推荐微信扫码登录以获得更好的体验！另：🎉建议更新到最新版，以体验新功能！🎉 版本更新记录→

【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，

共 40 集

剧集目录

集标题时长
P1【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，21:05
P3【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，17:02
P4【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，16:32
P5【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，17:11
P6【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，11:20
P7【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，15:27
P8【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，14:06
P9【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，17:04
P10【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，15:23
P11【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，13:42
P12【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，13:48
P13【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，7:27
P14【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，17:08
P15【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，16:31
P16【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，13:43
P17【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，8:01
P18【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，14:15
P19【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，19:20
P20【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，15:30
P21【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，10:07
P22【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，14:27
P23【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，16:09
P24【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，12:55
P25【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，15:44
P26【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，13:15
P27【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，14:05
P28【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，15:37
P29【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，14:43
P30【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，16:11
P31【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，14:50
P32【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，20:15
P33【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，15:57
P34【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，12:33
P35【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，14:25
P36【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，16:31
P37【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，17:19
P38【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，15:21
P39【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，16:36
P40【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，15:29
P41【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，17:56

P1 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p01 1. 1. English Grammar 01.English Sentence Structure (P1)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Olivier.嗨,我是奥利维尔。
0:03Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
0:05In this lesson, you can learn about sentence structure in English.在这个课中,你可以学习英语的句子结构.
0:09You'll learn how to construct all kinds of sentences in English, from the simplest你会学会用英语构建各种句子 从最简单的
0:15possible sentences to long, complex sentences which contain many different ideas.长而复杂的句子可能包含许多不同的想法。
0:23To begin, a question.开始,一个问题。
0:26What's the simplest sentence you can make in English?英文最简单的句子是什么?
0:33What does every sentence in English need?英文的每个句子都需要什么?
0:37Every sentence needs a verb.每个句子都需要一个动词.
0:40The simplest sentence is an imperative, which means when you tell someone to do something.最简单的句子是必须的,这意味着当你告诉别人做一些事情的时候.
展开字幕全文（282 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Olivier.嗨,我是奥利维尔。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
3In this lesson, you can learn about sentence structure in English.在这个课中,你可以学习英语的句子结构.
4You'll learn how to construct all kinds of sentences in English, from the simplest你会学会用英语构建各种句子 从最简单的
5possible sentences to long, complex sentences which contain many different ideas.长而复杂的句子可能包含许多不同的想法。
6To begin, a question.开始,一个问题。
7What's the simplest sentence you can make in English?英文最简单的句子是什么?
8What does every sentence in English need?英文的每个句子都需要什么?
9Every sentence needs a verb.每个句子都需要一个动词.
10The simplest sentence is an imperative, which means when you tell someone to do something.最简单的句子是必须的,这意味着当你告诉别人做一些事情的时候.
11For example, run, leave, work.例如跑,离开,工作.
12These are the simplest complete sentences you can make in English.这些是最简单的完整句子 你可以用英语。
13They're just one word long.他们只是一个字长。
14Of course, most sentences are longer than this.当然,大多数的句子都比这长.
15Most sentences that are longer than one word also need a noun before the verb.大多数超过一个词的句子在动词之前也需要一个名词.
16The noun is the subject.名词为题.
17With a subject plus a verb, you can make simple sentences, like用题加上动词,可以做简单的句子,比如:
18You can see that the verb can be in different forms, past or present, simple or continuous.可以看到动词可以是不同的形式,过去或现在,简单或连续.
19The verb form doesn't change the structure of the sentence.动词形式不会改变句子的结构.
20These are all the same, subject plus verb.这些都是一样的,主题加上动词.
21Of course, these sentences aren't very interesting.当然,这些句子不是很有趣.
22You can't say much with short sentences like these.这样的短句不能多说.
23Let's add a little more information.我们再补充一点信息
24Take the sentence He runs.接受他的判决
25What could you add after runs to make it longer?跑步后你能加什么来延长时间?
26You could add an adverb of place.你可以添加一个副词的地方。
27He runs around the park.他绕着公园跑
28You could add an adverb of time.你可以加上时间副词
29He runs every morning.他每天早上跑来跑去
30You could add both.你可以加上两者
31He runs around the park every morning.他每天早上绕着公园跑
32You could add an adverb of manner.你可以添加一个副词 礼貌。
33He runs slowly.他运行缓慢。
34You can see that you have many choices, but your choices are also limited.你可以看到你有很多选择, 但你的选择也是有限的。
35In this case, you can use different kinds of adverbs, but there are also things you can't use.在这种情况下,可以使用不同种类的副词,但也有不能使用的东西.
36For example, you can't use another verb after run.例如,运行后不能使用另一个动词.
37You can't use an adjective.不能用形容词.
38You can't use a noun, or at least you can't use a noun with this meaning of run.不能使用名词,或者至少不能使用这种运行含义的名词.
39This is an important point.这一点很重要。
40Let's look at it in more detail.更详观之.
41To build grammatically complete sentences in English, there's one important question.要用英语构建语法完整的句子,有一个重要问题.
42What needs to come next?接下来需要做什么?
43For example, you saw this sentence He runs.例如,你看见他所执行的这句话。
44That's a complete sentence.即是满句.
45You can put a full stop after runs, and it's correct.运行后可以全程停运,且正确.
46It's very basic, but it's correct.它非常基本,但是正确的.
47What about these?这些呢?
48She likes.她喜欢。
49He wants.稱璶
50We go.我们走了。
51These aren't complete sentences.这些不是完整的句子。
52Can you explain why not?你能解释为什么吗?
53They aren't complete, very simply, because they aren't finished.它们不是完整的,非常简单, 因为它们还没有完成。
54Look at the first sentence.观初句.
55She likes.她喜欢。
56She likes what?她喜欢什么?
57She has to like something.她必须喜欢的东西。
58He wants.稱璶
59What does he want?他想怎样?
60You can't just want.你不能就这么想
61You have to want something.你必须要想要的东西。
62We go.我们走了。
63Where?哪里? 哪里来的?
64At this point, we want to teach you a word.此时,我们想教你一个字.
65Compliment.赞曰.
66The compliment is the thing you add after a verb to make a sentence complete.赞美是您在动词之后添加的内容,以使句子完整.
67A compliment can have many different forms.赞美可以有多种不同的形式.
68It can be a noun, a verb, an adjective, or an adverb.可以是名词,动词,形容词,也可以是副词.
69These things can be single words or phrases.这些东西可以是单词或短语.
70For example, when we say noun, we also mean noun phrases.例如,当我们说名词时,我们也是指名词短语.
71So, table is a noun.所以,表是一个名词。
72And the wooden table, which my grandmother gave me, is also a noun.我祖母给我的木板也是名词
73Both nouns refer to one object, one table.两个名词都指一个对象,一个表.
74For this lesson, a noun can be one word or a phrase.对于这一课,名词可以是单词或短语.
75Okay, let's practice.好吧,让我们练习。
76Look at the first sentence.观初句.
77She likes.她喜欢。
78How could you finish this?你怎么能完成这一切?
79What are the possible compliments?什么是可能的恭维?
80Pause the video and write down three endings for your sentence.暂停录影 写下三个结尾
81Try to use different ideas and structures.尝试使用不同的想法和结构.
82Ready?准备好了吗?
83Let's look at some possible answers.让我们看看一些可能的答案。
84These are just our suggestions.这些只是我们的建议。
85Of course, there are many possibilities.当然,有许多可能性。
86She likes strawberries.她喜欢草莓
87She likes swimming.她喜欢游泳。
88She likes getting up before the sun rises.她喜欢在太阳升起前起床.
89She likes to listen to music while she works.她喜欢在工作时听音乐.
90You can see that there's more than one possible compliment.你可以看到,有不止一种可能的赞美。
91You can use a noun, a gerund with a verb-ing which acts like a noun,你可以用一个名词,一个古老的动词, 它的动作就像一个名词,
92a gerund phrase, or an infinitive verb with two.老年词组,或带有两个的无限动词.
93So, you have many choices.所以,你有很多选择。
94However, like before, your choices are also limited.然而,和以前一样,你的选择也是有限的。
95Only certain structures are possible.只有某些结构是可能的。
96The idea of compliments isn't just for the first verb in the sentence.赞美的理念不仅仅是句子中的第一动词.
97Many words need a compliment.许多话都需要赞美。
98For example, look at one of the sentences you just saw.比如,看看你刚刚看到的一句话。
99She likes getting up before the sun rises.她喜欢在太阳升起前起床.
100Technically, you can say, She likes getting up.从技术上讲,你可以说, 她喜欢起床。
101It's a grammatically complete sentence.这是一个语法上完整的句子.
102But you would never say it.但你绝不会说
103Why not?为什么不呢?
104Because it doesn't make any sense.因为它没有任何意义。
105You need more information.你需要更多的资料。
106She likes getting up.她喜欢起床。
107When.何时
108Why.为什么?
109How.怎样
110You need a compliment after getting up to complete the idea.你起床后需要赞美一下
111She likes getting up before.她喜欢起床之前。
112Before also needs a compliment.之前也需要赞美
113You can't stop there.你不能停下来。
114Before what?之前怎样?
115She likes getting up before the sun.她喜欢在太阳之前起床
116This also doesn't work, because it doesn't make sense.这也行不通,因为它没有道理.
117It doesn't make sense because the sun needs a compliment.因为太阳需要赞美,所以没有道理.
118Before the sun does what?太阳会做什么?
119She likes getting up before the sun rises.她喜欢在太阳升起前起床.
120Okay, finally, we have a sentence which is both grammatically correct and which communicates meaning.好吧,最后,我们有一个句子, 它既在语法上是正确的, 也传达意义。
121What should you remember from this?你该记住什么?
122Remember that when you use a particular word, you have limited choices in what kind of word记住,当你使用一个特定的词, 你的选择有限 在哪种词
123you can use next.你可以使用下一个。
124To speak or write in clear correct English, you don't just need to know English words.要用明确的正确的英语说话或写作,你并不只需要知道英语单词.
125You need to know what can come next.你需要知道接下来会发生什么
126For example, with a verb like like or want, it's not enough to know the verb.例如,用一个类似或想要的动词,不足以了解动词.
127You also need to know whether the verb needs a compliment and what compliments are or aren't你还需要知道动词是否需要恭维 恭维是还是不是
128possible.也许吧
129This is why it's good to learn vocabulary in full phrases and sentences.这就是为什么在完整的短语和句子中学习词汇是好的.
130That way, you'll know how to use the words you learn to make sentences you can use in这样,你会知道如何使用 你学会的词 使句子你可以使用
131your spoken or written English.你的英语或英语
132Using what you've seen up to now, you can build many simple English sentences.利用你至今所看到的,可以建立许多简单的英语句子.
133Let's see how you can add more information and more detail to these simple sentences.让我们看看如何在这些简单的句子中加入更多的信息和更多细节.
134You can add information to a simple sentence in two ways.可以在简单句子中以两种方式添加信息.
135You can add adjectives or adverbs.可以增加形容词或副词.
136Let's look at an example using a sentence we started before but we didn't finish.我们用我们之前开始的句子来举一个例子,但我们没有完成。
137He wants.稱璶
138Actually, you should do some work.实际上,你应该做一些工作。
139Pause the video and finish this sentence in three different ways.暂停录像,以三种不同的方式完成这句话.
140Start again when you have your answers.有答案就重新开始吧
141Ready?准备好了吗?
142Here's our suggestion.这是我们的建议
143He wants to buy a car.他想买车
144Now, let's add some description using adjectives and adverbs.现在,让我们用形容词和副词来补充一些描述.
145Can you see how you could add adjectives to this sentence?能见此句加形容词么.
146You could add adjectives before the word car, like this.你可以在"汽车"这个词之前加上形容词 像这样
147He wants to buy a new car.他想买辆新车
148He wants to buy a second-hand car.他想买辆二手车
149He wants to buy a bright red car.他想买一辆明亮的红车
150What about adverbs?副词呢?
151Could you add adverbs to these sentences to add some details?你能在这些句子中添加副词来添加一些细节吗?
152There are many possibilities.有许多可能性。
153For example,举例来说,
154Apparently, he wants to buy a new car.显然他想买辆新车
155He wants to buy a new car.他想买辆新车
156He wants to buy a second-hand car next month.下月欲买二手车.
157He wants to buy a bright red car for his new girlfriend.他想为他的新女友买辆明亮的红色汽车.
158You can see that the adverbs can be single words or phrases.可以看到副词可以是单词或短语.
159Adjectives can go before the noun they describe or after some verbs.形容词可以在他们描述的名词之前或一些动词之后进行.
160Adverbs are more complicated and can go in many different positions.副词比较复杂,可以走许多不同位置.
161However, this is the important point.然而,这是重要的一点。
162Using adjectives and adverbs like this doesn't change whether a sentence is complete or not.使用这样的形容词和副词不会改变句子是否完整.
163If you say, He wants to buy a car, that's a complete sentence.如果你说,他想买辆汽车,那是句完整的句子。
164You can add adjectives and adverbs to make it more detailed.可以增加形容词和副词,使其更加详细.
165Apparently, he wants to buy a second-hand car for his new girlfriend.显然,他想买一辆二手车给他的新女友.
166However, if a sentence is incomplete,但是,如果一个判决不完整,
167then you can't make it complete by adding adjectives or adverbs.这样你就不能通过添加形容词或副词来完成它.
168He wants to buy.他想买。
169This sentence is incomplete.此句未详.
170Adding adjectives and adverbs won't make it complete.添加形容词和副词不会使其完整.
171So, at this point, you can build a simple sentence.所以,在这一点上,你可以建立一个简单的句子.
172You also hopefully understand something about compliments,也希望你明白 关于恭维,
173and why are they important for making complete sentences,他们为什么对完成判决很重要?
174and now you can also add description to a complete sentence using adjectives and adverbs.而现在也可以使用形容词和副词在完整的句子中添加描述.
175Let's look at how you can combine these simple sentences into complex ones.让我们来看看你如何把这些简单的句子组合成复杂的句子.
176First, let's define some words.首先,让我们定义一些词。
177A conjunction is something which joins two sentences, or two parts of a sentence, together.相合是将两句,或两段句子,合为一体的东西.
178Words like and, but, if, although, because, or which are conjunctions.词类和,但,如果,虽然,因为,或哪些是结合的.
179A complex sentence contains two or more parts joined with a conjunction.复杂句子包含两个或两个以上的部分与一个连在一起.
180These parts are called clauses.这些部分称为条款。
181An independent clause expresses a complete idea, and could stand by itself.一项独立条款表达了一个完整的想法,可以自己站立。
182A dependent clause wouldn't make sense if it were by itself.依赖性条款如果本身就毫无意义。
183A dependent clause depends on an independent clause in this same sentence in order to have meaning.附属条款取决于该句中的独立条款才能有意义.
184Don't worry if this is new.别担心,如果这是新的。
185You don't need to remember everything right now.你不需要记住一切
186You'll see lots of examples of these ideas in this section and in the next section, too.你们将在本节和下一节看到许多这些想法的例子。
187In this section, you're going to learn about complex sentences with two independent clauses.在这一节中,你会学到两个独立条款的复杂句子.
188Okay, enough abstract talk.好吧,够了抽象的谈话。
189Let's see some examples.让我们看看一些例子。
190He runs around the park every morning, so he's in pretty good shape.他每天早上在公园周围跑步,所以他的状态相当不错.
191She likes strawberries, but she hardly ever eats them.她喜欢草莓,但她很少吃它们。
192You should write to her and thank her for the present.你应该给她写信 感谢她送来的礼物
193These are simple examples of complex sentences.这些是复杂句子的简单例子.
194Here's your recipe.这是你的食谱
195Independent clause plus conjunction plus independent clause.独立条款加结合条款加独立条款。
196You generally need a comma at the end of the first clause, before the conjunction,你通常需要一个逗号 在第一条结尾处, 在连接之前,
197but comma rules are quite flexible in English.但逗号规则在英语中相当灵活.
198So, you won't always need a comma.所以,你不会总是需要一个逗号。
199Look at the first example.观第一譬.
200He runs around the park every morning, so he's in pretty good shape.他每天早上在公园周围跑步,所以他的状态相当不错.
201Which word is the conjunction?哪个词是连结的?
202The conjunction is so.络脉如此.
203You can split this sentence into two full, meaningful sentences.你可以把这个句子分成两个完整,有意义的句子.
204Let's look at one more.让我们再看看一个。
205She likes strawberries, but she hardly ever eats them.她喜欢草莓,但她很少吃它们。
206Again, you can split this into two full sentences.再说一次,你可以把这分为两句
207You might think that the second sentence here isn't complete, or doesn't make sense by itself.你可能会认为这里的第二句是不完整的,或者说它本身是没有意义的.
208As it is, you'd be right.你说得对
209However, you can change them to strawberries, and then it's a complete, meaningful sentence.然而,你可以把它们改为草莓, 然后它是一个完整的,有意义的句子。
210But, she hardly ever eats strawberries.但是,她很少吃草莓。
211You can keep adding conjunctions and clauses for as long as you want.你可以继续加合和条款,只要你想。
212She likes strawberries, but she hardly ever eats them.她喜欢草莓,但她很少吃它们。
213And she doesn't earn much money, so she has to be careful how much she spends on groceries.而且她挣的钱不多,所以她必须小心地花多少钱在杂货上.
214And fresh food is generally more expensive than canned or frozen produce, so…而新鲜食品一般比罐头或冷冻产品更贵,所以.
215Of course, just because you can, it doesn't mean it's a good idea.当然,只是因为你可以,这并不意味着这是一个好主意.
216Sentences with too many clauses are difficult to follow, so it's generally better to limit条款过多的句子难以遵循,所以一般最好加以限制.
217your complex sentences to two, maximum three, clauses.您的复杂句子为 2, 最多 3,条款。
218Now you know how to build a complex sentence using independent clauses.现在你知道如何用独立条款构建复杂的句子.
219What about dependent clauses?附属条款怎么办?
220Do you remember the definition of a dependent clause?你还记得依赖条款的定义吗?
221A dependent clause is a part of a sentence which would not make sense by itself.附属条款是句子的一部分,其本身没有意义。
222Let's see an example.举个例子
223She's taller than I am.她比我还高
224This short sentence has two clauses.这一短句有两个条款。
225Can you see where the two clauses start and end, and which one is dependent?你可以看到这两条的起始和结尾,以及哪一条是相互依存的吗?
226The two clauses are, she's taller, and, than I am.这两条是,她比我高,而且,比我高。
227They're linked with the conjunction than.他们和连结有关
228The second clause, than I am, is dependent.第二条,比我还重要
229It doesn't make sense by itself.其义不自在.
230Let's see some other ways to build complex sentences with dependent clauses.让我们看看其他一些方法来构建带有依赖条款的复杂句子.
231You can add a dependent clause with conjunctions, like if, because, although, unless, or wherever.您可以添加一个附带条款, 如, 因为, 虽然, 除非, 或者在哪里 。
232For example, If you're late, I'll leave without you.例如,如果你迟到,我会离开你。
233He's broke because he spent all his money on beer.他破产了,因为他把钱都花在啤酒上.
234Although she spends a lot of time at work, she doesn't get much done.虽然她花了很多时间在工作上,但并没有获得太多成就.
235I won't do it unless you come with me.除非你跟我来 否则我不会这么做的
236We can meet wherever you want.我们可以在任何地方见面
237Often, you can change the order of the two clauses if you want.通常,如果需要,可以更改两条的顺序.
238So, you can say, If you're late, I'll leave without you.所以,你可以说,如果你迟到, 我会离开没有你。
239Or, I'll leave without you if you're late.或者,我会离开 没有你,如果你迟到。
240Notice that there's a comma between the two clauses if the dependent clause is first,通知,如果附属条款是第一位的,这两个条款之间就有一个逗号,
241but not if the independent clause is first.但如果独立条款是第一,则不是。
242What's the difference between these complex sentences and the ones you saw in part four?这些复杂的句子和你在第四部分看到的句子有什么区别?
243Here, you can't split this sentence in two.在这里,你不能把这句话一分为二。
244Well, you can, but one of the two parts won't make sense.好吧,你可以的,但其中之一 是没有道理的。
245If you're late, I'll leave without you.如果你迟到,我会离开你。
246I'll leave without you is an independent clause, so it makes sense by itself.我会离开你是一个独立条款, 所以它本身是有道理的。
247But the other clause, if you're late, is dependent, and it doesn't make sense by itself.但另一条款,如迟到,是依附的,本身不合理.
248It needs something more to make it complete.它需要更多的东西来完成它。
249What other common ways are there to build complex sentences with dependent clauses?还有哪些其他共同办法可以用附属条款构建复杂的句子?
250Another common structure is relative clauses,另一个共同的结构是相对条款,
251using relative pronouns like who, which, or what to link two clauses, for example.例如,使用相对代名词,如谁,谁,或将两个条款联系起来。
252That's the guy who shouted at me. I have no idea what's going on.就是那个对我大吼大叫的家伙 我不知道发生了什么。
253They gave us a cake which was made from dried beetroot.他们给了我们一个蛋糕 是干甜菜做的
254In these cases, the dependent clause goes after the independent clause.在这些情况下,附属条款在独立条款之后。
255Let's review what you've learned in this lesson.让我们回顾一下你学到了什么
256You can build a very simple sentence with just a verb.你可以用一个动词来构建一个非常简单的句子.
257Work.工作时
258You can add a subject and complement to make a simple sentence.可以增加一个主题和补充来做一个简单的句子.
259She works in a zoo.她在动物园工作
260You can use adjectives and adverbs to add description.可以使用形容词和副词来添加描述.
261Apparently, she works in a private zoo.显然,她在私人动物园工作。
262You can make a complex sentence by adding a second independent clause with a conjunction.可以通过加一个连带的第二个独立条款来做出一个复杂的句子.
263Apparently, she works in a private zoo, so she must know a lot about animals.显然,她在私人动物园工作, 所以她必须知道很多关于动物。
264You can also make a complex sentence by adding a dependent clause.也可以通过添加依赖条款来做出复杂的句子.
265Or even several dependent clauses, again using conjunctions to connect them.甚至几个附属条款,再次使用联结连接它们.
266Apparently, she works in a private zoo, so she must know a lot about animals.显然,她在私人动物园工作, 所以她必须知道很多关于动物。
267Which surprises me because, as far as I know, she studied economics at university.这让我惊讶 因为据我所知 她在大学学习经济学
268Although, I guess I could be wrong.虽然,我想我可能错了。
269This is a big topic, and it will take you time to learn everything about these points.这是一个大话题,需要时间来了解这些要点。
270Studying conjunctions and how they work can help you to build complex sentences研究组合及其工作方式可以帮助你构建复杂的句子
271which are clear and correct.明确无误。
272Relative clauses are another useful topic if you want to improve your sentence grammar.相对条款是另一个有用的话题,如果你想改进句子语法的话.
273Learning about relative clauses can help you to connect your ideas in complex sentences.学习相对条款可以帮助您在复杂的句子中连接您的想法.
274It's also a good idea to study verb complements, and learn what structures you can, or can't use,研究动词补充,学习什么结构可以,或者不能使用,也是一个好主意.
275after a verb.在动词之后。
276Remember that a lot of sentence structure is being able to answer the question,记住很多句子结构 能够回答问题,
277what needs to come next?接下来要做什么?
278We hope this lesson was useful for you.我们希望这一课对你有用。
279Check out our website for more free English lessons, Oxford Online English lessons,查看我们的网站 更多的免费英语课程,牛津在线英语课程,
280Oxford Online English dot com.牛津在线英语点数com.
281Thanks for watching.谢谢你的观看。
282See you next time.下次见
该视频共有字幕 285 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P3 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p03 2. 2. English Grammar 02.How to Improve English Grammar (P3)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Olivier.嗨,我是奥利维尔。
0:03Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
0:06In this lesson, you can learn how to improve your English grammar.在这个课中,你可以学习如何改进你的英语语法.
0:10To some people, grammar is kind of a dirty word.对有些人来说,语法是一种脏话.
0:15It probably makes you think of boring textbooks, boring exercises, and boring lessons.它可能让你想到无聊的教科书,无聊的练习,和无聊的课。
0:21Maybe you think, why do I need grammar?也许你认为我为什么需要语法?
0:23I just want to communicate.我只想沟通一下
0:26But here's the thing, grammar isn't just something in a book.但问题是 语法不仅仅是一本书
0:31Grammar is how you connect words into phrases, and phrases into sentences.语法就是把词和句子联系起来。
0:37Every time you connect two words, you're using grammar.每次连接两个词时,都会使用语法.
展开字幕全文（257 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Olivier.嗨,我是奥利维尔。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
3In this lesson, you can learn how to improve your English grammar.在这个课中,你可以学习如何改进你的英语语法.
4To some people, grammar is kind of a dirty word.对有些人来说,语法是一种脏话.
5It probably makes you think of boring textbooks, boring exercises, and boring lessons.它可能让你想到无聊的教科书,无聊的练习,和无聊的课。
6Maybe you think, why do I need grammar?也许你认为我为什么需要语法?
7I just want to communicate.我只想沟通一下
8But here's the thing, grammar isn't just something in a book.但问题是 语法不仅仅是一本书
9Grammar is how you connect words into phrases, and phrases into sentences.语法就是把词和句子联系起来。
10Every time you connect two words, you're using grammar.每次连接两个词时,都会使用语法.
11Even now, you're using grammar to understand what we're saying.即使现在,你还是用语法来理解我们所说的.
12We think there's a better way to learn English grammar than just doing endless exercises.我们认为学习英语语法比做无休止的练习要好.
13In this lesson, you'll see a step-by-step practical plan to improve your English grammar在这个课程里,你会看到一个逐步的实用计划 来改进你的英语语法
14in any area.在任何区域。
15To work on grammar, it's a good idea to have a book for reference.为了研究语法,有一本书供参考,这是个好主意.
16One of the most popular is English Grammar in Use by Raymond Murphy.其中最受欢迎的是雷蒙德·墨菲(英语:Raymond Murphy)的"使用中的英语语法".
17You can find a link under the video.您可以在视频下找到链接。
18So, let's start.所以,让我们开始。
19You want to improve your English grammar.你想改进你的英语语法。
20What should you do first?你该先做什么?
21English grammar is not just one topic.英语语法不仅仅是一个话题.
22It's tens of major topics, and each of those contain tens of smaller topics.其主要话题有数十个,每个都包含数十个较小的话题.
23So, you need to know where to begin.所以,你需要知道 从哪里开始。
24You need to set goals and establish priorities for your studies.您需要设定目标 并确定您的学习重点。
25How can you do that?你怎么能这么做?
26Let's start with five things.先举五事.
27Take a list of five errors or grammar problems you have.列出五个错误或语法问题。
28Maybe you already know some errors you make.也许你已经知道自己犯了什么错误
29Maybe your teacher corrects you or your classmates often, and you have an idea.也许你的老师经常纠正你或同学 你有一个想法
30A good way to do this is through writing.一个很好的方法是通过写作。
31Write something for your teacher and ask them to highlight and correct your grammar mistakes.写些东西给你的老师,请他们突出和纠正你的语法错误.
32See which mistakes you make most often.看看你经常犯什么错误
33If you aren't studying with a teacher, what can you do?若不与师学,何能为?
34This can be more difficult.这可能更困难。
35One suggestion, use a grammar book which has exercises and an answer key.一种建议是使用有练习和答案的语法书。
36Choose five topics which you think you will find difficult.选择您认为会遇到困难的五个主题 。
37Do the exercises and check your answers.做练习,检查你的答案。
38If you made a lot of mistakes, then you know you need to do more work on these topics.如果你犯了很多错误,那么你知道你需要在这些话题上做更多的工作.
39Here's another suggestion.还有个建议
40Find a reading text, for example, a news article online.寻找阅读文本,例如在线新闻文章.
41Make sure the text is not too difficult for you.确保文本不会对你来说太难.
42Read the text two to three times.诵此文二三遍.
43Next, try to rewrite the text without looking at it.接下来,尝试重写文本而不查看.
44Don't worry about getting it perfect, just do your best.不要担心它会完美, 只要尽力。
45Afterwards, compare your text with the original.之后,将文本与原件进行比较。
46Where did you make mistakes?你在哪里犯过错?
47Did you make mistakes with verb forms, with adverbs, word order?你有没有用动词表、副词、词序来犯错?
48This should show you where some of your grammar mistakes are.这应该让你知道 你的一些语法错误在哪里
49OK, hopefully now you have a list of five grammar errors or weaknesses.好吧,希望现在你有一个列表 五个语法错误或弱点。
50It could look like this.它可能看起来像这样。
51Using the present perfect.使用现在的完美。
52Word order in questions.问讯语序.
53Using commas correctly.正确使用逗号 。
54Mixing up adjectives and adverbs.混合形容词和副词.
55Prepositions after adjectives.形容词后的预设.
56Be as specific as you can with your list.尽量具体点,你的名单。
57Using something like verbs or prepositions isn't really helpful.使用诸如动词或预设等东西并不真正有用.
58Now, you have your list, what's next?现在,你有你的列表, 什么是下一个?
59If you have a problem with a grammar topic, there can be two basic reasons, form or function.如果对语法主题有问题,可能有两个基本原因,形式或功能.
60The first possibility is that you don't know how to form a structure correctly.第一个可能性是,你不知道如何正确形成一个结构.
61For example, think about the present perfect verb tense.例如,考虑一下目前完美的动词时态.
62I have done it.我已经做到了。
63To form the present perfect, you need to know several things, such as use have or has要形成现在的完美,你需要知道一些东西,例如用途有或有
64plus a past participle.加上过去的一个派对
65Make negatives with haven't or hasn't.做负面的没有或者没有。
66Make questions by moving have or has before the subject.通过移动提出问题 或有在主题之前。
67If you don't know these rules well, you might make mistakes like these.如果你不了解这些规矩 你可能会犯这样的错误
68She have been to Cambodia.她去过柬埔寨。
69I don't have finished.我没说完
70How long they have lived here.他们住在这里多久了?
71Can you correct these mistakes?你能纠正这些错误吗?
72Often, problems with form are habits.形式问题往往是习惯。
73You say and write the wrong sentence hundreds of times, and then it's hard to change it.汝当说与写错一句数百遍,然后难改.
74The only way to correct these habits is to repeat and review the correct form many, many纠正这些习惯的唯一办法是重复和审查正确的形式,许多,许多
75times.时间。
76The best way to do that?最好的办法?
77Use a flashcard app like Quizlet.使用类似Quizlet的闪卡应用.
78We'll talk more about this in detail later.我们稍后再详细讨论这个问题。
79Or maybe you don't know the correct form.或许你不知道正确的形式
80If so, use your grammar book to check.如果是的话,请用语法书来检查.
81Problems with form are simpler to understand, but sometimes they take a long time to fix,形式上的问题比较容易理解 但有时需要很长时间才能解决
82especially if your mistakes have become deep habits.特别是如果你的错误 变成了深层的习惯。
83You heard before that there are two basic reasons you could have problems with a grammar你之前听说 文法有两种基本原因
84topic.主题。
85What's the other?另一个是什么?
86The other possibility is that you don't understand the function.另一种可能性是,你不明白这个功能.
87What does that mean?这是什么意思?
88Function means how a grammar structure is used, and what meaning it has.函数是指语法结构是如何使用的,它有什么意义.
89For example, think again about the present perfect verb tense.例如,再考虑一下目前完美的动词时态.
90To use the present perfect correctly, you need to know things like…要正确使用现在的完美 你需要知道诸如...
91Use the present perfect to talk about states which started in the past and are still true用现在的完美来谈论过去开始的状态,
92now.现在
93Don't use the present perfect to talk about finished times in the past.不要用现在的完美 来谈论过去完成的时间。
94Use the present perfect to talk about life experiences when you don't specify a time.使用现在的完美在不指定时间时谈论人生经历.
95Of course, there are more.当然,还有更多的。
96These are just examples.这些只是例子。
97If you don't understand these rules, you might make mistakes like these.如果你不理解这些规则, 你可能会犯这样的错误。
98I am living here since four years.我在这里生活了四年。
99We've had lunch three hours ago.我们三个小时前吃过午饭了
100Have you ever been to Japan last year?你去年去过日本吗?
101Can you correct these mistakes?你能纠正这些错误吗?
102Often, problems with function are problems with translation.功能上的问题往往是翻译上的问题.
103Maybe your language doesn't have this grammar structure, or maybe your language expresses或许你的语言没有这种语法结构 或者你的语言表达
104these ideas in a different way.这些想法不同的方式。
105If you have problems with the function of a grammar structure, what can you do?如果你对语法结构的功能有问题,你能做什么?
106First, check the rules in your grammar book and try to find example sentences.首先,检查你语法书中的规则,并尝试找到示例句子.
107Think about how you would express the same ideas in your language.想想你怎样用语言表达相同的想法。
108Secondly, think about how this grammar works in your language.第二,想想这个语法在你的语言中是如何运作的.
109Do you have the same structure?你有相同的结构吗?
110Do you use it in the same way?你用同样的方式吗?
111The more difficult grammar topics will often be things which don't exist in your language.比较困难的语法话题,常常是语言中不存在的东西.
112For example, many languages don't have an exact equivalent to the present perfect例如,许多语言没有精确的等效于现在的完美
113in English, which is why so many English learners find this verb tense particularly所以很多英语学习者 才会觉得这个动词特别紧张
114difficult.很难
115However, thinking about the differences between your language and English can help to make但是,思考你的语言和英语的差异,可以帮助
116things clearer.事情变得更清楚了
117OK, so now you've found your mistakes and thought about where they come from.好吧,所以现在你发现了你的错误 并思考它们来自哪里。
118What next?接下来呢?
119You're going to see one of the most powerful learning tools you can use.你会看到最强大的学习工具之一 你可以使用。
120Even better, it's simple.更简单一点
121Anyone can use it.任何人都可以使用它。
122It's called templating.名为调伏.
123Templating means you take a part of a sentence and finish it in different ways.温和是指你用不同的方式来完成一段句子.
124Let's stick with the example of the present perfect.让我们以目前完美的例子为例。
125Here's an unfinished sentence.下一句未尽.
126I have never.我从来没有。
127Your job is to finish this sentence in five different ways.你的工作是用五种不同的方式来完成这句话.
128Make them as different as possible.让他们尽可能不同。
129Here's one example.这里有一个例子。
130I have never eaten snake.我从来没有吃过蛇。
131Can you make one or two more?你能再做一两个吗?
132Think about it now.现在想想吧
133You could make sentences like…你可以做出诸如...
134I have never been to New Zealand.我从来没有去过新西兰。
135I have never seen Titanic.我从没见过泰坦尼克号
136Try to make sentences which are true for you.试着做出对你真实的句子
137This way, they'll be more meaningful and easier to remember.这样,他们就会更加有意义,更容易被记住.
138Remember, you need five sentences for each template.记住,每个模板需要5句.
139That means you need to think of at least two more.这意味着你需要考虑 至少两个。
140Think of two more things you've never done and write them down.再想想你从未做过的两件事 然后写下来
141Let's look at some more templates you could use to practice the present perfect.让我们看看更多的模板 你可以用来练习现在的完美。
142I have this week.我这周有
143I haven't yet today.我今还无.
144Have or has been living for…曾经或一直为...
145I've been recently.我最近去过
146My has since.从那时起,我一直这样
147Can you see how you could use these templates?你能看看这些模板是怎么用的吗?
148Think about it.考虑一下
149Pause the video if you want more time.如果你想多点时间就暂停录像
150Let's see some possibilities.让我们看看一些可能性。
151I've watched this video three times this week.这周我看了三次录像
152I haven't had coffee yet today.我还没喝咖啡呢
153My sister has been living in Milan for three years.我妹妹在米兰住了三年了
154I've been reading a lot of Chekhov recently.最近我读了很多契诃夫书
155My wife has been a doctor since 2005.我妻子从2005年起成为一名医生。
156Of course, these are just suggestions.当然,这只是一些建议。
157You should write sentences which are true for you.你应该写出对你真实的句子
158Also, remember that you should try to write five sentences for each template.另外,请记住,你应该尝试为每个模板写五句。
159If you can't think of five, write as many as you can.不思议五人,尽写多少.
160You can use this to practice any grammar topic.您可以用它来练习任何语法话题 。
161For example, here are three templates you could use to practice using must, have to例如,这里有三个模板,可以用来练习,必须使用,必须使用
162and should.并且应该。
163At work, we mustn't.在工作的时候,我们不能。
164Tomorrow, I have to.明天 我必须去
165If you want to learn English quickly, you should.如果你想尽快学习英语,你应该。
166Here are three templates you could use to practice talking about the future.这里有三个模板 你可以用来练习 谈论未来。
167Tonight, I'm…今晚,我...
168For my next vacation, we're going to…下个假期,我们要...
169Next year, I hope I'll…明年,我希望我会...
170You see, you can use this to practice anything.你看,你可以用这个练习任何东西。
171Why should you use this method?为什么要用这种方法?
172What makes it so powerful?是什么使它如此强大?
173It's powerful because you're learning grammar through real-life examples.它很强大,因为你正在通过现实生活中的例子学习语法.
174Also, you're learning grammar in full sentences.而且,你正在学习语法 在完整的句子。
175Finally, this lets you practice your vocabulary, too.最后,这也让你练习你的词汇。
176You have one more thing to do here.你还有一件事要做
177You need to make sure your templated sentences are correct.您需要确保您的模板句子正确 。
178You're going to use these templates to practice and learn.你要用这些模板来练习和学习.
179If you have any mistakes in your sentences, you'll just create bad habits which will如果你在句子上有任何错误, 你只会制造坏习惯, 这将
180be difficult to change in the future.将来很难改变。
181So, ask your teacher, ask a friend, or ask an online forum.所以,问你的老师,问一个朋友, 或者问一个在线论坛。
182Make sure your sentences are correct.确保你的句子是正确的。
183Now, you're ready for step four.现在,你准备好第四步。
184Flashcard apps like Quizlet or Enki are a great way to review and remember grammar whenQuizlet 或 Enki 等闪卡应用程序是审查和记住语法的好方法
185you're learning English.你在学英语
186Both of these apps are mostly free to use, although the Enki app for iOS costs money.这两个应用软件大多可以自由使用,尽管iOS的Enki应用需要花钱.
187Our staff and our students have had good results with both these apps.我们的工作人员和学生在这两个应用上都取得了良好的成绩.
188There are others available, and you should probably try different ones, and see which还有其他的,你也许应该尝试不同的, 看看哪个
189one you like best.一个你最喜欢的。
190You can find links underneath the video.您可以在视频下面找到链接 。
191So, why do you need an app like this?那你为什么需要这样的应用?
192Having a flashcard app will help you to remember more of what you study and practice.拥有一个闪卡应用可以帮助您更多记住您所研究和实践的东西.
193How can you do this?你怎么能这么做?
194First, you can make questions using your template sentences.首先,您可以用您的模板句子来提问 。
195Put one or two gaps in a sentence and make a question, like this.在句子中放一两个缺口,然后提出这样的问题.
196Do you remember the answer?你还记得答案吗?
197You can also make a question with a mistake which you make frequently.你也可以用你经常犯的错误来提问。
198The answer is the corrected sentence.答案是改正的句子。
199For example, correct the mistake, I just have had a shower.例如,纠正错误,我只是洗了个澡。
200Can you correct the mistake?你能改正错误吗?
201I've just had a shower.我刚洗过澡
202The word order was wrong.字令错.
203Put the correct sentence as your answer.把正确的句子当作答案
204So, there are two kinds of cards that you can make.所以,可以制作两种牌.
205Gapped sentences and error correction.装入的句子和错误校正 。
206You can make gapped sentences cards easier or harder by leaving out different number隔开的句子卡可以通过省下不同的号码来方便或更难
207of words.语言。
208For example, my sister has…比如说,我妹妹...
209In Milan for three years.米兰三年.
210Or my sister…还是我妹妹...
211Three years.三年..
212You might be thinking, this sounds like a lot of work.你可能会在想,这听起来像很多工作。
213Do I really have to make my own cards?我真的要自己打牌吗?
214Do I have to do this for every grammar topic I study?我一定要为我研究的每个语法题做这个吗?
215No, you don't have to but you should.不,你不必,但你应该。
216Here's why.这是为什么。
217First, you should make your own cards so that you're using your own examples.首先,你应该自己打牌 这样你就可以用自己的例子。
218Your own examples should mean something to you.你自己的例子对你很重要
219They're real, they're about you and your life.他们是真实的, 他们是关于你和你的生活。
220This makes them easier to remember.这使得他们更容易记住。
221Secondly, you should spend the time to make your own cards because it will save you time第二,你应该花时间做自己的牌 因为这样可以节省你的时间
222later.等会
223If you review efficiently, you can remember 70 to 80% of what you learn.如果你能有效地检讨,你可以记住你学到的70%到80%.
224If you don't, you'll forget most of what you study and then you'll have to do it否则,你就会忘记你所学习的大部分东西,然后你不得不这样做
225again in the future.未来再次出现。
226So, spending time now will save you a lot more time in the future.所以,现在花时间可以节省你更多的时间。
227Not only that, isn't it frustrating when you can't remember something you've studied不仅如此,你不记得自己研究过的东西 是不是很沮丧?
228tens of times?数十次?
229It's demotivating and that's a problem.情绪低落而成问题.
230You need to be motivated to learn English.你需要有学习英语的积极性.
231Using flashcards and templating will help you to remember more of what you study.使用闪卡和诱导会帮助你记住更多你研究的东西.
232This will give you more motivation because you'll feel that you're making more progress.这将给你更多的动力 因为你会觉得 你正在取得更多的进步。
233Finally, make sure you review your cards every day or as often as possible.最后,确保您每天或尽可能频繁地审查您的卡片.
234Review your cards when you have a spare moment during the day.白天有空的时候检查牌
235For example, do them before you get up in the morning, or on the subway to work, or比如,在早上起床前做, 或者在地铁工作,或者
236during a break.在休息期间。
237Now you have a four-step process to improve your English grammar.现在有四个步骤来改进你的英语语法。
238Step one, identify and write down your weaknesses.第一步,找出并写下你的弱点。
239Start with five topics maximum.从5个话题开始 最大
240The topics you write down should be as specific as possible.您所记录的主题应该尽可能具体。
241Step two, identify the mistakes you make and the problems you have.第二步 找出你犯的错误和问题
242Do you have problems with the form, or the function, or both?你对形式,功能有问题吗?
243Use a grammar book to check, or ask a teacher.使用语法书来检查,或问老师.
244Step three, make templates and write five full sentences for each template.第三步,制作模板,并为每个模板写出五个完整的句子.
245The sentences should be real.句应真如.
246Write true sentences about you and your life.写真实的句子 关于你和你的生活。
247Track your sentences carefully and make sure they're correct.仔细跟踪你的句子 确保它们是正确的。
248Step four, take your sentences and make them into flashcards.第四步,拿上你的句子,把它们变成闪卡.
249You can make gapped sentences or error correction questions.您可以制作空白句子或错误更正问题。
250Review your cards regularly.定期检查您的卡片 。
251And that's all!就这样!
252Use these tools and you can learn anything you want to efficiently.使用这些工具,你就可以学到任何你想学得有效率的东西.
253Tell us, what's the first grammar topic you're going to review?告诉我们,你要审查的第一个语法话题是什么?
254Let us know in the comments and we can see if you have similar ideas or not.在评论中告诉我们,我们可以看看你是否有类似的想法。
255你可以在我们的网站上找到更多免费英语课程, oxfordonlineenglish.com.
256Thanks for watching!谢谢你的观看!
257See you next time!下次见!
该视频共有字幕 257 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P4 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p04 3. 3. English Grammar 03.Grammar Lesson #1 - Tips to Improve Your Sentence Struc (P4)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Daniel.嗨,我是丹尼尔。
0:02Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
0:04In this lesson, you can learn the most important grammar rule in English.在这个课中,你可以学习英语最重要的语法规则.
0:10Of course, you need to know many things to use grammar correctly in English.当然,你需要知道很多事情才能正确使用英语的语法.
0:15However, there's one tip that can dramatically improve your English grammar, especially in然而,有一个提示可以显著地改进你的英语语法,特别是
0:21writing.写作。
0:22First, don't forget to check our website, Oxford Online English dot com.首先,不要忘记检查我们的网站,牛津在线英语点点com。
0:29We have many free lessons to help you improve your English.我们有很多免费的课可以帮助你改进你的英语。
0:32There's also a level test, which can show you how good your grammar is now.还有一个水平测试,可以显示你现在的语法有多好.
0:38But you want to hear the grammar tip, right?但你想听语法提示,对不对?
展开字幕全文（208 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Daniel.嗨,我是丹尼尔。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
3In this lesson, you can learn the most important grammar rule in English.在这个课中,你可以学习英语最重要的语法规则.
4Of course, you need to know many things to use grammar correctly in English.当然,你需要知道很多事情才能正确使用英语的语法.
5However, there's one tip that can dramatically improve your English grammar, especially in然而,有一个提示可以显著地改进你的英语语法,特别是
6writing.写作。
7First, don't forget to check our website, Oxford Online English dot com.首先,不要忘记检查我们的网站,牛津在线英语点点com。
8We have many free lessons to help you improve your English.我们有很多免费的课可以帮助你改进你的英语。
9There's also a level test, which can show you how good your grammar is now.还有一个水平测试,可以显示你现在的语法有多好.
10But you want to hear the grammar tip, right?但你想听语法提示,对不对?
11What is it?这是什么?
12Let's see.让我看看。
13Here's the basic idea.这是基本的想法。
14Make sure your sentence has a subject and a verb, and that you know what the subject确保你的句子有主题和动词,你知道主题是什么
15and the main verb are.而主动词是.
16Every sentence needs a verb.每个句子都需要一个动词.
17And unless your sentence is an imperative, meaning that you're giving someone a command,除非你的句子是必须的, 这意味着你给某人的命令,
18then your sentence needs a subject, too.那你的话也需要一个话题
19Each clause in your sentence should have one subject and one main verb, and only one subject句子中的每个条款应该有一个主题和一个主要动词,只有一个主题
20and one main verb.和一个主动词。
21It sounds simple.这听起来很简单。
22Maybe you're thinking, this is too easy, I know this already.也许你在想,这太容易了,我知道这一点。
23However, we see students make mistakes with this all the time, especially in writing.然而,我们看到学生总是犯错误,特别是在写作方面。
24Mistakes with this point are serious, because they often make it hard to understand what这一点上的错误是严重的,因为它们往往使人们难以理解
25you want to say.你想说。
26Even if your meaning is clear, sentences with this problem are often difficult to read.即使你的意思是明确的,带有这个问题的句子往往很难读懂.
27In any situation, that's a problem.在任何情况下,这是一个问题。
28It's especially serious if you're taking an exam like I else.如果你像我一样参加考试 情况特别严重
29Let's look at the most basic point.让我们看看最基本的点。
30Your sentence needs a subject, which should be a noun or noun phrase, like they, everybody,你的句子需要一个主题, 它应该是一个名词或名词短语, 像他们,每个人,
31or my math teacher from high school.或者我高中的数学老师
32Then you need a main verb, which generally goes after the subject.然后需要主动词,一般在主题之后.
33With this, you can make simple sentences like these.有了这个,你可以做这样的简单的句子.
34They have a nice house.他们的房子不错
35Everybody agreed.每个人都同意。
36My math teacher from high school was really good at explaining complicated things.我高中的数学老师非常善于解释复杂的事情。
37After the main verb, you might have a simple complement, like a nice house.在主动词之后,你可能会有一个简单的补充,像一个漂亮的房子。
38You might have nothing at all.你可能什么都没有
39Your sentence might finish after the verb, like everybody agreed.你的句子可能会在动词之后完成 就像大家同意的那样
40Or you might have a longer complement, possibly including other verbs, as in, my math teacher或者你可能会有更长的补充, 可能包括其他动词,如我的数学老师
41from high school was really good at explaining complicated things.高中时很擅长解释复杂的事情
42So, you're probably still thinking that this is easy.所以,你可能还在想 这很容易。
43And so far, it is.到目前为止,它是。
44Let's see how it can go wrong.让我们看看它怎么会出错。
45Look at five sentences.观五句.
46By the way, these sentences are all real examples from our students' writing.顺便说一句,这些句子都是我们学生写作中的真实例子.
47Most of them come from I else's writing practice.他们大多来自我别人的写作实践.
48All these sentences break the basic rule we mentioned above.所有这些句子都打破了上述基本规则。
49Can you see how?你看得到吗?
50Pause the video, read the sentences and try to find the problems.暂停视频,读出句子,试着找出问题.
51Start again when you're ready.准备好了再开始
52In the first sentence, there's no main verb.在第一句中,没有主动词.
53Will is a modal verb, but a modal verb can't be a main verb.Will是一个模式动词,但模式动词不能成为主动词.
54You need a main verb after it.之后需要主动词.
55For example, we will go back home next Friday.例如,我们下周五回家。
56The second sentence has two subjects, imposing higher taxes on fast food and it.第二句有两个科目,对快餐和它征收更高的税收.
57One clause can't have two subjects.一个条款不能有两个科目。
58To correct this sentence, remove it.为纠正这句话,删除.
59Imposing higher taxes on fast food is a good idea.对快餐征收更高的税收是一个好主意.
60The third sentence has a main verb, but no subject.第三句有主动词,但没有主题.
61What affects individuals' lives directly?直接影响个人生活的是什么?
62This is difficult to correct, because it's impossible to know what the writer wanted这很难纠正 因为不可能知道作家想要什么
63to say.说起来
64You would need to add a noun before the verb affects to make it understandable.在动词影响之前,您需要添加一个名词,以便理解。
65The fourth sentence has a fragment at the end, which includes a subject and a verb.第四句结尾处有一个片段,包括一个主题和一个动词.
66This means the sentence has too many subjects and verbs.这意味着句子的主题和动词太多.
67Each clause can only have one subject and one main verb.每个条款只能有一个主题和一个主要动词.
68What's the solution?有什么办法?
69There are many possibilities, but the easiest way to correct this is to break the two sentences有很多可能性,但最容易纠正的方法 就是打破两句
70into two parts.分为两部分。
71You can do this by changing the comma after Alexandria to a semicolon.你可以将亚历山大港之后的逗号改为分号来完成这项工作.
72Finally, what about the fifth sentence?最后,第五句怎么办?
73It's difficult to understand, right?这很难理解,对不对?
74Again, it's difficult to correct this sentence because it's hard to see the writer's ideas.再说一遍,这句很难改正,因为很难看到作家的想法.
75The problem is that this sentence has several parts with several subjects and verbs, and问题在于这句话有多个部分,包含几个主题和动词,以及
76it is not clear what refers to what.不清楚什么叫什么。
77For example, each society is a subject, but then forced medical treatment is also a subject.例如,每个社会都是一个主体,但随后强制医疗也是一个主体.
78Later in the sentence, we have a verb, a void, and it isn't clear which subject goes with it.在句子的后面,我们有一个动词,一个空洞,并且不清楚哪一个主体随它而去.
79On a more practical level, it just isn't clear what this sentence is about.在更实际的层面上,只是这个句子的意思还不清楚.
80Does the writer want to say something about each society, or about large sets of people,作家是想对每个社会说点什么 还是说一大群人
81or about forced medical treatment?还是强迫医疗?
82We don't know.我们不知道。
83This is why subject-verb structure is so important.这就是为什么主题动词结构如此重要.
84If it isn't clear, it will be hard to understand what your sentence is about.如果不清楚的话 很难理解你的句子
85Sometimes, this might mean that your ideas aren't clear in your mind.有时候,这也许意味着你的想法 在你的脑海里并不清楚。
86Next, let's expand this basic rule, and see how you can use it to make a wider range接下来,让我们扩大这个基本规则, 看看如何利用它来扩大范围
87of sentences.判决。
88You heard before that both subjects and verbs can be words or phrases.你之前听说,主题和动词都可以是词语或短语.
89Sometimes, your subject or verb might be a longer phrase.有时候,你的主体或动词可能是一个更长的短语.
90This often leads to mistakes, because when your subject and verb are multiple words,这常常导致错误, 因为当你的主体和动词是多个词,
91it's more difficult to keep track of your sentence structure.更难追踪你的句子结构
92Let's do an example together.举个例子
93Take a sentence you saw before.取一句前所见.
94Everybody agreed.每个人都同意。
95You can make the subject, everybody, into a phrase.你可以把话题变成一个短语
96For example, Everybody who was at the meeting agreed.例如,与会的每个人都同意。
97You can make the verb into a phrase, like this.你可以把动词 变成一个短语,像这样。
98Everybody who was at the meeting agreed to change the office dress code.在场的每个人都同意改变办公室的着装规范.
99You can make each phrase even longer.你可以让每个短语更长。
100For example, Everybody who was at the board meeting held last Tuesday evening agreed to例如,参加上周二晚上举行的董事会会议的每一个人都同意
101change the existing office dress code to something more informal.将现有的办公服饰代码改为更非正式的.
102Even though we've added lots of new words and ideas, this sentence has the same basic虽然我们添加了许多新词和新想法,但这句话的基本原理是一样的
103structure as before.结构如前.
104It still has one subject and one main verb.它仍然有一个主题和一个主要动词.
105Although we've added a complement after the verb, the verb doesn't have a direct object.虽然我们在动词之后增加了一个补充,但动词并没有直接的对象.
106We haven't added anything grammatically new to the sentence.我们没有在语法上添加任何新的内容
107We've simply expanded the existing parts.我们只是扩展了现有的部分。
108Let's do one more example of this.再举个例子
109This time, we want you to try.这次我们要你试试
110Here's a basic sentence.以下为基本句子.
111My sister called.我姐姐打电话来
112Can you make this sentence longer by changing the subject and verb to longer phrases?你能通过将主题和动词改为更长的短语来延长这句话吗?
113For this exercise, there are a couple of rules.对于这项练习,有几条规则.
114You can't add a noun after called, because that would change the structure.调用后不能添加名词,因为这会改变结构.
115You also can't use conjunctions, like although or because.你也不能使用连结,像虽然或因为。
116The idea is to keep the basic structure the same, so that the sentence has one subject思想是基本结构不变,使句子有一个主题.
117and one verb, which doesn't have a direct object.和一个动词, 它没有直接的对象。
118Pause the video and try it now.暂停录像,试试看
119How did you do?你好吗?
120Of course, there are many ways to do this.当然,有许多方法可以做到这一点。
121Let's look at three possibilities.让我们看看三种可能性。
122My sister Mandy called last night.我妹妹曼迪昨晚打过电话
123My sister, who I haven't spoken to for ages, called to tell me about her new job.我妹妹,我很久没和他说话了, 打电话告诉我她的新工作。
124You can see that you can do this in a simpler way, or you can make the sentence much more你可以看到你可以用更简单的方式做到这一点, 或者你可以使句子更多
125complicated by adding relative clauses, adjectives, adverbs, and so on.由于增加了相对条款,形容词,副词等等而变得复杂.
126However, remember the basic idea.然而,记住基本的想法.
127All of these sentences have the same basic structure.所有这些判决都具有相同的基本结构。
128One subject and one main verb.一个主题和一个主动词.
129Let's move on and talk about one more important point.让我们继续讨论一个更重要的问题。
130As you heard before, almost all sentences need a subject.正如你之前听到的,几乎所有的句子都需要一个话题.
131Only imperatives, like come here, don't need a subject.只有必须的,像来这里, 不需要一个话题。
132Interjections, like wow, also don't need a subject.拦截,就像哇, 也不需要一个话题。
133But many linguists, including us, would say that these are not sentences.但包括我们在内的许多语言学家会说,这些不是句子。
134However, sometimes there isn't a clear noun subject.然而,有时没有明确的名词主题.
135In this case, you need to use a word like it or there.在这种情况下,你需要使用一个类似这个词或者那里。
136For example, It won't take long to get there.举例来说, 不久即得见.
137It's worth going.这值得去。
138There's a mosquito on your nose.鼻间有蚊子.
139There have been several developments since the last time we spoke.自上次发言以来,出现了若干事态发展。
140In these sentences, the words it and there are empty subjects.在这些句子中,其词和有空题.
141They don't refer to a specific noun or thing.他们并不是指特定的名词或事物.
142You use them only because the sentence needs a subject.你使用它们只是因为句子需要一个话题.
143They don't add any meaning to the sentence.二者不增其义.
144So what's the difference?那有什么区别?
145When do you need to use it and when do you need to use there?何时需要使用,何时需要在那里使用?
146Use it to talk about distances and times.用它来谈论距离和时间。
147For example, It's not far to the metro.譬如地铁不远.
148How long will it take you to finish everything?你要花多久才能完成这一切?
149It's six thirty.六三十岁.
150You often use it to talk about the weather, too.你经常用它来谈论天气。
151For example, It's sunny.例如,阳光灿烂。
152It'll be cold tomorrow.明天会很冷的
153It was really wet last month.上个月湿透了
154You also use it to talk about situations and in a number of phrases like it's worth.你也会用它来谈论一些情况 和一些像它的价值。
155For example, It's safe to walk around at night here.例如,晚上在这里走动是安全的.
156It's good that you could join us.很高兴你能加入我们
157It's really cosy in here.这里很舒适
158What about there?那边怎么样?
159Use there to say that something exists or doesn't exist.用它来表示存在或不存在的东西.
160Usually, when you use there, it's the first time you're mentioning something.通常,当你在那里使用时,这是你第一次提到一些东西.
161For example, There's some salad in the fridge.比如冰箱里有些沙拉
162There are several reasons why I have to say no to this idea.有几个原因我不得不拒绝这个想法。
163There didn't used to be so many homeless people here.这里以前没有这么多无家可归的人
164Let's practise together.我们一起练习吧
165Look at five sentences.观五句.
166Do you need to add it or there?你需要加吗?
167Pause the video and think about your answers.暂停录像 想想你的答案
168Ready?准备好了吗?
169Here they are.他们来了
170Finally, we have one more thing to show you.最后,我们还有一件事要告诉你。
171In general, the subject of your sentence goes immediately before the main verb.一般来说,你句子的主题紧接着主动词.
172You can see this in the sentences you've already seen in this lesson.你可以看到这一点 在句子 你已经看到在这个教训。
173Sometimes, the main verb also has an auxiliary verb, like have, has, do, does, will,有时,主动词也有一个辅助动词,如有,有,有,有,有,有,有,有,有,有,有,有,有,有,有,有,有,有,有,有.
174can, and so on.诸如此类。
175In positive sentences, the auxiliary verb and the main verb almost always go together.在正句中,辅助动词和主动词几乎总是一起走.
176For example, They have bought a nice house.例如,他们买了一间好房子。
177My sister Mandy will call tonight.我妹妹曼迪今晚会打电话来
178However, there's one case where the main verb goes before the subject.然而,有一个案例是主动词先于主体.
179Questions with be.问与有.
180For example, Are you ready?例如,你准备好了吗?
181Were there many people there?那里有很多人吗?
182In some cases, the auxiliary verb needs to come before the subject.在某些情况下,辅助动词需要出现在主体之前.
183This is most common in questions.这在问题中最为常见。
184For example, Can you help me?比如 你能帮我吗?
185What time does she arrive?她几点到?
186How many pieces of cake have you had already?你已经吃了多少蛋糕了?
187It's also possible in certain structures which are mostly used in formal writing,在某些结构中也是可能的,这些结构大多用于正式的写作,
188like At no time did I suspect that he was the thief.喜欢 我从未怀疑他是小偷
189At this point, let's review the most important points that you should take away from this lesson.现在,让我们回顾一下你应该从这个教训中吸取的最重要点。
1901. Make sure every sentence has a subject and a main verb in each clause.1. 确保每一句在每一条款中都有主题和主要动词.
191Don't put more than one subject or main verb in one clause.不要将一个以上的主题或主动词放在一个条款中.
1922. If your subject and main verb are longer phrases, or if you add a lot of adverbs or2. 如果您的主体和主动词是更长的短语,或者您添加了许多副词或
193subordinate clauses to your sentence, it might be harder to keep track of this structure.从属条款 可能更难追踪这个结构
194Before you write a sentence, think about this question.在写句子之前,想想这个问题.
195What are you talking about, and what are you saying about this thing?你在说什么? 你在说什么?
196Decide what you're talking about, the subject, and what you're saying about it, the main verb.决定所言,论题,及所言,主动词.
197Keep these in your head.把这些放在脑海里
1983. Study the difference between main verbs and auxiliary verbs.3.研究主动词与辅助动词的区别.
199Remember that auxiliary verbs can't generally be used alone.记住辅助动词一般不能单独使用.
200Make sure every auxiliary verb has a main verb attached.确保每个辅助动词都有主动词附着.
201Learn the cases when the auxiliary verb needs to come before the subject.当辅助动词需要出现在主体之前时学习案例.
202If you can follow these simple steps, your writing will be clearer,如果你能遵循这些简单的步骤, 你的写作会更清晰,
203better organised, and more accurate.组织得更好,更准确
204Do you have any tips to help other English learners improve their grammar?你有帮助其他英语学习者改进语法的提示吗?
205Please share your suggestions in the comments.请在评论中分享你的建议。
206Thanks for watching!谢谢你的观看!
207See you next time!下次见!
208you老师
该视频共有字幕 208 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P5 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p05 4. 4. English Grammar 04.English Verb Tenses Guide (P5)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Martin.嗨,我是马丁。
0:04Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
0:08In this lesson, you can learn about English verb tenses.在这个课中,你可以学习英语动词紧张.
0:14Are you confused about simple, perfect and continuous tenses?你对简单、完美和持续的紧张感到困惑吗?
0:17Do you know how many verb tenses there are in English?你知道英语里有多少动词紧张吗?
0:21In this lesson, you can get a big-picture understanding of English verb tenses.在这个课中,你可以获得对英语动词时态的大画面理解.
0:26You'll learn what connects English verb forms, which will make it easier for you to learn你将学习英语动词表的链接, 这将使你更容易学习
0:31and understand verb tenses in English.用英语理解动词时态.
0:35Let's start with an overview of the topic, so that you understand what you're dealing with.我们先概括一下这个话题, 这样你就能明白你正在处理什么。
0:43Every English verb form has two parts.每个英语动词形式有两个部分.
展开字幕全文（222 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Martin.嗨,我是马丁。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
3In this lesson, you can learn about English verb tenses.在这个课中,你可以学习英语动词紧张.
4Are you confused about simple, perfect and continuous tenses?你对简单、完美和持续的紧张感到困惑吗?
5Do you know how many verb tenses there are in English?你知道英语里有多少动词紧张吗?
6In this lesson, you can get a big-picture understanding of English verb tenses.在这个课中,你可以获得对英语动词时态的大画面理解.
7You'll learn what connects English verb forms, which will make it easier for you to learn你将学习英语动词表的链接, 这将使你更容易学习
8and understand verb tenses in English.用英语理解动词时态.
9Let's start with an overview of the topic, so that you understand what you're dealing with.我们先概括一下这个话题, 这样你就能明白你正在处理什么。
10Every English verb form has two parts.每个英语动词形式有两个部分.
11The first part is the time – past, present or future.第一部分是时间——过去、现在或未来。
12The second part is the aspect – simple, continuous, perfect or perfect continuous.第二部分是方面——简单,连续,完美或完美的连续.
13So, there are three times and four aspects.故有三乘四谛.
14You can combine them in twelve different ways.你可以以十二种方式结合它们.
15Pause the video if you want more time to look at the table.如果你想多看桌子,请暂停录像。
16Let's do a quick test.让我们做一个快速测试。
17Can you recognise these three verb forms?你能认出这三种动词形式吗?
18I was having dinner this time yesterday.我昨天正吃晚饭呢
19He's been sitting there for hours.他坐在那里好几个小时了
20Where will you be next week?你下周要去哪儿? 下个礼拜?
21Do you know the answers?你知道答案吗?
22Let's check.让我们检查一下。
23In the first sentence, the time is past and the aspect is continuous.在第一句中,时间已经过去,方面是连续的.
24It's past continuous.这是过去连续。
25In the second sentence, the time is present and the aspect is perfect continuous.在第二句中,时间是存在的,其方面是完美的连续.
26It's present perfect continuous.这是完美的连续。
27In the third sentence, the time is future and the aspect is simple.第三句中,时间是未来,方面是简单的.
28It's future simple.这是未来的简单。
29You don't need to remember all of this now.你不需要记住这一切了。
30What you should remember – all English verb forms are made of these two parts.你应该记住的——所有英语动词表都是由这两个部分构成的.
31Time plus aspect.时间加方面。
32One more point.再来一点
33Different teachers, books and courses sometimes use different words for these things.不同的教师,书籍和课程有时会对这些事物使用不同的词汇.
34For example, some books use the word progressive instead of continuous.例如,一些书籍使用进步一词而不是连续.
35So, instead of present continuous, they say present progressive.所以,他们不说现在的连续性,而是说现在的渐进性。
36Other words have the same problem.其他话也有同样的问题。
37For example, the words tense and aspect are used in different ways by different people.例如,紧张和侧面的词被不同的人以不同的方式使用.
38Our advice?我们的建议?
39Don't think too much about the words.不思议言.
40Focus on the ideas.专心思惟.
41I understand it can be confusing, but this is really not your problem that people don't我知道这很迷惑 但这不是你的问题 人们不会
42use these words consistently.一致使用这些词语。
43Next, let's talk more about time.接下来,我们来谈谈时间
44I said we're going to talk about past, present and future,我说了我们要谈谈过去,现在和未来
45but really, we're mostly going to talk about the future.但实际上,我们主要要谈谈未来
46Why?为什么?
47Why is the future different?未来为何不同?
48English verbs have past and present forms.英语动词有过去和现在的形式.
49For example, be, was, do, did, want, wanted.例如,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是,是。
50So, to make a present form, past, just change the present verb to the past verb.因此,为了让现在的形式,过去,只是把现在的动词改为过去动词.
51Like this.像这样
52I go shopping once a week.我每周去购物一次
53I went shopping once a week.我每周去购物一次
54She's running in the park.她在公园里跑
55She was running in the park.她在公园里跑步
56We haven't seen it yet.我们还没有看到它。
57We hadn't seen it yet.我们还没有看到它。
58It doesn't matter if the aspect is simple, continuous, perfect or perfect continuous.无论这个方面是简单,连续,完美还是完美的连续,都无关紧要.
59Using a present or a past verb decides whether the meaning is present or past.使用现在或过去的动词来决定含义是现在还是过去.
60That's almost too simple, right?这几乎太简单了,对不对?
61But what about the future?但未来呢?
62There are no future verb forms.没有未来的动词形式.
63You can't change the verb to make it future.不能改动词以示未来.
64So, you have to add something before the verb.所以,你必须在动词之前添加一些东西.
65For example, I'll be waiting for you outside the station.例如,我在车站外等你
66When are you going to tell her?你打算什么时候告诉她?
67He might join us later.他可能晚点加入我们
68Now you can see why the future is more complicated.现在你可以看到为什么未来会更复杂。
69There are many things you can add before the verb to give it a future meaning.动词之前可以添加很多东西来赋予它未来的意义.
70You saw examples with will, be going to and might, but there are other possibilities.你们看到有意愿的例子, 将要和可能, 但还有其他的可能性。
71It's also very common to use present verb forms with a future meaning.使用具有未来含义的现时动词形式也非常常见.
72Like this.像这样
73What are you doing this weekend?这周末你在做什么?
74Class starts at ten.课从十起.
75So, talking about the future is more complex.因此,谈论未来更为复杂.
76There isn't one way to give a verb a future meaning in English,在英语中没有一种方法给动词一个未来的含义,
77and there's also a large overlap between the present and the future.而现在和将来之间也有很大的重叠.
78What should you remember from all this?这一切你应该记得什么?
79Remember that every verb has only one past form and only one present form,记住每个动词只有一个过去的形式,只有一个现在的形式,
80but there are many possible future forms.但未来可能有许多形式
81There isn't one future tense in English.英语没有未来的紧张
82Now, let's talk about aspect.现在,让我们谈谈方面。
83Look at three sentences.观三句.
84I went to Rome last year.去年我去罗马了
85I go to work by bus.我坐公交车上班
86I'll go with you.我和你一起去,好吗?
87What are these three verb forms?这三种动词形式是什么?
88They're all simple.都很简单
89Past simple, present simple, and future simple.过去简单,现在简单,未来简单。
90You can see that the past and present simple,你可以看到过去和现在的简单,
91you just use the present or past form of the verb without adding anything.您只需使用动词的当前或过去的形式而不添加任何东西。
92For the future simple, you need to add something.简而言之,你需要添加一些东西。
93Like will or going to.如是愿愿或将去.
94In general, simple verb forms describe two things.一般来说,简单的动词形式描述了两件事.
95One, single actions.一,单行.
96Two, repeated actions or states.二,重复行动或状态.
97So, I went to Rome, or I'll go with you,所以,我去了罗马,或者我会和你一起去,
98describe single actions in the past or the future.描述过去或未来的单一行动。
99I go to work by bus describes a repeated action in the present.我坐公交车去工作 描述了现在的反复行动
100The present simple can't generally be used to talk about single actions.目前的简单一般不能用来谈论单项行动.
101The present simple generally expresses repeated actions or states.目前的简单一般表示重复的行动或状态。
102The past and future simple can be used to talk about single actions,过去和将来的简单可以用来谈论单项行动,
103repeated actions, or states.重复行动或状态。
104For example, I went to Rome every year until 2012.例如,我每年都去罗马,直到2012年。
105I'll go with you on Tuesday and Wednesday, but I can't on Thursday.周二和周三我都会跟你去 但我不能在周四
106So, what about continuous verb forms?那么,连续动词形式呢?
107Let's start with three examples.先举三例.
108I was eating dinner at seven o'clock last night.我昨晚七点吃晚饭
109I'm eating a tuna sandwich.我在吃金枪鱼三明治
110This time next week, I'll be eating fresh seafood on an island.下周的这个时候 我会在岛上吃新鲜海鲜
111These three sentences are all continuous.此三句皆为连续.
112Past continuous, present continuous, and future continuous.过去是连续的,现在是连续的,将来是连续的。
113Can you see what connects them?你能看到他们之间有什么联系吗?
114First, all continuous forms use the verb be, together with an ing verb.首先,所有连续形式都使用动词,加上一个ing动词.
115So, to make a continuous form, take the verb be in the past, present, or future,所以,为了形成一个连续的形式, 以动词是在过去,现在,或未来,
116then add your main verb with ing on the end.然后在结尾处加上主动词。
117For example, She was telling me a really interesting story.比如,她告诉我一个非常有趣的故事。
118They aren't helping at all.他们一点帮助都没有。
119It'll be getting dark at five o'clock.五时会天黑.
120What about the meaning of continuous forms?连续形式的意义如何?
121Can you see what connects these examples?你可以看到这些例子有什么联系吗?
122Continuous forms describe things which are incomplete.连续形式描述不完全的东西.
123Generally, continuous forms are used to talk about one moment in time.一般来说,连续的表单用于谈论一个时刻的时间.
124So, you say I was eating dinner at seven o'clock last night because you're talking你说我昨晚七点吃晚饭 因为你在说话
125about a moment in time, seven o'clock, and something incomplete,大约一分钟的时间, 七点钟, 和一些不完整的,
126you hadn't finished your dinner at that moment.当时你还没吃完晚餐
127In the sentence, she was telling me a really interesting story.在句子里,她告诉我一个非常有趣的故事。
128You're talking about a moment in time when she was in the middle of her story.你在说她正在故事中的时刻
129You use a continuous form because at that moment, she hadn't finished her story.你用连续的形式 因为当时她还没有完成她的故事
130OK, but what about perfect verb forms?好吧,但是完美的动词形式呢?
131Again, let's start with some examples.我们再举几个例子。
132He hadn't finished speaking.他还没说完呢
133She's finished all her homework.她的功课都完成了
134Will have finished everything by Friday.周五之前就结束了
135What do you notice?你注意到什么了吗?
136All perfect tenses use the verb have in the past, present or future form.所有完美的时态使用动词在过去,现在或将来的形式中都有.
137After have, you use a past participle to make the perfect form.之后,你用一个过去的派对来制作完美的形式。
138So, for example, to make the past perfect, you take the past form of have, which is had,所以,举例来说,为了让过去完美, 你采取了过去的形式, 拥有,
139并添加一个过去的participle。
140For example, we hadn't thought about it.比如,我们没想过
141I had never tried miso soup before.我从来没有尝试过米苏汤之前。
142For the future perfect, take the future form of have,为了未来的完美, 采取未来的形式有,
143which could be will have, and add a past participle, like this.并添加一个过去的聚会,像这样。
144I'll have finished all my exams by this time next year.我明年这个时候就完成了所有考试
145What about the meaning of perfect forms?那完美形式的意义呢?
146Can you see anything which connects these three sentences?你能看到任何连接这三句话的东西吗?
147Perfect verb forms connect two points in time.完美的动词形式在时间上连接了两点.
148For example, he hadn't finished speaking is past perfect.比如说,他还没说完话就过去了
149This connects two different times or actions in the past.这连接了过去两个不同的时代或行动.
150To understand this, you need a longer sentence with more information.要了解这一点,你需要更长的句子 更多的信息。
151For example, he hadn't finished speaking when everybody started to leave.例如,当每个人都开始离开的时候,他还没有说完话.
152The perfect form connects the two different actions.完美的形式将两种不同的动作连接起来.
153This is the best way to think about perfect verb forms.这是思考完美动词形式的最佳方法.
154Perfect verb forms connect two points in time.完美的动词形式在时间上连接了两点.
155How does this work in the present?这在目前是怎么做的?
156This is present perfect.这是现在的完美。
157What two points in time does this connect?这在时间上有什么关联?
158It connects the present and the past.它连接了现在和过去.
159She's finished her homework in the past, before now,她的功课过去, 在此之前,
160and now her homework is done and ready to be checked.现在她的功课完成了 准备接受检查
161In the present.于今时.
162What about the future?那未来呢?
163This is the future perfect.这是未来的完美。
164In this case, it connects the present to a point in the future.在这种情况下,它将现在与未来的某个点联系起来.
165When you say, We'll have finished everything by Friday,当你说,我们将完成 一切在星期五,
166you mean that you will finish everything sometime between now and Friday.你是说你会从现在到星期五完成所有的事
167You don't know exactly when you'll finish everything,你不知道你何时能完成一切
168but you know that it will be somewhere in this period between now and the future.但你知道这段时期 从现在到将来 总会有某个地方
169Finally, let's look at perfect continuous forms.最后,让我们看看完美的连续形式。
170Here are three examples to begin.下面是三个例子。
171She's been feeling much better.她感觉好多了
172We've been waiting for ages.我们等了很久了
173By the end of the day, we will have been working without a break for fourteen hours.到最后,我们将工作14小时,没有休息。
174What do you notice?你注意到什么了吗?
175You can see that perfect continuous forms are a mix of the perfect and the continuous,你可以看到,完美的连续形式 是完美和连续的混合,
176which is logical, right?这是合乎逻辑的,对不对?
177They're perfect forms because they use a form of have plus a past participle,他们是完美的形式 因为他们使用一种形式 加上一个过去的聚会,
178which in a perfect continuous verb form is always the same – been.在完美的连续动词形式上,它总是一样的 — 一直如此。
179The perfect continuous verb form is always the same – been.完美的连续动词形式总是一样的 — — 一直是.
180They're continuous forms because they use be plus a main verb with ing.它们是连续形式,因为使用时会加上带有ing的主要动词.
181How do you set the time of a perfect continuous form?如何设定完美连续形式的时间?
182You set the time by changing the form of have.你通过改变拥有的形式来设定时间.
183Use a past, present or future form of have plus been plus a verb with ing.使用一个过去,现在或将来的形式 加上一个带有ing的动词.
184Let's practice.让我们练习。
185Here's a sentence in the present simple.今简中此句.
186I walk through the forest.我穿过森林
187Can you change this sentence into the three perfect continuous forms – past, present and future?你能把这个句子改成三种完美的连续形式——过去,现在和未来?
188Pause the video and try it.暂停录像,试试看
189Ready?准备好了吗?
190Let's check your answers.让我们看看你的答案。
191I had been walking through the forest.我穿过森林
192I've been walking through the forest.常行经林.
193I will have been walking through the forest.我会一直走过森林。
194Did you get them right?你弄对了吗?
195Next, let's talk about the meaning of perfect continuous forms.接下来,让我们谈谈完美连续形式的意义.
196Again, the meaning is a combination of the two aspects – perfect and continuous.同样,其含义是两个方面——完美和连续的结合。
197So, the meaning is perfect because these forms connect two points in time.因此,意义是完美的,因为这些形式在时间上连接了两点.
198I had been walking through the forest when something else happened.我曾经走过森林 当其他的事情发生。
199For example, I'd been walking through the forest for hours before I realised I was lost.例如,我在发现我迷路之前 已经穿过森林好几个小时了
200Like you saw before, the perfect aspect is used to connect two points in the past.正如你以前看到的,完美的一面被用来连接过去的两个点.
201What about the continuous side?那连续的一面呢?
202What meaning does that add?这是什么意思?
203It adds the idea of something incomplete or temporary.它增加了不完全或暂时性的想法.
204If you say she'd been feeling much better, this suggests she was feeling ill either before or after she was feeling better.如果你说她感觉好多了 这说明她在她感觉好之前或之后都感觉不舒服
205If you say we've been waiting for ages, you mean that you still haven't got what you came for.如果你说我们已经等了好几年了 你是说你还没拿到你要的东西
206The action – waiting – is incomplete.等待的行动是不完整的。
207Waiting isn't complete.等待还没有完成。
208If you say by the end of the day we will have been working without a break for fourteen hours,如果你说在一天结束时 我们将一直工作 没有休息14小时,
209you mean that your work still won't be finished at the end of the day.你是说你的工作到最后还不能完成
210The past and future perfect continuous forms are rare, but you still need them sometimes.过去和未来的完美连续形式很少见,但有时你还是需要它们.
211OK, so now you've seen an overview of all the English verb forms.好了,现在你看到了所有英语动词形式的概述。
212First of all, remember that this lesson is meant to give you the big picture.首先,记住,这个教训是为了给你大局.
213You've seen what connects different English verb tenses,你见过不同的英语动词
214and how verb forms are different from each other.以及动词形式如何彼此不同.
215However, you've seen the most general connections and differences.然而,你看到了最普遍的联系和差异.
216This can help you to understand English verb forms,这能帮助你理解英语的动词形式,
217but remember that every English verb has its own specific uses and meanings.但记住每个英语动词都有自己的特定用途和含义.
218Want more practice with this topic?还要练习这个话题吗?
219Make sure you check out the full version of this lesson on our website.请检查date=中的日期值 (帮助) 校对:Soup
220It includes a quiz to help you review and practice what you've learned in this class.它包括一个测验来帮助你审查和实践你在这个班学到的知识.
221That's all from us. Thanks for watching.这都是来自我们。 谢谢你的观看。
222See you next time.下次见
该视频共有字幕 224 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P6 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p06 5. 5. English Grammar 05.Modal Verbs - How to Use Must, Have to and Should (P6)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Kasia.嗨,我是卡西亚。
0:03Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
0:06In this lesson, you can learn about the modal verbs must, have to and should.在这个课中,你可以学习模式动词必须,必须和应该.
0:12Do you know the difference between must, have to and should?你知道必须的、必须的和应该的区别吗?
0:16English learners often mix these three verbs.英语学习者经常混合这三种动词.
0:19In this lesson, you can learn how to use must, have to and should correctly in English.在这个课中,你可以学会如何使用,必须,并且应该正确使用英语.
0:29Must and have to are both used to talk about obligations, things you cannot choose not必须而且必须 都习惯于谈论义务, 你不能选择的东西
0:36{\fn黑体\fs22\bord1\shad0\3aHBE\4aH00\fscx67\fscy66\2cHFFFFFF\3cH808080}我们得去
0:38For example, We must talk to her before she leaves.比如,我们必须在她离开之前和她谈谈。
0:43I have to go into work early tomorrow.我明天要早点上班
展开字幕全文（151 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Kasia.嗨,我是卡西亚。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
3In this lesson, you can learn about the modal verbs must, have to and should.在这个课中,你可以学习模式动词必须,必须和应该.
4Do you know the difference between must, have to and should?你知道必须的、必须的和应该的区别吗?
5English learners often mix these three verbs.英语学习者经常混合这三种动词.
6In this lesson, you can learn how to use must, have to and should correctly in English.在这个课中,你可以学会如何使用,必须,并且应该正确使用英语.
7Must and have to are both used to talk about obligations, things you cannot choose not必须而且必须 都习惯于谈论义务, 你不能选择的东西
8{\fn黑体\fs22\bord1\shad0\3aHBE\4aH00\fscx67\fscy66\2cHFFFFFF\3cH808080}我们得去
9For example, We must talk to her before she leaves.比如,我们必须在她离开之前和她谈谈。
10I have to go into work early tomorrow.我明天要早点上班
11If you say, We must talk to her before she leaves, you mean that you think this is very如果你说 我们必须在她离开之前和她谈谈 你是说你觉得这非常
12important and you need to do it.重要的是,你需要做到这一点。
13When you say, I have to go into work early tomorrow, you mean that you have no choice.你说我明天要早点上班 你是说你别无选择
14These are both obligations, but they're slightly different.这两项义务虽然都是义务,但略有不同.
15Can you see how they're different?你能看到他们有什么不同吗?
16The first obligation is more personal, which is why you use must.第一个义务是个人的,这就是为什么你必须使用。
17You feel that it's necessary and important to talk to her before she leaves.你觉得在她离开之前和她谈谈是必要和重要的
18The obligation comes from you and your feelings.责任来自你和你的感觉
19What about have to?那必须怎么办?
20The second obligation is more situational, which is why you use have to.第二项义务是更符合实际情况的,这就是你必须使用的原因.
21It's necessary to go into work early tomorrow, maybe because you have to meet a client or明天要早点上班 也许是因为你必须见客户
22you have some important work to finish.你还有重要工作要做
23The obligation comes from the situation, not from you.义务来自情况 而不是你
24Let's see some examples.让我们看看一些例子。
25I must pay him back, like I promised.我必须如我承诺的那样还他钱
26You made a promise, and now it's important to you personally to keep your promise and你答应过,现在你个人必须信守诺言
27pay him back.还他
28He has to do a lot of homework every week.他每周都要做很多功课
29He needs to do a lot of homework because the school gives him a lot of homework.他需要做很多功课,因为学校给他很多功课.
30It's rare to use must to talk about obligations in spoken English.用英语讲义务是很罕见的.
31Native English speakers use have to much more in conversation.讲英语的原住民在交谈中需要更多。
32However, you can use must to talk about obligations in formal or written English.不过,您可以使用正式或书面的英语谈论义务。
33For example, all passengers must have a valid ticket.例如,所有乘客必须持有有效票.
34Candidates must arrive no later than five minutes before the scheduled start time.候选人必须在预定开始时间之前五分钟到达。
35Want an easy answer to this?想要一个简单的答案吗?
36Here's an easy answer.这里有一个简单的答案。
37Use have to when you speak.说话的时候一定要用
38Using must to talk about obligations can sound very formal and strange in spoken English.使用必须谈论义务的英语听起来非常正式和奇怪。
39If you use have to when you speak, you'll never be wrong.如果你说话的时候必须用,你永远不会错的.
40You can use must to talk about obligations in your written English if you're writing写作时可以用英文写义务
41something more formal.更正式的东西。
42This doesn't mean that you won't hear must in conversation.这并不意味着你不会在谈话中听到
43Actually, you'll hear it a lot.事实上,你会听到很多。
44Why is this?为什么?
45Didn't we just tell you not to use must in spoken English?我们不是叫你不要用英语吗?
46It's because must has many other meanings too.因为肯定还有其他许多意义
47Using must to talk about obligations is rare in spoken English, but you can use it for使用必须谈论义务在英语中是罕见的,但你可以使用它来
48many other things.还有很多事
49OK, you've seen how must and have to are different.好吧,你已经看到如何 必须和必须不同。
50What about mustn't and don't have to?那不能和不必吗?
51Wait, what?等等,什麽?
52We just talked about must and have to.我们只是谈论了必须和必须。
53Isn't this the same?这不是一样吗?
54Not at all.一点也不
55Must and have to aren't exactly the same, but they are quite similar.一定和他不一样 但他们很相似
56However, the negatives mustn't and don't have to are completely different.然而,底片不能,也不必完全不同.
57Look at two sentences.看两句.
58Visitors must not touch the paintings.访客不能碰画
59You don't have to be here before ten.你不必在十点之前来
60Can you tell the difference?你能分辨出不同吗?
61Must not means that something is forbidden.一定不是说有东西被禁止
62You are not allowed to do this.你不允许这样做。
63If you're in a museum, and the sign says, visitors must not touch the paintings, then如果你在博物馆里 招牌上写着 访客不能碰画
64don't touch the paintings.别碰画
65Don't have to means that something is not necessary.不必说有东西是不必要的
66You can choose to do something or not.你可以选择做一些事情与否。
67If we have plans, and I tell you, you don't have to be here before ten, then you can be如果我们有计划,我告诉你, 你不必在十点前到这儿, 那么你可以
68here before ten if you want.10点前到这里
69You can come at nine, at eight, or whenever you want.你可以9点,8点,或者随便你
70It's your choice.这是你的选择。
71Let's see some more examples.更举诸例.
72Passengers must not talk to the driver while the bus is moving.乘客在公交车行驶时不得与司机交谈.
73It's forbidden to talk to the driver while the bus is moving.禁止在公交车行驶时与司机交谈.
74You aren't allowed to do this.你不能这么做
75You don't have to finish it today.今不须修行.
76You can finish it today if you want to, but you can also leave it until later if you want.如果你愿意的话,你可以在今天完成它,但是如果你愿意,也可以留到以后。
77It's your choice.这是你的选择。
78Like must, must not is more common in formal or written English.与必须一样,在正式或书面的英语中,决不能更常见。
79In spoken English, it's more common to use can't.在口语英语中,使用不能比较常见.
80For example, you might see a sign saying, Mobile phones must not be used while driving.例如,你可能会看到一个标志说,在开车时不能使用移动电话。
81But if you were talking, you'd probably say, You can't use your mobile phone while但是如果你在说话,你可能会说, 你不能使用你的手机同时
82you're driving.你在开车
83On the other hand, don't have to is common in both spoken and written English.另一方面,不必在口头和书面英语中都常见.
84So now you've seen the difference between must and have to.所以,现在你已经看到了 区别是必须的。
85But what about should?但是应该怎么办?
86Remember that must and have to can be used to talk about obligations.记住这一点必须而且必须被用来谈论义务。
87Should is different.应该不同
88You use should to give advice or express your opinion.您应当提供建议或表达自己的意见。
89For example, You should go to bed earlier.比如,你该早点上床睡觉
90Then you wouldn't feel so tired all the time.那你就不会一直觉得很累了
91This is my advice.这是我的建议。
92I think it's better for you to do this, but it isn't necessary.我觉得这样对你更好,但没必要
93It's not an obligation, so you still have a choice.这不是义务,所以你还有选择权。
94He should do more work if he wants to get promoted.如果想升职,他应该做更多的工作.
95This is my opinion.这就是我的看法。
96I don't think he needs to do it, and I don't necessarily care if he does this or not.我觉得他不需要这么做,我也未必在乎他这样做与否.
97You can't use should to talk about obligations or rules.你不能用来谈论义务或规则。
98When you say, You should, you mean that the person has a choice.当你说,你应该,你是说, 人有选择。
99You're giving your opinion or some advice.你在发表意见或建议
100However, must can also be used to give advice.然而,也必须用来提供咨询意见。
101For example, You must try the fish, it's delicious.例如,你必须尝试鱼, 它的美味。
102Actually, you can also use have to to give advice.其实,你也可以使用 提供建议。
103You could also say, You have to try the fish, it's delicious.你也可以说,你必须尝试 鱼,它的美味。
104Can you tell the difference between using should to give advice and using must or have你能分辨出使用应提供咨询意见与使用必须或拥有
105to?给?
106Giving advice with must or have to is stronger and more emphatic than giving advice with提供或必须提供的咨询意见比提供建议更为有力和有力。
107should.应该。
108If you say, You should try the fish, this sounds quite neutral.如果你说,你应该试试鱼, 这听起来很中立。
109But if you say, You must try the fish or You have to try the fish, these sound much stronger.但是如果你说,你必须尝试鱼 或者你必须尝试鱼, 这些听起来要强得多。
110You're more excited about what you're saying.你对你说的更兴奋
111You really like that fish.你真的很喜欢这条鱼。
112So, you can use must, have to or should to give advice or express opinions.因此,您必须、必须或应当提出意见或发表意见。
113Using must or have to expresses stronger feelings than just using should.使用必须或必须表达比使用更强烈的感情。
114However, if you want to give negative advice, only shouldn't is possible.但是,如果你想给出负面的建议,就不应该有.
115For example, You shouldn't eat so much chocolate at once, you'll make yourself sick.例如,你不应该同时吃这么多巧克力,你会生病的.
116You shouldn't take the job unless you're sure it's what you want.你不该接这份工作 除非你确定这是你想要的
117In negative sentences, you can only use shouldn't to give advice or express your opinion.在负面的句子中,只能使用不应该给出建议或表达自己的意见.
118You can't use mustn't or don't have to with this meaning.你不能用,不能用,也不能用这个意思
119At this point, you've seen how to use must, have to and should to talk about obligations现在,你已经看到如何使用,必须,必须,应该谈论义务
120or advice.或建议。
121Let's put everything together by comparing all three verbs.让我们通过比较所有三个动词来将一切组合起来.
122Use must for Obligations you feel strongly about, I must remember to send him a birthday一定要用在义务上 你强烈的感受, 我必须记得送他生日
123card.纸牌。
124Obligations in formal, written English, all employees must wash hands.所有雇员必须洗手。
125Strong advice, you must read it, it's an amazing story.强烈的建议,你必须读它, 这是一个惊人的故事。
126Using something is forbidden.使用的东西是被禁止的。
127If you use mustn't, children must not be left unattended.如果你不能使用, 不能让孩子无人照顾。
128Remember, that mustn't or must not are more formal, and in spoken English it's more记住,这不能或不能 更正式,在口语英语 它更
129common to say can't.常说不能.
130Next, what about have to?接下来怎么办?
131You use have to for Obligations which depend on rules or circumstances.义务取决于规则或情况。
132I have to wear glasses because I can't see so clearly.我必须戴眼镜 因为我看不清
133Most obligations in spoken English, do you have to work tomorrow?大部分的英语义务,你明天要工作吗?
134Saying something is not necessary.说点什么是不必要的。
135You don't have to do this if you don't want to.欲得无上菩提.
136Strong advice, you have to try this ice cream.强烈的建议, 你必须尝试这个冰淇淋。
137Having have to for strong advice sounds more conversational than using must.需要强有力的建议 听起来比必须使用更能说话
138Finally, should.最后,应该。
139You can use should for…你可以用来...
140Giving advice, you should try once more, I'm sure you can get it.提供建议,你应该再试一次, 我相信你可以得到它。
141Giving negative advice, you shouldn't work so hard, take a break sometimes.给负面的建议,你不应该这么努力, 休息一段时间。
142Giving your opinion, if they make us work overtime, they should pay us for it.你的意见,如果他们让我们加班, 他们应该给我们钱。
143One last point, these three verbs can also be used to talk about probability and certainty.最后一点,这三个动词也可以用来谈论概率和确定性.
144In this video, we focused on talking about obligation and giving advice, but these verbs在这段视频中,我们专注于谈论义务和提供建议,但这些动词
145can also be used in other ways.也可以以其他方式使用.
146So now you've seen how to use must, have to and should in different ways.所以,现在你已经看到了如何使用, 必须,并且应该以不同的方式。
147Want more practice with this topic?还要练习这个话题吗?
148请检查access-date=中的日期值 (帮助) Oxfordonlineenglish.com网站上的完整教训.
149You can read the script and practice with a quiz.你可以用试题阅读脚本和练习.
150Thanks for watching.谢谢你的观看。
151See you next time.下次见
该视频共有字幕 151 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P7 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p07 6. 6. English Grammar 06.Future in English - How to Talk about the Future (P7)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Martin.嗨,我是马丁。
0:04Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
0:07In this lesson, you can learn how to talk about the future in English.在这个课中,你可以学习如何用英语谈论未来.
0:12What are you doing this evening?你今晚要干吗?
0:15What are your plans for next year?你明年有什么计划?
0:18Who will win the next World Cup?谁会赢得下届世界杯?.
0:21In this class, you'll learn to answer these and other questions about the future in clear,在这个班上,你会明白地 回答这些和其他关于未来的问题,
0:26natural, correct English.自然的,正确的英语。
0:28You'll see many simple phrases which you can learn to help you talk about the future你会看到很多简单的句子 你可以学会帮助你谈论未来
0:34in English in any situation.在任何情况下使用英语。
展开字幕全文（265 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Martin.嗨,我是马丁。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
3In this lesson, you can learn how to talk about the future in English.在这个课中,你可以学习如何用英语谈论未来.
4What are you doing this evening?你今晚要干吗?
5What are your plans for next year?你明年有什么计划?
6Who will win the next World Cup?谁会赢得下届世界杯?.
7In this class, you'll learn to answer these and other questions about the future in clear,在这个班上,你会明白地 回答这些和其他关于未来的问题,
8natural, correct English.自然的,正确的英语。
9You'll see many simple phrases which you can learn to help you talk about the future你会看到很多简单的句子 你可以学会帮助你谈论未来
10in English in any situation.在任何情况下使用英语。
11Let's start with a simple question.先简问.
12What are you doing this weekend?这周末你在做什么?
13I'm meeting some friends for lunch on Saturday, and then we're going to the theatre.周六我和几个朋友吃午饭 然后我们去剧院
14Sounds good.听起来不错
15What about Sunday?星期天怎么样?
16Not sure.还不确定
17Don't have plans yet.还没有计划
18What about you?你怎么样?
19Doing anything fun?有什么好玩的吗?
20I'm going away, for the weekend.我要离开这周末
21Really?真的吗?
22Nice.不错
23Where are you going?你们要去哪?
24Berlin!柏林!
25I found some cheap flights.我找到一些廉价的航班。
26Let's look at some useful language you saw in this dialogue.让我们看看你在这场对话中看到的一些有用的语言.
27What are you doing this weekend?这周末你在做什么?
28This is a very common question.这是一个非常常见的问题。
29You can change it and use it in different situations, like this.你可以改变它 并用在不同的情况,像这样。
30What are you doing tomorrow?你明天要干吗?
31What are you doing tonight?你今晚要干吗?
32What are you doing next Wednesday evening?你下周三晚上要做什么? 周三晚上要做什么?
33How could you answer these three questions?你怎么能回答这三个问题?
34Here are some possible answers.这里有一些可能的答案。
35I'm working in the morning, then I'm playing football in the park with some friends.早上上班,然后和一些朋友在公园踢足球.
36I'm going for a beer with some people from work.我要和一些同事去喝杯啤酒.
37Next Wednesday?下周三吗?
38不知道 说不定 No idea.
39I haven't made any plans yet.我还没计划好
40Can you see what verb form you need in these questions and answers?你能看到这些问答需要什么动词吗?
41You often need the present continuous tense.你经常需要 当前的持续紧张。
42You can use the present continuous to talk about the future, even though it's a present你可以使用现在的连续 谈论未来,尽管这是一个礼物
43tense.紧张
44You can use the present continuous to talk about plans if you know where or when something如果你知道在哪里或何时
45will happen.将会发生。
46Usually, you use it to talk about the near future, however, you can also use it for plans通常,你用它来谈论 近期,但是,你也可以用它 计划
47which are further in the future, like holiday plans.未来会更远 就像假期计划
48Let's see some examples of this.举个例子吧
49Are you going anywhere next summer?你明年夏天要去哪儿吗?
50We're going to Cornwall.我们要去康沃尔
51It's the same place we go every year.我们每年都去同一个地方
52I've heard it's beautiful there.我听说那里很美
53How long are you staying there?你在这里待了多久?
54Just a week.就一个星期
55Are you going in July?你要去七月吗?
56I'm thinking about going, just for two or three days.我想去,只要两三天。
57No, we're going in August.不,我们八月去。
58Who are you going with?你和谁去?
59I'm going with two old college friends.我和两个大学老朋友一起去
60Well, if you come in August, we can show you around.如果你八月来 我们可以带你到处看看
61I'm working in August, unfortunately.不幸的是,我在八月工作。
62Here, you heard useful questions to ask someone about their vacation plans.在这里,你听到一些有用的问题 问别人关于他们的度假计划。
63Are you going anywhere this summer?你今年夏天要去哪儿吗?
64How long are you staying there?你在这里待了多久?
65Who are you going with?你和谁去?
66Can you answer these three questions?你能回答这三个问题吗?
67Pause the video and make your own answers.暂停录像,自己回答
68Now, put your answers together in one sentence, like this.现在,把你的答案放在一句话里,像这样。
69I'm going to Egypt for ten days with a group of friends.我要和一群朋友去埃及十天
70Next, add some more details about what you're planning to do.接下来,补充一些关于你计划做什么的细节.
71For example, I'm going to Egypt for ten days with a group of friends.例如,我和一群朋友去埃及十天。
72We're planning to do some sightseeing around Cairo.我们计划在开罗周围观光
73Then we're going to do a boat trip on the Nile.然后我们要去尼罗河上旅行
74Can you see something different in this sentence?你能看到不同的东西吗?
75We said,我们说,
76We're planning to do some sightseeing around Cairo.我们计划在开罗周围观光
77We're going to do a boat trip on the Nile.我们要去尼罗河旅行
78Here, you're using two verbs, planning to do and going to do.在这里,你使用两个动词,计划做和去做.
79Do you know why?你知道为什么吗?
80Let's see the answer.让我们来看看答案。
81You use the present continuous to talk about plans if you know where or when something如果你知道在哪里或何时
82will happen.将会发生。
83That means you often need the present continuous to talk about plans in the near future.这意味着你经常需要现在的连续 谈论在不久的将来的计划。
84What about plans in the future if you don't know exactly where or when things will happen?如果你不知道具体地点或何时会发生,那未来的计划呢?
85Is it true you quit?你真的辞职了吗?
86Yes!对!
87I'm done with this place, and it feels great!我受够了这个地方,感觉很好!
88What are you going to do now?你现在打算怎么办?
89You know, first of all, I'm planning to take some time to rest and recover my energy.你知道,首先,我计划 花一些时间休息 并恢复我的能量。
90I've been so stressed the last few months.过去几个月我压力很大
91Sure, but then how are you going to find a new job?当然 但你要怎么找新工作?
92Actually, I'd like to start my own business.实际上,我想开始我自己的生意。
93Tired of working for other people.厌倦为他人工作.
94Really?真的吗?
95What kind of thing are you thinking of doing?你在想什麽?
96My dream is to have my own small marketing firm.我的梦想是拥有自己的小营销公司.
97I'm hoping to start with freelancing and then build up from there.我希望从自由舞开始,然后从那里积聚起来.
98Wow, good luck!哇,祝你好运!
99Here, you saw useful phrases to talk about plans if you don't know all the details yet.在这里,你看到了一些有用的短语来谈论计划 如果你还不知道所有的细节。
100Do you remember any of the questions and phrases?你还记得问题和短语吗?
101Here's some of the key language you saw.这是你看到的一些关键语言。
102What are you going to do now?你现在打算怎么办?
103I'm planning to take some time to rest.我打算花点时间休息
104I'd like to start my own business.欲自开业.
105My dream is to have my own marketing firm.我的梦想是拥有自己的营销公司。
106You can change these sentences to fit different situations.你可以改变这些句子来适应不同的情况.
107Like this.像这样
108What are you going to do after you graduate?毕业后怎么办?
109I'm planning to buy an apartment next year.我打算明年买个公寓
110I'd like to learn to scuba dive one day.一日欲学潜水.
111My dream is to live near the sea where it's sunny all year round.我的梦想是住在海边 那里是全年的阳光
112You can use these to talk about future plans, dreams and ideas.你可以用这些来谈论未来的计划,梦想和想法.
113What about you?你怎么样?
114What are your plans, dreams and ideas for the future?你对未来有什么计划、梦想和想法?
115Use these templates and make four sentences about your life and your plans.使用这些模板,并就你的生活和计划做四句.
116Say the sentences out loud, or write them down, or both.大声说句子,或者写下来,或者两句都写下来.
117Now you know how to talk about all kinds of future plans in English.现在你知道如何用英语谈论各种未来的计划.
118What other things do you need to talk about in the future?将来你还要谈什么?
119What time does the concert start?音乐会什么时候开始?
120Eight o'clock, so we need to leave at six thirty.8点,所以我们六点半离开
121Is there a bus?有巴士吗?
122Yeah, I think it leaves at six forty-five, and it gets there around seven thirty.是的,我想它离开 在6点45分, 它到达那里大约7点30分。
123What time does it finish?什么时候结束?
124It's supposed to end at ten.应於十地尽.
125The last bus back leaves at ten fifteen, so we'll have to hurry.末班车在十点十五分离开 所以我们得快点
126Here, you saw us talking about schedules.在这里,你看到我们谈论时间表。
127Do you remember what language you heard?你还记得你听到什么语言吗?
128You can use the present simple to talk about future schedules or timetables.您可以使用当前简单的方式谈论未来的日程或时间表。
129For example, what time does the concert start?例如,音乐会什么时候开始?
130The bus gets there around seven thirty.公交车7点30分左右到
131The last bus leaves at ten fifteen.末班车10点15分出发.
132You can use this to talk about public transport, class timetables, work schedules, events,你可以用这个来谈论公共交通 班级时间表 工作时间表 活动
133or anything else which runs on a timetable.或任何按时间表运行的
134For example, our class starts at eleven thirty.例如,我们的课从11点30分开始。
135What time is your flight?你的飞机几点?
136The wedding is at three.婚礼在三点
137Now it's your turn.现在轮到你了
138Think of three things in your life which run on a timetable.想想你生命中的三件事 都按时间表进行
139Make three sentences using the present simple.以今简故作三句.
140Want an extra challenge?还要再挑战一下吗?
141Make questions and answers like this.作此问答.
142What time does the train leave?火车几点出发?
143It leaves at five thirty.5点30分离开
144Pause the video and make your three sentences now.暂停录像,现在做三句。
145Again, write them down if you want some extra practice.再来一次,如果需要额外练习,请写下来.
146Oh!瓳
147We forgot something!我们忘了一件事!
148A very important question!一个非常重要的问题!
149Oh?是吗?
150What's that?这是什么?
151You don't remember?你不记得了吗?
152At the beginning, who's going to win the next World Cup?一开始,谁会赢得下届世界杯?.
153What do you think?你觉得呢?
154Maybe you said something like, Italy will win.也许你说过意大利会赢
155I hope Russia will win, but I don't think they actually will.我希望俄罗斯会赢 但我不认为他们会赢
156England definitely won't win it.英国绝对不会赢
157To make predictions about the future, you can use will or won't.为了预测未来,你可以使用或不会使用.
158You can also use going to.你也可以用来。
159You generally use going to for predictions that are not so far in the future.你一般都用来预测 未来不会那么远
160It's going to rain.会下雨的。
161Look at those clouds.看那些云头.
162What do you think is going to happen next?你觉得接下来会发生什么?
163He's going to be unhappy when he finds out about this.他会不高兴的 当他发现这一点。
164That said, don't worry about the difference between will and going to here.也就是说,不要担心 意志和去这里的区别。
165You can use both freely.你可以自由地使用两者。
166No one will notice.没人会发现的
167You can also use many other phrases to make predictions.也可以使用许多其他短语来作出预测.
168Let's look.让我们看看。
169So, do you think they'll do it?你觉得他们会这么做吗?
170Michelle will definitely do it.米歇尔一定会这么做的
171There's no chance Andy is going to finish.Andy不可能结束的
172It doesn't look like he can run to the bus stop, so I can't believe he'll run 26 miles.看来他跑不了车站 所以我不敢相信他会跑26英里
173I don't know.师曰.
174He's been training hard.他一直在努力训练。
175He's unlikely to get a fast time, but I'm pretty sure he'll do it.他不可能得到一个快速的时间, 但我很确定他会做到这一点。
176Well, anyway, we can agree that Michelle is sure to be much faster.好吧,无论如何,我们可以同意 米歇尔肯定会更快。
177Yeah, of course.当然
178Do you think she'll do it in under three hours?你觉得她三小时后会做吗?
179It's not likely that she'll do it that fast.她不会这么快就动手的
180Under three hours for a marathon is quick, but she's bound to get under four hours.跑马拉松不到三个小时是很快的,但她肯定会不到四个小时.
181That's still a good time.那还是个好时机
182There, we were talking about two people running a marathon, and making predictions about how在那里,我们谈论两个人 运行马拉松, 和预测如何
183they would do.他们会这样做。
184Apart from will and going to, did you notice any other language we used to make predictions除了意志和去,你有没有注意到任何其他语言 我们用来做预测
185about the future?关于未来?
186Firstly, you can modify will or going to by adding an adverb, like this.首先,你可以通过添加副词来修改或去修改遗嘱,像这样.
187She'll definitely do it.她一定会的
188There's no chance he's going to finish.他不可能结束的
189I'm pretty sure he'll do it.我敢肯定,他会做到这一点。
190In this way, you can show that you're more or less sure about your prediction.这样,你可以显示你或多或少对你的预测很确定.
191You also heard some other phrases you can use to make predictions in the future.你也听到一些其他的短语,你可以用来预测未来.
192He's unlikely to get a fast time.他不可能得到一个快速的时间。
193She's sure to be much faster.她肯定会更快。
194It's not likely that she'll do it that fast.她不会这么快就动手的
195She's bound to get under four hours.她肯定会不到四个小时
196Likely has a similar meaning to probable.可能与可能的含义相似。
197Be careful, because likely is an adjective, not an adverb.要小心,因为可能是形容词,而不是副词.
198So if you say, he's unlikely to get a fast time, you mean that he'll probably be quite所以,如果你说, 他不太可能得到一个快速的时间, 你是说,他可能会相当
199slow.慢点
200Sure to and bound to both mean that you're absolutely certain about something.肯定的,和束缚 意味着你绝对肯定的东西。
201You can use them to emphasise how sure you are.你可以用它们来强调你有多确定
202These phrases are a little less common, however, they are good to know, so you can add variety这些短语比较少见,不过它们很好听,所以你可以添加品种
203to your spoken English.你的英语。
204Let's see how you can use these phrases in some other ways.让我们看看你如何用这些短语 在某些其他方式。
205They're unlikely to hire you if you have so little experience.如果你经验太少 他们不可能雇你
206It's exactly your kind of film.这正是你那种电影
207You're sure to like it.你肯定会喜欢的
208It's not likely that he'll wake up before nine.他不可能在九点前醒来
209He's a really good cook.他是个好厨师
210Whatever he makes, it's bound to be delicious.不管他做的什么 一定好吃的
211Note also that likely can be used with both a positive and a negative meaning.还请注意,可能同时具有正面和负面意义。
212You can say, it's unlikely that, or, he's not likely to, however, sure to and bound你可以说,这是不太可能的, 或者,他不太可能,但是,确定和约束
213to are always positive.总是积极的。
214Now it's your turn.现在轮到你了
215Pause the video and make four predictions about the future.暂停录像,并对未来作出4个预测.
216You could make predictions about the weather, sport, your life, or anything you like.你可以预测天气,运动,你的生活,或者你喜欢的任何东西。
217Make four sentences, say them aloud, and write them down if you want extra practice.作四句,大声说,若欲加练,写下.
218Done?说完了吗?
219Next, let's look at one more topic you need to talk about the future.接下来,让我们再看看 一个你需要谈论未来的话题。
220Up to now, you've learned how to talk about things in the future that you are certain到现在为止,你已经学会了 如何谈论未来的事情 你确信
221about.有关。
222However, the future is often uncertain.然而,未来往往是不确定的。
223How can you express this when you speak English?你讲英语的时候怎么表达这个?
224Let's look.让我们看看。
225So do you have any idea when you'll have finished everything?你知道你什么时候能完成一切吗?
226It really depends.这真的取决于。
227It may be ready next week, if everything goes well.如果一切顺利的话,下周可能就准备好了
228We really need it done sooner.我们真的需要尽快完成
229The thing is, it's possible that we'll have to replace some of the artwork.问题是,我们可能要更换一些艺术品。
230That could take a few days.这可能需要几天时间。
231OK, I have to ask.好吧,我必须问。
232Why are you making such big changes so late?你为什么这么晚才做出这么大的改变?
233For a project like this, those details should be finalised by now.对于这样一个项目,这些细节现在应该完成。
234We had some issues.我们有一些问题。
235But anyway, let's focus on what we can do now.但无论如何,让我们集中精力,我们现在能做什么。
236Perhaps we won't need to change anything.也许我们不需要改变任何事
237In that case, it'll definitely be finished by… the end of next week.这样的话 下周末一定能完成
238Even that's too late.连这都太晚了。
239Look, you need to sort this out.听着,你需要解决这个问题。
240Hmm, maybe I'll work overtime this weekend.嗯,也许我会加班 这周末。
241That might help.这也许有帮助。
242Just do what you have to.做你该做的
243In this dialogue, I was an employee, and I wasn't very sure about a lot of things.在这场对话中,我是一名雇员,我对很多事情并不十分肯定.
244I used different words and phrases to show that I wasn't sure.我用不同的词和短语来表示我不确定.
245Do you remember any of them?你记得他们吗?
246You can use a modal verb like may, might, or could.你可以使用一个模式动词 像可能,可能,或者可以。
247For example, it may be ready next week.例如,下周可能就绪。
248That could take a few days.这可能需要几天时间。
249That might help.这也许有帮助。
250You can also use will with an adverb like perhaps or maybe.你也可以用遗嘱 副词像也许或者也许。
251This has the same meaning as using verbs like might or could.这与使用诸如威力或能力等动词具有相同的含义.
252For example, perhaps we won't need to change anything.例如,也许我们不需要改变任何事情。
253Maybe I'll work overtime this weekend.也许我周末会加班
254Finally, you can use the phrase it's possible that, like this.最后,你可以使用短语 它有可能,像这样。
255It's possible that we'll have to replace some of the artwork.有可能我们不得不更换一些艺术品。
256As with all of these sentences, you can change them to express your own ideas.和所有这些句子一样,你可以改变它们来表达你自己的想法.
257For example, I may be away next week.举例来说,我下周可能要离开。
258Taking a warm coat might be a good idea.换件暖和的大衣也许是个好主意
259Perhaps I'll go to the park for a walk this afternoon.也许我今天下午会去公园散步
260It's possible that she didn't see your message.她可能没看到你的留言
261Now, you hopefully understand many different ways to talk about the future in English.现在,你希望能够理解很多不同的方式 来用英语谈论未来。
262For more practice with this topic, check out the full version of the lesson on our website, OxfordOnlineEnglish.com.更多关于这个话题的实践,请查看我们的网站OxfordOnline English.com的完整版本的课.
263The full lesson includes a quiz to help you practice these ideas.完整的课程包括一个测验来帮助你实践这些想法.
264Thanks for watching.谢谢你的观看。
265See you next time.下次见
该视频共有字幕 266 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P8 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p08 7. 7. English Grammar 07.Using Would Have, Could Have, Should Have (P8)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Oh. Hello. Uh, I should have prepared for this lesson. I guess now I don't know what瓳 哈罗 呃,我应该有 准备这个教训。 我猜现在我不知道了
0:14to say. Whoops.说起来 呜呼.
0:17Martin, you could have at least warned me. Now what are we going to do?马丁,你至少可以警告我 现在怎么办?
0:23I would have done it, but I was just so busy.我本想这么做的 但我太忙了
0:28I could have done it if you told me. Don't you have some notes or something we can use?如果你告诉我,我本可以做到的 你没有笔记吗?
0:34I had some notes, but I can't find them.我有一些笔记 但我找不到
0:38Well, think about it. Where could they be?考虑一下吧 他们在哪里?
0:42Uh, not sure. I could have left them on the bus.呃,还不确定。 我本可以把他们留在巴士上
0:50I should have never agreed to do this video.我本不该同意拍这个视频的
0:54Hi, I'm Martin. Welcome to Oxford Online English. In this lesson, you can learn how嗨,我是马丁。 欢迎来到牛津在线英语。 在这个课中,你可以学会如何
展开字幕全文（125 条）
序号英文中文
1Oh. Hello. Uh, I should have prepared for this lesson. I guess now I don't know what瓳 哈罗 呃,我应该有 准备这个教训。 我猜现在我不知道了
2to say. Whoops.说起来 呜呼.
3Martin, you could have at least warned me. Now what are we going to do?马丁,你至少可以警告我 现在怎么办?
4I would have done it, but I was just so busy.我本想这么做的 但我太忙了
5I could have done it if you told me. Don't you have some notes or something we can use?如果你告诉我,我本可以做到的 你没有笔记吗?
6I had some notes, but I can't find them.我有一些笔记 但我找不到
7Well, think about it. Where could they be?考虑一下吧 他们在哪里?
8Uh, not sure. I could have left them on the bus.呃,还不确定。 我本可以把他们留在巴士上
9I should have never agreed to do this video.我本不该同意拍这个视频的
10Hi, I'm Martin. Welcome to Oxford Online English. In this lesson, you can learn how嗨,我是马丁。 欢迎来到牛津在线英语。 在这个课中,你可以学会如何
11to use would have, should have, and could have.使用会,应该,并且可以。
12These verbs would, should, could, etc. are modal verbs, so they don't have past forms这些动词会,应该,可以,等等都是模式动词,所以没有过去的形式.
13like normal verbs do. Instead, you can talk about the past by adding have plus a past就像普通动词一样 相反,你可以谈论过去 通过添加有加一个过去
14participle after the verb. In this lesson, you'll learn to use those modal verbs to动词之后的participle. 在这个课中,你会学会使用这些模式动词
15talk about the past in English, what they mean, and how they're different.以英语谈论过去,他们的意思,以及他们是如何不同的.
16Sometimes, you have moments when your life could go in very different ways. For example,有时候,你有些时候 你的生活会变得非常不同 举例来说,
17Maybe you take an important exam, and your result decides where you can go to university.也许你参加重要的考试,结果决定了可以上大学的地方.
18Maybe you're thinking about moving to another country. Do you stay where you are, or do可能你想搬到另一个国家去 你留在原地,还是做
19you leave? Perhaps you're in a relationship, and things aren't going so well. Do you你离开? 也许你们在交往 事情不太顺利 你会吗?
20stay and try to make it work, or do you move on?留下来,试着让它工作, 还是你继续前进?
21Life is full of these important moments and decisions. Try to think of something like生活充满了这些重要的时刻和决定. 试着想点办法
22this from your past. Now ask yourself, you made the choices you made. You passed the这是从你的过去。 现在问问你自己 你做出了选择 你通过了
23exam or you failed it. You moved to another country or you didn't. That's reality,考试或者你失败了。 你搬到了别的国家 或者你没有。 这就是现实
24but what if things had gone the other way? This is the imaginary past. You're imagining如果事情变了怎么办? 这是想象中的过去。 你在想象着
25a different version of the past. You're asking yourself questions like, what if I不同版本的过去。 你问自己问题 比如,如果我
26had worked a bit harder and passed that exam? What if I had taken that job and moved to更努力地通过考试? 如果我接受了那份工作并搬到了
27Italy? What if I had told her how I feel? This is where you use would have. Use would意大利吗? 如果我告诉她我的感受呢? 这就是你用过的地方 用途将
28have to talk about the imaginary past. For example, if I had got better exam results,必须谈谈想象中的过去 例如,如果我有更好的考试成绩,
29I would have got into Harvard. I wouldn't have met my wife if I had moved to Italy seven我会进入哈佛大学的 如果我搬到意大利7号,我就不会见到我妻子了
30years ago. If I hadn't forgotten my pen that day, I wouldn't have asked to borrow数年前. 如果那天我没忘记我的笔 我就不会借了
31yours and we wouldn't have become friends. Think about your important moment from the past你和我们不会成为朋友。 想想你过去的重要时刻
32when your life could have gone in two very different directions. What would have happened当你的人生可能走向两个非常不同的方向。 会发生什么?
33if things had gone the other way? So, you can use would have to talk about the imaginary如果事情变了呢? 所以,你可以使用 不得不谈论想象
34past. What about our other verbs? Where do you suppose they are? I don't know. They're过去 我们的其他动词呢? 你觉得他们在哪儿? 师曰. 他们是
35usually so reliable. I guess they could have mixed up the date. Shall we try calling them通常如此可靠。 我猜他们可能把约会搞混了 我们要不要打给他们?
36again? We can't wait forever. When will it be ready? I think next Thursday. You said又来了? 我们不能等到永远。 什么时候准备好? 我想下个星期四。 你说
37you'd have it finished by the end of this week. Now what am I gonna do? Sorry. You could这周末你就能完成 我该怎么办? 对不起 你会
38have told me sooner that you weren't gonna finish on time. Doctor, is it serious? No,早告诉我,你不会按时完成。 医生,你是认真的吗? 没有
39it's just a scratch. But be more careful next time. You could have really hurt yourself.只是擦伤而已 但下次要小心点 你可能真的会伤到自己
40You can also use could have to talk about the imaginary past. If I'd had more time,你也可以用 不得不谈论想象中的过去。 如果我有更多的时间,
41I could have finished everything. He could have won it if he hadn't slipped at the start.我本可以完成这一切的 如果他一开始没滑倒的话 他本可以赢的
42When you use could have to talk about the imaginary past, you're talking about possibilities. You're当你不得不谈论想象中的过去时, 你说的是可能性。 琌
43talking about opportunities and chances which you didn't have in reality, but in your imaginary谈论机会和机会 你没有在现实中,而是在你的想象中
44version of the past, you would have had these chances. However, could have can also have说到过去 你会有机会的 然而,也可能有
45different meanings. Let's look. Here, you saw three more ways to use could have. Remember that不同的意义。 让我们看看。 在这里,你看到了 三种方法可以使用。 记住
46you can go back and review the dialogues if you need to. Can you explain how could have is需要的话,您可以回去查看对话框。 你能解释一下吗?
47used in each of these dialogues? Could have can mean that you aren't sure about something in the用于每个对话框? 可能意味着你不确定
48past. You're talking about a possibility. They could have mixed up the date. I've lost my keys.过去 你说的是一个可能性。 他们可能把约会搞混了 钥匙丢了
49I could have left them at work. Where are they? I guess they could have missed the train.我本可以把他们留在工作上 他们在哪? 我猜他们可能错过了火车
50In these examples, you aren't sure about something that happened in the past. You use在这些例子中,你不确定过去发生过什么。 你用这个
51could have to make a guess about what happened. You can also use could have to criticise someone.可能得猜测一下发生了什么 你也可以用来批评某人。
52You could have told me sooner. You could have tidied up a bit.你可以早点告诉我 你本来可以整理一下的
53You could have worn something a bit nicer.你可以穿得更好一点
54In these examples, you want to criticise the other person for something they didn't do.在这些例子中,你想要批评另一个人 他们没有做的事情。
55Finally, you can use could have to mean that somebody was lucky to avoid a bad situation最后,你可以使用 可能意味着有人幸运 避免一个坏的情况
56in the past. It's just a scratch, but you could have really hurt yourself.过去 只是擦伤,但你可能真的伤到自己了
57We were really late, and we could have missed our plane, but luckily we just made it.我们真的迟到了,我们本可以错过我们的飞机, 但幸运的是,我们刚刚赶上了。
58Let's review quickly. Could have has four different meanings. Can you remember them?让我们快速审查。 可能有四个不同的含义。 你还记得吗?
59You can use could have to talk about the imaginary past,你可以用 不得不谈论想象中的过去,
60to guess about something in the past which you aren't sure about,猜猜过去你不确定的事
61to criticise someone for something they didn't do,批评某人没有做的事,
62and to say that someone was lucky to avoid a bad situation.并说有人幸运地避免了糟糕的局面。
63Next, what about should have?接下来,应该有什么呢?
64You just saw that could have can be used to criticise someone. Should have is similar你刚刚看到,这可以用来批评某人。 应该有相似的
65should have is similar, but you can use it in a wider variety of ways.应该是相似的, 但你可以用更广泛的方式。
66Like could have, you can use it to criticise something that someone didn't do in the past.你可以用它来批评过去没有做的事
67You should have called me like you promised.你应该按照你的承诺打电话给我
68He should have checked the recipe before he started cooking.在他开始做饭前,他应该先检查食谱.
69They should have practised penalties before the match.他们应该在比赛前进行处罚。
70You can also use it to criticise something that someone did. You shouldn't have drunk so much at你也可以用它来批评某人所做的事。 你不该喝这么多的
71the wedding. She shouldn't have left everything to the last minute.婚礼。 她不该把一切都留到最后一刻
72You can even use it to criticise yourself if you regret something which you did in the past.你甚至可以用它来批评自己 如果你后悔你过去做的事。
73I should have realised what was going on. I shouldn't have said that.我早该意识到发生了什么 我不应该这么说的
74I shouldn't have said that.我不应该这么说的
75You can also use should have to apologise to someone. If you say I shouldn't have said that,你也该向某人道歉 如果你说我不该这么说
76you're admitting that you made a wrong choice and that you regret it.你承认你做错了选择 你后悔了
77This is the most common use of should have, criticising others or yourself,这是最常用的用法 批评别人或你自己
78and talking about things you regret in the past. However, it has one more meaning.谈论你过去后悔的事 然而,它还有一个意义。
79Look at three examples. Can you work out what should have means here?观三例. 你能想出办法吗?
80Here, you use should have to talk about something which you expected to happen,在这里,你应该 谈谈你预期会发生的事情,
81but it didn't happen. They should have been here by now means that you expected them to have arrived但它没有发生。 他们应该已经在这里了,你以为他们已经到了
82before now, but you're still waiting. It should have been ready an hour ago.不过你还在等呢 一小时前就应该准备好了
83Means that you expected everything to be ready earlier. Maybe you're cooking something,意味着你期望一切能早点准备好 也许你在做点什么
84and it's taking much longer than you thought it would. The plane should have landed at 7.30.比你想象的要长得多 飞机应该在7点30分降落
85Means you expected the plane to land then, but it didn't.意思是你当时想让飞机降落 但飞机没有
86Probably you mean that the plane is late and you're still waiting for it.可能你是说飞机晚了 你还在等它
87Now, you should have learned two different ways to use should have.现在,你应该学会两种不同的使用方式。
88Let's practise using would have, could have and should have together.我们一起练习吧,可以,应该一起练习
89You should have told me your friends were coming. I would have made some extra food.你应该告诉我你的朋友会来 我会做一些额外的食物。
90Sorry, I would have called you, but I had no phone credit. I should have topped up before we went out.抱歉,我本来会给你打电话的 但我没有电话信用卡 出门前我本该爬上去的
91What are we going to eat? We don't have much in the fridge.我们吃什么? 冰箱里没多少
92I should have stopped and got a takeaway on the way. Not to worry, we'll order something.我本该停下来在路上买外卖的 别担心,我们定点什么
93Where's the food? I'm so hungry. They should have come by now, right?食物呢? 食物呢? 东西呢? 我饿了 他们应该已经来了,对不对?
94They're probably just busy.他们可能只是很忙。
95They could have forgotten. They would have called if there was a problem, don't you think?他们本可以忘记的 如果有问题他们会打电话的 你不觉得吗?
96Relax. You should have had a snack when you got in. It'll be here soon.放松点 你进来的时候应该吃点零食的 它会在这里很快。
97That was delicious. I've never had such a good meal.这是美味的。 我从来没有吃过这么好的饭
98You could have left some for me. What am I supposed to eat?你可以留一些给我。 我该吃什么?
99Oh, I'm sorry. I would have left some if I'd known you'd wanted some. I should have asked.哦,对不起。 如果我知道你想要的话 我会留下一些的 我应该问的
100Yeah, you should have. Oh well, there's half a cucumber in the fridge, I think.是啊,你应该有。 冰箱里有半个黄瓜
101Half a cucumber in the fridge, I think. Look at three sentences from the dialogues.冰箱里有半个黄瓜 从对话中看三句.
102Can you explain what they mean? The first sentence is talking about你能解释他们是什么意思吗? 第一句说的是
103the imaginary past. It means that if I had known you were bringing guests,想象中的过去 意思是如果我知道你带了客人
104I would have made some more food. But in reality, I didn't know, so I didn't make enough food.我会做一些更多的食物。 但实际上,我不知道,所以没有做足够的食物.
105The second sentence is talking about something you aren't sure about in the past.次二句说过去无量劫中.
106Do you remember the situation? We were waiting for our takeaway to arrive.你还记得情况吗? 我们在等我们的外卖到来
107It was late and we didn't know what happened. You use could have here to make a guess about很晚了,我们不知道发生了什么 你可以在这里猜测一下
108something in the past when you don't know what happened.过去的事,当你不知道发生了什么。
109The third sentence is a criticism, or an expression of regret.第三句是批评,或者表示后悔.
110If you say this, you mean that you made a mistake in the past.如果你这么说,你是说你在过去犯了一个错误。
111Think back to the dialogues. Did we use should have or could have in any other ways?回想一下对话 我们是否应该或可以用任何其他方式?
112Look at two more sentences. They should have come by now.又看两句. 他们应该已经来了。
113You could have left some for me.你可以留一些给我。
114What do should have and could have mean here?这里应该有什么,可能意味着什么?
115Here, should have means that something didn't happen the way you expected.在这里,应该有 意味着事情没有像你预期的那样发生。
116You expected the food to be here by now, but it isn't.你早就料到食物会到这里了 但其实不是
117Could have is used to criticize something which someone else didn't do.可能被用来批评别人没有做的事
118Now, hopefully you understand how to use would have, could have and should have.现在,希望你明白如何使用 会,可以,并且应该。
119Get more practice with the full version of this lesson,更多的练习 与这个课程的完整版本,
120which includes a quiz to help your understanding of this topic. There's a link underneath the video.包括一个测验来帮助你理解这个话题。 视频下面有个链接
121您也可以在我们的网站上找到更多免费英语课程, Oxford Online English dot com。
122Finally, a question. Did you learn anything new about using would have,最后,有一个问题。 你是否学到了新的使用方法
123could have, or should have? What was new for you in this lesson?可以,还是应该? 这课对你有什么新意?
124Please let us know in the comments.请在评论中告诉我们。
125Thanks for watching! See you next time!谢谢你的观看! 下次见!
该视频共有字幕 125 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P9 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p09 8. 8. English Grammar 08.Adverbs in English - Learn All About English Adverbs (P9)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Stephanie.嗨,我是史蒂芬妮。
0:03Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
0:05In this lesson, you can learn about adverbs.在这个课中,你可以学习副词.
0:08What do adverbs do?副词是做什么的?
0:10What's the difference between adjectives and adverbs?形容词和副词有什么区别?
0:14How do you use adverbs in English?英文副词怎么用?
0:17You can learn the answers to these questions in this lesson.你可以在这个课中学习这些问题的答案.
0:20Let's start with a challenge.我们先挑战一下
0:22Can you write down five English adverbs?你能写下五个英文副词吗?
0:26Pause the video and do it now.暂停录像,现在就做
展开字幕全文（255 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Stephanie.嗨,我是史蒂芬妮。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
3In this lesson, you can learn about adverbs.在这个课中,你可以学习副词.
4What do adverbs do?副词是做什么的?
5What's the difference between adjectives and adverbs?形容词和副词有什么区别?
6How do you use adverbs in English?英文副词怎么用?
7You can learn the answers to these questions in this lesson.你可以在这个课中学习这些问题的答案.
8Let's start with a challenge.我们先挑战一下
9Can you write down five English adverbs?你能写下五个英文副词吗?
10Pause the video and do it now.暂停录像,现在就做
11Ready?准备好了吗?
12I'm guessing you wrote down words ending with l-y, for example, quickly, slowly, or我猜你写了词 结尾与L -y, 例如,快速,慢,或
13clearly.很明显。
14These are all adverbs, however, there are many other adverbs.这些都是副词,然而,还有许多其他副词.
15Many of them don't end with l-y, like these – fast, to, or often.他们中的许多人不会像这些那样以L-y结束 — — 很快,或者经常结束。
16Many adverbs aren't just one word.许多副词不仅仅是一个词.
17Adverbs can be two words, or even whole phrases.副词可以是两个词,甚至整个短语.
18For example, last week, in a very strange way, for the last six years.例如,上周,以非常奇怪的方式,在过去六年里。
19So you might be thinking, what do adverbs actually do?所以你可能在想副词会做什么?
20What are adverbs?副词是什么?
21Adverbs are describing words.副词在描述词.
22They add information to something else in your sentence.他们给你句子里的别的东西添加了信息
23Adverbs can describe many different things.副词可以描述许多不同的事物.
24You can use an adverb to describe a verb like this.可以使用副词来形容这样的动词.
25He speaks very loudly.他说话很大声
26Does everyone drive that fast in the city?大家都开得这么快吗?
27I think I sound better than I did the first time.我听起来比第一次好
28The adverbs add information to the verbs.副词在动词中添加信息.
29These adverbs all describe the verbs by saying how someone did something.这些副词都通过说有人做了什么来形容动词.
30For example, look at the first sentence.譬如观初句.
31He speaks very loudly.他说话很大声
32The adverb loudly tells you how he speaks.副词大声地告诉你他怎么说
33You can also use adverbs to add information to verbs in other ways.也可以使用副词以其他方式在动词中添加信息.
34For example, I kind of enjoyed it, but it could have been better.例如,我有点喜欢它,但它可能是更好的。
35We talked a little, but we didn't have time to discuss everything.我们聊了一会,但是我们没有时间讨论一切。
36What else?还有什么?
37Well, you can use an adverb to show when, where, or how often something happens.你可以用副词来说明 何时、何地或发生什么的频率
38For example, let's meet at eight o'clock.譬如八时相见.
39She moved overseas after she graduated.她毕业后移居海外.
40I don't often have time to cook for myself.我经常没有时间自己做饭
41Remember that adverbs can be phrases.记住副词可以是短语.
42Adverbs aren't always single words.副词并不总是单词.
43Another point.又说一句.
44Adverbs can add information to adjectives, or even to other adverbs.副词可以将信息添加到形容词中,甚至可以添加到其他副词中.
45How does this work?怎么会这样?
46Can you think of any examples of this?你能想到这个例子吗?
47Here are some examples.以下是一些例子。
48It was a really exciting trip.这是一个非常令人兴奋的旅行。
49It's too hot in here.这里太热了
50She works incredibly hard.她很努力地工作着
51You can see two examples where an adverb describes an adjective, and one example where an adverb副词描述形容词的两个例子 副词描述形容词的一个例子
52describes another adverb.描述另一个副词。
53Remember that hard here is an adverb because it describes a verb.记住,这里硬是一个副词,因为它描述了一个动词.
54Works.有用吗?
55Is that everything?就这样吗?
56No, not quite.不,不尽然。
57Adverbs can do one more thing.副词还可以做一件事.
58Adverbs can also express your opinion about a situation.副词也可以表达你对某种情况的看法.
59Look at three sentences.观三句.
60She's obviously the best of the candidates we've seen so far.她显然是最好的候选人 我们见过到目前为止。
61Apparently, they're not sure they want to get married anymore.显然,他们不确定 他们想结婚了。
62Fortunately, we were able to recover most of the files.幸运的是,我们找到了大部分文件。
63These adverbs are different because they don't just add information to one word, they add这些副词之所以不同, 是因为它们不只是在一个单词上添加信息,
64information to the whole sentence.整个句子的信息。
65So you can see that adverbs can do many, many different things.所以,你可以看到副词可以做很多,很多不同的事情.
66They can describe verbs, adjectives, other adverbs, or even whole sentences.它们可以描述动词,形容词,其他副词,甚至整个句子.
67But there's a connection.但有脉络.
68Do you remember what we said at the start of this section?你还记得我们在这节开头说的话吗?
69Adverbs describe other things.副词描述其他事物.
70They add information to something else in your sentence.他们给你句子里的别的东西添加了信息
71Now let's look at our next question.现在让我们看看我们的下一个问题。
72How do you form adverbs?你怎么形成副词?
73Actually, this question isn't always relevant.其实,这个问题并不总是相关的.
74For most English adverbs, you don't need to form them, they just exist.对于大多数英语副词,你不需要形成它们,它们只是存在.
75For example, to, very, sometimes, always, here, and soon are all adverbs.比如说,非常,有时,总是,在这里,并且很快都是副词.
76You don't need to do anything to them.你不需要对他们做任何事情。
77So why ask the question at all?那为什么要问这个问题呢?
78For some adverbs, you can form them from adjectives.对于一些副词,可以从形容词中形成.
79This is mostly true for adverbs which describe verbs.对形容动词的副词来说,大多数都是如此.
80Adverbs which describe how someone does something.形容别人做事方式的副词
81For example, slow is an adjective.例如,慢是形容词.
82How can you make an adverb from it?你怎么能用它做副词?
83Look at a sentence and complete the missing word.看一句,补缺字.
84He eats very s…他吃得很饱...
85Do you know the answer?你知道答案吗?
86The answer is slowly.答案是缓慢的。
87You add –ly to an adjective to make an adverb.在形容词中添加一个副词
88This is the same for many adverbs which describe verbs.对许多形容动词的副词来说也是如此.
89For example, quiet, quietly, nice, nicely, clear, clearly.例如,安静,安静,美好,美好,清晰,清晰.
90Can you use these adverbs in a sentence?你能用这些副词在句子里吗?
91Pause the video and write down three sentences using these adverbs.暂停视频,用这些副词写下三句.
92Of course, there are many possibilities.当然,有许多可能性。
93Here are some suggestions.以下是一些建议。
94Everyone was sitting quietly and reading.每个人都静静地坐着看书
95He sings very nicely.他的歌唱非常不错。
96You clearly told me that you would be here at 10.30.你明确告诉我,你会在这里 在10: 30。
97However, even here you can't just think add –ly to an adjective.不过,即使在这里,你也不能只考虑在形容词中添加-ly。
98It doesn't always work.常不通达.
99First, if an adjective ends with y, you need to change the y to an ily to make it an adverb.首先,如果形容词以y结尾,则需要将y修改为ily,使其成为副词.
100For example, healthy, healthily, lazy, lazily, happy, happily.例如健康,健康,懒惰,懒惰,快乐,快乐.
101Secondly, some words don't change their form.第二,有些文字不会改变形式.
102The same word can be either an adjective or an adverb.同一个词可以是形容词,也可以是副词.
103For example, he's a really fast worker.例如,他是一个非常快的工人。
104He works really fast.他动作真快
105You're a better dancer than you used to be.你比以前更会跳舞
106You dance better than you used to.你跳得比以前还好
107Fast and better can be used as adjectives or adverbs, and the form of the word doesn't快速和更好可以用作形容词或副词,而词的形式不.
108change.变化。
109Thirdly, some adjectives already end in ly, like ugly, friendly, likely, or oily.第三,一些形容词已经以ly结尾,比如丑陋,友好,可能,或者油腻.
110These adjectives can't be made into adverbs.这些形容词不能制成副词.
111Finally, some adverbs are irregular.最后,一些副词是不规则的.
112Words which don't change, like fast or better, are examples of irregular adverbs.不改变的词,如快或更好,是不规则副词的例子.
113There's one more important one.还有一件重要的事
114What's the adverb for the adjective good?形容词好的副词是什么?
115The answer is well.答案是不错的。
116For example, she's a good writer.例如,她是一个很好的作家.
117She writes well.她写得很好
118Now, you know how to form adverbs from adjectives.现在,你知道如何从形容词中形成副词.
119Remember that you don't need to form most adverbs.记住你不需要形成大多数副词.
120Most adverbs are ready for you to use, and you don't have to do anything to them.多数副词都已经准备好让你使用,你不必对他们做任何事情.
121So, now seems like a good time to ask a new question.所以,现在看来是问一个新问题的好时机。
122What's the difference between adjectives and adverbs?形容词和副词有什么区别?
123Hopefully you have enough information from parts one and two to answer this question.希望能从第一部分和第二部分得到足够的信息来回答这个问题。
124Do you know the answer?你知道答案吗?
125Adjectives and adverbs both describe other words.形容词和副词都描述了其他词.
126Adjectives describe nouns.形容词描述名词.
127For example, Are you a good cook?比如,你厨艺好吗?
128He has a loud voice.他的声音很响亮
129My computer is so slow.我的电脑太慢了
130Adverbs describe everything else – verbs, adjectives, adverbs, and whole sentences.副词描述其他一切——动词,形容词,副词,以及整个句子.
131That sounds easy, right?这听起来很简单,对不对?
132So let's test your skills.所以,让我们测试你的技能。
133Look at four sentences.观四句.
134Is the word in red an adjective or an adverb?红色的词是形容词还是副词?
135It's unlikely that we'll be there on time.我们不可能准时赶到
136I found the exam really hard.我发现考试很困难
137I worked really hard preparing for the exam.我非常努力地准备考试
138He hardly studied at all, but he got a high score.他几乎没有学习,但他得到了很高的分数.
139What do you think?你觉得呢?
140Pause the video if you want more time to think about it.如果你想多考虑一下的话 暂停录像
141Hardly and hard are adjectives.很难和硬是形容词。
142Hard and hardly are adverbs.硬的和几乎没有副词。
143Did you get the right answers?你得到正确的答案了吗?
144There are two things to pay attention to here.这里有两个问题需要注意。
145One, the form of the word doesn't tell you if it's an adjective or an adverb.一,词的形式不告诉你是形容词还是副词.
146Unlikely ends in ly, but it's not an adverb, it's an adjective.不太可能以ly结尾,但它不是副词,而是形容词.
147Hard in the third sentence doesn't end in ly, but it's an adverb, which describes a verb.第三句中硬字不以ly结尾,而是一个副词,它描述了一个动词.
148Two, the same word can be an adjective or an adverb in different sentences, like hard,第二,同一个词可以是形容词,也可以是不同句子中的副词,如硬,
149which is an adjective in the second sentence, but an adverb in the third sentence.它在第二句中是一个形容词,但在第三句中是一个副词.
150So what can you do here?你在这里能做什么?
151You can't depend on memory.你不能依赖记忆。
152If you think something like, hard is an adjective, that won't work all the time.如果你觉得硬是形容词 那不会一直有效
153Don't look at the form of the word.别看字形.
154Look at what the word does in the sentence.观此语在句中作甚么.
155Does the word describe a noun?这个词描述的是名词吗?
156It's an adjective.谓之形容.
157Does it describe something else, a verb, an adjective, another adverb, or the whole sentence?是形容别的东西,动词,形容词,另一个副词,还是整个句子?
158It's an adverb.副词.
159Next, look at one more important question.接下来,看看另一个重要问题。
160How do you use adverbs in a sentence?在句子中如何使用副词?
161More specifically, where should you put the adverb?更具体地说,你应该把副词放在哪里?
162Let's start with a simple point.先简说.
163Word order rules for adverbs in English are complicated.英语副词的词令规则很复杂.
164There are many rules, and as usual, the rules don't work all of the time.规矩很多,照常,规矩不能始终有效.
165So, if you want to use an adverb and you're not sure where it should go in the sentence,所以,如果你想使用副词 而且你不确定 它应该在哪里 在句子,
166trust your instinct first.先相信你的直觉
167If it sounds right, it probably is.如果这听起来是正确的, 它可能是。
168If you want to understand word order rules in depth, you need to divide adverbs into如果你想深入理解词序规则,就需要将副词分为:
169five different categories.五个不同的类别。
170You already saw these categories in part one, although we didn't give them names.你已经看到这些类别在第一部分, 虽然我们没有给他们的名字。
171Let's review now.让我们现在回顾一下。
172Adverbs of manner describe a verb.方式的副词描述一种动词.
173They describe how someone does something.他们描述某人如何做事。
174For example, fast, lazily, or well.例如,快速,懒惰,或者良好.
175Adverbs of time and place describe where or when something happens.时间和地点的副词描述事物发生在何处或何时发生.
176For example, yesterday, here, or in five minutes.例如,昨天,在这里,或五分钟后。
177Adverbs of frequency describe how often something happens.频率的副词描述事物发生的频率.
178For example, often, sometimes, or never.例如,经常,有时,或永远。
179Adverbs of degree mostly add information to other adjectives or adverbs.学位的副词大多在其他形容词或副词中添加信息.
180For example, very, too, or a little.比如说,非常,或者有点。
181Comment adverbs describe a whole sentence or situation.注释副词描述整个句子或情况.
182For example, unfortunately, basically, or obviously.例如,很不幸,基本上,或者很明显。
183Here you have five categories of adverb.这里有五类副词
184Mostly, where you put the adverbs depends on the type of adverb it is.大部分情况下,将副词放在哪里取决于它是什么副词类型.
185So for example, comment adverbs follow different rules to adverbs of manner.举例来说,评论副词跟随不同的规则来形容方式的副词.
186Mostly, why mostly?主要是为什么?
187Of course there are exceptions.当然也有例外。
188Remember, trust your instinct when you can.记住,相信你的直觉 当你可以。
189Now let's look at how to use these different types of adverbs in an English sentence.现在让我们看看如何在英文句子中使用这些不同类型的副词.
190Adverbs of manner go after the verb or verb phrase which they describe.方式的副词在他们描述的动词或动词短语之后进行.
191For example, he drives slowly.例如,他开车慢。
192She sings well.她唱得不错
193Here, you have very simple examples, a verb followed by an adverb.这里,你们有非常简单的例子,一个动词后面是副词.
194Remember that adverbs of manner can also follow a verb phrase.记住,礼貌的副词也可以跟随动词短语.
195For example, she didn't handle the situation well.例如,她没有很好地处理这种情况。
196Adverbs of time and place usually go at the end of a sentence or phrase, like this.时间和地点的辅词通常在句子或短语的结尾,像这样.
197Let's leave in half an hour.我们半小时后离开
198Is there a bank nearby?附近有银行吗?
199If you have both, then adverbs of place go before adverbs of time.如果两者兼有,那么地方的副词在时间的副词之前进行.
200She was here ten minutes ago.她十分钟前就在这里了
201Adverbs of frequency usually go before the main verb.频率的辅词通常在主动词之前进行.
202For example, I usually get up early.例如,我通常早起。
203They hardly ever talk to each other.他们很少互相交谈
204There's one important exception here.这里有一个重要的例外。
205If the main verb is be, adverbs of frequency go after it.如果主动词是,频率的副动词会跟着它.
206He isn't often so talkative.他经常不说话
207Adverbs of degree go before the word they describe.学位的副词在他们描述的词之前进行.
208It's absolutely freezing in here.这里好冷
209She took the news very calmly.她很冷静地接受这个消息。
210Comment adverbs usually go at the beginning of the sentence.注释副词通常在句首.
211Basically, you've got two options.基本上你有两种选择
212Eventually, we had to admit that things weren't going how we expected.最终,我们不得不承认事情没有我们预期的那样发展.
213That's a lot of rules.这是很多规则。
214It's good to have an idea of the rules, or know where to find them in case you want要知道规则,或者知道在哪里找到规则,如果你想
215to look something up.来查查
216However, you don't need to carry all of these in your head all of the time.不过,你不用一直把这些东西都放在脑海里
217Remember that you can and should use your instinct.记住,你可以而且应该利用你的本能。
218Finally, here are two important points which you can carry in your head and which you should最后,这里有两个要点,你可以放在头上,你应该
219remember.记住
2201.一、导 言
221If the verb has two parts, most adverbs will go in the middle before the main verb.如果动词有两部分,大多数副词在主动词之前会进入中间.
222Try it.试试
223Look at five sentences and put the adverb in the right place.观五句而置副词于正处.
224Pause the video and start again when you think you have the answers.暂停录像,当你觉得自己有答案时再开始
225Ready?准备好了吗?
226Let's look at the answers.让我们来看看答案。
2271.一、导 言
228They didn't even tell us they'd be late.他们甚至没有告诉我们他们会迟到。
2292.2. 国家
230I've just spoken to her.我刚和她谈过
2313.3个
232He's quickly becoming one of our most valuable team members.他正迅速成为我们最宝贵的团队成员之一.
2334.4个
234I can probably do it by next Wednesday.我可能可以做到这一点 在下周三。
2355.5.五.
236She hasn't always been like that.她并不总是这样。
237Did you get them all right?你把它们都弄好了吗?
238This is a useful rule, and many of the mistakes that English learners make with adverb-word这是一个有用的规则, 和很多错误 英国学习者 用副词
239order are related to this rule, so remember it.命令与这个规则有关,所以记住它。
240We said before that there are two important points.我们以前说过,有两个要点。
241What's the second?何等为第二.
242There can be more than one possible position for an adverb.副词可以有一个以上可能的位置.
243For example,举例来说,
244He can be very moody sometimes.他有时会很情绪化
245Sometimes he can be very moody.有时他会很情绪化
246Both of these are possible.两者都有可能。
247The first is more common, but the second is also correct, and you might use this if you前者比较常见,但后者也是正确的,如果你
248want to emphasise the word sometimes.有时想强调这个词。
249So if you have two choices, and you aren't sure which is right, maybe they both are.所以如果你有两种选择,你不确定哪一种是正确的, 也许两者都是。
250Hopefully this lesson helped you understand English adverbs and how to use them.希望这个课能帮助你理解英语副词以及如何使用它们.
251Want more practice?还要练习吗?
252Check out the full version of this lesson on Oxford Online English dot com.在牛津在线英语点数com上查看这一课的完整版本.
253You can check your understanding of this lesson with a quiz.你可以用测验来检查你对这个课的理解.
254Thanks for watching!谢谢你的观看!
255See you next time!下次见!
该视频共有字幕 255 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P10 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p10 9. 9. English Grammar 09.How to Talk About the Past in English (P10)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Martin.嗨,我是马丁。
0:04Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
0:07In this lesson, you can learn how to talk about the past in English.在这个课中,你可以学习如何用英语谈论过去.
0:14Talking about the past includes many things.谈论过去包括很多事情。
0:17Do you want to talk about interesting experiences you've had, tell a funny story, or talk你想谈谈你所经历的有趣经历, 讲述一个有趣的故事, 或者说
0:22about something that you regret in the past?你过去后悔的事?
0:25In this lesson, you'll see the words, phrases, and structures you need to talk about the在这个课上,你会看到 词,短语和结构 你需要谈论
0:31past in clear, fluent English.以清清楚楚,流利的英语。
0:34Let's start by seeing how you can talk about your experiences in the past.让我们先看看你如何能谈论你过去的经历.
0:44Have you ever been bungee jumping?你跳过蹦极吗?
展开字幕全文（243 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Martin.嗨,我是马丁。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
3In this lesson, you can learn how to talk about the past in English.在这个课中,你可以学习如何用英语谈论过去.
4Talking about the past includes many things.谈论过去包括很多事情。
5Do you want to talk about interesting experiences you've had, tell a funny story, or talk你想谈谈你所经历的有趣经历, 讲述一个有趣的故事, 或者说
6about something that you regret in the past?你过去后悔的事?
7In this lesson, you'll see the words, phrases, and structures you need to talk about the在这个课上,你会看到 词,短语和结构 你需要谈论
8past in clear, fluent English.以清清楚楚,流利的英语。
9Let's start by seeing how you can talk about your experiences in the past.让我们先看看你如何能谈论你过去的经历.
10Have you ever been bungee jumping?你跳过蹦极吗?
11No, I haven't.没有
12I've been skydiving, though.我跳伞了,虽然。
13What about you?你怎么样?
14Have you ever done any extreme sports like that?你做过那种极端运动吗?
15I've tried windsurfing, although that was a long time ago.我尝试过风土人情 虽然那是很久以前的事了
16I think windsurfing definitely counts.我觉得风力冲锋绝对算数
17I've seen people doing it, and they were going at crazy speeds.我见过有人这样做, 他们正在疯狂的速度。
18I've never done anything like that myself.我从未做过这种事
19Skydiving听起来非常极端我。
20Where did you do it?你从哪弄来的?
21It was in Spain.当时在西班牙.
22I did a tandem jump.我跳过一跳
23It was fun, but I'm not sure I'd do it again.很有趣,但我不确定我会再次这样做。
24You probably know already that English has different past verb forms to talk about the你可能已经知道,英语有 不同的过去动词表 关于
25past in different ways.以不同的方式过去。
26However, you often need a present verb form to talk about the past.然而,你常常需要一种现在的动词表来谈论过去.
27You saw an example in the dialogue you just heard.你在刚才听到的对话中看到了一个例子。
28Use the present perfect to talk or ask about experiences in the past, but only if you don't使用现在的完美 谈论或询问过去的经验, 但前提是你不
29say a time.说一次
30For example, I've tried windsurfing.比如,我尝试过风力冲刺
31I've never been bungee jumping.我从来没有跳过蹦极
32Have you ever been skydiving?你跳伞过吗?
33Of course!当然
34You can change these to talk about different things, like this.你可以改变这些来谈论不同的事情,像这样。
35I've read the idiot.我读过那个白痴
36I've never drunk whiskey.我从没喝过威士忌
37Have you ever grown your own vegetables?你自种过蔬菜吗?
38However, as soon as you mention a time, you need to switch to a past tense.然而,一旦你提到一个时间,你需要切换到过去时态.
39For example, I went windsurfing three years ago.比如说,我三年前去野餐了
40I didn't drink a lot last year.我去年没喝太多
41Did you eat a lot of sushi when you were in Japan?在日本的时候吃了很多寿司吗?
42For this reason, when you're talking about life experiences, you often start with the为此,当你谈论生活经历时,你常常从
43present perfect, and then switch to the past tense when you mention a specific time.当您提到一个特定的时间时, 转换为过去的时态。
44For example, someone might ask you, have you ever been to Australia?例如,有人可能会问你, 你有没有去过澳大利亚?
45You might answer, yes, I went there two years ago for my friend's wedding.你可以回答,是的,我两年前去那儿参加我朋友的婚礼
46The question is in present perfect because it's asking about experiences without mentioning这个问题现在很完美,因为它问 的经验,没有提及
47a time.一个时间。
48The answer mentions a time, two years ago, and so you need the past simple.答案提到了两年前的一次, 所以你需要简单的过去。
49Next, let's see how you can talk about differences between the past and the present.接下来,让我们看看,你如何谈论过去和现在之间的差异。
50Wow!哗!
51You used to have a beard?你以前有胡子吗?
52You look so different!你看起来很不一样!
53Yeah, that was during my punk rock phase.是啊,那是在我的朋克摇滚阶段。
54Really?真的吗?
55Did you used to be in a band or something?你曾经在乐队什么的?
56Yes, but it wasn't anything big.是的,但没什么大不了的
57There were a few of us who were all mates, and we'd play in pubs or small clubs.我们有几个人都是朋友 我们会在酒吧或小俱乐部玩
58So what were you?那么,你是谁?
59Singer?歌手吗?
60Guitar?吉他吗?
61Drummer.钻.
62I used to play the drums.我以前打过鼓
63And now?现在呢?
64You don't play anymore?你不玩了吗?
65No, I gave up.不,我放弃了。
66In English, there are past structures which you can use to show a difference between the在英语中,有些过去的结构可以用来显示不同
67past and the present.过去和现在
68Can you remember any of these from the dialogue?你还记得对话中的这些吗?
69You can use used to to talk about something which was true in the past, but it isn't你可以习惯于谈论一些过去的事 但它不是
70true now.现在是真的了
71For example, He used to have a beard.例如,他曾经有胡子.
72He had a beard in the past, but he doesn't have one now.他过去有胡子,但现在没有胡子
73I used to live in Berlin.我曾经住在柏林
74I lived in Berlin in the past, but I don't live there now.过去我住在柏林 但我现在不住在那里
75You can also use the negative form, didn't used to, to talk about things that weren't你也可以用负面形式,不习惯, 来谈论一些不是的东西
76true in the past, but are true now.过去是真实的,但现在是真的。
77For example, They didn't used to get on so well.比如说,他们以前没这么好过
78They didn't get on in the past, but they do now.他们过去没有继续,但现在有了。
79I didn't used to wear glasses.我以前不戴眼镜的
80I wear glasses now, but I didn't in the past.我现在戴眼镜,但过去没有
81You can also make questions.你也可以提问
82Did you used to play a musical instrument?你以前玩过乐器吗?
83Didn't he used to work here?他以前不是在这里工作吗?
84You can also use would to talk about actions or habits, which you did in the past, but你也可以用来谈论你过去的行为或习惯,但
85you don't do now.你现在不这样做。
86For example, When we got home, Mum would make us beans on toast, and then we'd watch cartoons.比如,我们回家后,妈妈会给我们做土司豆子,然后我们看卡通片。
87There was this bakery near the office where I would go every lunchtime to get a sandwich办公室附近有个面包店 我每次都去吃三明治
88and to chat to other regulars.并与其他常客聊天。
89Finally, you can also use a present verb, plus, anymore.最后,你也可以使用现在的动词, 加上,现在。
90This is a similar meaning to used to.这和以前一样
91Let's look.让我们看看。
92She doesn't live here anymore.她不住在这里了。
93She lived here in the past, but she doesn't live here now.她以前住过这里 但她现在不住在这里
94I don't have time to listen to music anymore.我没时间听音乐了
95I had time in the past, but now I don't.我过去有时间 但现在没有了
96What about you?你怎么样?
97How is your life different now?你现在的生活有什么不同?
98Let's practise.让我们练习。
99Pause the video and make three sentences about how your life is different to the past.暂停录影带,就你的生活如何与过去不同作出三句.
100Try to use all of the language from this section, used to, would and anymore.尝试使用本节的所有语言, 习惯,会和现在。
101You can say your sentences out loud or write them down.你可以大声说出来 或者写下来
102Pause the video and do it now.暂停录像,现在就做
103In the next two sections, you're going to use useful language for telling a story.在接下来的两节中,你会使用有用的语言来讲述一个故事.
104Oh, have I told you what happened to us on our trip?哦,我告诉过你 我们旅行时发生了什么吗?
105No, what happened?不,发生了什么事?
106It's a really crazy story.这是一个非常疯狂的故事。
107So, we were sitting on the bus, ready to leave.我们坐在巴士上 准备离开
108Where were you going?你们要去哪?
109Sophia.索菲亚
110Anyway, the weather was awful.无论如何,天气很糟糕。
111It was raining so hard you couldn't even see out the window, and…雨下得那么大,你连窗外都看不见,然后...
112Who were you travelling with?你和谁一起旅行?
113With my wife.与吾妇.
114We were planning to visit some old friends who…我们打算拜访一些老朋友 他们...
115Where was the bus leaving from?公交车从哪里走?
116From Athens.从雅典来.
117Look, can I tell my story or not?听着,我可以讲我的故事吗?
118Oh, sorry.对不起
119When you tell a story, you need to set the scene.当你说出一个故事, 你需要设置场景。
120What does set the scene mean?场景是什么?
121It means you need to describe the background of the story.这意味着你需要描述故事的背景.
122What was happening at the start of the story?故事开始时发生了什么?
123Who was there, and what were the people in your story doing at the start?你故事里的人一开始是做什么的?
124To give background to a story, you use the past continuous.为了给一个故事提供背景,你使用过去的连续.
125For example, we were sitting on the bus, ready to leave.例如,我们坐在巴士上,准备离开。
126It was raining so hard you couldn't even see out of the window.雨下得那么大,你连窗外都看不到
127If you're telling a story from your own life, you'll often start with one or two如果你从自己的生活中讲一个故事, 你会经常从一两个开始
128sentences in the past continuous to set a scene.在过去的句子中连续设置一个场景。
129You might say…你可以说...
130I was living in a small apartment at the time.当时我住在一间小公寓里
131I was driving home after work.我下班后开车回家
132This isn't just useful when you're telling long stories.这不只是在讲长篇小说时有用。
133You can use this any time you're giving a slightly longer answer about the past.你可以随时用这个来回答过去的事
134For example, in a job interview or an IELTS exam.例如,在工作面试或IELTS考试中.
135However, if you do want to tell a longer story, there are some other things you'll need但是,如果你真的想说一个更长的故事, 你还需要一些其他的东西
136to know.来知道。
137Did I tell you about my driving test?我跟你说过我的驾驶考试吗?
138No.没有
139What happened?发生了什么事?
140I passed.我通过了
141You know, I took it last week and I hadn't taken any lessons, not one.你知道,我上周拿了它 我没有上任何课程,没有。
142No way!没门!
143But you must have practised, at least.但你至少应该练习过
144No, and I had only driven a car twice in my life.不,我这辈子只开过两次车
145How on earth did you pass?你怎么通过?
146It was rush hour.是高峰时间
147We drove out of the test centre, and then we sat in a traffic jam.我们开车离开测试中心, 然后我们坐在一个交通堵塞。
148All the streets were totally stuck.所有的街道都完全卡住了。
149I made three left turns, and finally we arrived back at the test centre.我左转三个弯 最后我们回到测试中心
150I just drove around the block once.我刚刚开车绕过街区一次。
151And that counts as a pass?这算什么?
152Hey, I didn't make any mistakes!嘿,我没有犯任何错误!
153So, what happened next?接下来呢?
154Did you drive home?你开车回家吗?
155Well…这个...
156What happened?发生了什么事?
157I tried, and I had a very small accident.我试过了 出了个小意外
158I mean, I don't think it even counts as an accident.我觉得这不算是意外
159Maybe you should take some driving lessons.也许你应该去学开车
160Very funny.很有趣,你觉得呢?
161When you start a story, you usually say when these things took place.当你开始一个故事的时候,你通常会说这些事情发生的时间.
162You'll say something like…你会说一些类似...
163Last week.上礼拜.
164This happened two years ago, in summer.这发生在两年前,夏天。
165So, yesterday, I was walking down the street.昨天我在街上走着
166This time reference fixes the time when your story starts.此时间参考可以修正您的故事开始时间 。
167What does this mean?这是什么意思?
168Well, think about the story you heard in the dialogue.想想你在对话中听到的故事
169The time reference was last week.时间参考是上周。
170During the story, I talked about things that happened before the start of the story, even在故事期间,我谈到了 发生在故事开始之前的事情,甚至
171further in the past.更在过去。
172I also talked about the things that happened in the story, meaning they happened after我也谈到了故事中发生的事情,意思是它们发生在之后
173the start of the story.故事的开始。
174Do you know how to talk about these two different ideas?你知道怎么讨论这两个不同的主意吗?
175Do you remember from the dialogue?你还记得对话吗?
176To talk about things that happened before the start of the story, use the past perfect说说故事开始前发生的事 用过去的完美
177– had done.- 已经做了。
178For example, I hadn't taken any driving lessons.例如,我没有上任何驾驶课程。
179I had only driven a car twice in my life.我这辈子只开过两次车
180The story was about taking a driving test.故事是关于驾驶考试.
181You need to use the past perfect to talk about things that had happened before the start你需要利用过去完美地谈起开始前发生的事情
182of the story.故事的情节。
183Let's see another example.再举个例子
184When I was twenty-five, I quit my job and decided to train as a pilot.25岁时辞去工作,决定接受飞行员培训.
185I had always wanted to learn to fly.我一直想学会飞行
186Here, you have a time reference, which fixes the start of the story.在这里,你有一个时间参考, 它决定了故事的开始。
187Then, you use the past perfect to talk about things which happened before that time, further然后,你利用过去 完美地谈论 之前发生的事情,进一步
188in the past.过去
189If you're talking about the events of your story, just use the past simple like this.如果你在谈论你的故事中的事件, 就用过去这样简单。
190We drove out of the test center.我们开车离开测试中心
191We sat in a traffic jam for ages.我们坐车堵了好几年
192I had a small accident on the way home.我回家路上出了点小意外
193Using these verb tenses, you can make it clear when things happened in the past, and whether使用这些动词时,可以明确过去发生的事情,以及是否
194something happened before or after something else.在别的事情发生之前或之后
195Do you have a funny story you'd like to share?你想分享一个有趣的故事吗?
196Let us know in the comments.在评论中告诉我们。
197Let's look at one more topic.让我们再看看一个话题。
198Do you speak any other languages?你会说其他语言吗?
199Not really.没有
200I used to speak Spanish, but I haven't used it for years.我曾经说西班牙语,但多年来没有使用过.
201I wish I'd started learning other languages when I was younger.我希望我年轻时开始学习其他语言.
202So much easier if you start earlier.早点开始就容易多了
203Yeah, I know what you mean.对,我知道你的意思
204If only I'd kept my Spanish going.如果我能继续说西班牙语就好了
205Why don't you pick it up again?何不再捡.
206It'd come back.会回来的
207Maybe.也许
208You know what, though?你知道吗?
209I wish I'd spent some time in Latin America when I had the chance.我希望我有机会在拉丁美洲呆过一段时间
210I could have lived there for a year or two, and my Spanish would have gotten really good.我本可以在那里住上一两年, 我的西班牙语会变得非常好。
211Well, you could still do it, right?好吧,你仍然可以做到这一点,对不对?
212In the dialogue, you saw three different forms you can use to talk about regrets in the past.在对话中,你看到了三种不同的形式,可以用来谈论过去发生的遗憾.
213Do you remember them?你记得他们吗?
214First, you can use wish plus the past perfect to talk about something you regret.首先,你可以用许愿加上过去的完美来谈论你后悔的事情.
215For example, I wish I'd learned other languages when I was younger.例如,我希望我年轻时能学其他语言.
216I wish I hadn't said that.我真希望我没这么说
217Remember that here, you're talking about the opposite of what really happened.记住,你说的是 与真实发生的情况相反。
218If you say, I wish I hadn't said that, you did something in reality, and now you如果你说,我希望我没有说, 你做了什么在现实中,现在你
219regret it.悔过悔过.
220You can also use if only plus the past perfect like this.你也可以使用,如果 加上过去的完美像这样。
221If only I'd kept my Spanish going.如果我能继续说西班牙语就好了
222If only I hadn't wasted so much time.如果我没有浪费这么多时间的话
223The meaning is very similar to wish.其意义与愿望非常相似.
224You did something, or you didn't do something in the past, and now you regret it.你做了一些事情, 或者你过去没有做一些事情, 现在你后悔了。
225Finally, you can sometimes use could have to express regrets in the past, often as part最后,你有时可以使用 过去不得不表达遗憾, 经常作为一部分
226of a longer if sentence.如果刑期更长的话。
227For example, I could have tried harder.举例来说,我本可以更努力的
228If I hadn't left things to the last minute, I could have passed easily.如果我没有把事情留到最后一刻, 我可能很容易通过。
229Let's do one more practice.我们再练习一次
230Think of three regrets that you have.想想你有3个遗憾
231Make three sentences using the language from this section.以本节语言作三句.
232Try to use all three forms – wish, if only, and could have.尝试使用所有三种形式 — — 如果只有愿望,并且可以。
233Pause the video and make your sentences now.暂停录影,现在做你的句子。
234You can say them aloud or write them down.你可以大声说或者写下来
235Done?说完了吗?
236Great!不错!
237Now you've learned many different ways to talk about the past in English.现在,你学到了许多不同的方式,用英语谈论过去.
238Which English past form do you find the most difficult to use?您认为哪一种英文过去的形式最难使用?
239Let us know in the comments, and maybe you'll get some useful tips!在评论中告诉我们,也许你会得到一些有用的提示!
240Remember to check out our website to see more free English lessons – Oxford Online English请记住查看我们的网站,
241点com。
242Thanks for watching!谢谢你的观看!
243See you next time!下次见!
该视频共有字幕 243 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P11 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p11 10. 10. English Grammar 10.English Modal Verbs - May, Might, Could, Can (P11)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Mikey, and welcome to Oxford Online English.嗨,我是迈克 欢迎来到牛津在线英语频道
0:05In this lesson, you can learn how to use the English modal verbs may, might, can and could.在这个课中,你可以学习如何使用英语模式动词可能,可能,能够和可以.
0:13You'll learn how to use these modal verbs to talk about possibilities in English.你会学会如何使用这些模式动词来用英语谈论各种可能性.
0:18Modal verbs are powerful, because you can use them to express many different ideas andModal动词很有力,因为可以用它来表达许多不同的想法和
0:24complex nuances of meaning.含义的复杂细微差别。
0:26However, they're also difficult to use well.然而,它们也很难很好地使用.
0:30Each modal verb can be used in many different ways.每种模式动词都可以以多种不同的方式使用.
0:37You can use might, could or may to say that something is possible in the present or in你可以使用 可能或可能 说一些东西是可能的 在现在或
0:43the future.未来
0:45For example,举例来说,
展开字幕全文（208 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Mikey, and welcome to Oxford Online English.嗨,我是迈克 欢迎来到牛津在线英语频道
2In this lesson, you can learn how to use the English modal verbs may, might, can and could.在这个课中,你可以学习如何使用英语模式动词可能,可能,能够和可以.
3You'll learn how to use these modal verbs to talk about possibilities in English.你会学会如何使用这些模式动词来用英语谈论各种可能性.
4Modal verbs are powerful, because you can use them to express many different ideas andModal动词很有力,因为可以用它来表达许多不同的想法和
5complex nuances of meaning.含义的复杂细微差别。
6However, they're also difficult to use well.然而,它们也很难很好地使用.
7Each modal verb can be used in many different ways.每种模式动词都可以以多种不同的方式使用.
8You can use might, could or may to say that something is possible in the present or in你可以使用 可能或可能 说一些东西是可能的 在现在或
9the future.未来
10For example,举例来说,
11They could be brothers, they look so alike.他们可能是兄弟 他们长得真像
12I think it's possible that they're brothers.我觉得他们可能是兄弟
13There are my keys.这是我的钥匙
14They might still be in the car.他们可能还在车里
15I think it's possible that your keys are still in the car.可能你的钥匙还在车里
16It's raining here, but it may be sunny there.这里下雨了 但那里可能很晴朗
17I think it's possible that it's sunny there.我觉得那里很阳光
18These sentences are all about the present.这些句子都是关于现在的.
19There's no difference between could, might and may here.这里可以,可以和可以没有区别
20You can use any of these modal verbs in any of these sentences.您可以在这些句子中使用其中任何一种模式动词.
21It doesn't matter.没关系
22Could and might are more common than may, but you can choose which modal verb you use.可能和可能比可能更常见,但您可以选择您使用的哪一种动词。
23Be careful with may be two words and maybe one word.要小心,也许有两个词,也许一个词。
24May be two words is a modal verb plus the verb be.可能有两个词是模式动词加上动词.
25One word is an adverb.一个词是副词。
26They aren't the same.他们不一样
27You can also talk about possibilities in the future.你也可以谈论未来的可能性。
28It could cost more than you expect.它可能花费比你预期的还要多。
29I think it's possible that it will cost more than you expect.我认为它可能花费 比你预期的更多。
30You might miss the train unless you leave now.你可能会错过火车 除非你现在离开。
31I think it's possible that you'll miss the train if you don't leave now.我认为如果你现在不离开,你可能会错过火车.
32I may be around five minutes late.我大概要迟到五分钟
33I think it's possible that I'll be a little late.我觉得我可能会迟到
34It doesn't matter if you're talking about the present or the future.说现在或未来无碍.
35You can use these modal verbs in the same way.可以同样的方式使用这些模式动词.
36People will understand if you're talking about the present or the future from the context.人们会理解,如果你从上下文来谈论现在或未来.
37For example, She might be there already.例如,她可能已经在那里了。
38She might be there tomorrow.她明天可能会去
39Here, the first sentence is about the present and the second is about the future.在这里,第一句是关于现在的,第二句是关于未来的.
40You can understand this from the meaning, not from the modal verb.您可以从意义中理解这一点,而不是从模式动词中理解.
41You can also make negatives by adding not after the modal verb.也可以通过在模式动词之后不添加来做负数.
42Use negatives to say you think it's possible that something is not true用底片来表示你认为 事情可能不是真的
43or that something will not happen in the present or the future.或者说现在和将来都不会发生什么
44In this case, you can only use may or might.在这种情况下,你只能使用或可能使用。
45You can't use could to talk about negative possibilities.你不能用来谈论负面的可能性。
46For example, They might not be ready.例如,它们可能还没有准备好。
47I think it's possible that they aren't ready.我想他们可能还没准备好
48This could be in the present or in the future.这可能是在目前或将来。
49You can't tell just from this sentence.从此句中无法分辨.
50He may not be able to help you.他可能帮不了你
51I think it's possible that he won't be able to help you.我觉得他可能帮不了你
52There's no difference between using may or might here.这里使用可能和可能没有区别.
53But remember that there's no way to use could in these sentences.但记住,在这些句子中不可能使用.
54What about can?那罐头呢?
55We haven't mentioned can until now because can behaves differently.我们直到现在才提到可以,因为可以改变行为。
56Let's see how.让我们看看如何。
57Look at an example that you just saw.看看你刚刚看到的一个例子。
58She might be there tomorrow.她明天可能会去
59This is a specific possibility.这是一个特殊的可能性。
60You're talking about one person, one place, and one time.你在说一个人,一个地方,一个时间
61Let's add some more details to make it easier to see this.让我们补充一些细节,让大家更容易看到这一点.
62Sarah might be at the party tomorrow.莎拉可能在明天的派对。
63You can use might, may, or could to express specific possibilities.你可以使用、可能或能够表达具体的可能性。
64You use can to express general possibilities.你可以用来表达一般的可能性。
65You've seen what a specific possibility is.你已经看到了什么是特定的可能性。
66What does general possibility mean?一般可能性意味着什么?
67Can you explain it?你能解释一下吗?
68A general possibility is something which is true for many people in many places at many times.在许多时候,对许多地方的许多人来说,普遍的可能性是真实的。
69For example, it can take two hours to get to the airport if the traffic's bad.例如,如果交通不便,需要两个小时才能到达机场.
70This possibility doesn't apply to one person at one time.这种可能性一次不适用于一个人.
71It applies to anyone who tries to get to the airport when the traffic's bad.适用于交通不便时试图到达机场的任何人.
72Let's look at some more examples.让我们看看更多的例子。
73It can be very wet and cold in spring here.这里春季会很湿冷
74This is possible every year, not just in one year.每年都有可能,而不仅仅是一年。
75He can be very difficult to deal with when he's in a bad mood.心情不好时,他可能很难应付.
76This is possible every time he's in a bad mood, not just one time.每次他心情不好都有可能 不止一次
77Moving countries can be a stressful experience.流动国家可能是一种压力大的经历。
78It's possible that moving countries is stressful迁移的国家可能压力很大
79whoever you are, wherever you move to, and whenever you do it.无论你是谁,无论你搬到哪里,无论你何时这样做。
80If you're talking about general possibilities, you can only use can.如果你在谈论一般的可能性,你只能使用能力.
81You can't use could, might, or may.你无法使用 可能 也可能
82General possibilities refer to both the present and the future together.一般可能性既指现在,又指未来。
83For example, if you say,比如,如果你说,
84it can be very wet and cold in spring here,春天会很潮湿很冷
85you mean that this is possible this year in the present你是说今年有可能
86and next year in the future, and the year after that, and so on.及明年将来,后年之类.
87Also, general possibilities are only positive.而且,一般的可能性只是积极的。
88There's no such thing as a negative general possibility.负面一般的可能性是不存在的.
89Let's practice.让我们练习。
90Look at four sentences.观四句.
91For each one, decide if it expresses a general possibility or a specific possibility.对每一个国家,决定它是否表示一般可能性或具体可能性。
92Which modal verbs could you use in each case?在每种情况下,可以使用哪种模式动词?
93Pause the video and think about your answers.暂停录像 想想你的答案
94If it's difficult, review this part and the previous part of the video.如果有困难,请审查这部分和视频的前部分.
95Ready? Let's look at the answers.准备好了吗? 让我们来看看答案。
96In the first sentence, the word tomorrow makes it specific.第一句中明日字令其具体.
97Tomorrow is one day.明日为一日.
98That means you can use could, might, or may in this sentence.也就是说,你可以使用, 可能,或可能在本句。
99In the second sentence, in July in the south is a general idea.第二句中七月南方为总意.
100You're talking about one place, but you're also talking about every year, so you should use can.你讲的是一个地方,但你每年也讲一个地方,所以你应该利用这个地方.
101In the third sentence, you're talking about a general tendency which she has.在第三句中,你说的是她总的趋势。
102She can get angry any time when people don't listen to her, not just one time.当人们不听她的话 她随时会生气 不止一次
103So, you need to use can.所以,你需要使用罐头。
104You need to use can.你需要使用罐头。
105The fourth sentence is talking about one reaction to one thing.第四句是说对一件事的反应。
106The words when she finds out refer to one piece of news,当她发现一个消息时
107which she will find out at a specific time in the future.将来她会在某个特定时间发现
108So, you need to use could, might, or may.所以,你需要使用 可能,或者,也许。
109Now you've seen how to use might, may, could, and can现在你已经看到了如何使用 可能,可以,并且能够
110to talk about possibility in the present or the future.谈论现在或未来的可能性。
111But what about the past?那过去呢?
112Let's start with some examples.先举一些例子。
113Look at three sentences and try to work out how to talk about possibilities in the past.观三句试问如何是过去说诸可能性.
114Where is he?他现在在哪?
115I guess he might have missed the train.我想他可能错过了火车
116I don't know where the tickets are.我不知道门票在哪
117I may have left them in the hotel.我可能把它们留在旅馆了
118What was that noise?那是什么声音?
119I suppose it could have been the wind.我想可能是风
120To talk about possibilities in the past, use could, might, or may,过去谈论各种可能性时,使用可能、可能或可能,
121plus have, plus a past participle.加上过去的一个派对
122Again, it doesn't matter if you use could, may, or might here.再说一遍,如果用得上,可以,也可以在这里
123There's no difference in meaning.义无分别.
124You can't use can in these sentences.你不能用罐子在这些句子。
125There's no way to use can to express possibility in the past.过去不可能用它来表达可能性
126What do these sentences mean?这些句子是什么意思?
127Can you explain what they're saying, in other words?你能解释一下他们在说什么吗?
128First sentence means that you think it's possible that he missed the train.第一句意味着你认为他可能错过了火车.
129You're waiting for him.你在等他吗?
130You don't know where he is or why he's late.你不知道他在哪里 也不知道他为什么迟到了
131In the second sentence, you're saying that it's possible that the tickets are in the hotel.在第二句中,你说门票有可能在酒店里.
132You don't know where the tickets are.你不知道门票在哪
133In the third sentence, you heard a noise and you aren't sure what it was.在第三句中,你听到一个声音,你不知道是什么。
134You're saying that it's possible that it was the wind.你说可能是风
135You can also talk about negative possibilities in the past, like this.你也可以谈论 负面的可能性 在过去,像这样。
136He might not have heard you.他可能没听见你说话
137It's possible that he didn't hear you.他可能没听见你说话
138Their plane may not have arrived yet.他们的飞机可能还没到
139It's possible that their plane hasn't arrived yet.他们的飞机可能还没到
140As before, you can only use may or might to talk about negative possibilities.和以前一样,你只能利用或可能谈论消极的可能性。
141You can't use could in these sentences.你不能用这些句子。
142There's another way in which could behaves differently.还有另一种方式可以改变行为
143Let's look.让我们看看。
144All the examples you saw in the last section, positive and negative,你上一节所看到的 所有正面和负面的例子
145you're talking about situations where you don't know what happened in the past.你指的是你不知道过去发生的事
146For example, if you say,比如,如果你说,
147Their plane may not have arrived yet.他们的飞机可能还没到
148You don't know if their plane has arrived or not.你不知道他们的飞机是否抵达
149You aren't sure.你还没确定呢
150What about this sentence?这句话呢?
151You could have hurt yourself.你可能会伤到自己
152Be more careful next time.下次小心点
153This example is different.这个例子不同。
154Can you see how?你看得到吗?
155If you don't know, here's a clue.如果你不知道,这里有一个线索。
156In this sentence, do you know what happened or not?今句中,知其事否?
157Did the person you're talking to hurt themselves?你说的那个人伤了自己吗?
158Or not?还是不行?
159In this sentence, you know what happened.于此句中知诸法.
160The person didn't hurt themselves.这个人没有伤害自己
161You're saying that getting hurt was a possibility,你是说受伤是可能的
162but luckily, it didn't happen.但幸运的是,它没有发生。
163So, there are two kinds of possibility in the past.因此,过去有两种可能性.
164One, you don't know what happened and you're making a guess.一,你不知道发生了什么,你在猜测。
165Two, you know what happened and you're talking about a possibility which didn't occur.第二,你知道发生了什么, 你在谈论一个没有发生的可能性。
166In the first case, you can use any of the three verbs may, might, or could.在第一种情况下,可以使用三种动词中的任何一种可能,可能,或者可以.
167In the second case, you can only use could.在第二种情况下,你只能使用。
168You often need this when you're talking about something bad which didn't happen.你经常需要这个 当你谈论一些不好的事情,没有发生。
169Let's see some more examples of this second case.我们再看看第二个案子的更多例子
170They were very unlucky.他们非常不幸。
171They could easily have won.他们可能很容易就赢了。
172They didn't win, but it was close, so winning was a possibility.他们虽然没有赢,但已经很接近了,所以赢是可能的.
173She could have lost all of her money when the company went under.当公司倒闭时 她可能失去所有的钱
174She didn't lose all of her money, but it was a possibility.她没有失去所有的钱,但这是可能的。
175Of course, being in an accident was scary, but it could have been much worse.当然,在事故中是可怕的,但它可能更糟糕。
176The accident wasn't serious, but worse results were a possibility.事故并不严重,但结果更糟糕是有可能的.
177In all of these sentences, you know what happened in the past在所有这些句子中,你知道过去发生了什么
178and you're talking about a past possibility which didn't actually happen.你说的是一个过去的可能性 其实没有发生。
179Now, you've seen how to use the modal verbs might, may, can, and could to talk about现在,你已经看到如何使用 模式动词可能,可能,能够,并且可以谈论
180possibilities in English.可能使用英语。
181Let's put everything you've learned together.把你们学到的一切都放在一起
182Might, could, or may can be used to talk about specific possibilities in the present or the可能、可能或可能被用来讨论目前或今后可能出现的具体可能性。
183future.未来
184Take a jumper.取一跃者.
185It might be cold outside.外面也许很冷
186It could be a good game tomorrow.明天可能会是一场好比赛
187You can use can to talk about general possibilities.你可以用来谈论一般的可能性。
188Using a credit card can be an expensive way to buy things.使用信用卡可能是一种昂贵的购买方式.
189You can use could, may, or might plus have plus a past participle to talk about你可以使用,可能,或可能 加上一个过去的聚会 谈论
190possibilities in the past.过去的可能性。
191They may have got lost.他们可能迷路了
192I'll call them and find out where they are.我会打电话给他们 找出他们在哪里。
193You can use may or might to talk about negative possibilities, meaning there's a你可以使用或可能 谈论负面的可能性, 这意味着有一个
194possibility that something won't happen or didn't happen.可能不会发生什么或者没有发生什么
195It might work, but it might not.可能有用,但也许不行。
196He may not have seen the message yet.他可能还没有看到消息
197Finally, you can use could to talk about two kinds of possibilities in the past.最后,你可以用来谈论 过去两种可能性。
198Situations where you know what happened and situations where you don't know what发生什么了 发生什么了
199happened.发生了
200You could have missed the plane.你可能错过了飞机
201Don't be late next time.下次别迟到
202I'm not sure why he isn't here.我不知道他为什么没来
203I guess he could have missed the plane.我猜他可能错过了飞机
204Do you need practice with this topic?你需要练习这个话题吗?
205Visit Oxford Online English dot com for the full lesson, including a quiz to help you访问 Oxford Online 英文点数 com 完整课程,包括一个问答来帮助你
206check your understanding of English modal verbs.检查您对英语模式动词的理解。
207Thanks for watching.谢谢你的观看。
208See you next time.下次见
该视频共有字幕 209 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P12 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p12 11. 11. English Grammar 11.Present Simple Verb Form in English - English Verb Te (P12)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hello, I'm Oli.你好,我是奥利。
0:03Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
0:06In this lesson, you can learn about the present simple verb tense in English.在这个课中,你可以学习英语中目前简单的动词紧张.
0:11How many ways do you know to use the present simple?你知道多少种方法使用现在的简单?
0:15The present simple doesn't just have one or two uses.目前的简单不只是有一两个用途.
0:19There are at least eight common uses, and many more special cases.至少有8种常见的用途,还有许多特殊的情况.
0:25In this lesson, you can learn all about the present simple tense.在这个课中,你可以学习所有关于目前简单的紧张状态.
0:29Beginners can learn simple ways to use this verb form, and more advanced students can初学者可以学习使用这种动词形式的简单方法,更高级的学生可以
0:35learn about more complex uses of the present simple.了解目前简单的更复杂的用途。
0:38Ready?准备好了吗?
展开字幕全文（212 条）
序号英文中文
1Hello, I'm Oli.你好,我是奥利。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
3In this lesson, you can learn about the present simple verb tense in English.在这个课中,你可以学习英语中目前简单的动词紧张.
4How many ways do you know to use the present simple?你知道多少种方法使用现在的简单?
5The present simple doesn't just have one or two uses.目前的简单不只是有一两个用途.
6There are at least eight common uses, and many more special cases.至少有8种常见的用途,还有许多特殊的情况.
7In this lesson, you can learn all about the present simple tense.在这个课中,你可以学习所有关于目前简单的紧张状态.
8Beginners can learn simple ways to use this verb form, and more advanced students can初学者可以学习使用这种动词形式的简单方法,更高级的学生可以
9learn about more complex uses of the present simple.了解目前简单的更复杂的用途。
10Ready?准备好了吗?
11OK, let's start.好了,开始吧
12First question.初问.
13How can you form the present simple?如何形成现在的简单?
14To use the present simple, you need to remember three things.要使用现在的简单,需要记住三件事.
15First, add an S or ES to the verb in the third-person singular, for example after he, she or it.首先,在第三人称单数的动词中加入一个S或ES,比如在他,她或它之后.
16Make negatives using don't or doesn't.使用不使用或不使用阴性.
17You use doesn't again for the third-person singular, he, she or it.你不会再用第三人称单数了 他 她或者他
18You make questions with do or does.你总是问问题
19For example, I visit them once a week.例如,我每周拜访他们一次。
20She visits them once a week.她每周去看他们一次
21We add an S to the verb after he, she, it.在他,她,它之后,我们在动词中加上一个S.
22I have a lot of things to do.我还有很多事情要做
23I don't have a lot of things to do.无量众生.
24We make negatives with don't.我们用不着做底片
25I don't have much time.我时间不多了
26He doesn't have much time.他时间不多了
27We make negatives with doesn't after he, she or it.我们做底片时没有追他,她或它。
28You have a big family.你有一个大家庭。
29Do you have a big family?你有大家庭吗?
30We make questions with do.我们做问题。
31Do you live in this building?你住在这栋楼里吗?
32Does she live in this building?她住在这里吗?
33For the third person, we make questions with does.对于第三人来说,我们提出问题与做。
34You can see that when we use does or doesn't, we don't add S to the verb.你可以看到,当我们使用或不使用时,我们不会在动词中加入S.
35OK, that shows you how to form the present simple, but how can you use it?好吧,这说明你如何 形成现在的简单, 但你如何使用它?
36Let's look at the different ways you can use this verb form.让我们来看看你可以用这种动词形式的不同方式.
37Part two, talking about a regular action.第二部分,谈论常规行动.
38This is one of the most common uses of the present simple.这是目前简单的最常用的用途之一.
39Let's just look at some examples.让我们看看一些例子。
40She calls her parents every week.她每周给父母打电话
41I don't often go to the gym.我经常不去健身房
42Or Do you always eat so quickly?还是你总是吃这么快?
43In all of these sentences, we're talking about actions which happen or don't happen在所有这些句子中,我们指的是发生或不发生的行动
44regularly.经常
45These actions are not happening at this moment.这些行动目前没有发生。
46This is a simple use of the present simple, which you may be new already.这是一个简单的使用 目前的简单, 你可能已经是新的。
47But we've only just started.但我们才刚刚开始
48How else can you use the present simple?不然怎么用现在的简单?
49Do you know any other ways?你知道其他方法吗?
50Let's look, part three, talking about general truths.让我们来看看,第三部分,谈论一般的真理。
51If you want to talk about something which is generally true, you will also need the如果你想谈一些一般都真实的事情,你还需要
52present simple.现在很简单。
53For example, the moon goes around the earth.如月绕地.
54The Nile is the longest river in the world.尼罗河是世界上最长的河流.
55Or Elephants live for 60 or 70 years on average.或大象平均寿命为60年或70年.
56These things are generally true, because they aren't just true at one moment.这些事情一般都是真实的,因为它们在某一刻不仅仅是真实的.
57They were true a hundred years ago, they're true today, and they'll be true a hundred一百年前是真实的 今天是真实的 一百年后是真实的
58years in the future.未来的日子
59Compare this to the previous idea, talking about regular actions.与之前的想法相比,谈的是常规行动.
60In both cases, we use the present simple to talk about something which is true not just在这两种情况下,我们用现在的简单 来谈论一些是真实的
61at this moment, but also in the future and the past.此时此刻, 也在未来和过去。
62This idea is an important part of the meaning of the present simple.这个想法是目前简单意义的重要组成部分.
63We'll see it again.师复见之.
64Part four, talking about states and situations.第四部分 谈论国家与情况.
65Throwing is an action.投球是一种动作。
66It's something which can be happening at one moment.这是可以发生的时刻。
67A question, are all verbs actions?一个问题,所有动词都行动了吗?
68Think about a verb like seem.想想一个动词看起来像。
69Is seeming an action?看起来像是行动吗?
70Can you say, you're seeming very quiet today?你今天看起来很安静吗?
71No and no.没有,也没有。
72Verbs like seem describe states, not actions.动词似乎描述的是状态而不是行动。
73We use the present simple to talk about all states in the present.我们用现在的简单来谈论现在的所有国家。
74For example, You seem a bit quiet today.比如,你今天看起来有点安静。
75He has a lot of experience in his subject.他的课题经验丰富.
76Or Why does this one cost more than the others?或者为什么这个比其他更贵?
77Many verbs which describe states like seem or cost can only be used in simple tenses.许多形容状态的动词,如表态或成本,只能用在简单的时态中.
78They don't exist in continuous tenses.它们在持续的紧张状态中并不存在.
79Again, you can see the same idea of something which is true not just now, at this moment,再说一遍,你可以看到同样的想法 某件事是真实的,不是现在,
80but also in the future and the past.未来和过去
81If you say, he has a lot of experience in his subject, that means that he had a lot如果你说,他有很多 经验在他的课题, 这意味着他有很多
82of experience last week and he'll have a lot of experience next week too.上周的经历 他下周也会有很多经验
83It's not just about this moment.这不仅仅是这个时刻。
84Using the present simple with verbs of sensing, feeling, thinking, or speaking.使用目前简单的动词来表达感知,感受,思考,或说话.
85With many verbs of sensing, like hear, see, or smell, feeling, like like, love, or hate,有多种感应动词,如听,见,或闻,或觉,如爱,或恨,
86thinking, like know, realise, or remember, or speaking, like promise, admit, or advise,想着,比如知道,意识到, 或记住,或说话, 像承诺,承认,或建议,
87we use the present simple.我们用现在的简单。
88This is because many of these verbs describe states, and the present simple is used to这是因为许多这些动词都描述了状态,现在的简单用来
89talk about states, as we talked about just now.谈论国家,就像我们刚才谈到的那样。
90Let's look at some more examples.让我们看看更多的例子。
91This cheese smells a bit strange.这奶酪闻起来有点奇怪
92I don't like going shopping.我不喜欢去购物
93Do you realise what you're doing?你知道你在做什么吗?
94I promise it won't happen again.我保证不会再发生这种事了
95In all of these sentences, only the present simple is possible.在所有这些句子中,只有现在的简单是可能的.
96You can't say, are you realising what you're doing, or I'm promising it won't happen again.你不能说,你是否实现了你在做什么, 或者我保证它不会再发生。
97Part 6, talking about long-lasting situations.第6部分,谈论长期的情况。
98If you say, she lives with her friend, or she's living with her friend.如果你说,她和朋友住在一起,或者她和朋友住在一起.
99Are they the same?都一样吗?
100If not, what's the difference?如果不是,有什么区别?
101They are different.两者不同
102If you say, she lives with her friend, with the present simple, this suggests that the如果你说,她和她的朋友住在一起, 以现在的简单,这说明,
103situation is permanent, or at least long-lasting.局势是永久的,至少是长期的。
104She's not just staying with her friend for a few days.她不只是和朋友住几天
105She lives there, with her friend, permanently.她住在那里,和她的朋友,永远。
106If you say, she's living with her friend, with the present continuous, this suggests如果你说,她和她朋友住在一起, 与现在的持续,这说明
107that the situation is temporary.这是暂时的
108Maybe she's just staying with her friend while she looks for her own place.也许她只是和朋友住在一起 一边找自己的地方
109When we use the present simple to talk about a situation, it suggests that the situation当我们用现在的简单 来谈论一个情况, 它暗示情况
110has continued for a long time.已经持续了很长时间。
111The same idea again.又是同一个想法
112Or that we expect the situation to continue for a long time into the future.或者,我们期望局势将长期持续下去。
113In some cases, it's possible to use either the present simple or the present continuous在某些情况下,可以使用现在的简单或现在的连续
114in the same sentence, but the meanings would be different.在同一句中,但含义会有所不同。
115Using the present simple shows a situation is long-lasting or permanent, while using使用目前的简单显示一个情况是长期或永久的,同时使用
116the present continuous shows that a situation is just temporary.目前的情况表明,情况只是暂时的。
117For example, he works for a small design company.例如,他为一家小型设计公司工作.
118This is his career.这是他的事业
119This is his job.这是他的工作。
120He'll probably stay there for a long time.他可能在那里呆了很长时间。
121He's working for a small design company.他为一家小型设计公司工作.
122He works there at the moment.他现在在那里工作。
123He might change jobs soon.他可能很快会换工作
124Another example.另一个例子。
125I go to the gym every week.我每周去健身房
126That means I do this every week, every month, all year.这意味着我每周、每个月、一年都这样做。
127Next month, I'll still be going to the gym.下个月我还是要去健身房
128I'm going to the gym every week.我每周都要去健身房
129That means I'm just doing this at the moment.也就是说我现在就这么做
130Next month, you won't see me there.下个月,你不会在那里看到我。
131In all of these sentences, both forms are possible, simple or continuous, but the present在所有这些句子中,两种形式都是可能的,简单或连续的,但是现在
132simple shows that these situations are long-lasting.简而言之,这些局势是长期的。
133Using the present continuous shows that these situations probably won't continue for a使用目前的连续显示 这些情况可能不会继续下去
134long time.好久不见
135Okay, part seven.好吧,第七编。
136Lots of parts.很多部件。
137Use the present simple to tell stories or jokes in conversational English.用现在的简单来用对话英语讲故事或笑话.
138When you're telling a story to your friends, what verb form would you use?当你向朋友讲故事时 你会用什么动词形式?
139You should use the past, right?你应该用过去,对不对?
140After all, you're talking about a story, something which happened in the past.毕竟,你说的是一个故事, 过去发生过的事情。
141Shouldn't you use the past verb form?难道你不应该用过去的动词形式吗?
142That's logical, but it's not always true.这是合乎逻辑的,但并不总是真实的.
143We often use the present simple to tell stories or jokes, even for things which happened in我们经常用现在的简单 来讲述故事或笑话, 即使发生的事情
144the past.过去
145This is only possible in conversational English.这只能用英语说话
146Why do we do this?我们为什么要这么做?
147Using the present simple instead of the past makes the story sound more direct, more exciting.使用现在的简单而非过去,使得故事听起来更直接,更令人兴奋.
148For example, so I see this guy who looks just like Johnny Depp and I go up to talk to him,比如说,我看到一个像Johnny Depp的人 我上去跟他谈谈
149but then I trip and I throw my drink all over him.然后我就把酒泼在他身上
150He gives me this look like I'm a complete idiot and just walks away.他让我看起来像我是个白痴 然后就走了
151Similarly, the present simple is often used in newspaper headlines, even for things which同样,现在的简单也经常被用在报纸头条上,甚至用于一些事情
152happened in the past.过去的事
153For example, you might see headlines like,比如,你可能会看到头条新闻,
154Prime Minister Resigns!首相辞职!
155Scientists Discover New Element!科学家发现新元素!
156Next, we also use the present simple in commentary.其次,我们还在评注中使用目前的简单。
157What's commentary?什么是评论?
158Commentary means describing something as it's happening, usually on TV or on the radio.评论的意思是描述正在发生的事情,通常是在电视或广播上.
159For example, sports matches have commentators who describe the match to listeners or viewers.例如,体育比赛有评论家向听众或观众描述比赛内容.
160Commentators use the present simple to talk about shorter actions happening at that moment.评论者使用现在的简单来谈论当时发生的较短的行动.
161For example,举例来说,
162He passes, he shoots, he hits the post!他通过,他射击,他击中哨所!
163She serves but Williams makes a great return.她为她服务,但威廉姆斯 是一个伟大的回报。
164The prince waits at the altar while the princess walks slowly up the aisle.王子在祭坛上等待,而公主则慢慢走上过道.
165This might seem strange.这似乎很奇怪。
166Commentary describes something which is happening now, so you might think we should use the评论中描述了正在发生的事情,所以你可能认为我们应该使用
167present continuous.持续进行。
168Commentary does use the present continuous, but mostly for longer actions.评注的确使用了目前的连续法,但主要用于更长的行动。
169For example,举例来说,
170He's warming up and getting ready to come on the pitch.他热身了,准备上场
171The players are taking a break while the medic treats her leg.球员休息时,医生会治疗她的腿。
172Normally, we use the present simple for longer actions and the present continuous for shorter通常情况下,我们用现在的简单来做更长的动作,而现在的连续来做较短的动作.
173actions, but in commentary, the opposite is true.但是,在评注中,恰恰相反。
174The present simple describes shorter actions, the continuous is used for longer actions.目前简单描述的是较短的动作,连续用于更长的动作.
175OK, you're nearly finished.好了,你快结束了。
176We have one more use of the present simple.我们再用一次现在的简单。
177What is it?这是什么?
178Let's look.让我们看看。
179Part 9.第9编.
180We use the present simple for future schedules.我们用现在的简单来做未来的时间表。
181So, you can use the present simple to talk about the future.所以,你可以用现在的简单来谈论未来.
182How?怎么会?
183Well, we use the present simple to talk about things in the future which are on a timetable那么,我们用现在的简单 来谈论未来的事情 在一个时间表上
184or a schedule.或时间表。
185This includes things like trains, planes, and other public transport, meetings and appointments,包括火车、飞机和其他公共交通、会议和预约
186classes, and so on, things like this.诸如此类的课
187For example,举例来说,
188Class starts at ten.课从十起.
189The plane arrives at twelve-twenty at night.飞机晚上12点20分到达
190What time does the meeting start?会议什么时候开始?
191In all of these sentences, we're talking about the future, but because we're talking about在所有这些句子中,我们谈论的是未来,但因为我们谈论的是未来
192timetables or schedules, we use the present simple.时间表或时间表,我们使用目前的简单。
193OK, let's review.好吧,让我们回顾一下。
194Wow, lots of information in this lesson.哇,很多信息 在这个教训。
195Don't worry if you don't remember it all.'么则不记也.
196You can always review the video if you need to.需要的话随时可以审查录像.
197It will still be here.它还会在这里。
198I hope you can see that the present simple is actually a very flexible and powerful verb我希望你能看到,现在的简单其实是一个非常灵活和强大的动词
199form.表单。
200You can use it to express many, many different ideas.你可以用它来表达许多,许多不同的想法.
201However, if you want to use the present simple in these ways, you need to understand the然而,如果你想以这些方式使用现在的简单,就需要理解
202different meanings.不同的意义。
203There isn't one answer to the question, what does the present simple do?这个问题没有答案,现在的简单是做什么的?
204There are many answers.有许多答案。
205OK, that's the end of the lesson.好吧,这是结束的教训。
206Thanks very much for watching.非常感谢你的观看。
207I hope you found it useful.我希望你觉得有用
208你可以在我们的网站上看到更多的免费课程,www.oxfordonlineenglish.com。
209But that's all.仅此而已
210Thanks very much.非常感谢
211See you next time.下次见
212Bye-bye.再见
该视频共有字幕 212 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P13 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p13 12. 12. English Grammar 12.How to Use To Be in English (P13)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, my name is Reidan.嗨,我的名字是雷丹。
0:04Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
0:06Today, you can learn about the most important verb in English, to be.今天,你可以了解英语中最重要的动词。
0:12You'll learn how to use be in simple sentences and questions.你会学会如何用在简单的句子和问题中.
0:16The verb be is everywhere in English.动词在英语中无处不在.
0:19We use it all the time, so you need to know how to use be correctly.我们一直使用它, 所以你需要知道如何正确使用。
0:25Do you know the sentence, to be or not to be?你知道句子,是还是不是?
0:29That is the question.这就是问题所在。
0:31It's from Shakespeare's Hamlet.这是来自莎士比亚的哈姆雷特。
0:33It's only 10 words long and uses the verb to be three times.只长十句,用动词三遍.
展开字幕全文（123 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, my name is Reidan.嗨,我的名字是雷丹。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
3Today, you can learn about the most important verb in English, to be.今天,你可以了解英语中最重要的动词。
4You'll learn how to use be in simple sentences and questions.你会学会如何用在简单的句子和问题中.
5The verb be is everywhere in English.动词在英语中无处不在.
6We use it all the time, so you need to know how to use be correctly.我们一直使用它, 所以你需要知道如何正确使用。
7Do you know the sentence, to be or not to be?你知道句子,是还是不是?
8That is the question.这就是问题所在。
9It's from Shakespeare's Hamlet.这是来自莎士比亚的哈姆雷特。
10It's only 10 words long and uses the verb to be three times.只长十句,用动词三遍.
11So if you want to speak well, practicing the verb to be will help your English.所以,如果你想好说话, 练习动词会帮助你的英语。
12How to use different forms of be.如何是用不同形体.
13Be has different forms.Be有不同的形式。
14Let's look.让我们看看。
15We say, I am, you are, he, she, it is, we are, you are, they are.我们说,我是,你是, 他,她,这是,我们,你是,他们是。
16Do you know these forms?你知道这些表格吗?
17If not, repeat them again and again until you know them perfectly.如果不行,你再重复一遍 直到你完全了解他们为止
18Let's do it one more time.再来一次
19I am, you are, he, she, it is, we are, you are, they are.我,你,他,她,这是,我们,你,他们是。
20What about my brother?我弟弟怎么办?
21My brother am, my brother are, my brother is, which is correct.我的兄弟是,我的兄弟是,我的兄弟是,这是正确的。
22My brother, he, my brother is.我的兄弟,他,我的兄弟是。
23What about the cups?杯子怎么样?
24The cups am, the cups are, the cups is, which is correct.杯子是,杯子是,杯子是,这是正确的。
25The cups, they, the cups are.杯子,他们,杯子是。
26Next, let's look at how to make simple sentences with be.接下来,让我们来看看 如何做简单的句子与存在。
27How can we use be?怎么会这样?
28There are many ways.有许多方法。
29We can use be with a number.我们可以用一个数字。
30I am 29 years old.我29岁了
31You are 190 centimeters tall.你身高190厘米。
32It is five o'clock.5点了
33We can use be with a noun to say what something is.我们可以用名词来形容什么
34He is a doctor.他是个医生
35She is a student.她是一个学生。
36It is a cookbook.这是一本烹饪手册。
37You can use be with an adjective like hungry or quiet.你可以用一个形容词 像饥饿或安静。
38We are hungry.我们饿了。
39You are very quiet.你很安静
40They are German.他们是德国人
41Okay, what if you want to make a negative sentence?好吧,如果你想做一个负面的句子?
42It's easy to make negative sentences with be.以是故方便作负面句.
43Just add not after the verb.只要在动词之后添加不.
44I am 29 years old.我29岁了
45I am not 29 years old.我不是29岁。
46Sarah is a student.莎拉是个学生
47Sarah is not a student.莎拉不是一个学生。
48We are hungry.我们饿了。
49We are not hungry.我们不饿。
50What about he is a doctor?那他是医生呢?
51Can you make it negative?你能做负面的吗?
52He is not a doctor.他不是医生。
53Easy right?很简单吧?
54Good.不错
55Let's look at how to make short forms contractions with be.让我们看看如何使 短形式收缩与之。
56When we speak, we often make short forms also called contractions with be.当我们说话的时候,我们常常做一些简短的表格,也叫收缩。
57What am I talking about?我在说什么?
58You saw the example.你看见了这个例子。
59I am 29 years old.我29岁了
60We don't usually say this.我们通常不会这么说
61We usually say I'm 29 years old.我们通常说我29岁。
62I'm is a short form or contraction.我是一个短暂的形式或收缩。
63We take two words and put them together.我们用两个词把它们拼凑起来。
64This is easier to say.说起来容易
65Let's look at some more short forms with the verb be.让我们看看一些简短的表格 与动词是。
66I am, I'm, you are, you're, he is, he's, she is, she's, it is, it's, we are, we're,我,我,你,你,他,他,她,她,它,它,我们,我们,我们,
67they are, they're.他们是,他们是。
68You can also make short forms with nouns.也可以使用名词制作短表.
69Sarah is a student.莎拉是个学生
70My camera is Japanese.我的摄影机是日本的
71What about short forms with negatives?有底片的短表格怎么办?
72Let's look.让我们看看。
73I am not, I'm not, you are not, you aren't, you're not, he is not.我没有,我没有,你没有,你没有,你没有,你没有,他没有。
74He isn't, he's not, she is not, she isn't, she's not, it is not, it isn't, it's not,他没有,他没有,她没有,她没有,它不是,它不是,它不是,它不是,它不是,
75we are not, we aren't, we're not, they are not, they aren't, they're not.我们不是,我们不是,我们不是,他们不是,他们不是,他们不是。
76Let's look at some examples.让我们看看一些例子。
77I am not 29.我不是29岁。
78I'm not 29.我不是29岁。
79He is not a doctor.他不是医生。
80He isn't a doctor or he's not a doctor.他不是医生,也不是医生
81Okay, your turn.好吧,轮到你了。
82It is not a cookbook.这不是一本烹饪手册。
83What are the two short forms?两种简短的形式是什么?
84It isn't a cookbook or it's not a cookbook.这不是烹饪本,也不是烹饪本
85Let's do one more.再来一次
86They are not German.他们不是德国人。
87Can you make the short forms?你能做简短的表格吗?
88They aren't German or they're not German.他们不是德国人,也不是德国人
89When you speak English, remember to use short forms with B. You'll sound more natural.说英语时,请记住使用B的短表,听上去会更自然.
90Let's learn to do one more thing with B. Let's see how to use B to make simple yes-no questions.让我们学习用B再做一件事,看看如何用B来做简单的"是-否"问题.
91Look at the sentence.观此句.
92He is a doctor.他是个医生
93Can you make a yes-no question from the sentence?你能从句子里提个问题吗?
94Is he a doctor?他是医生吗?
95What happened?发生了什么事?
96We moved the verb B to the beginning.我们把动词B移到了开头.
97Let's look at another example.再举个例子
98Sarah is a student.莎拉是个学生
99Can you make the question?你能提出问题吗?
100Is Sarah a student?莎拉是学生吗?
101Okay, one more, a bit different.好吧,再来一个,有点不一样。
102You are Italian.你是意大利人吗?
103Can you make the question?你能提出问题吗?
104Why are you Italian?你为什么是意大利人?
105The same thing happens.同样的事情发生。
106Just move B to the beginning.把B移到开头
107What about they are German?那他们是德国人呢?
108Can you make the question?你能提出问题吗?
109Are they German?他们是德国人吗?
110Same idea again.又是一样的想法
111Not too difficult, right?不会太难吧?
112Okay, let's review what we've studied in this class.好吧,让我们回顾一下我们在这个班学习过什么。
113Can you remember what you learned in this lesson?你能记得你在这课上学到了什么吗?
114We saw how to make simple sentences with B.我们看到如何用B来做简单的句子.
115How to make short forms with B.如何与B制成短表.
116And how to make simple questions with B.和如何做简单的问题与B.
117Remember, you can watch the video again to review the topic if you want to.记住,如果你愿意,你可以再次观看视频来审查话题.
118Want more practice?还要练习吗?
119看看我们网站上的全部教训 OxfordOnline English.com.
120That's the end of the lesson.师於此毕.
121Thanks very much for watching.非常感谢你的观看。
122I hope you found it useful.我希望你觉得有用
123See you next time.下次见
该视频共有字幕 125 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P14 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p14 13. 13. English Grammar 13.Complete Guide to English Modal Verbs (P14)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Stephanie.嗨,我是史蒂芬妮。
0:03Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
0:05In this lesson, you can learn about English modal verbs.在这个课中,你可以学习英语模式动词.
0:09What are modal verbs?模式动词是什么?
0:11What do they do?他们做什么的?
0:12Why do you need them?你为什么需要他们?
0:13You'll see answers to all these questions in this class.你会看到答案 这些问题在本班。
0:17在开始前,你应该看看我们的网站 oxfordonlineenglish.com.
0:22You can find all our free English lessons, we also offer online classes with professional你可以找到所有免费的英语课程,我们也提供在线课程 专业
0:26teachers, where you can study speaking, prepare for IELTS, improve your pronunciation, or教师,可以学习演讲、准备IELTS、提高读音,或
展开字幕全文（279 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Stephanie.嗨,我是史蒂芬妮。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
3In this lesson, you can learn about English modal verbs.在这个课中,你可以学习英语模式动词.
4What are modal verbs?模式动词是什么?
5What do they do?他们做什么的?
6Why do you need them?你为什么需要他们?
7You'll see answers to all these questions in this class.你会看到答案 这些问题在本班。
8在开始前,你应该看看我们的网站 oxfordonlineenglish.com.
9You can find all our free English lessons, we also offer online classes with professional你可以找到所有免费的英语课程,我们也提供在线课程 专业
10teachers, where you can study speaking, prepare for IELTS, improve your pronunciation, or教师,可以学习演讲、准备IELTS、提高读音,或
11whatever else you want.随便你
12Let's get back to our topic, with some basic points you should know to use modal verbs让我们回到我们的主题,一些基本点 你应该知道使用模式动词
13correctly.没错
14Shall we start?我们开始吧?
15Yeah, we probably should.是啊,我们也许应该。
16So can you tell me something about modal verbs?你能跟我说说模式动词吗?
17Sure.当然
18What would you like to know?你想知道什么吗?
19I must know everything about them.我必须了解他们的一切
20That might take a long time.这可能需要很长时间。
21You'll help me, though, right?你会帮我的,对吧?
22Of course, even though it may be challenging.当然,尽管它可能具有挑战性。
23There are nine modal verbs in English.英语有9种模式动词.
24You just heard a dialogue with nine lines.你刚刚听到一个对话 与九行。
25Each line contains one modal verb.每行包含一个模式动词.
26Can you name the nine modal verbs in English?你能用英语命名九式动词吗?
27Maybe you know them already, but if not, you can go back and try and find them in the dialogue.也许你已经认识他们了,但是如果没有,你可以回去在对话中找到他们。
28The nine modal verbs are can, could, may, might, will, would, shall, should, and must.九式动词可以,可以,可以,可以,可以,可以,可以,应该,必须.
29What do modal verbs do, and how are they different from other verbs?模式动词做什么,与其他动词有什么不同?
30Also, why are they so important?而且,为什么它们如此重要?
31Modal verbs add information to other verbs.Modal动词将信息添加到其他动词中.
32That's their job.这是他们的工作。
33They can add ideas like possibility, uncertainty, or obligation to another verb.它们可以在另一种动词中添加一些想法,如可能性,不确定性或义务.
34Grammatically, modal verbs follow their own rules.在语法上,模式动词遵循自己的规则.
35Let's see what this means.让我们看看这意味着什么。
36Rule number one.规则一。
37A modal verb is followed by an infinitive verb without to.模式动词后面是无穷动词,没有到.
38For example, she can speak fluent Spanish.例如,她会说流利的西班牙语.
39We shouldn't do anything until we know more.我们不应该做任何事情 直到我们知道更多。
40They won't be here before ten.他们十点前不会来
41You can't put a noun after a modal verb, or an ing verb, or anything else.模式动词后不能加名词,也不能加音动词,或者其他任何词.
42Only an infinitive verb without to.只有无限动词没有
43Rule number two.规则二。
44Modal verbs can't be used in different times or tenses.modal动词不能在不同时间或紧张时使用.
45Modal verbs don't have past, perfect, or future tenses like regular verbs do.modal动词没有过去,完美,或者像普通动词那样的未来紧张.
46There are some cases where this isn't 100% true.有些情况下这不是真的
47For example, could is the past tense of can in some cases.例如,在某些情况下,可能是罐头过去的紧张状态。
48Could sometimes acts like a past version of will.有时可能表现得像过去版本的意志.
49However, could can also have a present or future meaning.然而,也可能具有目前或未来的意义。
50It's better to think about each modal verb individually.最好单独考虑每个模式动词.
51Rule number three.规则三。
52Modal verbs are auxiliary verbs.modal动词为辅助动词.
53That means you can make negatives by adding not to the end of the verb.这意味着可以通过不加入动词的结尾来做出负数.
54For example, can can't, would wouldn't, might might not.例如,不能,不会,也许不会。
55Modal verbs are often contracted, although might not and may not are usually writtenModal动词经常是订约的,尽管可能不是,也可能不是通常写的
56fully without contractions.完全没有收缩。
57For will and shall, the spelling changes in the negative.为了意志和意志,拼写变化为负数。
58Will won't, shall shan't.威尔不会的 不会的
59To make a question, move the modal verb before the subject.要提问,将模式动词移动到主体之前.
60For example, should I tell him?比如,我该告诉他吗?
61What would you do?你会怎么做?
62What about the other question?另一个问题呢?
63Why are modal verbs important?为什么模式动词很重要?
64Modal verbs can express many basic concepts which you will need regularly, in any situation.Modal动词可以表达很多基本概念,无论在什么情况下你都需要这些基本概念.
65Modal verbs are used to express obligation, give advice, talk about possibility and probability,Modal动词用于表达义务,给出建议,谈论可能性和概率,
66ask for permission, and more.请求许可,还有更多。
67Next, let's look at the meanings which modal verbs can express in more detail.接下来,让我们来看看模式动词可以更详细地表达的意义.
68Can I ask you something?我能问你件事吗?
69Sure!当然
70I'm thinking I might ask for a transfer to the Singapore office.我想我可以请求调去新加坡办公室
71I've always wanted to live abroad, and I think now's the right time.我一直想住在国外,我觉得现在是合适的时机.
72What do you think?你觉得呢?
73I think, if you've thought about it, then you should try it.我想,如果你已经考虑过, 那你应该试试。
74Better to regret something you did than something you didn't do, that's my view.最好后悔你做的事 而不是你没有做的事 这就是我的看法
75Will they agree, though?他们同意吗?
76You don't know till you ask!你不问就不知道!
77Anyway, I'm sure they'll agree.无论如何,我相信他们会同意的。
78You have a good track record here, and if you come back later, you'll have a lot of你在这里有良好的记录, 如果你回来以后,你会有很多
79valuable experience.宝贵的经验。
80So they should say yes.他们应该答应的
81I'm just worried, because I know that Olga asked for a transfer to Canada, and they wouldn't我只是担心,因为我知道奥尔加 要求调到加拿大, 他们不会
82let her.让她。
83That's a totally different situation.情况完全不同
84Olga's a tax specialist.奥尔加是税务专家
85She's irreplaceable.她是不可替代的。
86I wanted to ask one more thing.我想再问一件事
87Will you write a reference for me?你会给我写个参考书吗?
88No problem!没问题!
89I'd be happy to.我很乐意
90There's one more thing you must do before you apply.申请之前你还有一件事要做
91What's that?这是什么?
92Talk to the Singapore office.与新加坡办事处谈话.
93I can put you in contact if you need.需要的话我可以联系你
94That's great.赞曰.
95Thanks so much for helping me out.谢谢你帮我
96You can use modal verbs to express nine fundamental ideas.可以使用模式动词表达九种基本思想.
97Maybe you're thinking, that's nice and easy!也许你在想,这是很好和容易的!
98There are nine modal verbs, and nine meanings!有九种模式动词,有九种含义!
99So each verb must have one meaning, right?所以每个动词必须有一个意义,对不对?
100Nope, unfortunately, it's more complicated than that.不 很不幸 比这更复杂
101First, the nine meanings are broad.先九义广.
102Each contains several smaller ideas.每一个都包含几个较小的想法.
103Secondly, every modal verb can have more than one meaning.其次,每个模式动词可以有多个含义.
104Anyway, we'll worry about that later.无论如何,我们以后会担心的。
105For now, let's look at the nine fundamental ideas which modal verbs can express.现在,让我们看看模式动词可以表达的九种基本思想.
106Asking permission.请求许可。
107Expressing possibility or impossibility when you think something could be true, or not.表示可能或不可能 当你认为某事可能是真的,或不。
108Giving advice or suggestions.提供咨询意见或建议。
109Expressing certainty or uncertainty when you're sure something is true, or not.表示确定性或不确定性 当你确信某件事是真的,与否。
110Expressing probability when you think one result is more likely than another.当你认为一个结果比另一个结果更可能时 表示概率
111Expressing willingness or refusal, for example, when someone lets or doesn't let someone表示愿意或拒绝,例如当有人允许或不允许某人
112else do something.否则就做点什么
113Making a request or an offer.求或约.
114Expressing an obligation when it's necessary to do something.表达一项义务 当需要做一些事情的时候。
115Expressing ability when someone has the capacity to do something, or not.当某人有能力做某件事时 表达出能力
116In the dialogue, there's at least one example of each of these nine basic meanings.在对话中,这九种基本意义中,至少有一个例子.
117Can you find them?你能找到他们吗?
118If you want a challenge, go back and listen to the dialogue again.如果你想挑战,请回去再听对话。
119Try to find one sentence with a modal verb which expresses each of the nine basic meanings.尝试找到一个用模式动词表达九种基本含义的句子.
120Let's look together.让我们一起看看。
121Here are nine sentences from the dialogue.以下是对话中的九句.
122The first sentence is asking permission.初句问经.
123You use can to ask, is this okay?你可以问,这样可以吗?
124Sentence two is talking about possibility.第二句说的是可能性。
125You're saying something is possible, but not certain.你说有些事是有可能的 但不确定
126The third sentence is giving advice.第三句劝请.
127Number four is expressing certainty.第四是表示确定性。
128You're sure that something is true now, or that something will happen in the future.你确信,现在的事情是真的, 或者将来会发生什么。
129In case you're wondering, possibility and certainty are closely related.如果你想知道, 可能性和确定性密切相关。
130We're separating them, but you could also see them as two sides of the same idea.我们把它们分开了, 但你也可以把它们看作是同一个想法的两面。
131However, probability, as in sentence five, is different.然而,如第5句,概率是不同的。
132Here's a question.问曰.
133What's the difference between probability and possibility?概率和可能性有什么区别?
134Probability has different levels.概率不同。
135Something can be 90% probable, or 50%, or 20%, or whatever.东西可能是90%,或者50%,或者20%,或者什么的。
136Probability is binary – either something is possible, or it isn't.概率是二进制的 — — 要么是某种可能,要么不是。
137It doesn't make sense to say that something is 50% possible.说某事有50%的可能是没有道理的.
138This might sound abstract, but it's relevant to using modal verbs.这可能听起来很抽象,但它与使用模式动词有关.
139Here, should expresses probability.在这里,应该表示概率。
140The sentence they should say yes means it's more likely they'll say yes than no.他们应该说"是"的句子意味着他们更有可能说"是"而不是"否".
141The sixth sentence expresses refusal.第六句表示拒绝.
142Wouldn't hear has a similar meaning to refused to.不会听到类似的意思 拒绝。
143Number seven is a request, when you ask someone to do something for you.七号是请求 当你要求别人为你做点什么时
144The eighth sentence expresses an obligation.第八句表达了一项义务。
145Must hear means that it's necessary to do something.一定要听到的意思是必须做点什么。
146Finally, the ninth sentence expresses ability.最后第九句表达能力.
147So there's a lot of information here.所以这里有很多信息。
148What should you take away?你要带走什么?
149Let's look at two key points.我们来谈谈两个要点。
150First, not every modal verb was used in these nine sentences.首先,并非每一个模式动词都用于这九句.
151There's no could, no shall, and no may.没有,没有,没有,没有可能。
152What does this tell you?这告诉你什么?
153It shows you what we told you before – every modal verb can have more than one meaning.它显示了我们之前告诉你的 – 每个模式动词都有不止一个意义.
154Also, it shows you that every idea, like obligation, certainty, and so on, can be expressed by而且,它向你们表明,每一个想法,如义务、确定性等等,都可以通过下列方式表达:
155more than one modal verb.多个模式动词。
156Let's look at this point in more detail.让我们更详细地审视这一点。
157Can you look at something for me?你能帮我看点东西吗?
158Sure, what's up?当然,怎么了?
159It's my laptop.这是我的笔记本电脑
160It's acting weirdly.它的表现很奇怪。
161I know you're good with these things, so…我知道你擅长这些 所以...
162What's the problem exactly?到底有什么问题?
163It keeps freezing, and I can't do anything for a while.它一直冷, 我无法做任何事情一段时间。
164Sometimes it's just a few seconds, but sometimes it goes on for half an hour.有时只是几秒钟,但有时会持续半小时.
165It's really annoying.这真的很烦人。
166Older laptops can get like that sometimes.旧手提电脑有时会这样
167But I only bought it six months ago.但我六个月前才买的
168Do you have an antivirus program?你有抗病毒程序吗?
169Yes, and I do scans regularly.是的,我经常做扫描
170It can't be a virus.这不可能是病毒
171I'm not so good with technology, but I'm pretty security conscious.我不太擅长科技 但我很安全
172Hmm, that's probably not the problem then.嗯,那可能不是问题了。
173Can I take it for an hour or so?我能用一小时吗?
174I'll need your login password too.我也需要你的登录密码
175That way I can take a proper look.这样我可以好好看看
176Okay, here.好吧,在这里。
177Thank you so much.非常感谢
178In this dialogue, there were five different sentences using the modal verb can.在这个对话中,有五个不同的句子使用模式动词罐.
179Do you remember them?你记得他们吗?
180Here they are.他们来了
181In each sentence, can has a different meaning.每句中,可以有不同的含义.
182Think about the nine basic meanings of modal verbs, which you saw in the section two.想想模式动词的九个基本含义,你在第二节中看到了这一点.
183Can you explain the meaning of can in each of these sentences?你能解释一下每个句子里罐子的意义吗?
184Can you see how they're different?你能看到他们有什么不同吗?
185Can you look at something for me is a request.你能帮我看点东西吗?
186I can't do anything for a while expresses ability.暂时我什么都做不了 表现能力
187Older laptops can get like that sometimes expresses a general possibility.旧的笔记本电脑可以这样,有时会表达一种普遍的可能性.
188It's like saying it's common for older laptops to get like that.就像说老式笔记本电脑很常见
189It can't be a virus expresses certainty.这不可能是病毒 表达的确定性。
190It's like saying I'm sure it isn't a virus.这就像说,我确定这不是病毒。
191Can I take it for an hour or so is asking permission to do something.我能用一个小时吗?
192This is just one modal verb.这只是一种模式动词。
193Can is an extreme example, because most modal verbs don't have five different meanings.Can是一个极端的例子,因为大多数模式动词没有五个不同的含义.
194Actually, can has a sixth meaning.其实,可以有第六义.
195It can be used to make an offer, as in, can I help you with anything?它可以用来做一个报价, 就像,我可以帮你什么?
196However, every modal verb has at least two different meanings, and most have three or four.然而,每个模式动词至少有两个不同的含义,大多数有三四个.
197So, what's the point here?那么,这有什么意义呢?
198Point one.第一点
199Really, don't try and understand modal verbs by translating them into your language.真的,不要尝试和理解 模式动词通过 把它们翻译成你的语言。
200Of course, this is true generally, but it is especially important with modal verbs,当然,这在总体上是真实的,但对于模式动词来说尤其重要,
201because they don't translate cleanly between languages.因为他们不会在语言间进行干净的翻译。
202If you think that can in English translates to one verb in your language,如果你认为这可以用英语 翻译为您语言的一个动词,
203you'll create problems for yourself.你会给自己制造麻烦
204Point two.第二点
205To understand a modal verb in a sentence, you need to understand the context.要理解句子中的模式动词,就需要理解上下文.
206Again, this is general advice, but again, it's especially important with modal verbs.再说一遍,这是一般的忠告,但是,对模式动词来说,这一点尤其重要.
207The meaning of a modal verb can be completely different in different contexts.模式动词的含义在不同上下文中可以完全不同.
208Point three.点三.
209The different meanings of a modal verb are unconnected.模式动词的不同含义是互不相连的.
210Look at two sentences with must.看两句与须.
211It must be late.已经很晚了
212It's dark outside.户外黑.
213You must read this article.你必须读这篇文章。
214It's so interesting.这很有趣。
215What does must mean in these two sentences?此二句中何谓.
216In the first sentence, must expresses certainty.在第一句中,必须表示确定性。
217You're saying, I'm sure it's late, because it's dark outside.你是说,我肯定很晚了,因为外面很黑
218In the second sentence, must expresses strong advice.在第二句中,必须提出强有力的建议。
219Most English learners will first learn must to express obligation in sentences like多数英语学习者首先要学会在句子中表达义务,比如:
220employees must keep records of all expenses.雇员必须保留所有开支的记录。
221Often, they'll think about must by translating it into their language.他们常常会考虑把它翻译成自己的语言
222Then, when they see the word must, they think about the verb in their language.然后,当他们看到这个词时,他们就会在语言中思考动词.
223If you do this, you might think that other meanings of must are somehow connected to如果你这样做,你可能会认为,其他意义 一定在某种程度上与
224the idea of obligation, or whatever you learned first.义务的概念,或者任何你先学到的东西。
225But there's no connection.但无联系.
226It's just coincidence that you use the word must in these sentences.只是巧合你必须用这个词来表达这些句子.
227The meaning is completely different in each case.每个案例的含义都完全不同.
228There's no connection, except that the word is the same.既无联系,惟言之同.
229Now let's look at one more thing you should know about modal verbs.现在让我们再看看 关于模式动词你应该知道的一件事。
230What time were we supposed to be there?我们什么时候去?
231Ten, I think.10岁吧
232But I think we ought to aim to arrive at least fifteen minutes before.但我认为,我们应该争取在15分钟前到达。
233So, that means we have to leave here at, what, nine?所以,这意味着我们必须离开这里 在,什么,九?
234We'd better leave earlier.我们最好早点走
235There's a metro strike tomorrow, so the traffic will be terrible.明天会有地铁罢工,所以交通会很不方便.
236Are we going to drive, or take a taxi?我们要开车还是坐出租车?
237I'm not sure we'll be able to find a taxi, so I think driving is best.我不确定我们能找辆出租车 所以我觉得开车是最好的
238In the dialogue, you heard several examples of semi-modal verbs.在对话中,你听到了几个半模式动词的例子.
239Do you know what these are?你知道这些是什么吗?
240Here are the sentences you heard.这是你听到的句子。
241So, what are semi-modal verbs?那么,什么是半模式动词?
242Semi-modals have some of the features of modal verbs, but not all.半模式有模式动词的一些特征,但不是全部.
243Most importantly, semi-modal verbs do the same thing as modal verbs.最重要的是,半模式动词和模式动词一样.
244They add information to other verbs.他们将信息添加到其他动词中.
245They can express many of the same ideas, like obligation or giving advice.他们可以表达许多相同的想法,如义务或提供建议.
246They don't follow all the grammar rules of regular modal verbs.它们不遵循常规模式动词的所有语法规则.
247For example, have to is a semi-modal, and you can use it in different tenses.例如,必须是一种半模式,可以在不同的时态中使用.
248It has a past tense, had to.不得不这样
249You can use it in present perfect, I have had to, and so on.你可以用在现在的完美, 我不得不,等等。
250Often, modals and semi-modals can be used with the same meaning.通常,模式和半模式可以具有相同的含义。
251Look at two sentences.看两句.
252It'll rain this afternoon.今天下午会下雨的
253It's going to rain this afternoon.今午雨'.
254Here, you use going to, which is a semi-modal, to express certainty,在这里,你用去,这是一个半模式, 表示确定性,
255in the same way that you can use will.以同样的方式,你可以使用意志。
256It doesn't matter which verb you use in this case.这个案子你用哪一个动词不重要
257However, in some cases, semi-modal verbs have their own specific meaning.然而,在某些情况下,半模式动词有自己的具体含义.
258For example, supposed to is similar to should, but not the same.例如,应该与应该相似,但并不相同。
259Look at two sentences.看两句.
260We are supposed to be there at ten.我们十点就到
261We should be there at ten.我们十点到
262The basic meaning is similar, but not the same.基本含义相似,但并不相同.
263If you use should, you're saying that you think this is important.如果你应该使用,你是说 你认为这是重要的。
264If you use supposed to, you mean that other people think that this is important.如果你用它,你的意思是其他人认为 这很重要。
265We're supposed to be there at ten suggests that someone else has told you to be there at ten,我们应该10点到那里 暗示别人叫你10点到那里
266and maybe it's not so important to you.也许这对你来说并不重要
267Maybe you're thinking at this point, how many semi-modal verbs are there?也许你在想,现在有多少半模式动词?
268Can you give us a list?你能给我们一份名单吗?
269Not really, because it's not entirely clear what makes something a semi-modal verb.不太清楚,因为现在还不清楚什么是半模式动词。
270Many textbooks will say that need or dare are semi-modals,许多教科书会说 需要或大胆是半模式,
271but they're rarely used in this way in modern English.但是在现代英语中很少用这种方法.
272The most common semi-modals are all in the dialogue at the beginning of this section.最常见的半模式都在本节开头的对话中.
273If you understand how to use these six semi-modals, you are doing well.如果你明白如何使用这六种半模式, 你做的很好。
274Finally, a question.最后,有一个问题。
275Which modal verb is most difficult for you to understand and use in English?哪种模式动词最难理解和用英语?
276Why do you think that is?为什么?
277Please share your thoughts in the comments.请在评论中阐述你的想法。
278Thanks for watching!谢谢你的观看!
279See you next time!下次见!
该视频共有字幕 279 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P15 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p15 14. 14. English Grammar 14.9 Parts of Speech in English (P15)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Kasia.嗨,我是卡西亚。
0:03Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
0:05In this lesson, you can learn about parts of speech in English.在这个课中,你可以学习部分英语的语音.
0:08How many parts of speech are there in English?英语里有几部分?
0:12Can you name them and explain what they do?你能给他们起个名字并解释他们做了什么吗?
0:16Understanding parts of speech – nouns, verbs, adjectives, and so on – can help you to理解语音的部分——名词,动词,形容词等——可以帮助您实现
0:22understand English sentence structures and how English grammar works.了解英语句子结构以及英语语法如何工作.
0:27In this class, you'll learn the basic information about parts of speech.在这个班级里,你会学习关于部分言论的基本信息.
0:31You'll see some ways that parts of speech can be more complicated than you might expect,你会看到一些方式, 部分的言语 可能比你预期的更复杂,
0:37and you'll have several chances to practice.你会有几次练习的机会
展开字幕全文（241 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Kasia.嗨,我是卡西亚。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
3In this lesson, you can learn about parts of speech in English.在这个课中,你可以学习部分英语的语音.
4How many parts of speech are there in English?英语里有几部分?
5Can you name them and explain what they do?你能给他们起个名字并解释他们做了什么吗?
6Understanding parts of speech – nouns, verbs, adjectives, and so on – can help you to理解语音的部分——名词,动词,形容词等——可以帮助您实现
7understand English sentence structures and how English grammar works.了解英语句子结构以及英语语法如何工作.
8In this class, you'll learn the basic information about parts of speech.在这个班级里,你会学习关于部分言论的基本信息.
9You'll see some ways that parts of speech can be more complicated than you might expect,你会看到一些方式, 部分的言语 可能比你预期的更复杂,
10and you'll have several chances to practice.你会有几次练习的机会
11So, first question.所以,第一个问题。
12How many parts of speech are there?演说有几段.
13Well, I did a Google search and many of the top results said eight.我做了一个谷歌搜索, 并且很多最高结果都说八。
14So there must be eight parts of speech in English.因此,在英语中必须有八个部分的语音.
15Wrong.错.
16There are nine.有九门.
17What are they?他们是什么?
18Number one, nouns.第一,名词.
19Nouns can be things, animals, or people, like doctor, pencil, tree, or cat.名词可以是事物,动物,或人,如医生,铅笔,树,或猫.
20Nouns can also be ideas or abstract things, like happiness, time, or money.名词也可以是思想或抽象的东西,比如幸福,时间,或金钱.
21Number two, verbs.第二,动词.
22Verbs can be actions, like do, run, fly, or win.动词可以是动作,比如跑,飞,或者赢.
23Verbs can also describe states, like be, love, believe, or understand.动词也可以描述状态,比如爱,相信,或理解.
24Number three, adjectives.第三,形容词.
25Adjectives describe nouns.形容词描述名词.
26For example, red, big, metal, or beautiful.例如红,大,金属,或美.
27Number four, adverbs.第四,副词.
28Adverbs can describe verbs, meaning they describe how someone does something.副词可以描述动词,意思是描述某人如何做某事.
29For example, quickly, loudly, angrily, or well.例如,迅速,大声,愤怒,或者很好.
30Adverbs can also describe adjectives, other adverbs, or even whole sentences.副词也可以描述形容词,其他副词,甚至整个句子.
31For example, very is an adverb which can describe an adjective, very slow, or another adverb,例如,非常是一个副词,可以描述一个形容词,非常缓慢,或者另一个副词,
32very slowly.慢慢来
33Unfortunately, or sometimes are adverbs, which can be used to add information to a whole sentence.不幸的是,或者有时是副词,可以用来给整个句子添加信息.
34For example, unfortunately, they missed the train and were late to their own wedding.例如,不幸的是,他们错过了火车,并赶不及参加自己的婚礼.
35Sometimes, I wish I'd made different choices in life.有时候,我希望我有 不同的选择在生活中。
36So, adverbs are a little more complicated.因此,副词比较复杂一些.
37Here's a good way to remember it.以此妙法能记.
38Adjectives and adverbs both describe other words.形容词和副词都描述了其他词.
39They are both used to add information to something else.它们都用来给其他东西添加信息。
40Adjectives describe nouns, and adverbs describe everything else.形容词描述名词,副词描述其他一切.
41Verbs, adjectives, adverbs, and whole sentences.动词,形容词,副词,和整句.
42Number five, pronouns.第五 代词.
43Pronouns replace or represent nouns.代词替换或代表名词.
44For example, I, you, she, or they are pronouns which represent different people.比如,我,你,她, 或者他们是代名词 代表不同的人。
45You use pronouns to avoid repeating the same word, or to refer to something when it's你使用代词来避免重复同一个词,或者当它被引用的时候,指某个东西.
46obvious what you mean.很明显你的意思。
47For example, how was the weather there?例如,那里的天气怎么样?
48There is a pronoun which refers to a place.有一个代名词指的是一个地方。
49If you've already mentioned the place you're talking about, you don't need to say it again.如果你已经提到你所说的那个地方,你不必再说一遍.
50Another example.另一个例子。
51Give me two, please.请给我两杯
52Two is a pronoun which refers to a quantity of something which has already been mentioned.二是代词,指已经提到的数量。
53The person you're talking to already knows what you're talking about.与你说话的人已经知道你在说什么了
54Number six, prepositions.第六 预设.
55Prepositions usually go before a noun or noun phrase.预设通常在名词或名词短语之前进行.
56What's their job?他们的工作是什么?
57Prepositions can do two basic things.预设可以做两个基本的事情.
58First, they can add an idea of time, place, or movement to a noun.首先,他们可以在名词中添加一个时间,地点,或运动的概念.
59For example, on Wednesday, in the corner, towards the door.例如,星期三,在角落,向着门.
60Secondly, prepositions can connect other words to a noun or a pronoun.第二,预置可以将其他单词与名词或代词连接起来.
61For example, think about the verb depend on.例如,思考动词取决于.
62The preposition on connects the verb depend to the object of the verb.连接动词上的前置位置取决于动词的对象.
63For example, it depends on the cost.例如,这取决于成本。
64Usually the noun or noun phrase goes after the preposition.通常名词或名词短语会先于预设.
65However, sometimes a preposition can link to a noun or pronoun earlier in the sentence.然而,有时一个预设可以和句子前期的名词或代词联系起来.
66For example, what does it depend on?例如,它取决于什么?
67Here on links to the pronoun what.这里的链接 到代词什么。
68Conjunctions.结集.
69Conjunctions connect two things.连结两件事
70A conjunction can connect two words.组合可以连接两个词.
71I like cake and ice cream.我喜欢蛋糕和冰淇淋
72A conjunction can connect two phrases.一个组合可以连接两个短语.
73Do you want to go now or wait till this afternoon?你想现在去还是等到今天下午?
74You can also use a conjunction to connect two clauses.也可以使用连接连接两个条款。
75Although I've been trying to learn for years, I'm still really bad at drawing.虽然我多年来一直在努力学习,但我仍然非常不擅长绘画.
76Determiners.决者.
77Determiners go before a noun.确定者在名词之前去。
78They include words like a, the, this or that, which help to specify which noun you're talking包括一个、这个或那个词 帮助你确定你所说的名词
79about.有关。
80Words like my, your, his, her, etc. are also determiners.诸如我,你,他,她等言语,也是决定者.
81They specify which noun you're talking about by saying who something belongs to.他们通过说出属于谁的名词来指定你所说的名词.
82Determiners can also tell you how many of something there are.确定者还可以告诉你有多少东西。
83Look at three examples.观三例.
84Ten bananas, some people, both of my brothers.十个香蕉,一些人,我的兄弟。
85The words ten, some and both are determiners.词十,有的和两者都是决定者.
86Number nine, interjections.9号 插座
87Interjections are different because they aren't normally part of a sentence.截断是不同的,因为它们通常不是句子的一部分.
88Interjections are words or phrases which show how you feel.截断是表达你感受的词或短语.
89For example, wow, oh crap, no way.比方说,哇,哦废话,不可能。
90So now you know about the nine parts of speech in English.现在你知道英语的九部分了。
91Let's practice.让我们练习。
92Look at three sentences.观三句.
93Each sentence has five words.每句有五句义.
94One, they told me about it.一,他们告诉我的。
95Two, look in the big cupboard.二,看大柜内.
96Three, put it in there but carefully.三,放进去,但要小心
97Then you identify which part of speech each word is.然后确定每个词的哪个部分
98Pause the video and think about your answers.暂停录像 想想你的答案
99How did you do?你好吗?
100Could you identify the parts of speech correctly?你能正确识别说话的部分吗?
101Let's look at one more.让我们再看看一个。
102I'm staying in this evening.我今夜住此经.
103What part of speech are these words?这些话是讲什么的?
104Think about it.考虑一下
105So I is a pronoun, am is a verb and staying is also a verb.所以我是一个代词,am是一个动词,留下来也是一个动词.
106What about in?进去怎么样?
107Did you say it's a preposition?你说这是预设吗?
108It's not a preposition, it's an adverb.这不是预设,而是副词.
109How does this work?怎么会这样?
110We have the word in in one of the sentences you saw before and it was a preposition.我们在你之前看到的一句话里有这个字 那是个预言
111So what's going on?发生什么事了?
112Some words can only be one thing.有些话只能是一件事
113For example, the words independence or heir can only be nouns.例如,单词独立或继承只能是名词.
114Believe and destroy can only be verbs.相信和毁灭只能是动词.
115However, many words can be more than one part of speech.然而,许多词可以不止是语音的一部分.
116There are two things happening here.这里发生了两件事。
117First, a word can be two different things which have the same written form and the same首先,一个词可以是两种不同的, 具有相同的书面形式和相同的
118pronunciation.发音.
119Think about the word win.思惟胜义.
120Is it a noun or a verb?是名词还是动词?
121It can be both.既能为二.
122I'm sure they'll win the game this weekend.我相信他们会赢得这个周末的比赛。
123We'll be hoping for a win in the big game this weekend.我们希望这个周末的比赛能赢
124Many words are like this.许多文字都是这样的.
125Red can be an adjective or a noun.红色可以是形容词或名词.
126What do you think about this red for the kitchen?你觉得厨房的红色怎么样?
127I like that red top she was wearing.我喜欢她穿的红色上衣
128This is very common.这很常见。
129Very often, a word with one written form can be two or more different parts of speech.非常常见的是,一个带有一种书面形式的词可以是语音的两个或多个不同部分.
130We told you there are two things happening here.我们告诉过你这里有两件事
131What's the other?另一个是什么?
132Sometimes, a word can be different parts of speech depending on its function in the sentence.有时,一个单词可以根据其在句子中的功能而成为语音的不同部分.
133Look at two sentences.看两句.
134I have a few photos of my grandparents.我有几张我祖父母的照片
135Sure, you can have a few.当然,你可以有一些。
136Here's the question.问曰.
137What part of speech is few in these sentences?在这些句子中,言论的哪一部分是很少的?
138In the first sentence, few is a determiner.初句中少为定者.
139In the second, it's a pronoun.于第二义中作是说.
140Can you explain why this is?你能解释为什么吗?
141Think about what few does in these two sentences.思惟此二句中少有所作.
142In the first sentence, few adds a quantity to the noun photos.在第一句中,很少有人为名词照片添加了数量.
143It tells us how many photos you have.它告诉我们你有多少照片。
144This makes it a determiner.这使得它成为一个决定者。
145In the second sentence, few replaces a noun.在第二句中,很少有人取代名词.
146You know which noun it replaces, but in context, you would understand what the person meant.你知道该用哪个名词来代替,但是在上下文中,你会明白这个人的意思.
147Maybe it was a few biscuits or a few pieces of paper.可能是几块饼干或几块纸
148We don't know, but you do know that few replaces a noun, which makes it a pronoun.我们不知道,但你知道 很少有人能代替名词, 这使得它是一个代词。
149Another example is the sentence we saw before.另一个例子是我们之前看到的句子。
150I'm staying in this evening.我今夜住此经.
151Prepositions go with nouns, and connect nouns to other words in the sentence.预设与名词并列,将名词与句中的其他词联系起来.
152In here doesn't go with a noun, so it can't be a preposition.这里没有名词,所以不能是预设.
153In here means at home, and it adds information to the verb stay.在这里意味着在家里, 它增加了信息 在动词停留。
154What kind of words add information to verbs?什么样的词会在动词中添加信息?
155Adverbs.辅词.
156So, in is an adverb.所以,这是副词。
157Wait a minute.等一会
158Did we ever finish explaining what parts of speech are in this sentence?我们有没有解释过 这句话里讲到什么?
159You're right.你说得对
160We didn't.我们没有。
161Let's do it now.现在就做
162You need to say what parts of speech the words this evening are.你得说出今晚的演讲内容
163Can you do it?你能做到吗?
164Maybe you said that this is a determiner, and evening is a noun.也许你说这是决定者 晚上是名词
165That's technically correct, but it's not the best answer.这在技术上是正确的,但这不是最好的答案.
166The best answer is that this evening is an adverb.最好的答案是 今晚是一个副词。
167How do you explain that?你怎么解释?
168Until now, you've seen single words, and how single words can be nouns, verbs, etc.直到现在,你已经看到单词,单词如何可以成为名词,动词等.
169However, when you're thinking about parts of speech, you can't just think about single然而,当你思考 部分的言语, 你不能仅仅思考 单身
170words.词
171Phrases can also be nouns, verbs, adjectives, and so on.词也可以是名词,动词,形容词等等.
172Let's do an example.举个例子吧
173Add a small spoonful of brown sugar, then turn the heat down and stir the mixture gently.加入一小勺棕糖,然后把热量调低,轻轻地搅拌混合物.
174Think about the first part of this sentence.思惟此句初结.
175Add a small spoonful of brown sugar.添加一小勺棕糖.
176What parts of speech do we have here?我们这里的演讲内容是什么?
177Of course, you can go through it word by word.当然,你可以逐字逐句地通过它.
178You can say add is a verb, a is a determiner, small is an adjective, and so on.可以说加词是动词,一个是决定词,小是形容词,等等.
179Is that the most useful way of looking at it?这是最有用的方法吗?
180It makes more sense to see this as a verb add and a noun, a small spoonful of brown把这当成动词加词和名词更有意义 一小勺棕色
181sugar.糖浆。
182The noun is made of several parts of speech – determiners, adjectives, prepositions,名词由语音的几个部分组成——决定者,形容词,前置词,
183and nouns – but together, they have one meaning.和名词,但他们在一起,它们有一个意义。
184These words refer to one thing.这些话提到一件事。
185You can analyse a sentence in several different layers.你可以用几个不同的层次分析一个句子.
186So you can see a small spoonful of brown sugar as six individual words, or one noun phrase.这样,你可以看到一个小勺子的棕糖作为6个单词,或者一个名词短语.
187You can also see it as three parts – a determiner, a small spoonful, a preposition, of, and a也可以把它看作三个部分——决定者、小勺子、预设、以及
188noun – brown sugar.名词 – 棕糖.
189Confused?困惑?
190We understand.我们理解
191You want to know the answer.你想知道答案吗?
192You want to know which way is correct.你想知道哪条路是正确的
193There isn't one correct way to say this.没有任何正确的说法
194There are different perspectives.观点不同。
195A better question is, which perspective makes more sense?一个更好的问题是,哪个观点更有意义?
196In this sentence, a small spoonful of brown sugar refers to one thing in the world.在这句话中,一小勺的棕糖指的是世界上的一件事.
197So it makes sense to think of it as one part of speech in the sentence.因此,把它看作是句子中发言的一部分是有道理的.
198What about the second part of the sentence?句第二义如何.
199How do you analyse the parts of speech?你怎么分析语言的部分?
200As you saw before, there isn't one right answer, but here's a suggestion.正如你以前看到的,没有一个正确的答案, 但有一个建议。
201The sentence contains a conjunction, then, and then, two verb phrases linked with the句子中包含一个连结,然后,然后,两个动词短语与
202conjunction, and.还有...
203This makes sense because the sentence is telling you to do two things – turn the heat down这有道理,因为句子让你做两件事 — — 把热量调低
204– and stir the mixture gently.- 轻轻搅拌
205So it makes sense to see turn the heat down as one part of speech, because it's telling因此,把热量调低作为发言的一部分是有道理的,因为它告诉我们
206you to do one thing.你要做一件事 做点什么
207Let's put these ideas together.让我们把这些想法集中起来。
208First, when you think about parts of speech, you can't just memorise information.首先,当你想到部分的言论, 你不能只是记忆信息。
209You have to look at each sentence individually, and think about what each word is doing.你必须逐个看每个句子,想想每个词都在做什么.
210Secondly, always think about what the sentence means in the real world.第二,始终思考句子在现实世界的意义.
211Sentences aren't abstract things.句子不是抽象的东西。
212They refer to real people, real things, and real actions.他们指的是真实的人,真实的东西,以及真实的行动.
213There is always more than one way to analyse the parts of speech in a sentence.在句子中总是有不止一种方法来分析语音的部分.
214Choose the way that makes sense based on what the sentence is telling you about real life.根据句子对现实生活的看法,选择合理的方式.
215Let's do a more challenging practice exercise, so you can see these ideas in action.让我们做一个更具挑战性的练习, 这样你可以看到这些想法在行动中。
216Look at three sentences.观三句.
217Amazing!厉害!
218It's way better than I ever thought it would be.这比我想象的要好
219She was an amazing clinician who came up with many innovative ways to treat patients.她是一个惊人的临床医生,他想出了许多创新的方法来治疗病人.
220I don't believe it.不可思议.
221How would you analyse the parts of speech in these sentences?你会如何分析这些句子中的语音部分?
222Think about the ideas we talked about in the last section.想想我们在最后一节中谈到的想法。
223Does it make sense to break the sentences into individual words, or is it better to将句子分解成单个词有道理吗 还是最好
224group words into phrases?组词成短语?
225Pause the video and think about your ideas.暂停录像 想想你的想法
226Ready?准备好了吗?
227Here are our answers.这是我们的答案。
228You can pause the video again to look at these in more detail.你可以再次暂停录像 更详细地看这些。
229Notice how the same word can be different parts of speech in different sentences.注意同一个词如何在不同句子中成为语音的不同部分.
230For example, amazing is an interjection in one sentence and an adjective in another.例如,惊人是一句话中的插语,也是另一句中的形容词.
231Notice also the different layers of analysis.还注意不同层次的分析。
232For example, look at the phrase many innovative ways.例如,看看这个短语有许多创新的方法。
233You can see this as one noun phrase, or as a determiner plus a noun phrase, or as three你可以把这看作是一个名词短语, 或者作为一个决定者加一个名词短语, 或者作为一个三个
234individual parts, a determiner, an adjective, and a noun, which is correct.单个部分,一个确定者,一个形容词,和一个名词,这是正确的。
235They all are.他们都是。
236Choose the perspective which makes more sense to you.选择对您更有意义的视角。
237Want more practice with this topic?还要练习这个话题吗?
238校对:Soup
239You can practice with a quiz to check your understanding of parts of speech in English.您可以使用试题练习,以检查您对部分英语语言的理解。
240Thanks for watching.谢谢你的观看。
241See you next time!下次见!
该视频共有字幕 241 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P16 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p16 15. 15. English Grammar 15.How to Use Should, Ought to, Supposed to and Had Bett (P16)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Martin.嗨,我是马丁。
0:04Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
0:08In this lesson, you can learn how to use the modal and semi-modal verbs should, ought to,在这个教训中,你可以学会如何使用模式和半模式动词,应该,
0:16had better, and supposed to.更好,而且应该。
0:21We use these verbs to give advice, express opinions, to give warnings, or to criticise我们用这些动词来给出建议,表达观点,发出警告,或者批评
0:27someone.有人吗?
0:28These verbs are similar in meaning, but not exactly the same.这些动词在含义上相似,但并不完全相同.
0:33That means you need to understand exactly what each verb means to use them correctly这意味着你需要明白每个动词的正确使用意义
0:39when you speak.当你说话。
0:42Let's start with a basic introduction.先作基本介绍.
展开字幕全文（169 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Martin.嗨,我是马丁。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
3In this lesson, you can learn how to use the modal and semi-modal verbs should, ought to,在这个教训中,你可以学会如何使用模式和半模式动词,应该,
4had better, and supposed to.更好,而且应该。
5We use these verbs to give advice, express opinions, to give warnings, or to criticise我们用这些动词来给出建议,表达观点,发出警告,或者批评
6someone.有人吗?
7These verbs are similar in meaning, but not exactly the same.这些动词在含义上相似,但并不完全相同.
8That means you need to understand exactly what each verb means to use them correctly这意味着你需要明白每个动词的正确使用意义
9when you speak.当你说话。
10Let's start with a basic introduction.先作基本介绍.
11Part one – how to use should.第一部分——如何使用。
12Let's look quickly at the different ways you can use should in English.让我们快速地看看用英语可以使用的不同方式.
13For this lesson, we'll use should as our base verb.对于这个教训,我们应当作为我们的基词.
14You'll learn about the other verbs, like supposed to or had better, by comparing them通过比较,你会知道其他动词, 像应该或有更好的,
15to should.应该。
16This means you need to have a good understanding of should.这意味着你需要 一个很好的理解应该。
17First, you can use should to give advice.首先,你可以用来提供建议。
18You should buy the green one.你应该买绿色的
19It suits you.这适合你。
20I advise you to do this.我建议你这样做。
21You shouldn't go to bed so late.你不该这么晚才睡的
22It's bad for you.尔时阿难.
23This is my advice.这是我的建议。
24You can use should to express your opinion.你可以用来表达你的意见。
25Everyone should see that film.每个人都应该看那部电影。
26It's amazing!太不可思议了!
27I'm giving you my opinion about the film.我对这部电影的看法
28The government should raise taxes on the rich.政府应该提高富人的税收.
29This is my opinion, what I think should happen.这就是我的看法 我认为应该发生什么
30Obviously, advice and opinion are similar.显然,咨询意见和意见相似。
31Often, they're the same thing.通常,它们是一样的。
32You can also use should, often in the past, to criticise someone else.你也可以经常利用过去来批评别人。
33You shouldn't have said that.你不该这么说的
34I think you did the wrong thing.我想你做错了事
35He should have studied harder for his exams.他应该更努力地学习他的考试。
36I don't think he studied hard enough.我觉得他学得不够好
37What connects all of these cases?这些案件有什么关联?
38In all these uses of should, you use should to express what you think is the best thing在所有这些应用中,你应该用来表达你认为最好的东西
39{\fn黑体\fs22\bord1\shad0\3aHBE\4aH00\fscx67\fscy66\2cHFFFFFF\3cH808080}我们得去
40If I say, you should, I mean I think it's best if you.如果我说,你应该, 我的意思是,我觉得这是最好的,如果你。
41Now, let's look at ought to.现在,让我们看看应该。
42Part two.第二编.
43Should versus ought to.应该是对的
44In meaning, ought to is exactly the same as should.意思是,应该完全一样。
45If you can use should in a sentence, you can also use ought to.如果你能在句子里使用,你也可以使用。
46For example, you can say, you should buy the green one.例如,你可以说,你应该买绿色的。
47Or, you ought to buy the green one.或者,你应该买绿色的。
48You can say, everyone should see that film.你可以说 每个人都应该看那部电影
49Or, everyone ought to see that film.或者,每个人都应该看那部电影。
50There's no difference in meaning.义无分别.
51In both cases, the two sentences with should and ought to have the same meaning.在这两种情况下,两句应具有同样的含义。
52However, there are a couple of differences in how you use ought to.然而,你应该如何使用有一些不同之处。
53First, ought to is more formal, more old-fashioned, and less common in modern spoken English.首先,应该更正式,更古老,在现代口语英语中也不太常见.
54That means you probably won't use ought to unless you're writing, or you want to sound也就是说你可能不会用 除非你在写,或者你想听
55very formal.非常正式的。
56Secondly, ought to has a slightly different form.第二,形式应略有不同。
57Obviously, you need to add to.显然,你需要加入。
58Also, the negative form is not generally contracted, so you can say, you shouldn't have said that.另外,负表一般不收缩,所以可以说,不应该这么说.
59With should not, you can contract it to shouldn't.不应该的,你可以把它 不应该。
60However, with ought to, you need to use the full form.不过,你需要使用完整的表格。
61You ought not to have said that.你不应该这么说
62Again, with ought to, the sentence sounds very formal, and it's unlikely that you would再说一遍 这句话听起来很正式 你不可能
63actually say this.其实是这样说的。
64With should, you can make questions, like this.与should,你可以提出问题,像这样。
65What time should I get there?我什么时候去?
66With ought to, you can technically make questions, but they sound ridiculously formal.应该是的,你技术上可以提出问题, 但听起来很正式。
67What time ought I to get there?我什么时候去?
68This sounds really old-fashioned and unnatural, so I advise you that you don't use ought to听起来很老套很不自然 所以我建议你别用
69in this way.这边
70So to review, ought to has the same meaning as should, but a different form.因此,为了审查,应该具有同样的含义,但形式不同。
71It's also more formal and less common.也比较正式和少见.
72Let's look at our next verb, part three, how to use supposed to.让我们来看看我们的下一个动词, 第三部分,如何使用应该。
73Supposed to is similar to should, but there's an important difference.应该是和应该相似的,但有重要的区别.
74Look at these two sentences.观此二句.
75I should be there at nine.我九点就到
76I'm supposed to be there at nine.我九点就到了
77Can you see the difference in meaning?你能看到意义上的区别吗?
78If not, here's a clue.如果没有,这里有一个线索。
79Both sentences mean that someone thinks it's important for you to be there at nine.两句都意味着有人认为你9点到那里很重要.
80The important question is, who thinks so?重要的是,谁这么认为?
81The first sentence, I should be there at nine, means you think this is important.第一句,我应该在九点, 这意味着你认为这是重要的。
82It's important for you personally to be there at nine.九点亲自到场很重要
83The second sentence, I'm supposed to be there at nine, means someone else thinks it's important第二句,我应该9点就到 意思是别人觉得很重要
84for you to be there at nine.让你9点到那里
85You might not care, and using supposed to suggests you probably don't.你可能不在乎 利用这个暗示你可能不在乎
86For example, imagine your boss organises a meeting for nine one morning.比如,想象一下你的老板 组织一个9个上午的会议。
87You know the meeting is going to be a waste of time.你知道会议会是浪费时间。
88Your boss will talk about a load of pointless stuff, and the meeting will go on much longer than it needs to.你老板会说一堆毫无意义的东西 开会的时间会比它需要的时间长很多
89However, your boss thinks it's important that everyone attends.不过,你老板认为每个人都要出席
90So you might say, I'm supposed to go to the meeting at nine.这么说吧 我九点要去开会
91In this case, the meeting is not important to you, but it is important to someone else,在这种情况下,会议对你们来说并不重要,但对别人来说很重要,
92your boss.你们的老板
93This is a good example of when you might use supposed to.这是一个很好的例子,你可能应该使用。
94Let's do one more example.再举一个例子
95Imagine we're at a wedding, and I'm wearing jeans and an old t-shirt.想象一下我们在婚礼上 我穿着牛仔裤和一件旧T恤
96You say, you should have worn something more formal.你说,你应该穿 更正式的东西。
97You are supposed to wear something more formal.你应该穿更正式的衣服
98Can you tell the difference now?你现在能分辨清楚了吗?
99In the first sentence, with should, you're criticising me directly.在第一句中 你直接批评我
100You think I look too scruffy, and that I made a mistake by dressing too informally.你觉得我看起来太粗糙, 我犯了一个错误,因为穿得太非正式。
101In the second sentence, with supposed to, you're suggesting that you don't personally在第二句中,你暗示你不是个人
102care about my appearance, but other people might expect me to dress more formally.关心我的外表, 但其他人可能会希望我穿得更正式。
103There's one more way to use supposed to.还有一种方法可以使用
104Look at an example.观一譬喻.
105I was supposed to finish this essay yesterday.我昨天应该写完这篇文章的
106Can you tell what this means?你明白这意味着什么吗?
107It means that you didn't finish your essay, and you don't really want to finish your这意味着你没有完成你的论文, 你不是真的想要完成你的
108essay.论文。
109This shows you another common way to use supposed to.这显示了另一种常见的用法
110Use it to talk about things you don't want to do, or things which you aren't planning用它来谈你不想做的事 或者你没有计划的事情
111{\fn黑体\fs22\bord1\shad0\3aHBE\4aH00\fscx67\fscy66\2cHFFFFFF\3cH808080}我们得去
112For example, I shouldn't come with you to the cinema.比如,我不该和你一起去电影院
113I'm supposed to be revising.我应该修订。
114I'm not revising, and I don't want to.我不修订,我也不想
115In fact, maybe I will come to the cinema.事实上,也许我会来电影院。
116I'm supposed to wear a tie, but hardly anyone in the office actually does.我本来要打领带的 但办公室里几乎没人会打领带
117I don't want to wear a tie.我不想穿领带。
118I don't care about wearing one.亦不着一身.
119To review, supposed to has a similar meaning to should, but while should expresses what为了审查,应该有类似的含义,但应该表达什么
120you think is the right thing to do, supposed to expresses what other people think is the你认为这样做是正确的, 应该表达什么别人认为是
121right thing to do.这是正确的事情。
122Let's move on.让我们继续前进。
123Part four.第四编.
124How to use had better.如何使用有更好的。
125Again, let's start with a pair of sentences.复次先标一对句.
126You should finish everything today.你今天应该把一切都做完
127You'd better finish everything today.你最好今天把一切都做完
128Can you tell the difference?你能分辨出不同吗?
129Here's a clue.这里有一个线索。
130Using had better gives more information than just using should.使用比使用更能提供更多信息。
131What extra information am I communicating if I use had better instead of should?如果我用得更好,我还能传递什么额外信息?
132Had better expresses a warning or a threat, like should you're giving advice or expressing最好表达警告或威胁 就像你给建议或表达
133your opinion about the right thing to do.你对正确做法的看法
134However, with had better, you're also saying that something bad will happen if the other然而,有了更好的,你 也说坏事会发生,如果另一个
135person doesn't listen to you.人不听从你。
136So, if I say, you should finish everything today, using should suggests that you have所以,如果我说,你应该完成今天的一切, 使用应该说明你有
137a choice.一个选择。
138I think it's better if you finish everything today, but I don't think it's necessary.我认为你今天最好把一切都做完 但我不认为有必要
139But if I say, you'd better finish everything today, I'm suggesting you don't really have但是如果我说,你最好今天完成所有的事, 我建议你不是真的有
140a choice, because if you don't do what I say, something bad will happen.一个选择,因为如果你不按我说的做, 坏的事情会发生。
141With had better, you can even put the bad consequences into your sentence, like this.有了更好的,你甚至可以把 坏后果在你的句子,像这样。
142You'd better finish everything today, or the boss won't be happy.你最好今天完成一切 否则老板会不高兴的
143Let's look at some more examples.让我们看看更多的例子。
144You'd better leave now, or you'll miss your train.你最好马上离开 否则会错过火车的
145He'd better apologise, or I'll never talk to him again.他最好道歉 否则我再也不和他说话了
146Sometimes, the bad consequence is a kind of threat, like this.有时,坏后果是 一种威胁,像这样。
147You'd better be on time, or you could lose your job.你最好准时 否则你可能会失业
148However, it can just be a way to motivate the other person to do what you say.然而,这可以只是一种激励他人按你说的去做的方法.
149You'd better finish everything today, because you won't have time tomorrow.你最好今天完成一切 因为你明天没有时间了
150But even if you don't put the bad consequences into your sentence, the idea is still there.但即使你不把坏后果 放在你的句子, 想法仍然在那里。
151If I say, you'd better be on time, you would still understand that something bad will happen如果我说,你最好准时, 你还是会明白,坏事会发生的
152if you're not on time, even though I'm not saying what the bad thing is.如果你不准时, 即使我不说什么是坏事。
153Let's do a review.做个回顾
154We use the verbs should, ought to, supposed to, and had better to say what you or other我们使用动词应该,应该,应该, 并最好说出你或其他
155people think is the right thing to do.人们认为这样做是正确的。
156This means these verbs express advice, opinion, criticism, or, for had better, warnings or这意味着这些动词表达建议、意见、批评,或者说,更好的话,表示警告或
157threats.威胁。
158Should and ought to have the same meaning, although ought to is much more formal and应该而且应该具有同样的含义,尽管应该更加正式,而且
159is not commonly used in spoken English.通用英语。
160Supposed to refers to what other people think is right, while should expresses what you应该是指别人认为对的东西 同时应该表达你的意思
161think is right.认为是正确的。
162Had better expresses the idea that something bad will happen if you don't do what I say.最好表达一个想法,如果你不照我说的做 坏事就会发生
163This is why had better can also be used to make threats or to give someone a warning.因此,最好也可以用来威胁或警告他人。
164That's the end of the lesson.师於此毕.
165I hope it was helpful.我希望这有帮助。
166Want more practice with this topic?还要练习这个话题吗?
167请检查access-date=中的日期值 (帮助) Oxford Online English bot com网站上的完整版课目.
168Thanks for watching.谢谢你的观看。
169See you next time.下次见
该视频共有字幕 169 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P17 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p17 16. 16. English Grammar 16.Adjective Order in English (P17)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Oh, hello. I'm Ollie. Welcome to Oxford Online English. Sorry, I'm just standing here. I'm哦,哈罗。 我是奥利。 欢迎来到牛津在线英语。 对不起,我只是站在这里。 и琌
0:08drinking a cup of strong Italian black coffee. Oh, wait. Is it black Italian strong coffee?喝杯意大利浓黑咖啡 单单 是黑意大利浓咖啡吗?
0:16Hmm, that doesn't sound right. Italian black strong coffee? Hmm. Anyway, in this lesson,嗯,这听起来不对。 意大利黑浓咖啡? 是吗? 总之,在这个教训中,
0:25you can learn how to put adjectives in the right order. Let's go back to the example可以学习如何将形容词按正确的顺序排列. 让我们回到例子
0:32I was having so many problems with. You want to use the words coffee, black, Italian and我有很多问题 你想用咖啡、黑、意大利和
0:39strong all together. They can go in many different orders. Which is correct? Strong black Italian强壮在一起。 他们可以按不同顺序行事 这是正确的吗? 强壮的意大利黑人
0:48coffee, strong Italian black coffee, black strong Italian coffee, black Italian strong咖啡 意大利浓黑咖啡 意大利浓黑咖啡 意大利浓黑咖啡
0:56coffee, Italian black strong coffee or Italian strong black coffee. What do you think? Is there咖啡 意大利黑浓咖啡或意大利黑浓咖啡. 你觉得呢? 有没有
1:06only one possibility or is there more than one right answer? Think about it. There is only one只有一种可能性,或者不止一种正确的答案? 考虑一下 只有一个
1:14possibility. Strong black Italian coffee. Do you know why this is the right answer? In English,可能的话。 意大利浓黑咖啡. 你知道为什么这是正确的答案吗? 英语
展开字幕全文（61 条）
序号英文中文
1Oh, hello. I'm Ollie. Welcome to Oxford Online English. Sorry, I'm just standing here. I'm哦,哈罗。 我是奥利。 欢迎来到牛津在线英语。 对不起,我只是站在这里。 и琌
2drinking a cup of strong Italian black coffee. Oh, wait. Is it black Italian strong coffee?喝杯意大利浓黑咖啡 单单 是黑意大利浓咖啡吗?
3Hmm, that doesn't sound right. Italian black strong coffee? Hmm. Anyway, in this lesson,嗯,这听起来不对。 意大利黑浓咖啡? 是吗? 总之,在这个教训中,
4you can learn how to put adjectives in the right order. Let's go back to the example可以学习如何将形容词按正确的顺序排列. 让我们回到例子
5I was having so many problems with. You want to use the words coffee, black, Italian and我有很多问题 你想用咖啡、黑、意大利和
6strong all together. They can go in many different orders. Which is correct? Strong black Italian强壮在一起。 他们可以按不同顺序行事 这是正确的吗? 强壮的意大利黑人
7coffee, strong Italian black coffee, black strong Italian coffee, black Italian strong咖啡 意大利浓黑咖啡 意大利浓黑咖啡 意大利浓黑咖啡
8coffee, Italian black strong coffee or Italian strong black coffee. What do you think? Is there咖啡 意大利黑浓咖啡或意大利黑浓咖啡. 你觉得呢? 有没有
9only one possibility or is there more than one right answer? Think about it. There is only one只有一种可能性,或者不止一种正确的答案? 考虑一下 只有一个
10possibility. Strong black Italian coffee. Do you know why this is the right answer? In English,可能的话。 意大利浓黑咖啡. 你知道为什么这是正确的答案吗? 英语
11when we use several adjectives before a noun, the adjectives have to go in a particular order. Of当我们在名词之前使用几个形容词时,形容词必须按特定的顺序进行. 员额
12course, your meaning will still be clear if you make a mistake with adjective order. It's not a当然,如果你在形容词顺序上犯错,你的意思还是很明确的。 这不是一个
13big problem. However, it is very noticeable, especially to native speakers, if someone makes大问题 但是,如果有人提出:
14a mistake with adjective order. So if you want your English to sound correct and natural,形容词顺序有误 所以,如果你希望你的英语听起来正确和自然,
15you need to learn how to use adjectives in the correct order. Let's start with a simple rule您需要学习如何按照正确的顺序使用形容词。 先说个简单的规矩
16that you can use. Rule number one. Opinions go first, facts go second. The full rules for你可以用来。 规则一。 先是意见,然后是事实。 全部规则
17adjective order, which you'll see in a minute, are complicated and not very practical. However,形容词顺序,在一分钟内你会看到,它很复杂,并不十分实用. 不过,
18there is a simple rule which you can use. Adjectives which describe an opinion go before有一个简单的规则 你可以使用。 描述意见的形容词
19adjectives which describe a fact. For example, adjectives like nice, beautiful, useful or形容事实的形容词。 例如,形容词如美、美、有用或
20delicious all describe opinions. Just because you describe something as delicious, it doesn't所有美味的描述意见。 只是因为你形容的东西是美味的, 它不
21mean that everybody will agree with you. Adjectives like big, new, green or silk describe facts.意思是每个人都同意你的看法 形容词如大,新,绿色或丝绸描述事实.
22Take a second. Try to think of some more adjectives which describe opinions or facts. Think about it.慢着 试着想想一些描述观点或事实的形容词. 考虑一下
23Now, let's see our rule in action with some examples. They live in a beautiful old house on现在,让我们看看我们的规则 与一些例子。 他们住在一个漂亮的老房子上
24the edge of the city. We had some delicious Korean food with some friends. Why are you城市边缘 我们和朋友一起吃了一些美味的韩国菜 为什么是你
25wearing those ugly purple trousers? She has an interesting new perspective on the economic穿那些丑陋的紫色裤子? 她对经济有个有趣的新观点
26situation. In all of these sentences, we use two adjectives before a noun and you can see情况 在所有这些句子中,我们用两个形容词在名词之前,你可以看到
27that the adjective of opinion goes first and the adjective of fact goes second. Rule two. General意见的形容词是第一,事实的形容词是第二。 二条. 常规
28ideas go before specific ideas. There's another general rule which works well if you don't know想法在具体想法之前。 还有一条通则,如果你不知道的话
29the correct word order. Adjectives which describe a general idea go before adjectives which describe正确的单词顺序。 描述一般想法的形容词在描述形容词之前
30a specific idea. For example, if you say a long wooden table, the word long is more general. Many一个具体的想法。 例如,如果说一个长的木桌,那么这个单词就比较笼统. 许多
31things can be long in many different ways. A street can be long. A story or a speech can be long. You事情可以很长 在许多不同的方式。 一个街道可以很长。 一个故事或一个演讲可以很长. 你们
32can have a long day and so on. Wooden is more specific. Generally speaking, something can only可以有一个漫长的一天等等。 木头更具体. 一般说来,有些东西只能
33be wooden if it's actually made of wood. So, we put long first and we say a long wooden table.木头是木头做的 所以,我们先放一个长的木板
34Can you think of any other adjectives which have a general meaning? Adjectives like old, hot or你能想到任何其他具有一般意义的形容词吗? 形容词如老,热或
35small all have a general meaning because they can be used with many different meanings to describe小的都具有一般意义,因为它们可以有很多不同的含义来描述
36many different things. On the other hand, adjectives like green, French or striped are more specific.许多不同的东西。 另一方面,绿色,法语或条纹等形容词则更为具体.
37If something is green, that's quite a specific idea. Okay, let's see this rule in action with如果东西是绿色的, 这是一个相当具体的想法。 好吧,让我们看看这个规则与
38some examples. He works for a small Canadian company. I love these old black and white films.一些例子。 他为一家加拿大小公司工作. 我喜欢这些老黑白电影
39We bought a new leather sofa for the living room. I need to buy a really warm woolly hat. Again,我们买了一个新的皮革沙发 客厅。 我需要买一个非常温暖的羊毛帽。 再说一遍
40we use two adjectives with each noun. In each case, the adjective with a more general meaning我们用两个形容词 每个名词。 在每种情况下,具有更一般意义的形容词
41goes first and the adjective with a more specific meaning goes second. Okay, point three,词首,带有更具体含义的形容词第二。 好吧,第三点,
42let's look at the full rule. We said before that the full rule for adjective order is quite让我们看看完整的规则。 我们之前说过 形容词命令的全部规则是相当的
43complicated. I'm showing you just for your interest. Are you ready? The full rule is opinion,复杂 我给你看只是为了你的兴趣 你准备好了吗? 完整的规则是意见,
44size, other qualities, age, colour or pattern, nationality and then material. Okay, so we could大小、其他品质、年龄、肤色或图案、国籍和材料。 好吧,这样我们就可以
45say, for example, she bought a beautiful long warm new black and white striped Italian silk比如说,她买了一条温暖的意大利丝绸
46scarf. We have opinion, beautiful, a size, long, an other quality, warm, an age, new, a colour,围巾 我们有观点,美丽,大小,长, 另一种品质,温暖,年龄,新,颜色,
47black and white, a pattern, striped, nationality, Italian and the material, silk. So, do you need黑白,一种图案,条纹,国籍,意大利语和材料,丝绸. 所以,你是否需要
48to know this rule? No, not really. First of all, it's too complicated. You can't carry this around知道这个规则? 不,没有。 首先,这太复杂了。 你不能随身携带这个
49in your head and use it when you speak. Secondly, it's very rare that we use more than two or three在你的头上,并在你说话的时候使用它。 第二,我们很少用两三个以上
50adjectives with a noun. It almost never happens. And three, native speakers don't always follow带有名词的形容词. 这几乎永远不会发生。 第三,讲土语的人并不总是跟随
51these rules, especially when there are more than two or three adjectives. So, it doesn't matter so这些规则,特别是在有两三个以上的形容词时. 所以,这不重要
52much what you do in those cases. However, this doesn't mean that adjective order doesn't matter.在那些案子里你所做的很多事 然而,这并不意味着形容词顺序不重要.
53It does. If you make a mistake like, she has black, straight, short hair, this sounds a bit strange,没错 如果你犯了这样的错误, 她有黑色,直,短的头发, 这听起来有点奇怪,
54a bit wrong and native speakers will hear and notice mistakes like these. Okay, part four,有点错 本地人会听到和注意这样的错误 好吧,第四编,
55let's look at some advice you can use and let's review what we've talked about. Point one, trust让我们看看一些建议 你可以使用 让我们回顾我们已经谈论。 第一点,信任
56your instinct. If it sounds right, it probably is. If it sounds wrong, it probably is. Point two,你的直觉。 如果这听起来是正确的, 它可能是。 如果这听起来不对,它可能是。 第二点
57remember the basic rules. General before specific, opinion before fact. These rules can help you in记住基本规则。 一般先具体,意见先事实. 这些规则可以帮助你
58most of the situations you will meet in everyday speaking. That's the end of the lesson. Thanks大部分情况你每天都会见面 师於此毕. 谢谢
59very much for watching. I hope you found it useful. Do you want some more practice with this? Well,非常喜欢观看。 我希望你觉得有用 你想再练习一下吗? 那个
60check out the full version of the lesson on our website, OxfordOnlineEnglish.com. You can also校对:Soup 你也可以这样
61see many other free English lessons. That's all for today. Thanks again. I'll see you next time. Bye bye.参见许多其他免费英语课程. 今天就到这里吧 再次感谢。 下次见 再见
该视频共有字幕 61 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P18 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p18 17. 17. English Grammar 17.Present Perfect Verb Tense (P18)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Maria.嗨,我是玛利亚。
0:02Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
0:05In this lesson, you can learn about the present perfect verb tense in English.在这个课中,你可以学习英语中目前完美的动词紧张.
0:10Hey Daniel, how long have you been a teacher?丹尼尔,你当老师多久了?
0:13I've been a teacher for four years now.我今当师四年.
0:16Have you taught many lessons on the present perfect?你学过很多关于目前完美的课程吗?
0:18Of course!当然
0:19I've taught hundreds.我教过几百人
0:21How many have you taught this week?这星期你教了多少?
0:23I haven't taught any this week yet.这个礼拜我还没有教过
展开字幕全文（269 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Maria.嗨,我是玛利亚。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
3In this lesson, you can learn about the present perfect verb tense in English.在这个课中,你可以学习英语中目前完美的动词紧张.
4Hey Daniel, how long have you been a teacher?丹尼尔,你当老师多久了?
5I've been a teacher for four years now.我今当师四年.
6Have you taught many lessons on the present perfect?你学过很多关于目前完美的课程吗?
7Of course!当然
8I've taught hundreds.我教过几百人
9How many have you taught this week?这星期你教了多少?
10I haven't taught any this week yet.这个礼拜我还没有教过
11This is the first one.这是第一个。
12Does your language have anything like the present perfect?你的语言有像现在这样完美的吗?
13Many languages don't have a similar verb form.许多语言没有类似的动词形式.
14This can make it more difficult to use the present perfect correctly in English.这可以使现在的完美在英语中正确使用更加困难.
15In this lesson, you'll learn how to use the present perfect verb form in different在这个课中,你会学会如何使用 不同的当前完美的动词形式
16ways.办法
17Let's start with two basic but important points.我们先谈两个基本但重要的要点。
18Try to keep these in mind as you watch.尽量记住,当你看。
19First, the present perfect connects the past and the present.第一,目前的完美将过去和现在联系在一起。
20Secondly, think about the name present perfect.第二,想想现在的名字完美无缺
21It's a present verb form.现时动词形式.
22It tells you something about now.它告诉你一些关于现在的事情。
23Even though you often use the present perfect to talk about things in the past, it's still尽管你经常用现在的完美 来谈论过去的事情,但它仍然是
24a present form.a 本表。
25It gives you some information about the present.它给你一些关于现在的信息。
26Let's start by looking at how to form the present perfect tense.让我们从如何形成现在的完美紧张开始。
27The present perfect is formed with have or has, plus a past participle.现今的完美是 与有或有, 加上一个过去的聚会。
28Have and has are often contracted.曾经和曾经经常签订合同。
29For example, I finished everything.例如,我完成了一切。
30She's just left.她刚刚离开。
31We've been here for hours.我们已经在这里好几个小时了。
32Past participles usually look the same as the past tense.过去的participles 通常看起来与过去的紧张。
33For example, finish, finished, finished.例如,完成,完成,完成.
34Leave, left, left.左边,左边,左边
35However, many common verbs are irregular.然而,许多常见的动词是不规则的.
36That means you need to know irregular verbs to use the present perfect.这意味着你需要知道不规则的动词来使用现在的完美.
37There's also a continuous form of the present perfect, with been, plus a verb with ing.还有一种连续的形式是现在的完美,与过去,外加带有ing的动词.
38For example, I've been cleaning the house all morning.例如,我整个早上都在打扫房子.
39He's been acting very strangely lately.他最近表现得很怪异
40However, in this lesson, we're going to focus on the simple verb form.然而,在这个课中,我们要专注于简单的动词形式.
41Make negatives by adding not after have or has.通过在有或有之后不添加来做负数.
42Again, this form is often contracted.同样,这种表格常常是订约的。
43For example, I haven't seen anything like that before.比如说,我以前从未见过这样的事情.
44He hasn't helped at all.他一点帮助都没有
45They haven't given me much information.他们没有给我多少信息。
46Make questions by moving have or has before the subject.通过移动提出问题 或有在主题之前。
47Have you booked the tickets yet?你订票了吗?
48How long has your sister been a vet?你姐姐当兽医多久了?
49How many people have you told about this?你告诉过多少人?
50Next, let's look at how to actually use the present perfect, and what it means.接下来,让我们看看如何实际使用现在的完美,以及它的含义.
51Have you ever been to Argentina?你去过阿根廷吗?
52No, I've never even been to South America.不,我从来没有去过南美。
53I'd love to go.我很乐意去。
54Have you ever been skydiving?你跳伞过吗?
55Yeah, actually, it was amazing.是的,其实,这是惊人的。
56Have you tried kangaroo before?你试过袋鼠吗?
57No, never.没有,从来没有。
58What's it like?怎么样?
59How many times have you seen this film?你看过多少次这部电影?
60More than once.复次无量.
61So, twice?那么,两次?
62Three times?三次吗?
63OK,OK。 OK,OK。 OK。
64I've seen it eight times.已见八遍.
65Eight?八个?
66You can use the present perfect to talk about life experiences.你可以用现在的完美来谈论生活经验.
67You've just heard different examples of this.你们刚听到不同的例子
68Do you remember the questions we asked?你还记得我们问的问题吗?
69This is common with questions like…这和诸如...
70Have you ever d-d-d?你有没有D -d -d?
71Have you d-d-d before?你以前做过吗?
72How many times have you d-d-d?多少次你d -d -d吗?
73For example, have you ever seen a ghost?比如,你见过鬼吗?
74Have you met Ahmet before?你以前见过亚美特吗?
75How many times have you bought something and never worn it?你买过多少件东西,从没穿过?
76In all these questions, you don't say when.在所有这些问题中,你不说什么时候。
77You don't use a time reference, like this year or recently.你不使用时间参考, 像今年或最近。
78That's because all these questions are asking about your whole life.这是因为所有这些问题 都在问你的整个生活。
79You don't say it, but the meaning is there.你不说,但意义是存在的。
80Try something now.现在试试看
81Pause the video and write down three questions.暂停录像,写下三个问题。
82Use your own ideas.利用你自己的想法。
83Then, write your own answers.那就自己写答案
84Pause the video and do it now.暂停录像,现在就做
85Now, let's look at another way to use the present perfect.现在,让我们看看另一种方法 用现在的完美。
86Have you called about the internet yet?你打过电话吗?
87I haven't.我没有。
88I'm sorry.对不起
89I've been so busy all day.我一整天都这么忙
90You said you'd do it today.你说你今天会做
91I haven't been able to do any work since Monday.周一以后我再也无法工作了
92I've tried to call several times this week, but they always say我本周打过几次电话 但他们说
93that they can only talk to the account holder.他们只能和账户持有人说话。
94That's you.这就是你。
95I know.我知道,我记得
96I'm sorry.对不起
97I just haven't had time all week.我只是整个星期都没有时间
98So, what can I help you with?有什么需要帮忙的吗?
99Well, I haven't been feeling well recently.最近感觉不太好
100What are your symptoms?你的症状是什么?
101I've had a really bad cough for a couple of weeks now.我已经咳嗽了几个星期了
102This week, I've started to feel really slow and tired,这周我开始觉得很慢很累
103and I haven't had much appetite.我没有太多的胃口。
104Have you had any nausea, headaches?你有恶心,头痛吗?
105No, not really.不,没有。
106We'll do some tests and see what we can do.我们会做一些测试 看看我们能做些什么
107You can use the present perfect to talk about a time period,你可以用现在的完美 来谈论一个时间段,
108which is unfinished.还没有完成。
109Remember that the present perfect connects the present and the past.记住,现在的完美 连接现在和过去。
110For example, take today.譬如今日摄受.
111Today is an unfinished time period.今天是一个未完成的时期。
112It started, but it hasn't finished yet.它开始,但还没有完成。
113You heard several other unfinished time periods in the dialogues.你在对话中听到其他几个未完成的时间。
114Can you remember any?你还记得吗?
115Here are some examples.以下是一些例子。
116I've been so busy all day.我一整天都这么忙
117I haven't been able to do any work since Monday.周一以后我再也无法工作了
118I haven't been feeling well recently.最近感觉不太好
119This week, I've started to feel really slow and tired.这周,我开始觉得 真的很慢和累了。
120Other unfinished time periods include things like this week,其他未完成的时期包括本周,
121this month, this year, and so on.这个月,今年,等等。
122So, if you're talking about an unfinished time period,所以,如果你说的是一个未完成的时间段,
123you can use the present perfect.你可以使用现在的完美。
124To make this clearer, compare unfinished time with finished time.为了更明确这一点,将未完成时间与已完成时间进行比较.
125I've been so busy all day.我一整天都这么忙
126I was so busy yesterday.我昨天忙得要命,我还不知道
127I haven't been able to do any work since Monday.周一以后我再也无法工作了
128I wasn't able to do any work last week.上周我无法做任何工作。
129I haven't felt well recently.最近我感觉不太好
130I didn't feel well last weekend.我上周感觉不舒服
131I've had a really bad cough for a couple of weeks now.我已经咳嗽了几个星期了
132I had a really bad cough last year.去年我咳嗽严重
133When you talk about a finished time period, like last year or yesterday,当你谈论一个结束的时间段, 像去年或昨天,
134you need to use the past simple.你需要用过去的简单。
135You can't use the present perfect to talk about finished time periods.你不能用现在的完美 来谈论完成的时间段。
136Sometimes, you can choose to use the present perfect or the past simple有时候,你可以选择使用现在的完美或过去简单的
137with an unfinished time period.时段未完成。
138For example, I've worked hard today.譬如我今勤劳.
139I worked hard today.我今天很努力地工作着
140These are both possible, but there's a small difference in meaning.两者都是可能的,但意义上存在小的差别.
141Do you know what?你知道吗?
142The first sentence with the present perfect suggests that today is not finished yet.第一句用现在的完美说明今天还没有结束。
143Maybe you have more work to do.也许你还有工作要做
144The second sentence with the past simple第二句与过去的简单
145suggests that today is finished.说明今天已经结束了
146It's the evening, and you're relaxing after a long day.今天是晚上 一天过后你就放松了
147Let's practice.让我们练习。
148Look at three incomplete sentences.观三句不全.
149I haven't da-da-da today.我今未达.
150I've da-da-da a lot this week.这周我有很多事要做
151I haven't da-da-da enough recently.最近我还没到
152Can you complete the sentences to make them true about you?你能完成句子 让他们对你真实吗?
153For example, you could say something like例如,你可以说一些类似
154I haven't eaten any fruit today.我今未尝食果.
155I haven't watched TV today.我今天没看电视
156I haven't had a shower today.我今天没洗澡
157Pause the video and write down three sentences.暂停视频并写下三句.
158OK, how was that?怎么样?
159Let's look at one more way to use the present perfect tense.让我们再看看一个方法 用现在的完美紧张。
160How long have you lived here?你住在这里多久了?
161For about a year.大约一年。
162Have you two known each other long?你们认识很久了吗?
163Yeah, since we were at primary school.是啊,因为我们在小学。
164How long have they been married?他们结婚多久了?
165I'm not sure.我不太确定 说不定
166I think for a couple of years.我想有几年时间了
167Maybe not even that long.也许没有那么长。
168Nice jacket.不错的外套。
169Is it new?新的吗?
170This?这个?
171No, I've had it for years.不,我受够了
172You can use the present perfect to talk about something which started in the past你可以用现在的完美 来谈谈过去的事
173and is still true now.现在仍然是真实的。
174For example, how long have you lived here?例如,你在这里住了多久?
175This means that you still live here now.这意味着你现在仍然住在这里。
176Have you two known each other long?你们认识很久了吗?
177You still know each other now.你们现在还认识
178How long have they been married?他们结婚多久了?
179They're still married now.他们现在还结婚了
180I've had this jacket for years.我穿这件外套好几年了
181I still have it now.我现在还有这个
182Be careful.小心点
183There's a common mistake which English learners make here.这里的英语学习者犯了一个常见的错误.
184It looks like this.看起来像这样
185I've bought this jacket for three years.这件外套我买了三年了
186Can you explain why this is wrong?你能解释为什么这样不对吗?
187It's wrong because the action of buying the jacket is finished and in the past.这是错误的,因为购买夹克的动作已经完成,而且在过去.
188You could say, I bought this jacket three years ago.你可以说 我三年前买了这件外套
189The action of having the jacket is not finished.穿外套的动作还没完成
190It started in the past, when you bought it, and it's still true now,它开始于过去, 当你买它, 现在仍然是真实的,
191because you still have the jacket now.因为你现在还有外套
192Again, it's useful to compare the present perfect and the past simple.同样地,比较一下现在的完美和过去的简单是有用的.
193I've lived here for about a year.我在这里住了大约一年。
194I still live here now.我现在还住在这里
195I lived there for about a year.我在那里住了大约一年。
196I don't live there now.我现在不住在那里。
197How long have they been married?他们结婚多久了?
198They're still married now.他们现在还结婚了
199How long were they married?他们结婚多久了?
200They're not married now.他们还没有结婚
201Okay, your turn to practice.好吧,轮到你练习。
202Look at three incomplete sentences.观三句不全.
203I've had for it.我受够了
204I've lived in since.从此入住.
205I've been.我去过
206Your job is to complete these sentences so that they're true for you.你的工作就是完成这些句子 这样它们才是真的
207Pause the video, think about what you could say, and write down three sentences.暂停录像,想想你能说什么 写下三句
208If you aren't sure, review this section and use the examples you've seen to help you.如果你不确定,请审查这一节,并用你看到的例子来帮助你.
209How was that?怎么样?
210Hopefully easy.希望很简单
211Let's look at one more way you can use the present perfect.让我们再看看一个方法 你可以使用现在的完美。
212What(?
213I've eaten too many cakes, and now I feel terrible.我吃太多蛋糕了 现在我感觉糟透了
214How many did you have?你有多少个?
215I had six or seven.我有六七个。
216That was smart.真聪明
217But they were so tasty.但是它们很美味
218Have you lost something?你丢了什么吗?
219Yeah, I've lost my phone.是啊,我丢了手机。
220I put it down somewhere, and now I can't find it.我把它放在某个地方 现在找不到了
221When did you last use it?你最后一次使用是什么时候?
222I don't know.师曰.
223I had it last night for sure.我昨晚肯定吃过了
224Can you call me?你能给我打电话吗?
225Oh no, the cat's been sick on the couch.哦,不,猫生病在沙发上。
226Again?又来了?
227That's the third time this week.这是本周第三次了
228Can you clean it up?你能清理干净吗?
229I cleaned it last time.我上次清理过了
230You can use the present perfect to talk about things in the past你可以用现在的完美 来谈论过去的事情
231if there's still a result in the present.如果现在还有结果的话
232For example.譬如说.
233I've eaten too many cakes, and now I feel terrible.我吃太多蛋糕了 现在我感觉糟透了
234I ate the cakes in the past, but the result, feeling terrible, is still true now.过去我吃蛋糕,但结果,感觉很糟糕,现在仍然是真实的.
235I've lost my phone.我手机丢了
236I lost my phone sometime in the past, but the result,过去某天我手机丢了 但结果
237I can't find my phone, is still true now.我找不到我的手机,现在还是真实的。
238The cat's been sick on the couch.猫病在沙发上.
239The cat was sick on the couch in the past, but the result,过去猫在沙发上生病了 但结果
240the sofa needs cleaning, is still true now.沙发需要清洁,现在仍然是真实的。
241You can also see something useful in these dialogues.您也可以在这些对话中看到一些有用的东西。
242Often, you start a conversation using the present perfect,你经常用现在的完美开始交谈
243and then switch to the past simple.然后切换到过去简单。
244For example.譬如说.
245I've eaten too many cakes.我吃过太多蛋糕了
246How many did you have?你有多少个?
247I've lost my phone.我手机丢了
248When did you last use it?你最后一次使用是什么时候?
249This is a very common pattern in English conversations.这是英语对话中非常常见的规律.
250Again, let's compare the present perfect to the past simple.再次,让我们比较一下现在的完美 和过去的简单。
251I've lost my phone.我手机丢了
252I can't find it now.我现在找不到了
253I lost my phone.我手机丢了
254Maybe I found it again, or maybe I gave up and had to get a new phone.或许我又找到它了 或者我放弃了 不得不换个电话
255This sentence only tells you about the past, so you can't be sure what happened.这个句子只讲过去的事,所以不能确定到底发生了什么.
256The cat's been sick on the couch.猫病在沙发上.
257The couch needs cleaning, and maybe the cat needs to go to the vet.沙发需要清洗, 也许猫需要去兽医。
258The cat was sick on the couch.猫病在沙发上.
259It's safe to sit on the couch again.又安住沙发.
260Now you know the most common ways to use the present perfect tense in English.现在你知道最常用的方法 用现在的完美紧张的英语。
261We have a question for you.我们有一个问题要问你。
262Can you name all the other verb tenses in English?你能用英语说出其他所有动词吗?
263Which one do you find the most difficult to understand?你觉得哪一个最难理解?
264Let us know in the comments.在评论中告诉我们。
265Want more practice for this topic?还要练习吗?
266请检查access-date=中的日期值 (帮助) Oxfordonlineenglish.com网站上的问答.
267There's a link before the video if you're watching on YouTube.如果你在YouTube上观看,视频之前有一个链接.
268Thanks for watching!谢谢你的观看!
269See you next time!下次见!
该视频共有字幕 269 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P19 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p19 18. 18. English Grammar 18.How to Talk About Time in English (P19)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Oli.嗨,我是奥利。
0:02Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
0:04In this lesson, you can learn how to talk about time in English.在这个课中,你可以学习如何用英语谈论时间.
0:09You'll learn how to use prepositions, conjunctions, and other useful words and phrases to talk你会学会如何使用预设,组合, 以及其他有用的词和短语说话
0:16about time.是时候了
0:18If you're watching on YouTube, don't forget to check out the full version of this lesson如果你在YouTube上看,别忘了看这个课的完整版本
0:24on our website, Oxford Online English dot com.我们的网站,牛津在线英语点数com。
0:28The full lesson contains the script and a quiz to help you practice what you've learned.完整的课中包含剧本和问答,帮助你练习你学到的东西.
0:35Go to Oxford Online English dot com and try it.去牛津在线英语点数com 试试看
0:40The things you'll learn in this lesson will help you in many situations, telling stories,在这个课上你会学到的东西 会帮助你 在许多情况下,讲故事,
展开字幕全文（291 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Oli.嗨,我是奥利。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
3In this lesson, you can learn how to talk about time in English.在这个课中,你可以学习如何用英语谈论时间.
4You'll learn how to use prepositions, conjunctions, and other useful words and phrases to talk你会学会如何使用预设,组合, 以及其他有用的词和短语说话
5about time.是时候了
6If you're watching on YouTube, don't forget to check out the full version of this lesson如果你在YouTube上看,别忘了看这个课的完整版本
7on our website, Oxford Online English dot com.我们的网站,牛津在线英语点数com。
8The full lesson contains the script and a quiz to help you practice what you've learned.完整的课中包含剧本和问答,帮助你练习你学到的东西.
9Go to Oxford Online English dot com and try it.去牛津在线英语点数com 试试看
10The things you'll learn in this lesson will help you in many situations, telling stories,在这个课上你会学到的东西 会帮助你 在许多情况下,讲故事,
11saying when things happen, talking about the future, describing how long something lasted,说当事情发生 谈论未来 描述事情持续了多久
12and many more.还有更多
13Let's start with one of the most basic ways to talk about time.我们先说说时间的最基本的方法之一
14When's her birthday?她什么时候生日?
15How many times have you asked me that?你问过我多少次了?
16It's in December.十二月'.
17Are you sure?你确定吗?
18I thought it was in January.以为一月.
19No, it's definitely in December, on the 23rd.不,肯定在12月,23号
20But that can't be right.但是,这不可能是正确的。
21Her birthday was on a Saturday last year, and this year, the 23rd, is a Wednesday.她的生日是去年的星期六 今年23号是星期三
22You're thinking of her birthday party.你在考虑她的生日派对
23She had it on the weekend before her birthday, don't you remember?她生日前的周末就有了,你不记得了吗?
24Our car broke down and we got there at 11.我们的车坏了,我们11点到达那里。
25Oh yeah, and then we had to stay the night there because we couldn't drive back.哦,是的,然后我们不得不呆在那里的夜晚 因为我们不能开车回去。
26That's right.没错
27Then, in the morning, remember that we had to try to call a tow truck and we couldn't然后,早上,记住,我们不得不尝试 呼叫拖车,我们不能
28find anyone who was working?找到有人在工作吗?
29Of course.当然
30What a nightmare.真是个噩梦
31What time did we get home in the end?我们什么时候回家的?
32Five?五个?
33Six?六个?
34Evening, but not too late.晚上,但不会太晚。
35Maybe at six, yeah?也许6点,是吗?
36Was that the second time we went?那是我们第二次去吗?
37No.没有
38We've been three times.我们去过三次了
39The first was in 2015, we were away in 2016, and then we went in 2017 and 2018.第一次是在2015年,2016年离开,之后又在2017年和2018年出道.
40So, if we go this year, it'll be the fourth time.因此,如果我们今年去,这将是第四次。
41Has she invited us?她邀请我们了吗?
42Yeah, she's having her party on the Friday before her birthday.她生日前周五要开派对
43So, on the 18th?在18号?
44That's right.没错
45In the dialogue, you heard many examples of using at, on and in to talk about when things在对话中,你听到很多例子 使用,在和在谈论 当事物
46are.对
47Can you remember any?你还记得吗?
48Do you know any rules about using at, on and in to talk about time?你知道在时间、时间和时间方面有什么规则吗?
49Use in for months and years.数月用之.
50For example, in December, in January, in 2016, or in 1999.例如12月,1月,2016年,或1999年.
51You can also use in for parts of the day, in the morning, in the afternoon, or in the也可以在白天、早晨、下午或下午使用。
52evening.边
53Use on with days and dates.使用天数和日期。
54For example, on Saturday, on Friday, on the 3rd, or on the 20th of November.例如周六,周五,3日,或11月20日.
55Use at with times, for example, at 6 o'clock, at 5.30, or at 12.45.与时俱用,例如6点,5点30分,或12点45分.
56There are a few exceptions and flexible cases.有一些例外和灵活的情况。
57In British English, you say at the weekend and at Christmas, but in American English,在英国英语,你说在周末和圣诞节, 但在美国英语,
58you say on the weekend and on Christmas.你说周末和圣诞节
59Also, although you say in the morning, in the afternoon and in the evening, you also而且,虽然你说在早晨,下午和晚上,你也
60say at night.说在晚上。
61It's an exception.这是例外。
62Let's practise quickly.我们快点练习吧
63We're going to ask you four questions.'四问.
64After each question, pause the video and answer with a full sentence.每问后,暂停视频,以满句回答.
65Ready?准备好了吗?
66When's your birthday?你的生日是什么时候?
67What time did you get up this morning?你早上几点起床的?
68When's the last time you went on vacation?你最后一次度假是什么时候?
69When's your next day off?你第二天什么时候放假?
70How was that?怎么样?
71Could you answer all the questions?你能回答所有的问题吗?
72Of course, there are many possible answers, but here are some suggestions.当然,有许多可能的答案,但这里有一些建议。
73You could say, My birthday's on the 8th of June.你可以说,我的生日是六月八日。
74You could say, I got up at half past seven.你可以说 我七点半起床
75You could say, The last time I went on vacation was in May.你可以说 我上次度假是在五月
76You could say, My next day off is on Saturday.你可以说,我的第二天是星期六。
77Could you answer all the questions?你能回答所有的问题吗?
78Remember that you can go back and review this section if you need to.记住,如果需要,你可以回去审查这一节。
79Let's move on to our next point.我们继续讲下一个问题。
80I can't work like this.我不能这样工作
81This is ridiculous.这太荒谬了
82What's the problem now?现在有什么问题?
83The network's not working again.网络又不工作了.
84I've spent the whole morning dealing with this.我花了整个上午处理这个。
85I can't even log in.我甚至不能登录。
86How am I supposed to work?我该怎么工作?
87Have you called the IT department?你给IT部门打电话了吗?
88Of course.当然
89They're useless.没用的
90They told me it'd be fixed in an hour, but it wasn't.他们告诉我一个小时后就修好了 但是没有
91I called again, and they promised that it'd be done by midday at the latest.我又打过电话 他们答应最晚中午就完成
92But now it's nearly two, and so far nothing seems to have happened.但是现在差不多是两件事了,到目前为止似乎什么都没发生.
93Well, I'm sure it'll be fixed in the next few hours.嗯,我相信它会固定 在接下来的几个小时。
94Can't you do some other work in the meantime?你就不能同时做点别的工作吗?
95I need the image files, which are in a shared folder.我需要在共享文件夹里的图像文件
96I promised my client this would be done by the end of today.我答应我的委托人今天就搞定了
97Now, I'm going to have to look back, because we can't make our computer systems work.现在,我必须回头看,因为我们不能让我们的计算机系统发挥作用。
98You should take this more seriously, you know.你应该更认真点,你知道的。
99I am taking it seriously, but we don't have these problems all the time.我认真对待,但我们没有 这些问题一直。
100Until recently, everything worked pretty well, right?直到最近,一切都很顺利,对吧?
101I wouldn't say that.我不会这么说的
102We've had at least five days this month when things weren't available for an hour这个月我们至少有五天了 一小时没空
103or more.或超过。
104In the long run, that lost time adds up.从长远来看,失去的时间会增加。
105I agree.и種
106It's not ideal, but look, in the short term, there's not much I can do.这不是理想的,但从短期来看,我无能为力。
107I'll talk to the IT department and try to move things along.我会跟IT部门谈谈 试着把事情解决掉
108I can also call your client to explain the situation and apologise, if you like.如果你愿意,我也可以给你的委托人打电话 解释情况并道歉
109How does that sound?怎么样?
110Sounds good.听起来不错
111OK, so we'll talk in an hour, and I'll give you an update.好,我们一小时后再谈,我给你个最新消息
112Sure.当然
113In this section, you're going to learn how to use the prepositions in, by and until.在这个节中,你将学会如何使用 预先位置,通过和直到。
114In the dialogue, you saw a different way to use in.在对话中,你看到了一种不同的使用方式。
115Do you remember what you heard?你还记得你听到的吗?
116You heard, they told me it'd be fixed in an hour, and we'll talk in an hour.你听到了,他们说一个小时后就修好了 我们一小时后再谈
117What does in mean here?这是什么意思?
118You can use in plus a time period to say when something will happen.你可以用加时段来表示什么时候会发生什么.
119It's most often used to talk about the future, although you might use it in the past if you're它最常用来谈论未来, 虽然你可能在过去使用它,如果你是
120talking about what someone said.谈论别人说的话
121For example, we'll arrive in three days.例如,我们将在三天内到达。
122This means that we'll arrive three days from now.这意味着我们三天后就会到
123If today is Tuesday, I mean we'll arrive on Friday.如果今天是星期二,我们周五就到
124Here's another example.这是另一个例子。
125Your car will be ready in 30 minutes.你的车30分钟后就准备好了
126That means, if it's one o'clock now, your car will be ready at 1.30.这意味着,如果现在是1点, 你的车会在1点30分准备好。
127There are also phrases with in, like in the short term or in the long run.还有一些短语带有,比如短期或长期.
128In the short term means you're talking about the near future.从短期来看,你指的是近期。
129In the long run has the opposite meaning – you're talking about the distant future.从长远来看,有相反的意义——你在谈论遥远的未来.
130For example, in the short term, he needs to focus on getting out of debt.例如,在短期内,他需要专注于摆脱债务.
131This means that in the near future, paying off his debt should be his priority.这意味着在最近的将来,偿还他的债务应该是他的优先事项。
132Next, let's think about by and until.接下来,让我们想一想,直到。
133Do you know the difference between these two prepositions?你知道这两个预设的区别吗?
134Look at two sentences.看两句.
135She'll be here by Friday.她星期五会来
136She'll be here until Friday.她会在这里直到星期五。
137What's the difference?有什么区别?
138By Friday means any time before Friday.指星期五之前的任何时间
139If you say, she'll be here by Friday, you mean that she's not here now and she'll如果你说,她周五会来, 你的意思是她现在不在这里,她会
140arrive sometime between now and Friday.从现在到星期五的某个时候
141You don't know exactly when she'll arrive, but you're sure that she won't arrive later你不知道她什么时候会来 但你肯定她以后不会来
142than Friday.比周五还多
143Until Friday means continuously from now up to Friday.直到星期五意味着从现在开始一直持续到星期五。
144If you say, she'll be here until Friday, you mean that she's here now, but she'll如果你说,她会在这里 直到星期五, 你是说她现在在这里, 但她会
145leave on Friday.星期五离开。
146So, the two sentences have very different meanings.因此,两句的意义非常不同.
147Does your language have different words for by and until with these meanings?你的语言有不同的说法吗?
148Some languages use one preposition for both meanings.有些语言对两种含义都使用一个前置位置.
149If this is the case in your language, you'll need to be careful using by and until in English.如果你的语言是这样的话,你需要小心使用,直到英文。
150Let's do a quick test.让我们做一个快速测试。
151Look at four sentences.观四句.
152Pause the video if you need more thinking time.如果你需要更多的思考时间,请暂停视频.
153Ready?准备好了吗?
154Let's look at the answers.让我们来看看答案。
155Did you get them all right?你把它们都弄好了吗?
156If so, well done!如果是这样,做得很好!
157If not, remember that you can review each section as many times as you need to.如果没有,请记住,您可以按需要对每一节进行多次审查。
158What's next?接下来呢?
159Where's Georgia?佐治亚呢?
160Weren't you meeting her at the airport?你不是在机场见她吗?
161Oh, it's a nightmare!哦,这是一场噩梦!
162Uh oh, what happened?发生了什么事?
163I was waiting for her in the arrivals hall, but I needed the toilet.我在抵达大厅等她 但我需要厕所
164I guess while I was in there, she came out, didn't see me and went outside.我猜当我在那里, 她出来, 没有看到我,然后出去。
165These things happen.这些事情发生。
166Anyway, I went back and waited for a while.总之,我回去等了一会儿
167Then I realized that she must have arrived already, so I went outside to look for her.然后我意识到她一定已经到了 所以我出去找她
168You won't believe this, as I was going down the elevator, she was going up in the elevator你不会相信的,我下电梯时,她上电梯了
169on the other side trying to find me.在另一边试图找到我。
170How do you know?你怎么会知道?
171She called me later, we'll get to that.她稍后打电话给我,我们会得到的。
172So I looked around for her near the train station, but I couldn't see her, just as I所以我在火车站附近到处找她 但我看不到她 就像我一样
173was going to go back to arrival, she called me.她本来打算回乡的 她打电话给我
174And?还有呢?
175The signal was really bad, so I couldn't really hear her.信号很坏,所以我听不到她的声音
176I ran outside to get a better signal, and at the exact moment I got out the door, my我跑出去得到一个更好的信号, 在准确的时刻 我走出了门,我的
177battery died.电池坏了
178That's bad luck.岂不吉祥.
179So I went back up to arrivals, but it turns out she was going down at the same time, so所以我回到了到达, 但事实证明她要同时下降,所以
180we missed each other again.我们又想念对方了
181It's like a comedy film.如喜剧片.
182I wasn't laughing at the time.我当时没有笑
183I figured that she'd catch the train into the city, so I decided to just go to her hotel我想她会赶上火车进城 所以我决定去她的旅馆
184and wait for her there.在那里等着她
185So did you meet her?你见过她吗?
186No, but I did find somewhere to charge my phone, so I called her.没有,但我确实找了个地方充电 所以我打给她了
187She was still at the airport.她还在机场
188And where is she now?她现在在哪?
189She said she'd take the train into the centre, so she'll call me as soon as she arrives.她说她会把火车开进中心 所以她一到就给我打电话
190I hope she doesn't fall asleep during the journey and miss her stop.我希望她不会在旅途中睡着了 并错过她的停留。
191Don't even joke about it.别开玩笑了
192Look at two sentences you heard in the dialogue.看看你在对话中听到的两句
193Here's a question.问曰.
194What's the difference between during and while?期间和期间有何区别?
195Both words are used to say when something happened.两个词都用来表示事物发生时.
196Specifically, you use them to talk about two things which happened at the same time, or具体来说,你用他们来谈论两件事 同时发生的,或
197something that happened in the middle of something else.发生在其他事情的中间
198However, they're used in different ways.然而,它们的使用方式不同.
199After during, use a noun.期间结束后,使用名词.
200For example, My phone rang during the film.例如,我的手机在影片中响起。
201During my presentation, there was a power cut.在我介绍期间,发生了断电事件。
202I just met my husband during my trip to Corsica.我刚在科西嘉旅行中遇见我丈夫
203After while, use a clause.之后,使用条款.
204That means you use a subject and a verb.这意味着你使用主题和动词.
205For example, I wasn't paying attention while he was explaining what to do.举例来说,他在解释该做什么时 我没有注意
206While I'm out, can you tidy up the living room?我出去的时候 你能收拾一下客厅吗?
207I like listening to music while I'm working.我喜欢一边听音乐一边工作
208You can also use at to talk about things which happened at the same time.你也可以用在谈论 同时发生的事情。
209For example, At the exact moment I got out of the door, my battery died.举例来说, 在我走出门的那一刻 我的电池就死了
210I went back up to arrivals, but it turns out she was going down at the same time.我回去了,但结果发现她要同时下楼
211You could use these in different ways.你可以用这些不同的方式。
212For example, At the exact moment the train left, I saw her running into the station.举例来说, 在火车离开的那一刻 我看到她跑进车站
213You can't study and watch TV at the same time.不能同时学习和看电视.
214Finally, you can use as to talk about the moment when something happened.最后,你可以用来谈论事情发生的那一刻。
215In the dialogue, you heard these.在对话中,你听到了这些。
216As means at the moment when.如是说时.
217So the first sentence means that at the moment when I was going down the elevator, she was所以第一句的意思是 当我下电梯的时候,她是
218going up in the other elevator.在另一个电梯。
219Just as has the same meaning, but it's more emphatic.同样的意义,但它更强烈。
220Use just as to mean that two things happened at exactly the same time.用它来表示两件事是同时发生的
221As soon as also has the same meaning, but it's used to talk about the future.即时亦有同义但用说未来.
222You use it to say that two things will happen at the same time.你用它说两件事会同时发生
223You can make more examples with this language, like this.你可以用这种语言做更多的例子,像这样。
224As I was walking down the street, I heard thunder in the distance.当我走在街上的时候 我听到远处的雷声
225I got to the airport just as they closed the gate for my flight.我去了机场 就在他们给我的航班关了大门的时候
226We'll leave as soon as you're ready.你准备好了我们就走
227So in this section, you saw how to use during, while, at, and as to talk about things which因此,在这个节中,你看到了如何使用 在,在,在,在,和谈的东西
228happen at the same time.发生在同一时间。
229Note that during and at are prepositions here, whereas while and as are conjunctions.请注意,期间和期间是这里的预设位置,而同时和同时设置。
230Let's look at one more thing.让我们再看看一件事。
231Let me stop for something to eat.让我停下来吃点东西。
232I didn't have lunch and I'm starving.我没有吃午饭,我饿了。
233I've been waiting for you for ages.我等了你好几年了,我一直等着你
234We're already going to be late.我们已经迟到了
235I think we should go straight there.我觉得我们应该直接去那儿
236Come on, it won't take long.拜托,不会太久的
237You always say that, and then you take forever.你总是这么说,然后你永远。
238That's not fair.这不公平
239Well, hey, you should have been on time.你该准时到的
240It's not my fault you're always late.你总是迟到不是我的错
241I'm really punctual these days.这些天我真的很准时
242This is the first time I've been late for a while.这是我第一次迟到
243Are you serious?你是认真的吗?
244Every time I met you over the summer, you were at least half an hour late.每次夏天我遇见你 你至少晚了半小时
245Yeah, but since then, I've been mostly on time, right?是的,但从那时起,我大多是准时的,对吧?
246You've been less late.你来不及了
247During the last few weeks, I've really been trying to be on time.在过去的几周里,我一直在努力准时。
248I know it's a bad habit to turn up late everywhere, but it's a tough habit to break.我知道到处出现很晚的习惯,但是打破这种习惯是很艰难的.
249Anyway, I don't want to be even later than we already are.总之,我不想比我们晚到
250Everyone will be wondering what's happened.每个人都会想知道发生了什么
251Let's just go and you can get some food there.我们走吧,你可以在那里得到一些食物。
252But I haven't eaten anything since this morning.但我从今早起就没吃过东西了
253Just stop at a shop and let me buy a snack or something.到店里买点零食什么的
254It'll take less than five minutes, I promise.不到五分钟,我保证
255Oh, all right.哦,没事。
256If you want to describe how long something continued, what can you use?如果你想要描述 东西持续了多久, 你可以使用什么?
257Can you remember any of the examples you heard in the dialogue?你还记得对话中听到的例子吗?
258Often, to describe a period of time, you use the preposition for.通常,为了描述一段时期,您会使用前置位置.
259For example, I've been waiting for you for ages.比如说,我等了你很久了
260You can use this in many different ways in the past, present and future.过去、现在和将来,你可以以许多不同的方式利用这一点。
261For example, I've worked here for ten years.例如,我在这里工作了十年。
262I'll be staying here for six weeks.我在这待六周
263She lived in Paris for several months.她在巴黎居住了几个月.
264There are also many common phrases with for, like for ages or for a while.也有许多常用的短语,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用,有的用.
265For ages means for a long time.对于年龄意味着很长一段时间。
266For a while means for some time.有一段时间意味着有一段时间。
267A while means a time period which is not very short and not very long.一段时间意味着时间不很短,也不很长。
268It's not very specific, but it's useful and common in spoken English.虽然不十分具体,但在口语英语中是有用和常见的.
269Here's a question.问曰.
270Can you complete the missing verb in this sentence?你能完成这句话中缺少的动词吗?
271The missing verb is take.缺少的动词是取.
272You can use take to say how long something will continue.你可以用时间来说 事情会持续多久
273In the dialogue, you also heard it won't take long.在对话中,你还听说不会花很长时间.
274It'll take less than five minutes, I promise.不到五分钟,我保证
275You can use take in many different situations.你可以在很多不同的情况下使用。
276For example, how long does it take you to get to work?例如,你需要多长时间才能开始工作?
277Getting to the airport takes about 45 minutes if the traffic's not too bad.如果交通不差,前往机场大约需要45分钟.
278If you want to talk about something which happened within a longer period of time, you如果你想谈一些事情 在更长的时间内发生,你
279can use over.能用过.
280In the dialogue you heard, every time I met you over the summer, you were at least half在你听到的对话中, 每次我遇见你 在夏天,你至少一半
281an hour late.晚了一小时
282For the last few weeks, I've been really trying to be on time.在过去几周里,我一直想准时
283Over has a similar meaning to during, but it's more conversational, and you use itOver有着与期间相似的含义,但它是比较对话的,你用它
284only with longer time periods.只有更长的时间。
285You might also see the phrase over time, which means gradually.你可能会看到这个短语 随着时间的推移,这意味着逐步。
286For example, over time, cars are getting more efficient and therefore cheaper to run.例如,随着时间的推移,汽车的运行效率越来越高,因此更便宜.
287This is a big topic, and there's a lot we weren't able to fit into this video.这是一个大话题,有很多 我们无法融入这个视频。
288Are there other time prepositions or phrases you'd like to know more about?还有别的时间预设或短语你更想知道吗?
289Please leave your suggestions in the comments.请在评论中留下你的建议。
290Thanks for watching!谢谢你的观看!
291See you next time!下次见!
该视频共有字幕 291 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P20 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p20 19. 19. English Grammar 19.How to Use Have and Get in English (P20)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Kasia.嗨,我是卡西亚。
0:03Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
0:05In this lesson, you can learn about the verbs have and get.在这个课中,你可以学习动词的拥有和获得.
0:10You'll see ten different meanings of have, and ten different meanings of get.你会看到十种不同的含义 和十种不同的含义获得。
0:15You'll also see examples, so you can learn to use the verbs have and get in different你也会看到例子 这样你就能学会使用动词 并进入不同的
0:21ways.办法
0:23This lesson has five parts.此课有五部分.
0:25Each part starts with a short dialogue.每个部分从简短的对话开始。
0:28In each dialogue, there are two different ways to use have, and two different ways to在每次对话中,有两种不同的使用方式,以及两种不同的使用方式。
0:33use get.使用获取。
展开字幕全文（243 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Kasia.嗨,我是卡西亚。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
3In this lesson, you can learn about the verbs have and get.在这个课中,你可以学习动词的拥有和获得.
4You'll see ten different meanings of have, and ten different meanings of get.你会看到十种不同的含义 和十种不同的含义获得。
5You'll also see examples, so you can learn to use the verbs have and get in different你也会看到例子 这样你就能学会使用动词 并进入不同的
6ways.办法
7This lesson has five parts.此课有五部分.
8Each part starts with a short dialogue.每个部分从简短的对话开始。
9In each dialogue, there are two different ways to use have, and two different ways to在每次对话中,有两种不同的使用方式,以及两种不同的使用方式。
10use get.使用获取。
11We suggest that you watch each dialogue two or three times.我们建议你们看两三次对话。
12Before you continue, try to hear the different sentences with have and get.在你继续之前 试着听下不同的句子
13Think about what they mean.想想他们是什么意思
14Then, watch the explainer section after the dialogue.然后,在对话后看解释者部分。
15You can check if you were right.你可以检查你是否是对的。
16在开始前,我们真的认为你应该查看一下我们的网站 oxfordonlineenglish.com.
17You can find free English lessons, and you can also take online classes with one of our你可以免费上英语课程 也可以和我们一起上在线课程
18many professional teachers.许多专业教师。
19Now, let's see our first dialogue.现在,让我们看看我们的第一个对话。
20Are you going out?你要出去吗?
21I have judo class.我有柔道课
22It's the first one after the holidays.是假期后的第一个.
23Oh yeah, I remember.哦,是的,我记得。
24Are you walking?你在走路吗?
25I need to get there before seven, so I think I'll get a taxi.我需要在7点前赶到 所以我想我去找辆出租车
26I'll be late, otherwise.不然我会迟到的
27OK, well, have a good time.好吧,祝你玩得开心
28Did you hear the four phrases with have and get?你听到那四句话了吗?
29Let's see them.让我们看看他们。
30Can you explain the meaning of have and get here?你能解释一下拥有和来到这里的意义吗?
31Have can mean take part in an event, as in I have judo class.就像我有柔道课一样
32You could also say I have a meeting tomorrow morning.你也可以说我明天早上要开会
33She has a tennis tournament on Saturday.她星期六有网球比赛
34What time do you have your Spanish lesson?你什么时候上西班牙语课?
35You can use this with meetings, classes, social events, and more.你可以用它来开会,上课,社交活动等等。
36In have a good time, what do you think have means?玩得开心,你觉得有什么意义?
37Have can also mean experience.也有经验
38For example, we had a lot of fun at their wedding.例如,我们在他们的婚礼上玩得很开心.
39He's having a lot of problems at school at the moment.他现在在学校遇到很多问题.
40I've been having a stressful time at work recently.我最近工作压力很大
41With this meaning of have, the phrase have a time is useful.有了这个意义,这个短语有时间是有用的。
42Put an adjective in the space, have a good time, have a bad time, have a difficult time,在空间里放一个形容词 玩得开心 玩得开心 玩得开心
43and so on.诸如来.
44What about the phrases with get?那用Get的语句呢?
45Get can mean arrive or reach.得到可以指 到达或到达。
46You can say things like what time do you think you'll get there?你能说出你什么时候能到那里?
47The train gets to Berlin at four o'clock.列车在四点钟方向到达柏林.
48In the dialogue, you also heard I'll get a taxi.在对话中,你也听说我会叫辆出租车。
49You can also use get like catch or take, meaning to use a form of transport.也可以使用像捕捉或服用,意思是使用一种运输方式.
50So, you can use get the metro, get a bus, get a taxi, and so on.因此,可以使用地铁,公交车,出租车等.
51For example, if we get the subway, we will be on time?例如,如果我们得到地铁,我们会准时?
52It's not worth spending so much money for such a short flight.这么短时间的飞行不值得花这么多钱
53Let's get the boat.让我们得到船。
54Have you seen the email I sent you?你看过我寄给你的邮件吗?
55No.没有
56My PC's got some kind of a problem.我的电脑有问题
57I can't connect to the internet.我不能连接到互联网。
58Can't you look on your phone?你不能看手机吗?
59Yes, I suppose I can.是的,我想我可以做到这一点。
60Yep, got it.对,明白了。
61I'll look at it right now.我现在就看
62Great.不错
63Let me know what you think.告诉我你的想法
64Will do.我会的
65I need to get someone to fix my computer, though.我需要找人来修我的电脑
66I don't like using my phone for work stuff.我不喜欢用手机工作
67This dialogue was a little different.这种对话略有不同。
68Can you see how?你看得到吗?
69In the dialogue, one of the uses of have was an auxiliary verb.在对话中,其中一个用途是辅助动词.
70Have you seen the email I sent?你看见我发的邮件了吗?
71What was the other usage of have?还有什么用?
72It was my PC's got some kind of problem.是我的电脑有问题
73We use have got as a form of have.我们的用法已经成为一种有。
74We'll come back to this in a minute.我们一会儿再谈这个
75So have can be an auxiliary verb, especially in perfect tenses.因此可以做一个辅助动词,特别是在完美的紧张状态下.
76In this case, have doesn't have its own meaning.在这种情况下,没有它自己的意义。
77Instead, it's a grammar word.取而代之的是语法词.
78It's used to make a verb form.用于制作动词形式.
79Look at three examples of this.观此三例.
80I haven't seen her all day.我一整天没见她了
81We hadn't realised that we needed to bring our passports.我们还没意识到我们需要带护照
82She'll have finished all her exams by the end of July.她将在7月底前完成所有考试.
83In all three sentences, have is not the main verb.在所有三句中,有不是主动词.
84The main verbs are see, realise, and finish.主要的动词是看到,意识到,和完成。
85Have is used to form the perfect tense.习惯了形成完美的紧张。
86The sentences are present perfect, past perfect, and future perfect, respectively.句子分别现成完美,过去完美,未来完美.
87Again, have doesn't have its own meaning here.再说一遍 这里没有它的意义
88When have is an auxiliary verb, it adds meaning to other words.当有是辅助动词时,它会增加其他词的意义.
89It doesn't mean anything by itself.自身无量义.
90Actually, have is an auxiliary verb in have got, too.实际上,有一个辅助动词 已经得到了。
91Have got is easy.得到的很简单。
92It means the same as have, in the most basic sense.意思和以前一样,在最基本的意义上。
93You can say, I have a new phone, or I've got a new phone.你可以说,我有一个新的手机, 或者我有一个新的手机。
94You can say, they have three children, or they've got three children.你可以说,他们有三个孩子, 或者他们有三个孩子。
95There's no difference in meaning, and it doesn't matter which you say.其义无异,而言之何为也.
96But be careful, you can't use have got to replace all other meanings of have.但小心点,你不能用它来取代 所有其他的含意。
97What about get in the dialogue?加入对话怎么样?
98You heard these phrases.你听到这些话了
99Any ideas?有什么想法吗?
100Got it here means I received your email.我收到你的邮件了
101Get can mean receive, so you can get an email, get a text message, get a present, and so获取可以指: 接收,所以你可以得到电子邮件, 得到短信, 得到礼物,所以
102on.继续
103For example, I got a new tablet for my birthday.比如说,我生日有一块新牌匾
104Did you get my message?你收到我的消息了吗?
105In the second phrase, get means to ask someone to do something for you.在第二句中,获得一些手段来要求某人为你做一些事情.
106Generally, you use the phrase get plus a person plus to plus verb.一般来说,你使用短语得到+一个人+++动词.
107You could also say, she's too old to look after the garden, so I got someone to help你也可以说,她太老了 照顾花园,所以我找人帮忙
108her once a month.她一个月一次。
109I'm no good at DIY, so I got someone to paint my living room.我不擅长DIY,所以有人来画我的客厅.
110Did you get everything for tonight?你得到今晚的一切吗?
111Let's see.让我看看。
112I got stuff for sandwiches, nachos, dips, and veggies for dipping.我买了三明治、玉米片、调料和水煮蔬菜
113If people are still hungry later, we can order pizzas.如果以后人们还饿了,我们可以点披萨.
114I guess they can also have the curry I made last night, if they really want.我想他们也可以吃我昨晚做的咖喱, 如果他们真的想要的话.
115What about drinks?喝点什么?
116I'm guessing people will bring drinks, but there's some wine and few beers which people我猜人们会带酒来 但酒和啤酒很少
117can have.当然可以
118Plus, there's juice for anyone who isn't drinking.此外,还有果汁给不喝酒的人。
119Did you get a birthday card?你有生日卡吗?
120Ah, crap!啊,该死!
121I knew I'd forgotten something.我知道我忘了点事
122It's getting late.渐渐迟.
123Do you think there's time to go out and get one now?你觉得现在有时间出去买吗?
124Maybe.也许
125We'll have to leave right now.我们马上离开
126We?我们?
127You forgot!你忘记了!
128OK, OK, I'm going.好吧,好吧,我这就去。
129This time, let's start with get.这一次,让我们开始得到。
130You heard these phrases.你听到这些话了
131Actually, you heard one or two more, but in most of these phrases, get has one meaning.其实,你听到一个或两个以上, 但在大多数这些短语, 得到一个意义。
132Do you know what?你知道吗?
133In the first three phrases, get means buy.在前三句中,获得手段购买.
134This is very common.这很常见。
135What about the last phrase?那最后一句话呢?
136It's getting late.渐渐迟.
137This is another common use of get.这是另一种常用的获取。
138Here, get means become.在这里,得到手段成为。
139Let's see some more examples.更举诸例.
140My water bottle came open in my bag, so my books got wet.我的水瓶打开在我的包里, 所以我的书湿了。
141Can we turn on the heating?我们能打开暖气吗?
142It's getting really cold in here.这里越来越冷了
143Renting an apartment is getting ridiculously expensive.租公寓越来越贵了
144What about have in the dialogue?在对话中呢?
145Have can mean eat or drink.吃还是喝?
146You can have lunch, have a snack, have a cup of coffee, and so on.你可以吃午饭,吃点心,喝杯咖啡等等.
147You also heard, we'll have to leave right now.你也听说了 我们现在就得离开
148Have to is a kind of modal verb.必须是一种模式动词。
149It means that something is necessary.意思是有必要的东西。
150The main thing to remember is that have to doesn't have a connection with have.主要的记忆是,必须和有没有关系。
151They look similar, but they're completely different verbs.它们看起来相似,但它们是完全不同的动词.
152They don't have the same meaning, and they don't follow the same rules.其义不一,亦不遵其规.
153You look exhausted.你看起来很累
154Is everything OK?一切都好吗?
155I'm all right, just a bit ill.我没事 只是有点不舒服
156I got a cold or a virus of some kind a few days ago.几天前我得了感冒或某种病毒
157There's something going around.有东西在绕.
158A lot of people at my office had something similar last week.我办公室的很多人上星期也有类似的事情
159I think it might be stress-related, too.我想这也可能和压力有关
160I've been working a lot, and I'm not getting enough sleep.我经常工作 睡不着觉
161Have you been to the doctor's?你去过医生那里吗?
162No, I'm just going to stay at home and rest.不,我只是 留在家里休息。
163It's a shame I was planning to visit Sarah on Saturday.真可惜我打算周六去拜访莎拉
164You're not going?你不走吗?
165I can't.我没办法
166She's just had her baby boy.她刚生了孩子
167She got home from the hospital two days ago.她两天前从医院回家
168Oh yes, of course.当然
169Both have and get can be used to talk about illness.两者都可用于谈论疾病。
170In the dialogue, you heard these.在对话中,你听到了这些。
171I got a cold or a virus of some kind a few days ago.几天前我得了感冒或某种病毒
172A lot of people at my office had something similar last week.我办公室的很多人上星期也有类似的事情
173What do you think?你觉得呢?
174What's the difference between getting an illness and having an illness?得病与有病有何分别.
175Get ill is similar to catch an illness.生病跟生病一样
176You use it to talk about the start of an illness.你用它来谈论一个疾病的开始。
177Often, you can use both words.经常可以使用两个词.
178You can say, I got a cold, or I caught a cold.你可以说我感冒了 或者感冒了
179There's no difference.无有分别.
180Have an illness is similar to be ill.有病与病相似.
181You use it to describe the state of being ill.你用它来形容病情
182In this case, you can also use have got.在这种情况下,你也可以使用 已经得到了。
183You can say, I have a cold, or I've got a cold.你可以说我感冒了 或者我感冒了
184You also heard, I'm not getting enough sleep.你也听说了,我睡不着
185She's just had her baby boy.她刚生了孩子
186Can you explain these?你能解释一下吗?
187This might sound confusing, but get can mean something similar to have, especially when这听起来很困惑,但得到的东西 类似有,特别是当
188you're talking about lifestyle habits like sleep, diet, exercise, and so on.你指的是睡眠、饮食、运动等生活方式。
189So you can say, He doesn't get enough fruit and vegetables in his diet.所以你可以说 他的饮食中没有足够的水果蔬菜
190I definitely don't get enough exercise.我绝对不够锻炼
191I get about seven hours of sleep every night.我每晚都睡七小时
192The meaning of get here is something between have and do.来这的意义在于有和有之间的事。
193What about the second sentence with have?第二句用得着吗?
194Have can mean to give birth.生子可以有义.
195If you say, She had a baby last week, you mean that she gave birth.如果你说她上周生了孩子 你是说她生了孩子
196What did you think?你觉得呢?
197I didn't like it.我不喜欢这样
198Plus, the rent was way too high for such a small place.此外,房租太高了 这么小的地方。
199I don't get it.I么则不解.
200Why show people an apartment in such a bad state?为什么要给大家看这么糟糕的公寓?
201对 我知道 Yeah, I know.
202I guess it's the seller's market.我想这是卖家的市场
203Did you have a look at the bathroom?你看过洗手间了吗?
204Yes, it was gross.对,很恶心
205You'd need to have the whole place redecorated, and even then it wouldn't be a good deal.你需要重新装修整间房子 即使那样也不算什么好交易
206Do you think they'll actually get a thousand a month for it?你觉得他们每月能赚一千块吗?
207It seems way too high.看起来太高了
208Salaries around here are pretty high.这里的薪水很高
209People get a lot of money even for basic jobs.即使是基本工作,人们也会得到很多钱.
210I agree it's not a good deal, but I imagine someone will probably take it.我同意这不是个好交易 但我想有人会接受的
211Anyway, how many more places are we looking at today?总之,我们今天还要看多少地方?
212Look at four phrases from the dialogue.从对话中看四个短语.
213Do you know what get and have mean in these sentences?你知道这些句子有什么意义吗?
214Get can mean understand.得到可以意味着理解。
215I don't get it means I don't understand.我不懂这意味着我不明白
216You could also say, Do you get what I mean?你也可以说,你明白我的意思吗?
217Which means, Do you understand me?也就是说, 你明白吗?
218Have can be used in certain phrases to mean do an action.在某些短语中,可以用来表示采取行动。
219You can have a look, have a shower, have a walk, or have a nap.你可以看一眼,洗个澡,散步,或者睡个午觉
220For example, you might say, We had a short walk before dinner.比如说,你可能会说,我们在晚餐前走了一小步。
221I wish I could have a nap in the afternoon, I get so sleepy after lunch.真希望下午能睡个午觉 午饭后就睡了
222In the third sentence, have is used in the structure have something done.在第三句中,在结构中已经使用了一些东西。
223This means, usually, that you pay someone else for a service.这意味着,通常,你支付别人的服务。
224For example, you can have your haircut, have your house painted, or have your car repaired.例如,你可以剪发,刷房子,或者修车.
225In all of these, the idea is the same – you pay someone else to do the work for you.在所有这些事情中,这个想法是相同的——你付钱给别人为你做这个工作.
226You can also use get in these phrases with the same meaning, although it's slightly你也可以使用 得到这些短语 具有相同的含义,虽然它有点
227more informal.比较非正式。
228So, you can say get your haircut, get your house painted, or get your car repaired.你可以说去理发 给房子涂漆 或者修车
229Finally, get can be used to mean earn money or make money.最后,获得可以用来指赚钱或赚钱.
230You can use it to talk about salaries, as in plumbers can get over 3k a month around你可以用它来谈工资, 因为水管工可以每月超过3k左右
231here.在这里。
232You can also use it for other things.也可以用来做别的事情.
233For example, I got £1,500 for my old car.例如,我得到了1500英镑 我的旧车。
234This means you sold your old car and you made £1,500 from the sale.这说明你卖了旧车 卖了1500英镑
235Of course, there are other ways to use have and get.当然,还有其他方法可以使用。
236We couldn't fit every meaning of these verbs into one lesson.我们无法把这些动词的每一个意义都融入一个课程中.
237Here's a question.问曰.
238Can you find any common meanings of have or get?你能找到有还是有的共同含义吗?
239If you can, post a meaning and an example in the comments.如果您可以,请在注释中张贴一个含义和示例.
240You can learn more about these verbs from other viewers, and check if your ideas are你可以从其他观众那里更多地了解这些动词,并检查你的想法是否
241correct or not.正确与否。
242Thanks for watching!谢谢你的观看!
243See you next time!下次见!
该视频共有字幕 243 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P21 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p21 20. 20. English Grammar 20.How to Use Should in English - English Modal Verbs (P21)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Oli.嗨,我是奥利。
0:03Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
0:06In this lesson, you can learn about using the modal verb should in English.在此课中,您可以学习使用英语中模式动词应该使用的.
0:12Do you know how to use should in English?你知道怎么用英语吗?
0:16Like most modal verbs, should has many different meanings and can be used in many different和大多数模式动词一样,应该有许多不同的含义,可以用于许多不同的动词.
0:21ways.办法
0:23In this lesson, you can learn how to use should correctly and naturally in different situations.在这个课中,你可以学习如何在不同的情况下正确和自然地使用.
0:30Let's start with a simple question.先简问.
0:34What does should mean?这是什么意思?
0:36This question sounds simple, but when you think about it, it's not so easy to answer.这个问题听起来很简单,但当你考虑这个问题时,答案并不那么容易.
展开字幕全文（146 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Oli.嗨,我是奥利。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
3In this lesson, you can learn about using the modal verb should in English.在此课中,您可以学习使用英语中模式动词应该使用的.
4Do you know how to use should in English?你知道怎么用英语吗?
5Like most modal verbs, should has many different meanings and can be used in many different和大多数模式动词一样,应该有许多不同的含义,可以用于许多不同的动词.
6ways.办法
7In this lesson, you can learn how to use should correctly and naturally in different situations.在这个课中,你可以学习如何在不同的情况下正确和自然地使用.
8Let's start with a simple question.先简问.
9What does should mean?这是什么意思?
10This question sounds simple, but when you think about it, it's not so easy to answer.这个问题听起来很简单,但当你考虑这个问题时,答案并不那么容易.
11Look at a sentence.观一句.
12You shouldn't work so hard.你不应该这么努力
13Should you change this sentence so that you keep the same meaning, but without using should?你是否应该改变这句话,以便保持相同的含义,但不使用应该?
14Think about it.考虑一下
15There's more than one possible answer.有不止一个可能的答案。
16Here's one.这里有一个。
17I think it would be better for you not to work so hard.我想你最好别这么努力
18Here's another.这里还有一个。
19I don't think it's a good idea for you to work so hard.令诸众生苦行不思议.
20These are not the only two.这些不是唯一的两个。
21There are more possibilities.还有更多的可能性。
22From these examples, you can see that when you use should, you're talking about what从这些例子中,你可以看到当你使用应该, 你在谈论什么
23you think is right or what you think is the best idea for someone.你觉得对 还是你认为对某人最好的主意
24For example, if I say, you shouldn't eat mushrooms if you don't know what kind they are, I mean比如,如果我说,你不应该吃蘑菇 如果你不知道它们是什么类型,我的意思是
25that it's best for you not to eat mushrooms if you aren't sure what they are.最好不要吃蘑菇 如果你不知道它们是什么。
26After all, they might be poisonous.毕竟它们可能有毒
27Now we're going to look at different meanings of should in more detail.现在我们将更详细地研究不同的意义。
28Keep the ideas from this section in mind through this lesson.通过这一课,记住本节的想法。
29Hopefully, they'll make it easier to connect the different ideas you're about to see.希望它们能更方便地连接你即将看到的不同想法.
30Part 2.第2编
31Using should to give advice.利用它来提供建议。
32This is one of the most common ways to use should, giving advice to other people.这是最常用的方法之一,向其他人提供咨询意见。
33For example, you shouldn't eat pizza for dinner every night.例如,你不应该每晚吃披萨作为晚餐.
34You should watch Mad Men, it's an interesting show.你应该看《疯子》,这节目很有趣
35In these cases, I'm giving you advice, telling you what I think is a good idea for you to在这种情况下,我给你建议, 告诉你我认为一个好主意,让你
36do.说吧
37Easy enough, right?很简单,对吧?
38Try to think of your own examples.试着想想你自己的例子。
39What kind of things do we give advice about?我们有什么建议?
40Many things, work, study, hobbies, dating, lifestyle.很多事情,工作,学习,爱好,约会,生活方式.
41Pause the video and practice.暂停录像和练习
42Give yourself one piece of advice.给自己一个忠告
43Okay?好吗?
44Let's move on.让我们继续前进。
45Part 3.第三编
46Using should to express your opinion.应该用来表达你的意见。
47You can use should to say what you think is the right thing for someone else to do.你可以用它来表达你所认为的 对别人来说是正确的
48For example, He should tell her how he feels.例如,他应该告诉她他的感受。
49I think she should apply for that job.我觉得她应该申请这份工作
50This is quite similar to giving advice, except that you're talking about a third person.这与提供建议相当相似,只是你说的是第三人.
51You can also use should in this way to talk about more general subjects.也可以用这种方式来谈论比较一般的科目.
52For example, The government should raise taxes on the rich.例如,政府应该提高富人的税收.
53A day who works should get four weeks paid holiday a year.工作日每年应获得四周带薪假期。
54Do you agree with these ideas?你同意这些想法吗?
55Try to think of one more example on a different topic.试着再想一个不同主题的例子
56What subjects do you have strong opinions on?你对哪些主题有强烈的看法?
57Pause the video and make a sentence with should.暂停录影带 并做出句子与should。
58Say it out loud.大声说出来。
59Up to here, we've seen how to use should to talk about the present or the future.到这里,我们已经看到如何用它来谈论现在或未来.
60However, you can also use should to talk about the past.然而,你也可以用来谈论过去。
61Let's see how.让我们看看如何。
62Part 4.第四编
63Using should to criticise past mistakes.利用它来批评过去的错误
64Do you know how to use should in the past?你知道过去该怎么用吗?
65What do you have to add after the verb?动词后加什么?.
66Let's see an example.举个例子
67You should have asked me for help.你应该请我帮忙
68You can see that, to use should in the past, you need to add have plus a past participle你可以看到,要用在过去,你需要加上一个过去 的聚会
69after the verb should.动词应该之后。
70Let's practice this quickly.快点练习吧
71Can you complete these two sentences to make them past?你能完成这两句让他们过去吗?
72You should book the tickets earlier.你应该早点订票
73They shouldn't spend so much money on a car.他们不该花这么多钱买车
74Think about your answers.考虑一下你的答案
75Pause the video if you need time.需要时间就暂停录像
76Let's check.让我们检查一下。
77You should have booked the tickets earlier.你应该早点订票的
78They shouldn't have spent so much money on a car.他们不该花那么多钱买车的
79Next, let's think about what should means in these sentences.接着,让我们想想这些句子应该意味着什么.
80We use should in this way to talk about mistakes in the past.我们应该用这种方式谈论过去的错误。
81Often, we use should in this way to criticise ourselves or other people.我们通常应该用这种方式来批评自己或其他人。
82For example, you should have studied harder for your exam, meaning you didn't study hard比如说,你应该更努力地学习考试, 也就是说你没有认真学习
83for your exam, and I think this was a mistake.我想这是个错误
84I shouldn't have told her, meaning I told her, but I wish I hadn't.我不应该告诉她,意思是我告诉她, 但我希望我没有。
85It was a mistake to tell her.告诉她是个错误
86What about you?你怎么样?
87Can you think of something you should have done differently in the past?你能想到过去你本该做的吗?
88Try to make your own example sentences.试着做你自己的例子句子。
89For extra practice, you could even write your sentences down.作为额外练习,你甚至可以写下你的句子。
90Now, we have one more meaning of should to look at.现在,我们还有一点意义需要研究。
91Part five, using should to talk about probability.第五部分 利用机会来讨论概率
92We said at the beginning that you use should to talk about the right thing to do.我们一开始说,你应该谈谈应该做的事。
93That's true for all the meanings of should we've seen until now.这对我们现在应该看到的一切意义来说都是如此.
94However, there's one exception, one meaning of should which doesn't fit this pattern.然而,有一个例外,一个意义应该是不符合这种模式的.
95Look at two sentences.看两句.
96Can you see what should means?你明白应该意味着什么吗?
97There should be some milk left.应该还有牛奶
98You should be here soon.你很快就会到的
99Remember, should here has a completely different meaning to everything we've seen so far.记住,这里应该有 完全不同的意义 我们迄今看到的一切。
100Can you work it out?你能解决吗?
101In these sentences, should expresses probability.在这些句子中,应表示概率。
102If I say, there should be some milk left, I mean that I think there's probably some如果我说,应该还有一些牛奶, 我的意思是,我认为可能有一些
103milk left.牛奶左边。
104By probably, I mean more than fifty percent chance.也许,我是指50%以上的机会。
105So, I might say this if I remember buying milk a few days ago, and I think there's所以,如果我记得几天前买牛奶的话,我可能会说这个,我想...
106some left, but I'm not a hundred percent certain.还有一些,但我不确定
107I think there's probably still some milk in the fridge.我想冰箱里可能还有牛奶
108In our other example, if I say, he should be here soon, I mean that he'll probably在我们的另一个例子,如果我说, 他应该很快在这里, 我的意思是,他可能
109get here soon.快过来
110For example, imagine your friend is coming to visit you.比如,想象一下你的朋友会来看你
111You know that his train arrives at twelve o'clock, and it takes twenty minutes to他的火车12点到达 需要20分钟
112get to your house from the station.从车站去你家
113The time now is twelve twenty.现在是十二点二十分
114You could say, he should be here soon.你可以说,他应该在这里很快。
115How do you know if should means, I think this is the right thing, or I think this is probable?你怎么知道,如果应该意味着, 我认为这是正确的事情, 或者我认为这是可能的?
116It depends on the context, usually it'll be obvious.这取决于上下文,通常会很明显.
117For example, if I say, you should definitely go to the British Museum if you're in London,比如,如果我说,你肯定应该去大英博物馆 如果你在伦敦,
118it's really worth a visit.这真的值得一看。
119It's clear here that should means, I think it's a good idea for you to go to the British这里很清楚,这意味着, 我认为这是一个好主意,你去英国
120Museum, and not, I think you'll probably go to the British Museum.博物馆,而不是, 我想你可能去大英博物馆。
121That just doesn't make sense.这根本说不通
122Similarly, if I say, it should take about thirty minutes to get there by car, then should同样,如果我说, 大约需要30分钟 开车到达那里,然后应该
123clearly expresses probability.明确表达概率。
124There's no way for this sentence to be advice or criticism, or anything like that.这个句子不能成为建议或批评,或是任何类似的东西.
125Now, you've seen all the possible meanings of should.现在,你已经看到了所有可能的意义 应该。
126Finally, let's review what you've learned in this class.最后,让我们回顾一下你在本班学到了什么.
127Should is mostly used to express what you think is right, or what you think is the best应该主要用来表达你认为正确 或者你认为最好
128thing.东西。
129So, you can use should to give advice, or to express your opinion about different topics.因此,你可以用来给出建议,或者表达你对不同主题的看法.
130Remember that should is not the same as must or have to.记住,这不应该是必须或必须的。
131When you use should, you aren't talking about obligations or things which are necessary,当你使用时,你不是在谈论义务 或一些必要的事情,
132you're talking about what you think is best.你说的是你认为最好的
133You can also use should plus have plus past participle to talk about the past.你也可以使用加 加上过去的聚会 来谈论过去。
134We use should in this way to criticise past mistakes, yours or other people's.我们应该用这种方式来批评过去的错误,你的或者别人的错误.
135There's one way to use should which doesn't fit this pattern.有一种方法应该 不符合这个模式。
136Should can mean that something is probable.应该可以意味着 某事是可能的。
137You need to use the context to work out what should means, although it's quite obvious你需要用上下文来决定应该意味着什么 虽然很明显
138in most cases.在大多数情况下。
139Remember that probable here has a specific meaning.记住,可能在这里有具体的意义。
140It means the chance of something happening is higher than fifty percent.这意味着事情发生的概率 超过50%。
141That's the end of the lesson.师於此毕.
142I hope you learned something new about what should means and how to use it.我希望你学到一些新的东西 关于什么应该意味着,如何使用它。
143You can find more great free English lessons on our website, Oxford Online English dot你可以在我们的网站上找到更多的免费英语课程 牛津在线英语点
144com.电话
145Thanks for watching.谢谢你的观看。
146See you next time.下次见
该视频共有字幕 146 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P22 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p22 21. 21. English Grammar 21.How to Use Must in English - English Modal Verbs (P22)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Oli.嗨,我是奥利。
0:03Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
0:06In this lesson, you can learn about the verb must.在这个课中,你可以学习动词必须.
0:10Must can have many different meanings in English.在英语中一定有很多不同的含义.
0:14In this video, you can learn about the different meanings of must and how to use the verb must在这个视频中,你可以了解必须的不同含义,以及如何使用动词必须
0:20in English.英文。
0:21OK, part one.好吧,第一部分。
0:24Using must to talk about obligations.使用必须谈论义务。
0:28You can use must to talk about obligations and rules.你可以用来谈论义务和规则。
0:32For example, I must remember to call her.比如,我必须记得给她打电话。
展开字幕全文（220 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Oli.嗨,我是奥利。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
3In this lesson, you can learn about the verb must.在这个课中,你可以学习动词必须.
4Must can have many different meanings in English.在英语中一定有很多不同的含义.
5In this video, you can learn about the different meanings of must and how to use the verb must在这个视频中,你可以了解必须的不同含义,以及如何使用动词必须
6in English.英文。
7OK, part one.好吧,第一部分。
8Using must to talk about obligations.使用必须谈论义务。
9You can use must to talk about obligations and rules.你可以用来谈论义务和规则。
10For example, I must remember to call her.比如,我必须记得给她打电话。
11It's her birthday.这是她的生日。
12This is an obligation.这是一项义务。
13It's something important to me.这对我很重要
14I feel it's necessary.我觉得有必要
15All passengers must hold a valid ticket.所有乘客必须持有有效车票.
16This is a rule.这是规则
17You can't choose to travel without a ticket.没有票就不能选择旅行.
18These are things that it's necessary or important to do.这些都是必须做的或者很重要的事。
19If you must do something, you have no choice.如果你必须做点什么,你别无选择。
20When you use must for obligations, it can mean that the obligation is important to当您必须使用义务时,这可能意味着该义务对于
21you personally.你个人。
22It's not just a rule that someone else made.这不只是别人制定的规矩
23Using must means that something matters to you.使用一定意味着 东西对你很重要。
24For example, you must be here on time, otherwise we'll miss the start.举例来说,你必须准时赶到,否则我们会错过开始.
25Using must shows that you care about whatever you're going to see.使用必须显示你关心你将要看到的一切。
26Maybe you're going to see a concert that you've been looking forward to for ages, and you'll也许你会看到一个音乐会 你期待了很久,你会
27be really unhappy if you miss even a minute of it.如果你错过了一分钟 就会很不高兴
28I must finish this work today.我今天必须完成这项工作。
29Again, this means that I feel strongly about this.同样,这意味着我对此有强烈的感受。
30You can probably hear it in my voice.你也许能听到我的声音。
31I say, I must finish this today.我说,我今天必须结束这一切。
32Maybe I promised someone that I would finish it by today, and it's important to me that也许我答应过别人今天就完成 对我很重要
33I keep my promise.我信守诺言
34When talking about rules, we mostly use must in formal or written English.在谈论规则时,我们主要必须使用正式的或书面的英语。
35For example, all candidates must show valid ID.例如,所有候选人必须出示有效的身份证。
36This is a rule probably in an examination hall, which, of course, is a formal setting.这也许是在考试大厅里的一个规则, 当然,这是一个正式的场合。
37Candidates must wash their hands before working with food.考生必须先洗手再用餐.
38This could be from a sign in a restaurant or a café.这可能是从餐馆或咖啡馆的标志。
39Again, this is more likely to be written than spoken.再说一遍,这很可能是书面的,而不是口头的。
40In informal English, we mostly use the verb have to to talk about rules and obligations.在非正式英语中,我们主要使用动词必须谈论规则和义务.
41To review, you can use must to express an obligation if the obligation is important为了审查,如果一项义务很重要,则可以使用该义务表示:
42to you personally, or if you want to sound more formal.或者你想听得更正式点的话
43Part two, using must to talk about prohibition.第二部分,使用必须谈论禁止。
44You can use mustn't to say that something is not allowed or forbidden.你可以使用不能说的东西是不允许或禁止的。
45This is the opposite of using must to talk about obligations or rules, and it's similar这是相反的 使用必须谈论义务或规则, 它相似
46in meaning.在意义上。
47Look at some examples.看看一些例子。
48You mustn't smoke here.你不能在这里抽烟。
49That means smoking is forbidden.这意味着禁烟。
50It's against the rules to smoke here.这里吸烟违反规定.
51Mobile phones must not be used while the plane is flying.飞机飞行时不得使用移动电话。
52Again, this means that it's forbidden to use phones.这又意味着禁止使用电话。
53Must expresses the idea that you don't have a choice, like we saw before.必须表达你没有选择的想法 就像我们以前看到的
54If you mustn't smoke here, then it's not okay to smoke.如果你不能在这里抽烟 那抽烟就不行了
55You don't have a choice.你别无选择
56Mustn't, with this meaning, is similar to can't.一定不能,有这个意思, 类似于不能。
57With obligations and rules, we mostly use must in formal or written English, and have根据义务和规则,我们主要使用正式的或书面的英语,并且
58to in informal English, as we said before.正如我们以前说过的,是非正式英语。
59However, you can use mustn't in both formal and informal English.不过,您不能使用正式和非正式的英语。
60Part three, using must to give strong advice.第三部分 使用必须提供强有力的建议。
61Must can be used to give someone advice or a recommendation.必须有建议或建议。
62Let's look at some examples.让我们看看一些例子。
63You must read this book.你必须读这本书。
64It's amazing.不可思议.
65If you go to Paris, you must take a walk by the river at night.如果你去巴黎, 你必须在晚上在河边散步。
66It's so beautiful.妙绝.
67We must hire some new staff as soon as possible.我们必须尽快雇用一些新的工作人员。
68In these examples, must has a strong meaning.在这些例子中,必须有强烈的意义。
69If I say, you must read this book, it's amazing.如果我说,你必须读这本书,这是惊人的。
70I don't mean that you have an obligation to read it.我不是说你有义务读它
71I mean that I really recommend this book.我的意思是我真的推荐这本书。
72In the same way, if I say, if you go to Paris, you must take a walk by the river at night,同样,如果我说,如果你去巴黎, 你必须在晚上在河边散步,
73this is advice or a recommendation.这是建议或建议。
74It doesn't mean that it's a rule or an obligation.这并不意味着这是一条规则或义务.
75Sometimes, the meaning of must depends on the context.有时,必须的含义取决于上下文.
76For example, we must hire some new staff as soon as possible.例如,我们必须尽快雇用一些新的工作人员。
77Must here could mean that hiring new staff is necessary and it's an obligation, or it这里必须意味着雇用新工作人员是必要的 而且这是义务
78could be a strong recommendation.可能是一个强有力的建议。
79How do you know what must means in a sentence like this?你怎么知道这样的句子必须意味着什么?
80Well, in a sentence like this, in a lesson where there's no context, you can't say exactly在这样的句子里 在没有上下文的课里 你不能说得很清楚
81what must means.这是什么意思?
82In real life, the meaning would depend on the context, who's speaking, what the situation在现实生活中,意义取决于背景, 谁在说话,什么情况
83is, and so on.这是,等等。
84When you use must in this way, you can't use the negative.使用时必须这样,不能使用阴性.
85There's no way to use mustn't to give advice or make recommendations.绝不能用它来提出建议或建议
86Using only the positive form, must, can have this meaning.只能使用正面形式,必须,可以有这种意义。
87Part four, using must to talk about logical necessity.第四部分 使用必须谈论逻辑必要性。
88Finally, we can use must to make deductions.最后,我们可以利用这些方法进行扣减。
89What are deductions?什么是扣减?
90Well, look at some examples and then I'll explain what this means.好吧,看看一些例子 然后我会解释这是什么意思。
91They must be rich.他们一定很有钱
92Their house is huge.他们的房子很大
93It must be a difficult exam.考试一定很困难
94Only 10% of candidates pass.只有10%的候选人通过考试。
95It must have rained last night.一定是昨晚下雨了 一定是昨晚下雨了
96Take the first sentence.初句颂.
97They must be rich.他们一定很有钱
98Their house is huge.他们的房子很大
99Do we know they're rich?我们知不知道他们有钱?
100No, we don't know for a fact, but we do know that they have a huge house.不,我们不知道一个事实, 但我们知道 他们有一个巨大的房子。
101Huge houses cost a lot of money, therefore they must be rich.豪宅要花很多钱 所以一定很有钱
102We're sure that they're rich, because otherwise they couldn't afford such a big house.我们肯定他们很有钱 否则他们买不起这么大的房子
103Compare.比较。
104They must be rich.他们一定很有钱
105They're rich.二者富贵.
106What's the difference?有什么区别?
107Their rich is a fact.他们的财富是事实
108We know they're rich.我们知道他们很有钱
109Maybe you're their accountant and you know all about their financial situation.也许你是他们的会计 你知道他们的财务状况
110Maybe they told you how much money they have directly.也许他们告诉你 他们有多少钱直接。
111Anyway, however you know, you know they're rich.无论如何,无论你知道, 你知道他们很有钱。
112They must be rich is a deduction.他们一定很有钱,这是个推理
113You don't actually know that they're rich.你不知道他们很有钱
114You know something else.你知道别的事
115You know that they have a huge house, and this makes you sure that they're rich.你知道他们有一栋大房子 这让你确定他们很有钱
116Okay, let's look at another example.好吧,让我们看看另一个例子。
117It must be a difficult exam.考试一定很困难
118Only 10% of candidates pass.只有10%的候选人通过考试。
119Again, using must expresses a deduction.同样,使用必须表示扣减。
120If you say this, you haven't actually taken the exam.如果你这么说,你实际上没有参加考试。
121You don't know for yourself that it's difficult.汝亦不自知其难.
122However, again, you do know something else.不过,你还是知道别的事
123You know that only 10% of candidates pass this exam, and this makes you sure that it's你知道只有10%的考生通过这个考试, 这让你确定这是
124a difficult exam.考试很困难
125In our last example, it must have rained last night.在我们的最后一个例子中,它一定是雨昨晚。
126Did you see it rain?你看到下雨了吗?
127Well, no, you didn't, but you're sure it rained.你没有 但你肯定下雨了
128Probably you can see that the ground is wet.也许你可以看到地面是湿的。
129You didn't see or hear the rain, but you can make a deduction from what you see.你没有看到或听到雨声, 但你可以从你看到的东西中扣除。
130What you see makes you sure that it rained last night.你所看到的 让你确定昨晚下雨了
131You can also use must not with this meaning, but you can't use the short form mustn't你也不能用这个意思,但不能用简表
132in standard English to express the idea of deduction.在标准英语中表达扣除的想法。
133Mustn't is only used to say that something is forbidden.不得只用来说禁止的东西。
134Okay, that's a strange point.好吧,这是一个奇怪的点。
135So let's look at our next topic, which is negatives, part five.让我们来看看下一个话题, 也就是负面的,第五部分。
136It's important to remember that when you use must with different meanings, the negative一定要记住,当你使用 不同的含义,负
137or the opposite word is also different.或者相反的词也是不同的。
138Okay, let's look at this.好吧,让我们看看这个。
139So if must is used for obligation, the opposite would be mustn't or maybe can't.所以,如果必须用来承担义务,相反的是不能或也许不能。
140The opposite of mustn't for prohibition would be must or have to.不可禁止的反面是必须或必须禁止的。
141The opposite of must for strong advice is shouldn't, and for making deductions, the强力建议必须相反 不应该, 和做扣除,
142opposite of must would be can't, couldn't, or maybe must not.与必须相反的是不能,不能,也许不能。
143For example, passengers must place bags above the seats.例如,乘客必须在座椅上方放置袋.
144Here, must expresses an obligation.在这方面,必须表明一项义务。
145The opposite would be passengers must not place their bags above the seats.与此相反的是,乘客不得将行李放在座位上方。
146Or if you wanted to explain this rule in spoken English, you might say, you can't put your或者,如果你想用英语解释这个规则, 你可能会说,你不能把你的
147bag above your seat.袋子放在你座位上边
148Another example, you mustn't say anything to her.另一个例子是,你不能对她说什么。
149Here, must expresses prohibition.在此,必须表示禁止。
150The opposite is you must say something to her, or you have to say something to her.恰恰相反,你必须跟她说话, 或者你必须跟她说话。
151Finally, if you say, he must be awake.最后,如果你说,他必须醒着。
152It's two o'clock in the afternoon.午后二时.
153Here, must expresses a deduction.在这里,必须表示扣减。
154The opposite could be he can't be awake.恰恰相反 他不可能醒着
155He never gets up before the late afternoon.他下午很晚才起床
156Or perhaps he must not be awake.也许他不能醒过来
157He never wakes up early.他从不早起
158It's important to remember that these opposites are not all the same.必须记住,这些对立面并非都是相同的.
159For example, if you use must to express prohibition, the possible opposites are must and have to.例如,如果用它来表示禁止,那么可能的对立就是必须的和必须的。
160This doesn't mean that must and have to have the same meaning.这并不意味着必须而且必须具有同样的含义。
161Modal verbs are complicated.modal动词比较复杂.
162For now, you need to remember one important point.现在,你需要记住一点。
163Different meanings of must have different negatives.不同的含义必须有不同的负数.
164OK?好吗?
165Good.不错
166Let's look at one more point.让我们再看看一点。
167Part 6.第六编
168Past forms.过去表.
169Like with negatives, if you want to use must to talk about the past, the past form depends和底片一样, 如果你想用它来谈论过去, 过去的形式取决于
170on the meaning of must.关于必须的意义。
171Often, you need to use a different verb.通常需要使用不同的动词.
172Take a look.看看这个。
173So, must for obligation, the past form is had to.因此,必须承担义务,过去的形式必须如此。
174Mustn't for prohibition, the past form is couldn't.不能禁止, 过去的形式是不行的.
175Must for strong advice or recommendations, the past form is should have.为了提供强有力的咨询意见或建议,过去的形式应该有。
176And for making deductions, the past form is must've.而对于做扣除, 过去的形式必须是'。
177Using must with a past meaning is only possible if you're using must to make deductions.使用具有过去意义的必须 只有在使用必须 作出扣减。
178In all other cases, you need to use a different verb to talk about the past.在所有其他情况下,都需要使用不同的动词来谈论过去.
179Let's look at some examples.让我们看看一些例子。
180We must be there at 9 o'clock tomorrow.我们明天九点到
181This is an obligation.这是一项义务。
182In the past, you'd say, we had to be there at 9 o'clock yesterday.过去,你会说, 我们必须在昨天9点到那里。
183We mustn't smoke in the restaurant.我们不能在餐厅抽烟
184That's prohibition.这是禁止的。
185The past.过去.
186We couldn't smoke in the restaurant.我们不能在餐厅抽烟
187You must try the stew.你必须尝试炖肉。
188It's delicious.这是美味的。
189This is advice, the past form.这是建议,过去的形式。
190You should have tried the stew.你应该试试炖肉的
191It was delicious.这是美味的。
192They must be on the subway.他们一定是在地铁上
193I can't get through on the phone.我无法通过电话。
194That's a deduction.那是个推理
195The past form.过去之形.
196They must have been on the subway.他们一定是在地铁上。
197I couldn't get through on the phone.我无法通过电话。
198You can see how you need to use different verbs to talk about the past, depending on你可以看到你需要如何使用不同的动词来谈论过去,取决于
199the meaning of must.即必须的意义。
200OK, finally, let's do a review.好吧,最后,让我们做一个审查。
201Let's review what we've studied in this lesson.让我们回顾一下我们在这个课中研究过什么.
202Must can be used to express obligation and prohibition, to give strong advice, and to必须用于表达义务和禁止,提供强有力的建议,以及
203make deductions.进行扣减。
204In some cases, must is similar to other verbs.在某些情况下,必须与其他动词相似.
205For example, must used to express prohibition is similar to can't.例如,必须用来表示禁止的类似不能.
206However, remember that similar does not mean the same.然而,要记住,类似的含义并不相同。
207Must is unique, and no modal verb is ever exactly the same as must.必须是独一无二的,没有模式动词永远是完全相同的.
208Different meanings of must have different negative and past forms.不同的含义必须具有不同的负面和过去的形式。
209In other words, the way you use must depends on the meaning of must.换句话说,你使用的方式必须取决于必须的含义.
210You can't just use must in the same way in every sentence.你不能只是用 以同样的方式 在每一个句子。
211You need to think about what must means in each case.你需要考虑每个案件必须意味着什么。
212Do you want more practice with this topic?你想更多练习这个话题?
213请检查access-date=中的日期值 (帮助) 校对:Soup
214The full lesson includes notes and exercises to help you practice what you've learned in全部的教训包括笔记和练习 帮助你实践你学到的东西
215this class.这个班级
216That's the end of the lesson.师於此毕.
217Thanks very much for watching.非常感谢你的观看。
218I hope it was useful for you.我希望对你有用
219I'll see you next time.下次见
220Bye bye!再见!
该视频共有字幕 220 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P23 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p23 22. 22. English Grammar 22.How to Use Will, Would and Might - English Modal Verb (P23)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Stephanie.嗨,我是史蒂芬妮。
0:04Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
0:06In this lesson, you can learn about will, might, and would.在这个教训中,你可以了解意志、意志和意志。
0:12Do you know the difference between will and would?你知道意志和意志之间的区别吗?
0:16What about the difference between might and would?那力量和意志之间的区别呢?
0:21In this lesson, you'll learn what these modal verbs mean and how to use them correctly.在这个课中,你会学会这些模式动词的含义以及如何正确使用.
0:27At one point, when we say might, we also mean may.当我们说可能的时候,我们也是指可能。
0:32Might and may are used in the same way, so almost everything you hear about might is可能和可能 使用的方式相同, 所以几乎所有你听到的 关于可能
0:38also true about may.可能也一样
0:41In the few cases where might and may are used differently, we'll make it clear.在少数可能和可能使用不同的情况下,我们会澄清.
展开字幕全文（230 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Stephanie.嗨,我是史蒂芬妮。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
3In this lesson, you can learn about will, might, and would.在这个教训中,你可以了解意志、意志和意志。
4Do you know the difference between will and would?你知道意志和意志之间的区别吗?
5What about the difference between might and would?那力量和意志之间的区别呢?
6In this lesson, you'll learn what these modal verbs mean and how to use them correctly.在这个课中,你会学会这些模式动词的含义以及如何正确使用.
7At one point, when we say might, we also mean may.当我们说可能的时候,我们也是指可能。
8Might and may are used in the same way, so almost everything you hear about might is可能和可能 使用的方式相同, 所以几乎所有你听到的 关于可能
9also true about may.可能也一样
10In the few cases where might and may are used differently, we'll make it clear.在少数可能和可能使用不同的情况下,我们会澄清.
11Let's start by looking at the difference between will and might.先观愿力差别.
12Look at a pair of sentences.观一对句.
13I'll go to yoga class tonight.我今晚要上瑜伽课
14I might go to yoga class tonight.我今晚可能会上瑜伽课
15What's the difference?有什么区别?
16The first sentence with will expresses certainty.第一句以意志表示确定性。
17You're 100% sure about your plans.你百分之百的确定你的计划。
18The second sentence with might expresses possibility.第二句可能表示可能性。
19You're not 100% sure about your plans.你对你的计划并不完全肯定
20It's possible that you'll go to a yoga class, but it's also possible that you'll可能你会上瑜伽课,但也有可能
21do something else.做别的事
22That's the difference between will and might.这就是意志和力量的区别.
23Both modal verbs are used to talk about the future.两种模式动词都用于谈论未来.
24Will expresses certainty about the future, while might expresses possibility, which in将表达对未来的确定性,同时可能表达可能性,即
25a way is the opposite of certainty.一种方式与确定性相反。
26Possibility means that you're not certain about something.可能性意味着你不确定什么
27Think about the negative forms.想想消极的形式。
28I won't go to yoga class tonight.我不会去瑜伽课今晚。
29I might not go to yoga class tonight.我今晚可能不会上瑜伽课了
30Can you see the difference here?你能看到这里的不同吗?
31The answer is the same.答如来.
32Using will or won't shows that you're 100% sure about what will happen.使用意志或不会显示 你100%地确定会发生什么。
33Using might or might not shows that you aren't 100% sure about what will happen.使用或可能不显示 你不确定会发生什么
34Let's see some more examples of this.再举几个例子
35It will be hot next week.下周会很热的
36You're sure about this.你确信这一点。
37It might be hot next week.下周会很热
38It's possible that it'll be hot, but you aren't sure.可能会很热 但你不确定
39He won't come unless you tell him several weeks beforehand.他不会来的 除非你提前几周告诉他
40You're sure about this.你确信这一点。
41He might not come unless you tell him several weeks beforehand.他可能不会来,除非你提前几个星期告诉他。
42It's possible that he won't come in this case, but you aren't sure.这案子他可能不会来 但你不确定
43Next, let's think about the difference between will and would.接下来,让我们想想意志和意志之间的区别.
44When you say, it will be hot next week, or it might be hot next week, you're talking你说下个星期会很热 或者下个星期会很热
45about the real future.关于真实的未来。
46You think it's possible that it will be hot next week.你觉得下周会很热吗?
47Even if you're not sure, it's still a real possibility.即使你不确定,这还是个真正的可能.
48What do you mean, real future?真正的未来是什么意思?
49Is there another kind?还有别的吗?
50Glad you asked!很高兴你问了!
51Yes, there is.是的,这是有的。
52In English, you can also talk about the imaginary future.在英语中,也可以谈论想象中的未来.
53Let's see how.让我们看看如何。
54If I could go anywhere, I'd go to Nepal.如果我能去任何地方,我会去尼泊尔。
55Who would you choose if it was up to you?如果由你决定,你会选谁?
56I'd never speak to you again if you told her.你告诉她我再也不会跟你说话了
57Look at these examples.看看这些例子。
58Do you know what imaginary future means?你知道想象未来意味着什么吗?
59It means you're imagining something in the future, but you don't think it will actually意思是你在想象未来的事情 但你并不认为真的
60happen in reality.发生在现实中。
61If I could go anywhere, I'd go to Nepal.如果我能去任何地方,我会去尼泊尔。
62I can't go anywhere, so I won't go to Nepal.我不能去任何地方,所以我不会去尼泊尔。
63I'm just imagining it.我只是幻想着
64Who would you choose if it was up to you?如果由你决定,你会选谁?
65It's not up to you, so you can't choose.不由你决定 所以你不能选择
66I'm just asking you to imagine that it's your decision.我只是要你想象这是你的决定
67I'd never speak to you again if you told her.你告诉她我再也不会跟你说话了
68I don't think you'll tell her, so I don't think it's realistic that I'll never speak我想你不会告诉她的 所以我不认为我永远不会说话
69to you again.再来一次
70Of course, I could be wrong.当然,我可能错了。
71So, when you use will, you're talking about the real future.所以,当你使用意志, 你谈论的是真正的未来。
72You're certain about something that is a real possibility.你确信一些事情 是一个真正的可能。
73When you use would, you're also certain, but about the imaginary future.当你用它的时候,你也是确定的, 但是关于想象中的未来。
74You're imagining a future, and you're sure about what would happen in that imaginary你想象着一个未来, 你确信会发生什么 在这个想象中
75future.未来
76But, you don't think that imaginary future will ever actually become reality.但是,你并不认为想象中的未来会变成现实。
77Okay, now we'd like you to think about something.好吧,现在我们想请你考虑一下
78Look at three sentences.观三句.
79Even if you ask, I won't help you.即使你问,我也不会帮你
80Even if you asked, I wouldn't help you.即使你问,我也不会帮你
81If you asked, I would help you.如果你问,我会帮你。
82A question.问曰.
83Which of these sentences means that I will help you in the future?这些句子中哪句意味着我将来会帮你?
84Think about it.考虑一下
85Actually, that was a trick question.其实,这是一个骗局问题。
86All three sentences mean that I won't help you in the real future.三句皆谓我于真实未来不助汝.
87Did you get it right?你说对了吗?
88In our experience, many students get this question wrong.根据我们的经验,很多学生都搞错了这个问题.
89Either way, let's explain the answer.不管怎样,我们解释一下答案
90Even if you ask, I won't help you, this one is hopefully obvious.即使你问,我也不会帮助你, 希望这个是显而易见的。
91If you say, I won't, you're talking about the real future.如果你说,我不会,你说的是真正的未来。
92Even if you ask, in reality, I won't help you, in reality.即使你问,在现实中, 我不会帮助你,在现实中。
93Even if you asked, I wouldn't help you.即使你问,我也不会帮你
94What's the difference between this and the first sentence?此与初句何别.
95The only difference is that I don't think you'll ask me to help you.唯一的区别在于,我不认为你会要求我帮你.
96You won't ask me to help you, so I won't help you.你不会要我帮你的 所以我不会帮你的
97But, even if you asked, I still wouldn't help you.但是,即使你问, 我仍然不会帮助你。
98Nice of me, right?不错吧?
99If you asked, I would help you.如果你问,我会帮你。
100This is a sentence that can cause problems.这个句子可以引起问题.
101Can you explain why this means that I won't help you in reality, in the future?你能解释为什么这表示我将来不会帮助你吗?
102This sentence is about the imaginary future.此句论虚空未来.
103Using would means that you don't think this situation will happen.使用意味着你认为这种情况不会发生
104If you asked, I would help you, but I don't think you'll ask, so I don't think I will如果你问,我会帮你, 但我不认为你会问, 所以我不认为我会
105help you.帮你
106This is an important point, and it can cause misunderstandings.这是一个重要的问题,它可能造成误解。
107We've seen it happen many times.我们见过很多次了
108Let's look at this in more detail.更详观此经.
109Look at two sentences.看两句.
110She won't agree.她不会同意的
111She would agree.她会同意的
112What's the difference between them?他们有什么区别?
113Hopefully, now you can answer that question.希望现在你能回答这个问题了
114The most important point is that in both sentences, you mean that she won't agree最重要的一点是 在两句,你的意思是她不会同意
115in reality.在现实中。
116In the first sentence, that's all you're saying.初句中说一切法.
117You're saying that she won't agree in the future, and you're sure about that.你是说她以后不会同意的 你确信
118In the second sentence, you're talking about an imaginary future situation, which exists在第二句中,你说的是一种想象中的未来状况,它存在
119in your head.在你的头上。
120You're not talking about what you think will happen in reality, so the basic meaning你不是在谈论你认为会发生在现实中的事 所以基本意义
121is similar.类似。
122She won't agree in reality.她不会同意现实。
123So abstract.如此抽象.
124Why are we making you think about this?我们为什么要让你考虑这个?
125If you don't understand this, you can very easily misunderstand quite important points如果你不明白这一点, 你很容易误解相当重要的观点
126when you're speaking to someone in English.当你用英语跟别人说话时
127For example, imagine you invite someone to your birthday dinner.比如,想象你邀请某人参加你的生日晚餐.
128The other person says, well, I would come.另一个人说,嗯,我会来。
129You think, great, this person's coming.你认为,伟大的,这个人来了。
130You walk away and continue making your birthday plans.你走开,继续做你的生日计划。
131Except, as you hopefully understood, they're not coming.但正如你所希望的 他们不会来了
132They left part of their sentence unsaid.他们把部分刑期置之不理。
133The full sentence might be something like, I would come if I wasn't so busy.整个句子可能有点像, 如果我不这么忙,我会来。
134I would come if I was free.如果我有空我会来
135I would come, but I don't want to spend any money on buying you a present.我本想来的 但我不想花任何钱给你买礼物
136You don't know.汝不识.
137The point is, the other person won't come to your birthday dinner in reality.重点是 对方不会来参加你的生日晚餐
138And reality is probably more important to you, right?现实对你来说可能更重要,对吧?
139Of course, this wouldn't be a problem if everybody was direct and said exactly what当然,如果每个人都是直接的 说出什么,这不会是一个问题
140they meant.他们的意思是。
141But in the real world, people are often indirect, and they don't say exactly what they mean.但在现实世界中,人们常常是间接的,他们并不确切地说出他们的意思.
142Also, people usually speak with contractions, I'll, I, she'll, she'd, et cetera.而且,人们通常会说收缩, 我会,我会,她,她,等等。
143It can be hard to hear the difference, but the meaning can be totally opposite.可能很难听到区别,但含义可以完全相反.
144If you're listening and you're not sure if someone said I'll or I'd, here's our advice.如果你在听,你不确定 有人说我会或我会, 我们的建议。
145Ask.问.
146It's important because you could completely misunderstand the situation.这很重要,因为你可以完全误解情况
147We've talked a lot about will and would here, but what about might?我们谈了很多关于意志和意志的问题, 但是关于可能呢?
148Can you use might to talk about the imaginary future?你能用可能来谈谈想象中的未来吗?
149You can use might to talk about the real future or the imaginary future.你可以用来谈论真正的未来 或者想象中的未来
150Look at three sentences.观三句.
151It might snow next week.下周可能会下雪
152He might have a different suggestion.他可能另有建议
153Taking the bus might not be the best way to get there.搭公交车可能不是去那的最好办法
154Are these sentences about the real future or not?这些句子是关于真实未来的吗?
155Is it possible that it will snow next week or not?下周会不会下雪?
156These sentences are about the real future.这些句子是关于真实的未来.
157They all describe real future possibilities that you aren't 100% sure about.他们都描述了你不确定的 真正的未来可能性
158In a simple sentence like this, might is always about real future possibilities.在这样简单的句子中,可能总是关于真正的未来可能性.
159However, you could also use might to talk about the imaginary future too.然而,你也可以利用可能 谈论想象中的未来。
160Do you know how?你知道怎么做吗?
161Here are some examples.以下是一些例子。
162If I had more energy, I might join you.如果我有更多的精力,我可能会加入你。
163He might not pay you back if you lent him the money.如果你借给他钱 他可能不会还你钱
164Can you see the difference?你能看出区别吗?
165You can use might to talk about the imaginary future only in a sentence with if.你可以用一个句子来谈论想象中的未来
166You also need to use a past tense verb after if.您还需要使用过去紧张的动词 。
167Think about something.想想办法
168What do these sentences mean?这些句子是什么意思?
169The first sentence means that I don't have more energy, so I won't join you, but I'm初句意谓我无余力故不与汝同.
170imagining a future in which I have more energy, and even in that imaginary future, I'm not想象未来,我拥有更多的能量, 即使在这个想象的未来,我也不是
171100% sure that I would join you.百分百确定我会加入你们
172Clearly, whatever you're inviting me to isn't very exciting.显然,无论你邀请我做什么都不是很刺激
173He might not pay you back if you lent him the money.如果你借给他钱 他可能不会还你钱
174I don't think you'll actually lend him the money in reality, but I'm imagining a future我想你不会真的借钱给他 但我在想象未来
175where you do lend him the money, and in that imaginary future, I'm not 100% sure whether你借给他的钱, 在想象中的未来, 我不确定是否100%
176he would pay you back or not.他会不会还你钱?
177Finally, this is one case where might and may are different.最后,这是一个可能和可能有所不同的情况。
178You can't use may in these sentences to talk about the imaginary future.你不能用这些句子来谈论想象中的未来
179Only might is possible.只有可能,才有办法
180Up to now, you've seen how to use will, might, and would to talk about the future, but what直到现在,你已经看到如何使用意志, 可能,并且会谈论未来,
181about the past?关于过去?
182First of all, you can't generally use will to talk about the past.首先,一般不能用意志来谈论过去.
183There are one or two cases where you can, but it's rare.虽有一两例可以,但罕见.
184Generally will is about the future, or sometimes the present.一般来说,意志是关于未来,有时是现在。
185You can use would or might to talk about imaginary past situations.你可以利用或可能 谈论想象中过去的情况。
186What does imaginary past mean?想象中的过去是什么意思?
187Like the imaginary future, it means you imagine a past which didn't happen.和想象中的未来一样 这意味着你想象过去没有发生
188For example, let's say that you studied history at university.比如说你在大学学习历史
189You want to imagine a past where you studied medicine instead.你想想象一下你曾经学习过医学
190You might say something like, if I studied medicine, I would have become a doctor.你可能会说, 如果我学习医学, 我会成为一个医生。
191I might have been more interested in my studies if I studied medicine.如果我学习医学,我可能更有兴趣学习。
192In these cases, you're imagining a different past.在这种情况下,你想象着不同的过去。
193You didn't study medicine, you studied history.你没学过医学,你学过历史
194But what if you had studied medicine?但如果你学过医学呢?
195Imagine it.试想一下
196That's the situation these sentences are describing.这就是这些句子所描述的情况.
197A question.问曰.
198What do you need to add after would or might to make the meaning past?你还需要加上什么 才能让意义过去?
199You need to add have and past participle verb.你需要加上有和过去 participle动词。
200Also, when talking about the imaginary past, you almost always use an if sentence.而且,在谈论虚构的过去时, 你几乎总是使用句子,如果是的话。
201Let's see some more examples.更举诸例.
202I would have bought you a present if I'd known it was your birthday.如果我知道这是你的生日 我会给你买礼物的
203If I had missed a train, we might never have met.如果我错过了火车 我们可能就永远没见过面了
204Next question.下问.
205Can you explain what these sentences mean?你能解释这些句子是什么意思吗?
206Let's look together.让我们一起看看。
207The first sentence is imagining a different past.第一句想象着不同的过去。
208In reality, I didn't know it was your birthday, and I didn't buy you a present.实际上,我不知道这是你的生日, 我没有给你买礼物。
209But I'm imagining a different past, where I knew it was your birthday.但我想象着不同的过去 我知道那是你的生日
210In that imaginary past, I'm 100% sure I would have bought you a present.在那个虚构的过去里 我百分之百肯定会给你买礼物
211The second sentence is also imagining a different past.第二句也想象着不同的过去。
212In reality, I didn't miss the train, so we did meet.实际上,我没有错过火车,所以我们确实相遇了.
213However, in my imaginary past, I missed the train.然而,在我的想象中,我错过了火车。
214In this imaginary situation, I'm not 100% sure whether we would have met or not.在这种想象中,我不确定我们会不会见面
215Maybe we would have met somewhere else, or on another day, but maybe not.也许我们会在别的地方碰面 或者改天碰面 但也许不会
216You can see that these sentences contain a lot of information.你可以看到这些句子包含了许多信息.
217However, you only really need to think about two, or maybe three, things.然而,你只需要考虑两件事,也许三件事。
218One, are you 100% sure or not 100% sure?一,你百分百确定还是不百分百确定?
219If you're 100% sure, use will or would.如果你百分之百肯定,使用意志或会。
220If not, use might.如果不是,使用可能会。
221Two, are you talking about real life or an imaginary situation?第二,你是在说现实生活还是想象中的情况?
222If you're talking about real life, use will or might.如果你说的是现实生活, 使用意志或可能。
223If you're talking about an imaginary situation, use would or might.如果你说的是想象中的情况, 使用会或可能。
224The final thing, you need to think about whether you're talking about the future or the past.最后一件事,你需要思考,无论你是在谈论未来还是过去.
225However, this doesn't change which verb you should use, it changes how you should但是,这不会改变你应该使用哪一个动词, 它会改变你应该如何
226use them.用他们。
227您可以在OxfordOnline English.com的网站上用试题练习这个话题。
228Check the link in the video description.请检查access-date=中的日期值 (帮助) 视频描述中的链接.
229See you next time!下次见!
230Thanks for watching.谢谢你的观看。
该视频共有字幕 230 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P24 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p24 23. 23. English Grammar 23.How to Use the Present Continuous (P24)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hello, I'm Jack, and welcome to Oxford Online English.你好 我是杰克 欢迎来到牛津在线英语频道
0:07In this lesson, you can learn about the present continuous verb tense in English.在这个课中,你可以学习英语中目前持续的动词紧张.
0:12We'll talk about all the possible meanings of the present continuous.我们来谈谈目前持续的一切可能含义.
0:18Whether you're a beginner or an advanced learner, you're sure to find something new.无论是初学者还是高级学习者,你肯定能找到新的东西.
0:24So, let's get into it.所以,让我们开始吧。
0:27First, how can you form the present continuous?首先,如何形成目前的连续?
0:33To form the present continuous, you use be, plus a verb, plus ing.要形成现在的连续,你使用,加上一个动词,加上ing.
0:42For example, He's washing his car.比如他在洗车
0:48They're watching a film.他们在看电影
0:52What about negatives and questions?负面和问题呢?
展开字幕全文（160 条）
序号英文中文
1Hello, I'm Jack, and welcome to Oxford Online English.你好 我是杰克 欢迎来到牛津在线英语频道
2In this lesson, you can learn about the present continuous verb tense in English.在这个课中,你可以学习英语中目前持续的动词紧张.
3We'll talk about all the possible meanings of the present continuous.我们来谈谈目前持续的一切可能含义.
4Whether you're a beginner or an advanced learner, you're sure to find something new.无论是初学者还是高级学习者,你肯定能找到新的东西.
5So, let's get into it.所以,让我们开始吧。
6First, how can you form the present continuous?首先,如何形成目前的连续?
7To form the present continuous, you use be, plus a verb, plus ing.要形成现在的连续,你使用,加上一个动词,加上ing.
8For example, He's washing his car.比如他在洗车
9They're watching a film.他们在看电影
10What about negatives and questions?负面和问题呢?
11To make negatives, add not after be.做负数时,加不后.
12She isn't doing anything.她什么也没做
13I'm not working on that right now.我现在不做这个
14Now, to make questions, move the verb be before the subject.现在,为了提出问题,移动动词放在主体之前.
15Is he doing anything?他在做什么吗?
16Are you talking to me?你在跟我说话吗?
17The same rule works if you ask a question, with a question word like what, why, or how.同样的规则是有效的 如果你问一个问题, 一个问题单词 像什么,为什么,或如何。
18Simply move the verb be before the subject.动动动词就放在主体之前
19What are you watching?你们在看什么?
20Where are they going?他们要去哪?
21Now, you can see that to make questions in the present continuous, you don't add anything.现在,你可以看到,为了不断提问, 你什么都不加。
22So, don't add words like do or did.所以,不要添加像做或做这样的词.
23Just change the order of the words.即改语序.
24So, now you know how to form sentences and questions with the present continuous.所以,现在你知道如何用目前的连续法 来形成句子和问题。
25But, how do you use it?但是,你如何使用它吗?
26One use is for something happening right now.一种用途是现在发生的事情。
27This is the most basic use of the present continuous.这是目前连续性的最基本用途.
28He's washing his car.他在洗车
29They're watching a film.他们在看电影
30These sentences are talking about something which is happening at this moment.这些句子讲的是此刻正在发生的事情。
31Now, we can also use the present continuous to talk about something which has started,现在,我们也可以利用现在的连续 谈论一些已经开始的事情,
32but not finished.但没有完成。
33Now, this sounds familiar to the last point.现在,这听起来熟悉到最后一点。
34If we say, he's washing his car, this means he's started washing his car, but he hasn't如果我们说,他正在洗他的车, 这意味着他开始洗他的车, 但他没有
35finished yet.还没完成
36So what's the difference?那有什么区别?
37Why is this separate to the last point?为什么这和最后一点分开?
38It's different because we can also use the present continuous in this way to talk about不一样的,因为我们也可以用现在的连续 以这种方式谈论
39things which are not happening right now.现在没有发生的事情
40For example, I'm reading a good book at the moment.譬如我今时念善本.
41She's looking for a new apartment.她在找一个新的公寓。
42If I say, I'm reading a good book at the moment, I don't mean that I'm reading right now at如果我说,我现在在读一本好书 我不是说我现在在读
43this minute.这分钟。
44I mean that I've started a book and I haven't finished it yet.我的意思是,我已经开始一本书 我还没有完成它。
45In the same way, she's looking for a new apartment doesn't mean that she's out looking for an同样地,她在找一个新的公寓 并不意味着她出去寻找一个
46apartment this minute.这一分钟的公寓。
47It means she's started looking for an apartment, but she hasn't found one yet.意思是她开始找公寓了 但她还没有找到
48In these examples, we use the present continuous to talk about things happening around this在这些例子中,我们用现在的连续 来谈论围绕这个
49moment, not necessarily at this specific moment.时刻,不一定 在这个特定的时刻。
50Next, describing a picture.接下来,描述一张照片。
51If you have a picture, or a photo, and you want to describe it to someone, you use the如果你有照片,或者照片, 如果你想描述给别人,你使用
52present continuous.持续进行。
53A picture, or a photo, is like a moment in time.照片,或者照片,就像时间的瞬间。
54That's why we use the continuous form to talk about it.故用连续形论.
55For example, here, we can use the present continuous to talk about what we see.例如,在这里,我们可以利用目前的连续性来谈论我们所看到的。
56They are sitting on a beam high above the city.他们坐在高架上
57The two men on the left are smoking.左边两个男人在抽烟
58Some of them are eating sandwiches.他们中有些人在吃三明治
59It doesn't matter that the picture was taken a long time ago, we can still use the present不管照片是很久以前拍的, 我们还可以用现在
60continuous to describe it.持续地描述它。
61Next, talking about something temporary or different from usual.接下来,谈一些暂时或不同于通常的东西.
62So another use of the present continuous is to show that something is temporary.所以,另一个使用当前连续是 显示某些东西是暂时的。
63Look at these two sentences.观此二句.
64He lives with his parents.随父母住.
65He's living with his parents.与父母同住.
66What's the difference?有什么区别?
67Why would you use the present continuous here?为什么你要用现在的连续?
68In these sentences, the present continuous shows that the situation is temporary.在这些句子中,目前的连续显示情况是暂时的.
69If you say, he lives with his parents, you mean that this is permanent.如果你说他和父母住在一起 你是说这是永久性的
70If you say, he's living with his parents, you mean that this is a temporary situation.如果你说,他和他的父母住在一起, 你是说这是一个暂时的情况。
71Maybe he's living with his parents while he saves enough money to get his own place.也许他和父母住在一起,同时他存了足够的钱来得到自己的住处.
72Let's look at one more example here.让我们再看看一个例子。
73She works in the marketing department.她在营销部门工作.
74She's working in the marketing department.她在营销部工作
75Is the difference clear now?区别现在清楚了吗?
76If you say, she works in the marketing department, you mean that this is her permanent job.如果你说 她在营销部门工作 你是说这是她的长期工作
77If you say, she's working in the marketing department, you mean that she normally works如果你说,她在营销部工作, 你是说她通常工作
78somewhere else.在别的地方
79She's just working in the marketing department temporarily.她只是暂时在营销部门工作
80Next, talking about a changing situation.接下来,谈论一个不断变化的情况。
81I understand there are a lot of ways to use the present continuous.我知道有很多方法 使用目前的连续。
82Remember that you don't have to learn all of this at once.记住,你不必马上学习这一切。
83This video will still be here, so you can take a break and review what we've done so这段录像还在这里,你可以休息一下,看看我们做了什么
84far if you need to.如果你需要的话,远。
85Now you can also use the present continuous to talk about a situation which is changing现在你也可以用现在的连续 来谈论一个正在改变的情况
86over time.随着时间的推移。
87For example, the population of our city is growing by around 5% a year.例如,我国城市的人口每年增长5%左右。
88My English is slowly getting better.我的英语慢慢好起来
89The river used to be really polluted, but it's getting cleaner.这条河曾经被污染过 但越来越干净了
90In all of these examples, we're talking about a change which is happening over time and在所有这些例子中,我们指的是随着时间推移而发生的一种变化。
91which will probably continue into the future.将来可能还会继续
92If I say, the population of our city is growing by around 5% a year, this means that I expect如果我说,我们城市的人口每年增长5%左右, 这意味着我期望
93the population to continue growing, at least for the next few years.人口将继续增长,至少在今后几年。
94Okay, so you've seen how the present continuous can be used to talk about things happening好了,所以你已经看到 如何利用目前的连续 可以谈论的事情发生
95now, things which have started but not finished, describing pictures, talking about temporary现在,那些已经开始但尚未完成的事情, 描述图片,谈论临时
96situations, and talking about changing situations.并谈论变化中的情况。
97All of the meanings we've seen so far are similar.至今所见一切义相相似.
98They're all about something happening around a moment in time.他们都是关于 发生在某一时刻的事情。
99However, there are also some other ways to use the present continuous which are completely然而,还有其他一些方法可以使用目前的连续方式,这些方式是完全的。
100different.不一样
101Let's look at a very important one.让我们看看一个非常重要的。
102Talking about arrangements in the future.谈论未来的安排。
103Many English learners use will to talk about the future, but will can't be used for everything.许多英语学习者使用意志来谈论未来,但不能用于一切.
104Actually, the present continuous is one of the most common ways to talk about the future实际上,现在的连续是谈论未来的最常用的方法之一
105in English.英文。
106If you have a solid plan or arrangement, meaning you know where and or when something will如果你有一个坚实的计划或安排, 这意味着你知道在哪里或何时 东西会
107happen, you can use the present continuous to talk about it.发生时,您可以使用当前连续 谈论它。
108Here's some examples.下面是一些例子。
109We're meeting outside the cinema at 8 o'clock.我们八点钟在电影院外面见面
110They're coming to ours for dinner on Saturday.他们星期六来我们家吃晚饭
111What are you doing next weekend?你下个周末要做什么?
112It's very common to use the present continuous when you talk about plans for the near future当你谈论近期的计划时 经常使用目前的连续
113and social plans and so on.社会计划等等
114Talking about something strange or annoying.说着奇怪或烦人的事
115Now we're getting to something more specialized and a less common use of the present continuous.现在,我们得到了一些更专业的, 和不太常见的 使用目前的连续。
116Using the present continuous together with adverbs like always, constantly or continually经常或持续使用当前连续的副词
117can show that you find a repeated action annoying or strange.可以显示你发现一个重复的动作令人讨厌或奇怪.
118For example, He's always forgetting to bring the things he needs.例如,他总是忘记带上他需要的东西.
119They're constantly gossiping about me behind my back.他们总是背着我说起我
120My boss is continually interrupting me while I'm trying to work.我老板一直打断我工作
121So if you say, He's always forgetting to bring the things he needs, you mean that he所以,如果你说,他总是忘记 带来他需要的东西,你是说他
122often forgets to bring things, and you find this strange or annoying.经常忘记带东西, 你会发现这个奇怪或烦人。
123This use of the present continuous is unusual, because we're using the present continuous这种使用现在的连续是不寻常的,因为我们使用现在的连续
124to talk about a repeated action or a habit, and we don't normally do that.我们通常不这样做。
125So you must use an adverb in these sentences.所以你必须在这些句子中使用副词.
126You can't say, He's forgetting to bring the things he needs.你不能说 他忘了带他需要的东西
127To give it the meaning of something which you find strange or annoying, you need an adverb.为了赋予它你觉得奇怪或烦人的东西的意义,你需要一个副词.
128So always is the most common adverb to use in these sentences.所以永远是这些句子中最常见的副词.
129Okay, we're nearly there.好了,我们快到了。
130One more to go.再来一个
131The last use is talking about feelings which you are starting to be aware of.最后的用意是谈论你开始意识到的感受。
132Now again, this is a very specialised, less common way to use the present continuous.现在再说一遍,这是一个非常专门,不太常见的 使用目前连续的方法。
133What does it mean?这是什么意思?
134Think about these two sentences.思惟此两句.
135I realise I made the wrong decision.我知道我做错了决定
136I'm realising I made the wrong decision.我意识到我做错了决定
137Now they're both possible, but what's the difference?现在他们都有可能了 但有什么区别?
138In the first sentence, I realise I made the wrong decision, your realisation is not a在第一句中,我意识到我做了错误的决定, 你的成就不是
139new feeling.新的感觉
140However, when you say, I'm realising I made the wrong decision, you mean that you're just但是,当你说,我意识到 我做了错误的决定, 你的意思是你只是
141starting to think about this.开始考虑这个
142The feeling that you made the wrong decision is still growing on you.你做错决定的感觉还在增加
143Let's do one more example.再举一个例子
144I find it difficult to work with him.我觉得很难跟他合作
145I'm finding it difficult to work with him.我觉得很难跟他合作
146Can you see the difference?你能看出区别吗?
147Again, if you say, I find it difficult to work with him, this isn't something new for再说一遍,如果你说,我觉得很难和他一起工作, 这不是什么新鲜事
148you.你们
149It means you generally find him difficult and you dislike working with him.也就是说你一般觉得他很困难 你不喜欢和他合作
150If you say, I'm finding it difficult to work with him, this means that you're just starting如果你说,我发现很难跟他合作 这意味着你刚刚开始
151to realise how difficult he is and how you dislike working with him.来意识到他有多难 以及你不喜欢和他一起工作
152These feelings are new to you, I guess.这些感觉对你来说是新的,我想。
153Okay well, that's the end of the lesson.好吧,这是结束的教训。
154There's a lot of information in this video, so you might find it useful to review some视频里有很多信息,所以你可能会发现 检查一些
155parts of this video again.这段视频再次。
156If you want to practice this some more, check out the full version of the lesson on our如果你想多练习一些, 请检查 我们的课的完整版本
157website.网站。
158The full lesson contains notes, the full script, and a quiz to help you practice this topic.完整的课中包含注释,完整的脚本,以及帮助您练习这个话题的问答.
159That's all for now.仅此而已
160Thanks very much for watching and we'll see you next time.谢谢你的观看 下次见
该视频共有字幕 160 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P25 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p25 24. 24. English Grammar 24.How to Use The - Articles in English Grammar (P25)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Justin.嗨,我是贾斯汀。
0:03Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
0:06In this lesson, you can learn about using the.在这个课中,你可以学习如何使用。
0:10What language do you speak?你讲什么语言?
0:12If your language has a word like the, then the isn't too difficult.如果你的语言有类似词的话,那就不是太难了.
0:17There are some small differences, but you don't have to think about it too much.有一些小的区别,但是你不必过多考虑.
0:21However, if you speak a language which doesn't have a word like the, then learning how to但是,如果你会说一个语言 没有一个词像那个, 那么学习如何
0:26use the is a nightmare.用这个做噩梦
0:28This lesson is made more for people whose native language doesn't have a word like对于那些母语没有语言的人来说,
0:33the, although we hope that speakers of all languages will find it helpful.尽管我们希望所有语言的发言者都认为这是有益的。
展开字幕全文（257 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Justin.嗨,我是贾斯汀。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
3In this lesson, you can learn about using the.在这个课中,你可以学习如何使用。
4What language do you speak?你讲什么语言?
5If your language has a word like the, then the isn't too difficult.如果你的语言有类似词的话,那就不是太难了.
6There are some small differences, but you don't have to think about it too much.有一些小的区别,但是你不必过多考虑.
7However, if you speak a language which doesn't have a word like the, then learning how to但是,如果你会说一个语言 没有一个词像那个, 那么学习如何
8use the is a nightmare.用这个做噩梦
9This lesson is made more for people whose native language doesn't have a word like对于那些母语没有语言的人来说,
10the, although we hope that speakers of all languages will find it helpful.尽管我们希望所有语言的发言者都认为这是有益的。
11Learning about articles and the is the only grammar topic I've seen which regularly学文章 学书法是我唯一经常看到的
12makes students angry.令学生愤怒。
13Any time I have to teach someone about articles, I know that they're going to go through无论何时,我都要教别人关于文章,我知道他们要经历
14an angry stage.一个愤怒的舞台。
15Why is this?为什么?
16It's because there are hundreds of rules about using the.是因为有上百条关于使用的规则。
17Every rule has exceptions.每个规则都有例外。
18Of course, it's English.当然是英语
19Sometimes the rules overlap, and you don't know which one to use.有时规则重叠,你不知道该用哪个.
20We're not going to try to cover all of the rules in this class.我们不会试图涵盖这个班的所有规则。
21If you really want a headache, you can find a grammar book and try to read and learn all如果你真的想头痛,你可以找到一本文法书 试着读和学习
22of them.他们。
23Instead of giving you rules which you can read in a grammar book, we're going to give而不是给你在文法书里可以读到的规则, 我们要给
24you some practical tips that we've used with students and which work.你的一些实用提示 我们用在学生和工作。
25You'll see six tips and one simple technique you can use in your written English.你会看到六个提示和一个简单的技术 你可以使用你的书面英语。
26These tips and tricks are easy to remember and use.这些小费和技巧很容易记住和使用.
27You won't need to study for hours to memorize lots of complex rules.你几小时都不用学习 就能记住很多复杂的规则
28Watch the video to the end, and you can start using these ideas today.观看视频到结尾,你可以开始使用这些想法今天.
29Let's start with a general question.先总问.
30What does the mean?这是什么意思?
31Have you ever thought about this?你有没有想过这个?
32What does the mean?这是什么意思?
33What does it do?这有什么用?
34If I say to you, show me the book, what does the mean?如果我告诉你,给我看书,那是什么意思?
35Why do I say the book and not a book?为什么我要说这本书而不是一本书?
36The, in this sentence, shows that you, the listener, know which book I'm talking about.这句话显示你,听者,知道我说的是哪本书.
37It shows that I'm talking about a specific book, and I know you know which one I mean.它显示我说的是一本特定的书, 我知道你知道我的意思。
38That's what the means.这才是手段
39It shows that you're talking about something specific.这表明你说的是具体的事
40You can think of the as a pointing word, like this or that.你可以把这个词当做指点语 像这样
41When you use the before a noun, you're pointing to a specific thing and saying that one.当你使用之前的名词, 你指一个特定的事情, 并说一个。
42So that's the basic meaning of the.这就是基本的意义。
43Keep this in mind, because it's useful to remember these basic points if things get记住这一点,因为如果事情得到
44confusing.令人困惑。
45Let's see how you can use these ideas.让我们看看你如何利用这些想法。
46Let's start with some examples.先举一些例子。
47Can you open the window, please?你能打开窗户吗?
48Is that the woman you were telling me about?是你告诉我的那个女人吗?
49The Taj Mahal is really worth going to see.泰姬陵真的值得一看
50When you look at these sentences, they look completely different, right?当你看这些句子, 它们看起来完全不同,对不对?
51But there is a connection.但有一个联系。
52Can you see the connection?你能看到联系吗?
53Think about why you use the in these sentences.想想你为什么要用这些句子
54If I'm talking to you, in all of these three situations, you know which one I mean.如果我跟你说话,在这三种情况下, 你知道我的意思是什么。
55For example, if you say, can you open the window, please, then we're in the same room,比如,如果你说,你能打开窗户,请, 然后我们在同一间房,
56and it will be obvious which window you mean.你指的是哪扇窗户?
57Sure, there are many windows in the world, but if we're in the same room, then we know当然,世界上有很多窗户 但如果我们在同一间房,那么我们知道
58which window you're talking about.你说的那扇窗户
59You can see the same idea in these sentences.这些句子中可以看到同样的想法.
60Where's the bathroom?厕所在哪?
61I'm going to the shop.我要去店里买东西
62In both of these cases, we use the because it's obvious which one you mean.在这两种情况下,我们使用 因为它是显而易见的 你指的是哪一个。
63If you're at someone's house and you ask, where's the bathroom?如果你在别人家问,浴室在哪里?
64We know which bathroom you mean—the bathroom in the house where you are.我们知道你是指哪间洗手间 你所在的洗手间
65If you say, I'm going to the shop, again, you mean that whoever you're talking to will如果你说,我要去商店, 再次,你是说,无论你说话的人会
66understand which shop you mean.懂你的意思吗?
67Probably, you mean the local shop, when you go too often.也许,你是说当地的商店, 当你经常去。
68Let's look at our second sentence.观二句.
69If I ask you, is that the woman you were telling me about?如果我问你,是你告诉我的那个女人吗?
70You know who I mean.你知道我的意思是谁。
71But here, the reason is different.但在这里,原因不同。
72You know who I mean because we were talking about her before.你懂我的意思,因为我们之前在谈论她。
73You were telling me about her.你刚才跟我说她的事
74So, this is our second idea.所以,这是我们的第二个想法。
75You can use the if the person you're talking to will remember which one you mean.你可以使用 如果你说话的人 会记得你指的是哪一个。
76Here are a couple more examples of this.这里还有几个例子。
77What did you think of the film?你觉得电影怎么样?
78Do you remember the hotel we stayed at in Berlin?你还记得我们在柏林的酒店吗?
79In both of these examples, you're referring to some kind of shared experience.在这两个例子中,你指的是某种共享的经验.
80What did you think of the film?你觉得电影怎么样?
81Why do you use the?你为什么用这个?
82Because you're either talking about a film we saw together, or a film we've talked about因为你不是说我们一起看的电影 就是我们谈过的电影
83before.之前,我刚说
84Either way, when you ask this, you use the because the person you're talking to will无论如何,当你问这个, 你使用 因为你说话的人意志
85know which film you mean.知道你指的是哪部电影
86Do you remember the hotel we stayed at in Berlin?你还记得我们在柏林的酒店吗?
87We both stayed at the same hotel, so you know which hotel I mean.我们都住在同一家酒店,所以你知道我的意思是哪家酒店。
88Okay, let's come back to our third original sentence.好吧,让我们回到我们的第三句原话。
89If you say, the Taj Mahal is really worth going to see, why do you use the?如果你说,泰姬陵真的值得看看, 为什么你要用那个?
90It's because there's only one Taj Mahal.因为只有一个泰姬陵.
91We know which one you mean, because there's only one.我们知道你的意思 因为只有一个
92Let's see some more examples of this idea.让我们再看看这个想法的一些例子.
93The moon was so beautiful tonight.今晚的月亮如此美丽
94It was the happiest day of my life.那是我一生中最快乐的一天
95In both of these examples, you use the because you're talking about one of something.在这两个例子中,你都使用 因为你在谈论一个东西。
96The person you're talking to will know which one you mean, because the thing you're talking你说话的人会知道你指的是哪一个 因为你说的是
97about is unique.有关是独一无二的。
98The Earth only has one moon, so we say the moon.地球只有一个月亮 所以我们说月亮
99You can have many happy days in your life, but only one can be the happiest, so you say你生命中可以有很多快乐的日子 但只有一个人能快乐 所以你说
100the happiest day of my life.我生命中最快乐的一天
101So, you've seen three important ideas about using the in this section.所以,你看到了三个重要的想法 使用这个部分。
102Use the for things around you, where it's obvious which thing you mean.用你周围的东西, 在那里它很明显,你的意思是什么。
103Use the to refer to shared experiences, things you've talked about before or done together.用这个来指代共享的经验,你之前说过的或者一起做过的事.
104Use the when something is unique.用独有之物时.
105These are practical, general ideas which will help you to use the correctly in English.这些是实用的、一般的想法,有助于你正确使用英文。
106Next, let's look at another simple rule that can help you.接下来,让我们看看 另一种简单的规则 可以帮助你。
107Here's a good rule you can use, especially in your written English.这是一个很好的规则 你可以使用, 特别是在你的书面英语。
108If a noun is singular and countable, it needs some kind of determiner.如果一个名词是单数和可数的,它需要某种决定者.
109A singular countable noun can't stand by itself.一个单数的名词不能自己站立.
110Okay, this isn't specifically about using the, because a determiner could be something好吧,这不是具体关于使用, 因为一个决定者可能是什么
111else—maybe a, or this, or that, or something else.也可能是这种 也可能是别的
112But it's often helpful if you're trying to decide whether to use the or not.但是,如果你想决定是否使用,往往会有帮助.
113Let's look at an example.举个例子
114Manager told us more about plan for New Year's party.经理告诉我们更多关于新年派对的计划.
115Maybe you can already see that this sentence doesn't look right.也许你已经看到这句话看起来不对了
116Let's apply our rule.让我们应用我们的规则。
117Can you remember it?你还记得吗?
118If a noun is singular and countable, then it needs some kind of determiner, like the,如果一个名词是单数的,那么它需要某种决定者,比如,
119a, this, that, and so on.a,这个,那个,等等。
120So, let's look at our sentence.所以,让我们看看我们的句子。
121How many nouns are there?有多少名词?
122The first noun is manager.第一个名词是经理.
123Is this singular?这是单数吗?
124Yes.对
125Is it countable?可以数吗?
126Let's see.让我看看。
127One manager, two managers, three managers…一个经理,两个经理,三个经理...
128Yes, it's countable.是的,这是可数的。
129So, it needs a determiner.所以,它需要一个决定者。
130It can't stand by itself.其不能自立.
131Probably, whoever says this sentence knows which manager they're talking about.也许,说这句话的人 知道他们在谈论哪个经理。
132That means we can use the.这意味着我们可以使用。
133What about plan?那计划呢?
134Is it singular?是单数吗?
135Is it countable?可以数吗?
136Yes and yes, so again, it can't stay like this.是的,是的,所以再次, 它不能一直这样。
137Here, we say that the manager told us more.在这里,我们说经理告诉我们更多。
138That means you already knew something about this plan.也就是说你已经知道这个计划了
139That means you can use the.这意味着你可以使用。
140You know which plan the manager is talking about.你知道经理在说什么计划
141What about New Year's party?新年派对怎么办?
142Is it singular?是单数吗?
143Is it countable?可以数吗?
144Yes and yes, so you need something.是的,是的,所以你需要的东西。
145How many New Year's parties can there be each year?每年有多少个新年派对?
146I mean, technically, you could have more than one, but generally, one company will just我的意思是,从技术上讲,你可以有一个以上, 但一般来说,一个公司只是
147have one New Year's party.开个新年派对
148If there's just one, then you know which one the manager is talking about.如果只有一个 你知道经理在说哪个
149So, again, you can use the.所以,再次,你可以使用这个。
150The manager told us more about the plan for the New Year's party.经理告诉我们更多关于新年派对的计划.
151Let's do one more example.再举一个例子
152Governments should do more to help elderly people.各国政府应做更多的工作来帮助老年人。
153Think about this sentence.想想这句.
154Where are the nouns?名词呢?
155Do they need determiners or articles?他们需要确定者或文章吗?
156Let's use our test.我们用我们的测试。
157The first noun is government.第一个名词是政府.
158Is it singular?是单数吗?
159Yes.对
160Is it countable?可以数吗?
161One government, two governments?一个政府,两个政府?
162Yeah, it is, so it needs a determiner.是的,所以它需要一个决定者。
163Should we use the or something else?我们该用这个还是别的?
164There are many governments in the world, but whenever you talk about the government,世界上有很多政府 但每当你谈论政府
165you mean the government in your country.你是指你国家的政府
166So, it's clear which government you mean.所以,很明显你指的是哪个政府。
167That means you can use the.这意味着你可以使用。
168There's one more noun.还有一个名词
169Elderly people.老年人。
170Is it singular?是单数吗?
171No, so it doesn't need a determiner.不,所以它不需要一个决定者。
172It can stand by itself.它可以自己站着。
173However, just because it doesn't need one doesn't mean it shouldn't have one.然而,仅仅因为它不需要一个并不意味着它不应该有一个.
174You still need to think.你还需要思考
175Should you say the elderly people?你该说老年人吗?
176Here, you're talking about elderly people in general.在这里,你说的是一般的老年人。
177When you talk about things in general, you don't use the, so the sentence is now correct.泛论事物时,不用此句,故此句今为正.
178The government should do more to help elderly people.政府应该做更多的工作来帮助老年人.
179The test that you've seen in this section isn't a magic spell.你在本节中看到的测试不是魔法咒语.
180You still need to think about where to use the or not.你还需要考虑用到哪里
181However, it's simple, and it does help.然而,它很简单,确实有帮助。
182Use this in your written English, and you will make fewer mistakes with the.用这个写在英文里,你会少犯错误。
183Trust me, we've seen this work for many students.相信我,我们见过很多学生的作品
184Okay, so now you've seen some simple but important ideas to help you decide when to好了,现在你看到了一些简单但重要的想法 来帮助你决定何时
185use the, but part of using the correctly is knowing when not to use the.使用正确使用是知道何时不使用。
186So, let's talk about that.所以,让我们谈谈。
187We just mentioned one case where you shouldn't use the.我们刚提到一个你不该用这个案子
188Do you remember?你记得吗?
189Don't use the if you're talking about things in general.别用一般说的东西
190For example, Greek food is both healthy and tasty.例如,希腊菜既健康又美味.
191You're talking about all Greek food, in general.你指的是所有的希腊食物, 总的来说。
192I hate shopping for clothes.我讨厌买衣服
193I hate shopping for all clothes, all the time.我讨厌买衣服,总是买
194I'm not talking about some specific clothes.我不是在说具体的衣服
195Football is more popular than basketball in most countries.在大多数国家,足球比篮球更受欢迎.
196Again, everything here is general.再说一遍 这里的一切都是一般的
197You're talking about football in general, basketball in general, and countries in general.指足球一般,篮球一般,国家一般.
198Nothing is specific here.这里没什么特别的
199So that's your first important rule.所以这是你的第一个重要规则
200Don't use the if you're talking about things in general.别用一般说的东西
201This is a really solid rule.这是一个非常坚实的规则。
202It works well, so you should definitely remember it.效果不错,所以你应该记住它。
203There's another useful point here.这里还有一个有用的问题。
204Don't use the with most names.别用大多数名字
205When we say names, we mean nouns that you'd write with a capital letter.当我们说名字的时候,我们是指你用大写字母写的名词.
206This works most of the time.大部分时间都这样
207There are a lot of exceptions, but if you remember, don't use the with names, you'll有很多例外,但如果你记得, 不要用名字,你会
208be right more often than not.常说对了
209Obviously, if you know the detailed rules, then that's better.很明显,如果你知道详细规则,那就更好了。
210However, if you're in a situation where you don't know whether to use the or not, then然而,如果你处于一个你不知道 是否使用,那么
211use this rule.使用此规则。
212It works most of the time.大部分时间都有效.
213So, this means don't use the with people's names.因此,这意味着不要用人名.
214I met Jamie.我遇见了杰米
215Don't use the with names of cities or countries.别用城市或国家的名字
216Stockholm is the capital of Sweden.斯德哥尔摩是瑞典的首都.
217Don't use the with names of streets or other city features.不要用街道或其他城市特征的名称。
218Queens Park is near Broad Street.皇后公园位于宽街附近.
219Don't use the with the names of schools, companies, universities, or other institutions.别用学校、公司、大学或其他机构的名称
220Bill Gates dropped out of Harvard to start Microsoft.比尔·盖茨退出哈佛大学开始微软.
221I know what some of you are thinking.我知道你们有些人在想什么
222What about the United States?美国呢?
223What about the Hilton?那希尔顿号呢?
224What about…怎么样...
225Yes, of course, there are exceptions.当然,也有例外。
226There are exceptions to everything.凡事都有例外.
227But, that's not the point.但是,这不是重点。
228Remember what we are trying to do here.记住我们想做什么
229This is a simple trick that you can carry in your head, and which is easy to use.这是一个简单的把戏,你可以携带在头上,这很容易使用.
230It will work most of the time.大部分时间都行
231There's one more simple tip here.这里还有一个简单的提示
232Don't use the with another determiner.不要用另一个决定者。
233Determiners include this, that, these, those, possessive adjectives like my, your, his,确定者包括这个, 这些,那些,占有性形容词 像我,你的,他的,
234her, as well as quantifiers like many, much, a lot of, each, every, and so on.她,以及像许多,很多, 很多,每个,每个等等。
235So you can't use the in examples like I like this one more than that one.所以,你不能用的例子 像我喜欢这个比那个多。
236Is this your bag, or is it hers?这是你的包,还是她的包?
237I want to spend lots of time with every person here.我想花很多时间和这里的每一个人在一起
238Okay, quick review.好吧,快速检讨。
239Don't use the if you're talking about things in general.别用一般说的东西
240Don't use the with most names, but remember, there are many exceptions to this.别用大多数名字,但记住,这有很多例外.
241Don't use the with another determiner.不要用另一个决定者。
242From this lesson, you've got six rules, three rules about when to use the, and three从这个课,你有六条, 三条关于什么时候使用, 三条
243rules about when not to use the.规定何时不使用。
244You also saw a simple test to check if a noun needs an article or not.您还看到一个简单的测试来检查名词是否需要文章 。
245Is the noun singular?是名词单数吗?
246Is it countable?可以数吗?
247If yes and yes, it needs a determiner, possibly the.如果有和有,它需要一个决定者,可能是。
248If you find it difficult to use the correctly, take these six rules and this test, and try如果你觉得很难正确使用, 就拿这六条规则和这个测试,尝试
249using them.使用它们。
250We hope these tips are simple enough that you can remember them and start using them我们希望这些小费足够简单,你可以记住,开始使用
251right now.现在
252If you do, you will use the more accurately, and you will make fewer mistakes.如果你这样做了,你会更准确地使用,你会犯较少的错误.
253Remember, these tips have helped many of our students, and they can help you, too.记住,这些小费帮助了我们很多学生,他们也可以帮助你.
254Also, if you want more practice, check out the full version of this lesson on our website,另外,如果你想要更多的练习, 看看我们网站上的这个课的完整版本,
255Oxford Online English dot com.牛津在线英语点数com.
256There's also a quiz to help you practice using the.还有一个测试 帮助你练习使用。
257Thanks for watching!谢谢你的观看!
该视频共有字幕 257 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P26 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p26 25. 25. English Grammar 25.How to Use the Past Perfect Tense in English (P26)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Oli.嗨,我是奥利。
0:02Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
0:04In this lesson, you can learn about the past perfect verb form.在这个课中,你可以学习过去完美的动词形式.
0:09What does the past perfect mean?过去的完美意味着什么?
0:12When do you need to use the past perfect?你什么时候需要利用过去的完美?
0:15How do you use the past perfect verb tense correctly in a conversation?你怎么在谈话中正确使用过去完美的动词紧张?
0:20You'll see the answers to these questions in this lesson.你会从这个课中看到这些问题的答案.
0:25If you're watching on YouTube, remember to check out our website, too – Oxford Online如果你在YouTube上看,请记住也看看我们的网站。
0:30英国点com.
0:31We have video lessons, quizzes to help you practice the topics in our videos, and free我们有视频课,考试 帮助你练习我们的视频中的主题,免费
展开字幕全文（204 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Oli.嗨,我是奥利。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
3In this lesson, you can learn about the past perfect verb form.在这个课中,你可以学习过去完美的动词形式.
4What does the past perfect mean?过去的完美意味着什么?
5When do you need to use the past perfect?你什么时候需要利用过去的完美?
6How do you use the past perfect verb tense correctly in a conversation?你怎么在谈话中正确使用过去完美的动词紧张?
7You'll see the answers to these questions in this lesson.你会从这个课中看到这些问题的答案.
8If you're watching on YouTube, remember to check out our website, too – Oxford Online如果你在YouTube上看,请记住也看看我们的网站。
9英国点com.
10We have video lessons, quizzes to help you practice the topics in our videos, and free我们有视频课,考试 帮助你练习我们的视频中的主题,免费
11listening lessons.听课。
12You can also take classes with one of our teachers, in case you need extra help with你可以和老师一起上课 以防你需要额外帮助
13your English.你的英语。
14One more thing!还有一件事!
15Turn on subtitles now, if you need them.现在打开字幕,如果你需要的话。
16Click CC in the bottom right of the video player if you need English subtitles.在视频播放器的右下角点击 CC , 如果您需要英文字幕 。
17Also, you can adjust the speed up or down if you need to.另外,如果需要,还可以调整上下速度.
18Click on the settings button to change the playback speed.点击设置按钮更改播放速度 。
19Ready?准备好了吗?
20Let's see how to use the past perfect verb form.让我们看看如何使用过去完美的动词形式.
21How was the wedding?婚礼怎么样?
22A disaster!一场灾难!
23I've never seen anything go so wrong!我从来没有见过什么事情发生这么糟糕!
24Why?为什么?
25What happened?发生了什么事?
26First, they'd booked a hall for the ceremony, but it was much too small.首先,他们预定了一个大厅 仪式,但它太小了。
27Only thirty people could go in, and everyone else had to wait outside.只有三十人可以进去,其他人只能在外面等.
28Really?真的吗?
29That's weird.这很奇怪。
30I know!我当然知道!
31Surely, they knew how many people they'd invited?他们肯定知道自己邀请了多少人?
32I guess not.我想没有。
33Sounds bad.听起来很糟
34Yes, but that's not all.是的,但还不止这些
35They'd booked a restaurant for the reception, but they hadn't told them how many people他们订了餐厅 招待会,但他们没有告诉他们有多少人
36were coming, so there wasn't enough food, either.所以食物也不够
37That's not good.这可不好
38And then, as if that wasn't enough, there were so many long, boring speeches!然后,好像这还不够, 这么多长,无聊的演讲!
39You could tell that no one had prepared their speeches, and they were just trying to improvise.你可以告诉大家,没有人准备他们的演讲,他们只是想即兴表演。
40It just went on and on.一直这样
41So, you're hungry and listening to boring speeches for hours.所以,你饿了,听 无聊的演讲几个小时。
42Doesn't sound like much fun.听起来没什么乐趣。
43It wasn't.事实并非如此。
44In the dialogue, you heard five examples of the past perfect.在对话中,你听到了五个过去完美的例子。
45Can you remember them?你还记得吗?
46Here they are.他们来了
47Pause the video to read if you need more time.需要更多时间时暂停视频读取.
48Think about two questions.考虑两个问题。
49One, how do you form the past perfect?一,如何形成过去的完美?
50Two, what's the difference between the past perfect and the past simple?二,过去完美与过去简单有什么区别?
51First, how do you form the past perfect?首先,你是如何形成过去的完美?
52You need had or hadn't, plus a past participle.你需要或者没有, 加上一个过去的聚会。
53For example, had gone, hadn't prepared, and so on.例如,已经走了,还没有准备好,等等。
54如果可以承包给Aposrophe d.
55Be careful, because would can also be contracted to apostrophe d.小心点,因为也可以承包给Aposrophe d.
56In spoken language and in informal writing, you should generally use contractions.在口语和非正式写作中,一般应当使用收缩法.
57This is important, because if you don't use the contractions, you won't hear them这很重要,因为如果你不使用收缩,你就不会听到
58when other people use them.当其他人使用它们。
59What about the second question?第二个问题呢?
60What's the difference between the past perfect and the past simple?过去完美与过去简单有何区别?
61To answer this, let's look at an example from the dialogue.为了回答这一点,让我们从对话中看看一个例子。
62They had booked a hall for the ceremony, but it was much too small.他们为仪式预定了一个大厅,但太小了。
63Here, you have the past perfect and the past simple in the same sentence.在这里,你有过去的完美 和过去的简单在同一句。
64Can you explain why?你能解释为什么吗?
65In the dialogue, we were talking about two different times in the past.在对话中,我们曾经谈到过两个不同的时代。
66First, Kasia was telling me about a wedding she went to, but she also talked about things首先,Kasia告诉我她去的婚礼 但她也谈了些事情
67which happened or didn't happen before the wedding.发生在婚礼之前或没有发生
68She used the past simple to talk about the wedding itself.她用过去的简单来谈论婚礼本身.
69I used the past simple to ask questions.我用过去简单 问问题。
70For example…比如说...
71I used the past perfect to talk about things which happened before the wedding.我用过去的完美 来谈婚礼前的事
72Look at the examples you saw before.看看你之前看到的例子
73These are all things related to the preparations for the wedding, which took place earlier.这些都与之前举行的婚礼的筹备有关.
74So, that's the basic idea.所以,这是基本的想法。
75You use the past perfect when you're talking about the past, and you need to talk about你用过去的完美 当你谈论过去, 你需要谈论
76something which happened, or didn't, before the time in the past which you're talking之前发生的事,或者没有发生的事, 过去你所说的时间
77about.有关。
78Let's look at this idea in more detail.让我们更详细地研究这个想法.
79I'm going to tell you a story.我要告诉你一个故事。
80This happened to me when I was twelve years old.这发生在我12岁的时候。
81I was on holiday with my family, and we were walking in a forest.当时我和家人一起度假,我们在森林里散步.
82My dad had told me that there were bears in the forest, but I didn't really take我爸告诉我森林里有熊 但我真的没有
83him seriously.他是认真的。
84I was walking in front.我在前面走着
85I turned a corner, and… there was a bear.我转了个弯,然后... 有一只熊。
86I had never seen such a big animal in the wild before.我从来没有见过这样大的动物 在野外。
87I remembered something I had read about bears.我记得我读过关于熊的书
88You should stay calm and try to move away slowly.你应该保持冷静 试着慢慢离开
89So, I walked backwards very slowly.所以,我向后走非常缓慢。
90Luckily, the bear didn't seem to care that I was there.幸好熊似乎不在乎我在那里
91Later, I felt scared, but at the same time, I didn't feel anything.后来,我感到害怕,但同时,我没有任何感觉。
92I guess because everything happened so quickly.我想是因为一切都发生得太快了
93When you tell a story, you need to talk about several things that happened in a sequence.当你讲一个故事, 你需要谈论一些事情 发生在一个顺序。
94For this, everything is simple.为此,一切很简单。
95Use the past simple if you're talking about things which happened one after another.使用过去简单的,如果你在谈论 发生的事情一个接一个。
96For example, I bought a new car.例如,我买了一辆新车。
97I took it for a drive.我把它作为兜风。
98I crashed it into a tree.我把它撞到树上
99However, you might want to talk about things which happened before the time of your story.然而,你也许想谈谈在你的故事之前发生的事情。
100This is where you use the past perfect.这就是你使用过去完美。
101Look at the text of the story.观此经文.
102There are three examples of past perfect verbs.过去完美动词有三种例子.
103Can you find them?你能找到他们吗?
104Pause the video if you want time to look.想看就暂停录像
105Here are the three past perfect verbs.这是过去三个完美的动词
106They all refer to things which happened, or didn't happen, before the time of the story.他们都提到了故事发生之前发生或没有发生的事情.
107So, this is a common reason to use the past perfect.因此,这是利用过去完美的一个共同理由。
108You're telling a story, and you need to refer back to times or events which happened你讲一个故事, 你需要追溯到 发生的时间或事件
109before the time of the story.在故事发生之前
110Next, let's look at when you might need the past perfect in an English conversation.接下来,让我们来看看你什么时候 可能需要过去的完美 在英语对话中。
111When did you start teaching?你什么时候开始教书的?
112Actually, it was kind of an accident.其实,那是意外
113It was 2005, I had just graduated, and I wasn't sure what I wanted to do, so I took a six2005年,我刚毕业, 我不知道我想做什么, 所以我拿了一个6
114month teaching job, mostly because I wanted to live abroad and travel a bit.一个月的教书工作,主要因为我想住在国外和旅行。
115So, you didn't want to teach?你不想教书?
116Not really.没有
117I had never considered it as a career.我从来没有考虑过它是一个职业。
118Where did you move to?你搬到哪里去了? 你搬到哪里去了? 哪里去了? Where did you move to?
119Russia.俄罗斯.
120I had studied a little bit of Russian at university, but not enough to really be able to do anything,我曾在大学学习过一点俄语, 但不足以真正能够做任何事情,
121so I wanted to learn more, and also just experience living in Russia.所以我想学习更多, 也只是体验生活在俄罗斯。
122Had you ever lived abroad before?你以前在国外住过吗?
123Briefly.简曰.
124I'd spent some time in Canada, but this was more challenging.我曾经在加拿大待过一段时间,但这更具有挑战性。
125In the dialogue, there were five examples with the past perfect.在对话中,有五个与过去完美的例子。
126Did you hear them?你听见了吗?
127Remember, you can go back and listen to the dialogue again if you want.记住,如果你愿意,你可以回去再听对话。
128Often, when you have a conversation or tell a story, you'll see something which fixes通常,当你有谈话 或讲故事, 你会看到的东西 修复
129the time of the story.故事的时间。
130In the dialogue, the first question fixes the time.在对话中,第一个问题决定时间。
131When did you start teaching?你什么时候开始教书的?
132In Olly's answer, there's a more specific time reference, in 2005.在奥利的回答中,有更具体的时间参考,在2005年.
133That means that the conversation is about the time I started teaching, 2005, but we也就是说 谈话是我开始教书的时间 2005年
134also mention things that happened before that time.也提到在那之前发生的事情。
135Let's practice this together.我们一起练习吧
136Look at four sentences from the dialogue.从对话中看四句.
137A question – do these things refer to 2005, or before 2005?一个问题——这些东西是指2005年还是2005年之前?
138Sentences two and three refer to the time we were discussing, 2005, when he started第二句和第三句提到我们讨论的时间,2005年,当他开始的时候
139teaching.教学。
140Sentences one and four refer to an earlier time, before 2005.第1句和第4句提到在2005年之前较早的时间。
141You use the past perfect to talk about things which happened before the past time which你用过去的完美 来谈论过去发生的事情
142you're talking about.你说的是。
143When you're telling a story or having a conversation, you might refer to several different当你讲故事或谈话时,你可能会提到几个不同的
144points which happened at different times, so it's common to jump between the past不同时间发生的点,所以通常跳过过去
145simple and the past perfect, like you saw in the dialogue.就像你在对话中看到的 简单和完美的过去
146Here's a good way to remember it.以此妙法能记.
147The past perfect is the past in the past.过去完美是过去
148You use it when you're already talking about the past, and you want to refer to something你用它,当你已经谈论过去, 你想提到的东西
149which is further in the past.这在过去更进一步。
150Many English learners understand these points, but they still have difficulties using the许多英语学习者理解这些点数,但他们仍然难以使用这些点数。
151past perfect correctly.完美地过去
152In the next section, let's see why that is.在下一节,让我们看看这是为什么。
153Were you late for work again?你又迟到了吗?
154Yeah.对
155What happened?发生了什么事?
156My alarm clock didn't go off this morning.我的闹钟今早没响
157So, what time did you get there?你什么时候到的?
158Um, around eleven?嗯,大约11?
159Eleven?十一岁?
160Why did you wake up so late?你为什么这么晚醒来?
161I couldn't fall asleep last night.我昨晚睡不着
162I probably got four hours of sleep.我大概睡了四个小时
163Did you go to bed late?你睡得很晚吗?
164Not really.没有
165I think it was around twelve.我想是12点左右
166Did you hear the past perfect verb forms in the dialogue?你听到对话中过去的完美动词表了吗?
167Trick question!诡计问题!
168There were no past perfect forms, but why not?没有过去完美的形式,但为什么不呢?
169In the dialogue, we refer to different time periods.在对话中,我们提到不同的时期。
170We start by talking about being late for work, but then we talk about earlier time periods我们先谈上班迟到,然后谈更早的时间
171– the morning when Kasia woke up, and the previous evening.- 卡西亚醒来的早晨 以及前一天晚上
172So, again, why not use the past perfect?那么,再次,为什么不用过去完美的?
173There are places in the dialogue where it is possible to use the past perfect, but it's对话中有些地方可以使用过去的完美,但是
174better not to.最好别这样
175The most important point is that the order of events, and when things happened, is clear.最重要的一点是,事件的顺序,以及事情发生时的顺序是明确的.
176For example, look at four lines from the dialogue.例如,从对话中看四行。
177You could say, why had you woken up so late?你可以说 你为什么这么晚才醒过来?
178And I had probably only got four hours of sleep.我可能只睡了四个小时
179But it's not necessary.但没必要
180It's better not to.不如别.
181It sounds unnatural.这听起来很不正常。
182It's not necessary because the order of events is clear from the context.因为事件顺序从上下文看是清楚的,所以没有必要.
183Obviously, I woke up before I went to work.显然,我在上班前就醒了
184Equally obviously, I was asleep before I woke up.很明显,我醒来前睡着了
185When the order that things happened is clear, you don't need to use the past perfect.当事情发生的顺序是明确的,你不需要利用过去的完美.
186Another point, using the past perfect is generally less common in US English.另一种观点是,使用过去的完美一般在美式英语中并不常见.
187So, if you're not sure whether to use the past perfect or not, ask yourself whether所以,如果你不确定 是否使用过去完美, 问自己
188it's necessary to make it clear what happened when.有必要说明什么时候发生了什么
189If not, use the past simple.如果没有,就用过去简单。
190Sometimes, using the past perfect is necessary.有时,利用过去的完美是必需的。
191Let's see an example.举个例子
192Look at two sentences.看两句.
193When I moved to the USA, I found a job.我搬到美国后找到了工作
194When I moved to the USA, I had found a job.我搬到美国后找到了工作
195These two sentences have different meanings.这两句有不同的含义.
196What's the difference?有什么区别?
197The first sentence means you moved to the USA first, and then you found a job after第一句意味着你先搬到美国,然后你找到了工作
198you moved.你动了
199The second sentence means you found a job before you moved.第二句指你搬家前找到工作.
200In this case, it's important to use the past perfect, because using the past simple在这种情况下,重要的是要利用过去的完美, 因为利用过去的简单
201changes the meaning.改变意义。
202That's all!就这样!
203Thanks for watching!谢谢你的观看!
204See you next time!下次见!
该视频共有字幕 204 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P27 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p27 26. 26. English Grammar 26.How to Use the Passive Voice in English (P27)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Olivier.嗨,我是奥利维尔。
0:03Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
0:05In this lesson, you can learn about the passive voice in English.在这个课中,你可以学习英语中的被动声音.
0:09You can see what it is, how to form it, and how to use it.你可以看到它是什么,如何形成,如何使用它。
0:15Before we start, don't forget to check out our website, Oxford Online English dot com.在我们开始之前,不要忘记查看我们的网站,牛津在线英语点点com。
0:21You can find many other free English lessons.你可以找到许多其他免费英语课程.
0:24You can also take online classes with one of our qualified teachers.您也可与合格的教师一起上在线课程。
0:28But now, let's start with the basics.但现在,让我们从基础开始。
0:32What is the passive voice?什么是被动的声音?
0:34Look at these sentences.看看这个句子。
展开字幕全文（211 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Olivier.嗨,我是奥利维尔。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
3In this lesson, you can learn about the passive voice in English.在这个课中,你可以学习英语中的被动声音.
4You can see what it is, how to form it, and how to use it.你可以看到它是什么,如何形成,如何使用它。
5Before we start, don't forget to check out our website, Oxford Online English dot com.在我们开始之前,不要忘记查看我们的网站,牛津在线英语点点com。
6You can find many other free English lessons.你可以找到许多其他免费英语课程.
7You can also take online classes with one of our qualified teachers.您也可与合格的教师一起上在线课程。
8But now, let's start with the basics.但现在,让我们从基础开始。
9What is the passive voice?什么是被动的声音?
10Look at these sentences.看看这个句子。
11This dish is made with eggs and cheese.这盘菜是用鸡蛋和奶酪做的.
12The car was badly damaged in the accident.该车在事故中严重受损.
13Their house looks like it hasn't been cleaned for months.他们的房子好像几个月没清理了
14All of these examples use the passive voice.所有这些例子都使用了被动的声音.
15Can you see how, and why?你明白为什么吗?
16Let's look.让我们看看。
17In a regular, active sentence, you start with a subject, then you add a verb, which often在普通的,活跃的句子中,你先从一个主题开始,然后添加一个动词,这个动词往往
18has an object.有对象。
19For example, a dog bit me when I was five.例如,我五岁时,一只狗咬了我.
20Can you find the subject, verb and object in this sentence?在这句话中你能找到主题,动词和对象吗?
21To make the sentence passive, the subject and object change places.要使句子被动,主体和对象改变位置.
22I was bitten by a dog when I was five.我五岁时被狗咬了
23When you make a sentence passive, you only change the subject, verb and object.使句子被动时,只改变主体,动词和对象.
24Everything else stays the same.其他一切不变.
25In this example, when I was five isn't part of the subject, verb, object structure, so在这个例子中,当我五岁时, 并不是主题的一部分,动词,对象结构,所以
26it's the same whether the sentence is active or passive.无论句子是主动还是被动,都是一样的.
27Next, let's see how to form the passive voice.接下来,让我们看看如何形成被动的声音.
28Look at three sentences from the start of the lesson again.复观三句从初教起.
29They look different, but they all contain the passive.它们看起来不同,但都包含被动.
30What do the sentences have in common?判决有什么共同点?
31All three sentences contain the verb be and the past participle, also called the third三个句子都包含动词 和过去的participle, 也称为第三
32form.表单。
33This is what you need to form passive sentences.这就是你需要形成被动的句子。
34Let's do some practice.让我们做一些练习。
35Can you add the missing verbs to these three sentences?能否将缺失的动词加入这三句?
36If you're not sure, remember the rule from before.如果你不确定,记住以前的规则。
37You need be plus a past participle.你需要加上一个过去的派对
38Here, you need to put the verbs into the past participle form.在这里,你需要把动词放到过去的participle形式.
39Pause the video and think about your answers.暂停录像 想想你的答案
40Ready?准备好了吗?
41Here are the four sentences.以下为四句.
42Here's a question.问曰.
43These sentences contain the verb be, but it's different in each sentence.这些句子包含动词是,但在每个句子中都是不同的.
44Do you know why?你知道为什么吗?
45Let's look together.让我们一起看看。
46What do you do if you want to make a passive sentence past, or future, or present perfect?如果你想让被动的句子过去, 或未来,或现在的完美,你会怎么做?
47What changes?什么变化?
48Look at our last three examples again.再看看我们最后的三个例子。
49Remember that the passive is made of two parts, be plus a past participle.记住被动由两部分组成, 加上一个过去的participle。
50What changes, and what stays the same?什么变化,什么保持不变?
51The answer?答案吗?
52You can change the verb be to use different tenses and times.你可以改变动词是使用不同的时态和时间.
53The past participle never changes.过去的派对从未改变过
54Whether you're talking about the past, the present, or the future, the past participle无论你指的是过去,现在,还是未来,过去的聚会
55stays the same.保持不变。
56Let's see how this works.让我们看看这是怎么回事。
57Past.过去
58The letters were sent to all of our customers last week.信是上周寄给我们所有顾客的
59Present.现在
60The letters are sent to all our customers every week.信每星期都会寄给我们的顾客
61Present perfect.现成完美.
62The letters have been sent to all our customers this week.信本周已经发给所有顾客了
63Future, with will.未来,带着意志。
64The letters will be sent to all our customers next week.信下周会寄给我们的客户
65Of course, there are other possible forms, but the idea stays the same.当然,还有其他可能的形式,但这个想法保持不变.
66There are also passive infinitives, with to.也有被动无穷的,有的.
67The letters need to be sent to all our customers.信件需要寄给我们所有的客户
68And there are passive ing forms.而有被动的ing形式.
69Many customers like being sent regular newsletters.许多顾客喜欢被定期发送通讯.
70You can see the same pattern every time.你每次都能看到同样的图案
71Be plus a past participle, and the verb be, can change to show different times or forms.加上一个过去的participle,动词是,可以改变以显示不同的时间或形式.
72The past participle never changes, in any form of the passive.过去的派对从不改变 任何形式的被动
73Let's do a quick test.让我们做一个快速测试。
74Look at a sentence.观一句.
75This problem be solved by our IT team.这个问题由我们的IT团队来解决.
76Your job is to write five different versions of this sentence.你的工作是写五个不同的版本 这句话。
771.一、导 言
78Write the sentence in the present simple.将句子写在现在的简单.
792.2. 国家
80Make it present continuous.保持连续
813.3个
82Make it past simple.简单一点
834.4个
84Make it present perfect.让它变得完美
855.5.五.
86Make it future, with going to.让它未来,与去。
87Pause the video and write your sentences.暂停录像 写句子
88You'll see the answers in a few seconds.几秒钟后你会看到答案的
89Ready?准备好了吗?
90Here are the answers.以下是答案。
91How did you do?你好吗?
92Could you write the five sentences correctly?你能正确写下这五句吗?
93If you could, then well done.如果你可以的话 那就做得好
94If not, then you can review this section and try to work out why you made mistakes.如果不是,那么你可以审查这一节,并试图找出你为什么犯错.
95Okay, now you know the most important points about how the passive is formed, but why do好了,现在你知道 关于被动是如何形成的最重要的点, 但为什么
96you use the passive?你用被动?
97There are three common reasons to use the passive voice.使用被动的声音有三种常见的原因.
98One, you want to change the emphasis of your sentence.一,要改变句子的强调.
99Two, the subject of your sentence is unknown or unimportant.二,你的判决对象不明或不重要.
100Three, you want to sound more impersonal or indirect.3,你想听起来更不个人或间接。
101Let's look at these one by one.让我们逐个看看这些
102First, use the passive voice to change the emphasis of your sentence.首先,用被动的声音来改变你句子的强调.
103Look at two sentences.看两句.
104Leonardo da Vinci painted the Mona Lisa.莱昂纳多·达·芬奇画了蒙娜丽莎.
105The Mona Lisa was painted by Leonardo da Vinci.蒙娜丽莎是莱昂纳多·达·芬奇画的.
106The first sentence is active, and the second is passive.第一句为主动,第二句为被动.
107What's the difference?有什么区别?
108If you're not sure, think about this.如果你不确定,想想这个
109Which is the most important idea in each sentence?每个句子中最重要的想法是什么?
110In the first sentence, you're more interested in Leonardo da Vinci.在第一句中,你对莱昂纳多·达·芬奇更感兴趣.
111In the second sentence, you're more interested in the Mona Lisa.在第二句中,你对蒙娜丽莎更感兴趣.
112In English, putting an idea at the beginning of a sentence shows that it's more important.在英语中,将一个想法放在句子的开头,表明它更重要.
113You can use the passive to change the emphasis of a sentence, and show what you think is你可以用被动来改变句子的强调,并显示你的想法
114the most important idea.最重要的点子
115Secondly, use the passive when the subject is unknown or unimportant.第二,当主体不明或不重要时使用被动.
116What does that mean?这是什么意思?
117Let's look.让我们看看。
118My bike was stolen.我的自行车被偷了。
119The kitchen has been cleaned today.厨房今天被清理了
120She was arrested for shoplifting.她因偷东西被捕。
121Why do you think you use the passive in these three cases?你觉得你为什么在这三种情况下使用被动?
122In these examples, you either don't know or don't care who did the action.在这些例子中,你要么不知道,要么不在乎是谁干的。
123My bike was stolen.我的自行车被偷了。
124By who?谁?
125I don't know, and it doesn't matter.我不知道,这不重要。
126What matters is the fact that it was stolen.重要的是它被偷了
127I don't have my bicycle anymore.我没有自行车了
128The kitchen has been cleaned today.厨房今天被清理了
129By whom?谁?
130Here, it doesn't matter.在这里,这不重要。
131You only care about the fact the kitchen is now clean.你只在乎厨房现在干净了
132She was arrested.她被捕了,她已经被捕了。
133By whom?谁?
134By the police, of course.当然是警察干的
135You don't care exactly who arrested her.你根本不在乎是谁逮捕她的
136You know that the police arrested her because it's obvious from the context.你知道警察逮捕她 是因为从背景来看很明显
137No one else can arrest people.没有人可以逮捕别人。
138In these sentences, you only care about the action itself.在这些句子中,你只关心动作本身.
139You don't know or care who did it.你不知道也不在乎是谁干的
140There's one more common reason to use the passive to sound impersonal.还有一个常见的理由,就是用被动来表达非人性。
141Here's a question.问曰.
142What's the difference between these two examples?这两个例子有什么区别?
143You need to do this by the end of the week.你得在周末完成这个任务
144This needs to be done by the end of the week.这需要在本周末完成。
145If someone says this to you, the basic meaning is the same, so what's the difference?如果有人对你说,基本意义是一样的,那么有什么区别呢?
146The second sentence with the passive is more indirect and impersonal.第二句与被动者比较间接和不人格.
147This is because it avoids the words you need to, which appear in the first sentence.这是因为它避免了你需要的词,在第一句中出现.
148Using the passive in this way can help you sound more formal and polite.使用这种被动方式可以帮助你听起来更加正式和礼貌.
149Saying you need to do this by the end of the week is very direct.说周末你必须这么做是非常直接的
150It sounds like an order, which could be rude in some situations.这听起来像命令,在某些情况下可能很无礼。
151Now you know how to form the passive and the most common ways to use it, but there's one现在你知道如何形成被动 和最常见的使用方式, 但有一个
152more important point.更重要的一点。
153Many problems English learners have with the passive happen because they overuse it.英国学习者遇到很多与被动现象有关的问题,因为他们过度使用.
154Here's the important point.这一点很重要。
155Don't use the passive if you don't have a good reason to use it.若用无上正法故不得用被动.
156If you use the passive, especially when you're writing, think about why you're using it.如果使用被动语,特别是写作时,考虑一下为什么使用.
157Do you need to use it to change the emphasis of your sentence?要用它来改变句子的重心吗?
158Do you need to sound more formal or impersonal?你需要听起来更正式还是不私人?
159Do you want to focus on the action, instead of whoever did the action?你想把注意力放在行动上吗?
160If not, don't use the passive.如果不是,不要用被动。
161Using the passive makes your sentences longer and more complicated.使用被动使你的句子更长,更复杂.
162This isn't good unless it's necessary.除非有必要 否则这可不好
163First, it's inefficient because you'll need more words to express the same ideas.首先,效率低下,因为你需要更多的文字来表达同样的思想.
164Second, it makes your writing harder to read.第二,这让你的写作更难阅读.
165Let's do some quick practice.让我们做一些快速练习。
166You're going to see five sentences.令见五句.
167For each one, you should decide if it's necessary to use the passive or not.对于每一个,你应该决定是否有必要使用被动的.
168Here are the five sentences.此为五句.
169We were asked by our friends to bring a dessert for the party.我们的朋友要求我们给派对带点甜点
170The proposed policy is strongly supported by conservative voters.拟议的政策得到保守派选民的大力支持。
171It was decided not to follow the recommended outline in the report.委员会决定不采用报告中建议的提纲。
172A variety of measures could be taken to diminish the detrimental effects of global warming.可以采取各种措施,减少全球变暖的不利影响。
173The website will be finished and ready to launch by the end of the month.该网站将完工,并准备在月底前启动。
174What do you think?你觉得呢?
175Are these good examples of using the passive or not?这些是使用被动的好例子吗?
176Remember that to use the passive, you need a good reason.记住,用被动, 你需要一个好的理由。
177If there's no reason, don't use it!若无因缘,勿用之!
178Pause the video if you want more time to look at these.如果你想多看这些,请暂停录像。
179Otherwise, let's look at the sentences.否则,让我们看看句子。
180In the first sentence, there's no good reason to use the passive.初句中说无上正理用被动.
181Using the passive here only makes the sentence longer and more inefficient.在这里使用被动语只会使句子更长,效率更低.
182The sentence should be active and direct.判决应主动且直接.
183Our friends asked us to bring a dessert for the party.我们的朋友要求我们给派对带点甜点
184In the second sentence, you probably shouldn't use the passive.在第二句中,你可能不应该使用被动.
185You could argue that you use the passive here to emphasise the idea of proposed policy,你可以说,你用被动在这里强调 建议政策的想法,
186but the words proposed policy are vague, and if you haven't defined the idea, then why但是,拟议政策的措辞模糊不清, 如果你还没有定义这个想法, 那么为什么
187emphasise it?重点?
188Again, this sentence should almost certainly be active.同样,这一句几乎肯定应该有效。
189Conservative voters strongly support the proposed policy.保守派选民坚决支持拟议的政策。
190In the third sentence, there's one possible reason to use the passive—to make the sentence在第三句中,有一个可能的理由 使用被动 - 使句子
191more impersonal.更不讲人性
192Perhaps you don't want to say exactly who decided to do this.也许你不想说到底是谁决定这么做的
193In this case, using the passive is appropriate.在这种情况下,使用被动是适当的。
194The fourth sentence is a good example of passive misuse.第四句是被动滥用的好例子.
195The problem is that it's easy to use the passive voice to make unclear, empty sentences.问题在于很容易利用被动的声音来制造不明确,空洞的句子.
196In this sentence, what exactly is the writer saying?在这句话里,作家到底在说什么?
197A variety of measures is so vague that it could mean anything.各种措施非常模糊,可能意味着什么。
198Making this sentence active won't solve the problem.让这句话生效不会解决问题.
199Instead, you need to be more specific and explain your ideas more precisely.相反,你需要更加具体地解释你的想法。
200By the way, this is common in IELTS essays.顺便说一下,这在IELTS散文中很常见.
201Again, it's not a language problem, it's an ideas problem.再说一遍,这不是语言问题,而是思想问题.
202It's possible to construct long, complicated sentences using the passive, which don't使用被动语句可以构建长而复杂的句子,但不会
203say anything.说什么。
204But, this is bad writing, and it certainly won't help you in an exam like IELTS.但是,这是不好的写作, 它肯定不会帮助你 在考试 像IELTS。
205The fifth sentence is a good example of using the passive.第五句善用被动法.
206In this case, it's not important who will finish the website.在这种情况下,谁完成网站并不重要.
207It's important that this work will be finished by the end of the month.这项工作必须在月底前完成.
208Don't forget to check out the full version of this lesson on our website, and try the别忘了在我们的网站上查看这个课的完整版本
209quiz to see how much you've understood.试问看你们了解多少
210Thanks for watching!谢谢你的观看!
211See you next time!下次见!
该视频共有字幕 211 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P28 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p28 27. 27. English Grammar 27.Complex Sentences in English Writing (P28)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Gina.嗨,我是吉纳。
0:03Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
0:04In this lesson, you can learn how to make different types of complex sentences in English.在这个课中,你可以学习如何用英语制作不同类型的复杂句子.
0:13Making complex sentences will help your English writing.做复杂的句子会帮助你的英语写作.
0:18By using a variety of complex sentence forms, your writing will become more versatile and通过使用各种复杂的句子形式,你的写作将变得更加多功能,
0:25elegant.优雅无比
0:27Using a range of complex sentences in your writing is also important if you're preparing在你的写作中使用一系列复杂的句子也很重要 如果你准备的话
0:32用于英语写作考试,如IELTS,TOEFL或FCE.
0:38Before we start, two things.在开始前,有两件事
0:41One, have you visited our website yet?第一,你访问过我们的网站了吗?
展开字幕全文（182 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Gina.嗨,我是吉纳。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
3In this lesson, you can learn how to make different types of complex sentences in English.在这个课中,你可以学习如何用英语制作不同类型的复杂句子.
4Making complex sentences will help your English writing.做复杂的句子会帮助你的英语写作.
5By using a variety of complex sentence forms, your writing will become more versatile and通过使用各种复杂的句子形式,你的写作将变得更加多功能,
6elegant.优雅无比
7Using a range of complex sentences in your writing is also important if you're preparing在你的写作中使用一系列复杂的句子也很重要 如果你准备的话
8用于英语写作考试,如IELTS,TOEFL或FCE.
9Before we start, two things.在开始前,有两件事
10One, have you visited our website yet?第一,你访问过我们的网站了吗?
11If not, why not?如果不是,为什么不呢?
12We have free video lessons, listening lessons, quizzes, and also many professional English我们有免费的视频课、听课、测验 还有许多专业英语
13teachers who offer online lessons.提供在线课程的教师。
14Check it out!检查出来!
15Oxford Online English dot com.牛津在线英语点数com.
16Two, we want to tell you about this lesson, who it's for, what's in it, and what isn't.二,我们想告诉你这个教训,它是为了谁,里面有什么,什么不是.
17This lesson will focus on grammar structures for forming complex sentences without using这个课程将侧重于形成复杂句子的语法结构,而不使用
18conjunctions.连接。
19If you want to learn about using conjunctions to form complex sentences, you can watch our如果你想学习如何使用组合 组成复杂的句子,你可以观看我们
20video about linking words for IELTS writing.关于IELTS写作词链接的视频.
21There's a link in the video description.视频描述中有链接.
22Also, using these structures requires that you have at least an intermediate knowledge另外,使用这些结构需要你至少拥有中级知识
23of English grammar.英语语法。
24This lesson assumes that you know how to form different verb forms and use relative clauses,这个教训假设你知道如何形成不同的动词形式,并使用相对条款,
25among other things.还有其他的
26This lesson is technical, and contains a lot of information.这个课程是技术性的,包含很多信息.
27You might need to watch it in sections, and repeat sections several times.你可能需要在片段观看, 重复多次片段。
28Finally, a warning.最后,一个警告。
29Using complex sentences can enhance your writing, but only if you have complex, coherent ideas使用复杂的句子可以增强你的写作能力,但只有在你有复杂,连贯的想法时
30behind them.在他们后面
31If your ideas are basic or incoherent, using what you think are advanced grammar structures如果你的想法是基本的或不一致的, 使用你认为先进的语法结构
32won't help.没用的
33OK, let's start.好了,开始吧
34Here's how this lesson will work.接下来的课会如何进行.
35First, look at four sentences.先观四句.
36Pause the video, read the sentences, and look up any words you don't know.暂停录像,阅读句子, 查查任何你不知道的话。
37If you want to read more about tulip mania, there's a link to a Wikipedia article in如果你想读更多关于郁金香的 维基百科中的相关条目: 郁金香
38the video description.视频描述
39Ready?准备好了吗?
40These sentences are all grammatically simple, meaning that they each have one main verb.这些句子在语法上都是简单的,意味着它们各自有一个主动词.
41Now, you'll see four different grammatical tools you can use to combine and add to these现在,你会看到四个不同的语法工具 你可以用来结合和加入这些
42sentences to make them richer and more complex.句子使其更加丰富和复杂。
43Do you know what ING participle clauses are, and how you can use them?你知道什么是 ING Participle条款, 你如何使用它们?
44If not, don't worry!如果不是,别担心!
45Look at an example based on our first sentence.从我们的第一句来看一个例子。
46Here, you use a participle clause to connect two ideas.在这里,你用一个participle条款来连接两个想法.
47You can use an ING participle clause to connect two ideas which happen at the same time, or您可以使用 ING participle 条款连接两个同时发生的想法,或者
48to show cause and effect.以显示因果.
49In this case, you could express the same idea using because, like this.在这种情况下,你可以表达 同样的想法使用 因为,像这样。
50ING participle条款没有主题.
51In a sentence like this, with two clauses, the ING clause can only refer to the subject在这样的句子中,有两条,ING条款只能指主题
52in the second clause.在第二个条款中。
53You can't have two subjects.不能有二门.
54When writing, make sure your sentence has a clear subject.在写作时,确保你的句子有明确的主题.
55Don't write something like this.别写这种东西
56Here, it isn't clear what it refers to.这里,不清楚它指的是什么。
57Let's practice.让我们练习。
58Here are two ideas.这里有两个想法。
59你能用 ING participle 条款连接他们吗?
60Pause the video and think about your answer.暂停录像 想想你的答案
61Want a hint?想暗示一下吗?
62Your answer should be quite similar to the example you saw before.你的回答应该和你以前看到的事例相当相似
63Ready?准备好了吗?
64Here's the answer.答此经.
65There's one more way to use ING clauses.还有一种方法可以使用ING条款.
66You can use a perfect ING form, with having plus a past participle, to show that one thing你可以使用一个完美的ING形式, 加上一个过去的participle, 来显示一件事
67happened before another.发生在另一个人之前。
68For example…比如说...
69So, quick review.所以,快速检讨。
70你可以用ING participle条款做三件事。
71Do you remember them?你记得他们吗?
72One, use them to show that two actions happened at the same time.一,用它们来显示两个动作同时发生.
73Two, use them to show cause and effect.二,用之以显因果.
74Three, use them with having plus a past participle to show that one thing happened after another.3,用它们加上一个过去的聚会 来证明一件事情又一件又一件
75Remember, you can always review a section if you need more time to work on it.记住,如果你需要更多的时间来研究,你随时可以审查一个部分.
76Let's move on to our next point.我们继续讲下一个问题。
77There are two kinds of participle clauses, ING clauses and ED clauses.部分条款有两种,即ING条款和ED条款。
78Look at an example of two ideas linked with an ED participle clause.举个例子,说明与ED participle条款有关的两个想法。
79This links two ideas.这把两个想法联系起来。
80You can use ED participle clauses when you have two clauses with the same subject, and您可以使用 ED participle 条款,如果您有两条与同一主题,以及
81one of the clauses has a passive verb.其中一个条款有一个被动动词。
82Like ING clauses, ED participle clauses do not have a subject in the participle clause.与ING条款一样,ED编组条款在编组条款中没有主题。
83Let's look at another example.再举个例子
84This time, you can try to make the complex sentence.这一次,你可以尝试 做出复杂的句子。
85Can you combine these two sentences with an ED participle clause?你能把这两句和ED participle条款结合起来吗?
86Pause the video if you need time to make your answer.如果你需要时间回答的话 暂停录像
87Ready?准备好了吗?
88Here's the answer.答此经.
89Because the ED clause doesn't have a main verb, the verb tense information had been由于ED条款没有主动词,所以动词紧张的信息是
90cultivated disappears in the ED clause.在ED条款中消失。
91However, no meaning is lost.然而,并没有失去意义。
92In these two sections, you've seen how to use ING and ED participle clauses to link在这两节中,你可以看到如何使用ING和ED participle条款来链接
93two full, independent clauses.两项完整的独立条款。
94However, there's another way to use them.然而,还有另一种方法使用它们.
95Look at an example.观一譬喻.
96Can you see how this is different?你看这有什么不同吗?
97In this case, you're using the ED participle clause not to replace an independent clause,在这种情况下,你使用ED participle条款 不取代一个独立条款,
98but instead to replace a relative clause.但改为取代相对条款。
99Relative clauses are one of the most powerful ways to add and combine ideas in complex sentences.相对条款是在复杂句子中添加和结合思想的最有力方法之一.
100Let's look in more detail.更详观之.
101Relative clauses can do two things.相对条款可以做两件事。
102One, you can use a relative clause to add information to a noun or noun phrase.一,可以使用相对条款在名词或名词短语中添加信息.
103Two, you can use a relative clause with which to add information to a sentence or idea.二,您可以使用相对条款,在句子或想法中添加信息.
104Let's look at an example of the first case, using a relative clause to add information让我们看看第一个案例的例子, 使用相对条款添加信息
105to a noun.给一个名词
106Here, you use a relative clause, which occurred in Holland, to add information to the noun在这里,您使用荷兰发生的相对条款在名词中添加信息
107phrase tulip mania.郁金香
108Relative clauses used like this can only describe the noun they come after.这样使用的相对条款只能描述它们之后的名词.
109Don't write something like this.别写这种东西
110If you're using a relative clause to add information to a noun, the clause must come如果你用相对条款在名词上添加信息,该条款必须来
111directly after the noun or noun phrase.直接在名词或名词短语之后.
112You can use multiple relative clauses in the same sentence.在同一句中可以使用多个相对条款.
113For example, here, you add a second relative clause, with when, to add more information例如,在此,您会添加第二个相对条款, 以及何时添加更多信息
114about the noun 1637.关于名词1637。
115Using multiple relative clauses like this allows you to structure your ideas in different使用这样的多个相对条款,您可以在不同的结构中构建您的想法
116ways.办法
117For example, you could also write this.例如,你也可以写这个。
118This might be useful if you want to add more information about Holland later in the sentence,如果你想在后面的句子中增加更多关于荷兰的信息, 这可能是有益的,
119like this.像这样
120Let's practice.让我们练习。
121Look at two ideas.看看两个想法。
122Can you connect these two ideas using a relative clause?你能用相对条款把这两个想法联系起来吗?
123There are two possible answers.有两个可能的答案。
124Pause the video and make your answer.暂停录像 回答问题
125Ready?准备好了吗?
126Here are the two possibilities.这是两种可能性。
127Did you get the right answer?你得到了正确的答案吗?
128Even better, did you get both?更好的,你得到了两者?
129For an extra challenge, can you add a third idea?对于额外的挑战,你能添加第三个想法吗?
130Here's a hint.这里有个提示
1311637 appears twice, and you need to link the two instances.1637出现两次,你需要将这两个例子联系起来.
132Here's the best way to do it.以此为最胜法.
133Let's look at one more point here.我们再看一点
134You can also use a relative clause to add information or explanation to a whole idea.也可以使用相对条款为整个想法添加信息或解释.
135Look at an example.观一譬喻.
136Here, you're using the relative clause to explain the whole idea of the first clause.在这里,你用相对条款来解释第一个条款的整个想法.
137You're not just adding information to one noun phrase.你不只是在名词短语中添加信息
138To use relative clauses in this way, you need to do two things.要这样使用相对条款,你需要做两件事.
139One, you can only use which as the relative pronoun.首先,你只能用这个作为相对代词.
140Two, your relative clause must add an explanation or an opinion related to the idea before the第二,你的相对条款必须附加一项解释或与想法有关的意见。
141relative clause.相对条款。
142You can't add factual information or details in this way.不能以这种方式添加事实信息或细节.
143Now, let's look at one more way to form complex sentences.现在,让我们再看看一个方法 形成复杂的句子。
144To be a good writer, you should make it clear which ideas are more important.要成为一个好作家,你应该明确哪些思想更重要.
145In English, ideas which are close to the beginning of the sentence are more important than others.在英语中,接近句子开头的观念比其他思想更重要.
146So, if you want to emphasise an idea, you should find a way to move it to the beginning因此,如果你想强调一个想法,你应该找到一个方法把它推向开始
147of the sentence.句号。
148You can do this by using it, like this.你可以使用它,像这样。
149Here, you're focusing on the year, 1637.在这里,你专注于一年,1637年。
150Often you use this structure to focus on a factual detail, like a person, time, place,你经常用这种结构 专注于一个事实细节, 像一个人,时间,地点,
151and so on.诸如来.
152You can also combine this with other structures you've seen in this lesson.也可以把这个与你在这个课中看到的其他结构结合起来.
153For example, you could add a relative clause to the end of this sentence, like this.例如,您可以在句尾添加一个相对条款,比如这样.
154Look at a sentence.观一句.
155You want to emphasise the idea of Holland, or the idea of 1593.你想强调荷兰的想法,或者1593年的想法.
156Can you write two different sentences, starting with it, to emphasise these two ideas?你能写两句不同的句子,从它开始,强调这两个想法吗?
157Pause the video and do it now.暂停录像,现在就做
158Did you get your answers?你得到答案了吗?
159Take a look!看看这个!
160In the first sentence, you'll probably need to change the structure a little by separating在第一句中,你可能需要通过分离来改变结构
161in 1593 from the main clause using a comma.在1593年从主要条款中使用逗号.
162Now, you've seen several ways to form complex sentence structures in English.现在,你已经看到几种方法 形成复杂的句子结构 用英语。
163What should you do if you want more practice?你想多练习怎么办?
164First, you can use a grammar book or other resources to practice the topics you've首先,你可以使用语法书或其他资源来练习你拥有的主题
165seen in this lesson.从这个课上看到的
166寻找关于ING participle条款、ED participle条款、相对条款、
167and cleft sentences.和断句。
168Cleft sentences are also called focusing clauses in some books and materials.左句在一些书籍和材料中也被称为重点条款.
169Secondly, remember that the ideas in this lesson are not the only way to connect ideas第二,记住,这个教训中的思想不是连接思想的唯一方法
170into complex sentences.变成复杂的句子。
171You should also learn how to use a range of conjunctions and linking phrases to build您也应该学会如何使用一系列的组合和连接短语来构建
172sentences.句号。
173Finally, practice writing, and try to use some of these ideas in your writing.最后,练习写作,尝试在你的写作中使用一些这些想法.
174Get good, quality feedback to make sure that your writing is clear, well-organised and获得优质的反馈,确保您的写作清晰,组织良好,
175accurate.准确
176If you need help from a teacher, then our teachers can work with you to improve your如果你需要老师的帮助,那么我们的老师可以 与你合作改善你的
177English writing.英语写作.
178You can take a discounted trial lesson on our website – look for the link under the你可以在我们的网站上接受一个低价的试训 – 寻找下方的链接
179video – or visit Oxford Online English dot com and click to get started.– 或访问牛津在线英语点数com并点击开始.
180That's all, thanks for watching!就这样,谢谢你的观看!
181See you next time!下次见!
182www.oxfordlearning.co.uk联合国
该视频共有字幕 182 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P29 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p29 28. 28. English Grammar 28.How to Use Adjectives in English - English Grammar Co (P29)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Daniel.嗨,我是丹尼尔。
0:02Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
0:05In this lesson, you can learn about using adjectives in English.在这个课中,你可以学习使用英语的形容词.
0:09You'll see basic information about English adjectives, what they do, and how you can你会看到关于英语形容词的基本信息, 它们做什么,你如何可以
0:15use them.用他们。
0:16Then, you'll see some more details about different types of adjectives and what they然后,你会看到一些更多的细节 关于不同类型的形容词 和它们是什么
0:21mean.恶心。
0:24Before we start, have you visited our website, Oxford Online English dot com?在我们开始之前 你访问过我们的网站吗 牛津在线英语点点com?
0:29If you want to improve your English, there are free video lessons, as well as listening如果你想改进英语,有免费的视频课,还有听
0:34lessons.教训
展开字幕全文（209 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Daniel.嗨,我是丹尼尔。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
3In this lesson, you can learn about using adjectives in English.在这个课中,你可以学习使用英语的形容词.
4You'll see basic information about English adjectives, what they do, and how you can你会看到关于英语形容词的基本信息, 它们做什么,你如何可以
5use them.用他们。
6Then, you'll see some more details about different types of adjectives and what they然后,你会看到一些更多的细节 关于不同类型的形容词 和它们是什么
7mean.恶心。
8Before we start, have you visited our website, Oxford Online English dot com?在我们开始之前 你访问过我们的网站吗 牛津在线英语点点com?
9If you want to improve your English, there are free video lessons, as well as listening如果你想改进英语,有免费的视频课,还有听
10lessons.教训
11We also have a large selection of professional teachers who can help you improve your English我们还有大批专业教师 可以帮你改进英语
12in online classes.在在线课堂上。
13But now, let's get back to the lesson!现在,让我们回到教训!
14First, a question.首先,一个问题。
15What do adjectives do?形容词做什么?
16Adjectives describe nouns.形容词描述名词.
17They add information to a noun or noun phrase.他们在名词或名词短语中添加信息.
18For example, the sea was blue and clear.例如,海是蓝色和清晰的。
19The adjectives blue and clear add information to the noun, sea.形容词为蓝色和清晰,增加了名词信息,海.
20Adjectives can be used in many ways, but there are two common patterns.形容词可以在许多方面使用,但有两种常见的模式.
21First, you can put adjectives directly before the noun they describe, like this.首先,你可以把形容词直接放在他们描述的名词之前,像这样.
22Red, high-heeled shoes.红色的高跟鞋
23A reliable friend.一个可靠的朋友。
24He gave me an expensive Italian leather wallet.他给了我一个昂贵的意大利皮夹。
25Secondly, you can use a linking verb plus an adjective after a noun, like this.第二,在名词之后可以使用链接动词加形容词,像这样.
26She felt happy.她觉得很高兴。
27It's sunny.阳光灿烂
28He seems quiet today.他今天看起来很安静
29By the way, what are linking verbs?顺便说一下,什么是连接动词?
30Linking verbs add information to a subject.将动词链接到一个主题上会添加信息.
31Common linking verbs include be, seem, become, feel and appear, although there are many others.常见的连结动词包括: 似乎,变成,感觉和出现,尽管还有许多其他.
32You don't need to worry about this right now.你现在不必担心这个
33Remember the basic point.记住基本点
34Adjectives can go before a noun or after it.形容词可以在名词之前或之后进行.
35This will become more important later in the lesson.这在以后的课程中将变得更加重要。
36Keep watching to find out why.继续注意找出原因
37Here's another question for you.还有个问题
38How can you find the adjectives in a sentence?句中如何找到形容词?
39What do adjectives look like?形容词是什么样子的?
40There's no simple answer to this question.这个问题没有简单的答案.
41With all parts of speech, it's better to look at full sentences and think about context话语的各个部分,最好看满句子,考虑上下文.
42and meaning.和意义。
43Let's do a quick test.让我们做一个快速测试。
44Here are five sentences.此为五句.
45Can you find the adjective or adjectives in each one?你能在每一个词里找到形容词或形容词吗?
46Pause the video if you need more time to think.如果你需要更多的时间思考,请暂停录像.
47You'll see the answers in a few seconds.几秒钟后你会看到答案的
48Ready?准备好了吗?
49Here are the answers.以下是答案。
50You can see a few useful points here.这里可以看到一些有用的要点。
51Firstly, adjectives don't look similar to each other.首先,形容词看起来并不相似.
52Adjectives can have many different endings, and they can even end with –ly, like most形容词可以有很多不同的结尾,甚至可以用-ly来结尾,就像大多数
53adverbs do.副词有
54Secondly, adjectives also have different forms.第二,形容词也有不同的形式.
55For example, many adjectives have comparative forms, like good, better, or superlative forms,例如,许多形容词都有比较形式,如好,好,或超形式,
56like hard, hardest.喜欢难,难。
57Thirdly, some adjectives are compound, meaning they're made from two or more other words.第三,一些形容词是复合词,意思是它们是由两个或两个以上其他词组成的.
58This is common with numbers, as in a twenty-five-year-old man.这在数字上是常见的,就像一个25岁的男子一样.
59Now, you know some of the basics about adjectives and how to use them.现在,你知道一些关于形容词和如何使用这些形容词的基本知识.
60Let's go into more detail about different types of adjectives.让我们更详细地谈谈不同类型的形容词.
61Look at four sentences.观四句.
62Two are right, and two are wrong.二为正,二为错.
63Can you see which sentences are correct?你能看到哪个句子是正确的吗?
64Do you know why the other two sentences are incorrect?你知道其他两句为什么不正确吗?
65Pause the video if you need more time to think about it.如果你需要更多时间考虑,请暂停录像.
66Ready?准备好了吗?
67Let's look together.让我们一起看看。
68Sentences one and four are correct.一四句对.
69Two and three are incorrect.二三不实.
70Did you get the right answers?你得到正确的答案了吗?
71And can you explain why sentences two and three are incorrect?你能解释为什么第二句和第三句不正确吗?
72To explain this, you need to know about an important idea – gradability.要解释这一点,你需要知道一个重要的想法 — — 可升级性。
73Some adjectives are gradable.一些形容词是可降解的.
74That means they can have different levels.这意味着他们可以有不同的水平。
75For example, nice and interesting are gradable.例如,好和有趣是可分级的.
76Something can be more interesting or less interesting.有些东西可能更有趣或更少有趣.
77There are different levels of interesting.有趣的程度不同。
78Some adjectives are ungradable.一些形容词是不可降解的.
79That means they're binary, either yes or no.也就是说他们是二进制的,是还是不是.
80For example, unique is ungradable.例如,独一无二是无法降解的.
81Either something is unique, or it isn't.要么是独一无二的,要么不是
82You can't have different levels of uniqueness.不能有不同层次的独特性.
83It's a yes-or-no property.是或无财产.
84Ungradable adjectives have two types.不可降解的形容词有两种类型.
85Firstly, there are words with a strong meaning, like delicious, exhausted or furious.首先,有些词有强烈的含义,如美味、疲惫或愤怒。
86Secondly, there are words with an absolute meaning, like unique, true or possible.第二,有些词具有绝对的意义,如独特的,真实的或可能的.
87When we talk about ungradable adjectives, we mean both of these types.当我们谈论不可升级的形容词时,我们指的是这两种类型.
88What does this mean for you?这对你意味着什么?
89Well, there are two important rules you should know.嗯,有两个重要规则 你应该知道。
90First, you can't make comparatives from ungradable adjectives.首先,不能用无法升级的形容词来进行比较.
91You can't say more delicious.你不能说更美味。
92You can't say truer or most possible.你不能说更真实或最有可能。
93Secondly, if you want to emphasize an adjective by adding a word like very, really or absolutely第二,如果你想通过添加一个词来强调形容词,比如非常,真正或绝对的
94before it, you need to use different words for gradable and ungradable adjectives.在它之前,您需要使用不同的词来表示可分级和不可分级的形容词.
95Very is used with gradable adjectives.ver用的是可分级的形容词.
96So, you can say very beautiful, very cold or very funny, but you can't say very gorgeous,所以,你可以说非常漂亮, 非常冷或非常搞笑, 但你不能说非常华丽,
97very freezing or very hilarious.非常冷冰冰的或者非常搞笑的
98You can't say very freezing, but what can you say?你不能说非常冷, 但你能说什么?
99With ungradable adjectives, use absolutely.带有无法升级的形容词,绝对使用.
100You can say absolutely freezing, absolutely exhausted or absolutely unique.你可以说绝对冷,绝对精疲力竭 或绝对独特。
101What if you're not sure?如果你不确定怎么办?
102Use really, which can be used with both gradable and ungradable adjectives.真正使用,可以同时使用可分级和不可分级的形容词.
103So, you can say really cold or really freezing.所以,你可以说真的很冷 或者真的冻。
104They're both fine.他们都很好。
105Understanding the difference between gradable and ungradable adjectives is important if如果
106you want to use adjectives correctly in English.您想要在英语中正确使用形容词。
107There's also one more important point you should know.还有一点你应该知道
108Let's look.让我们看看。
109You heard in part one that adjectives can go before the noun, or after the noun if you你听到在第一部分 形容词可以去名词之前, 或者在名词之后,如果你
110use a linking verb.使用链接动词。
111So, are these sentences correct or not?那么,这些句子是否正确?
112As always, pause the video if you want to think about it for longer.和往常一样,如果你想多思考,请暂停录像.
113Ready?准备好了吗?
114Here's the answer.答此经.
115All three sentences are incorrect.三句皆不实.
116None of them are possible.这些都不可能。
117Do you know why?你知道为什么吗?
118Many adjectives can be used either before or after the noun they describe.许多形容词可以在其描述的名词前后使用.
119For example, you can say the car is new, or the new car.例如,你可以说汽车是新车,或者新车.
120Both are possible, and it doesn't change the meaning.两者都是可能的,而且不会改变意义.
121However, some adjectives can only be used in one position, either before or after the然而,一些形容词只能在一个位置上使用,无论是在
122noun.名词
123That's the problem with the three sentences you saw just now.这就是你刚才看到的三句的问题.
124Asleep can only be used after the noun it describes.只有在它描述的名词之后才能使用睡眠.
125You can say the cat is asleep on the wall, but you can't say an asleep cat.你可以说猫在墙上睡着了,但不能说睡猫.
126Main and elder are examples of adjectives which can only go before the noun, so you主语和长语是形容词的例子 只能放在名词之前,所以你
127could say this is the main problem, or he is my elder brother.或者他是我的长兄
128Now, let's do a test.现在,让我们做一个测试。
129Look at six adjectives.看六个形容词.
130Here's the question.问曰.
131Can these adjectives be used before the noun, after the noun, or in both positions?这些形容词是否可以在名词之前,名词之后,或者在两种位置上使用?
132To do this, try making sentences with the six adjectives, or go to an online dictionary要做到这一点, 尝试用六个形容词来做句子, 或者去在线词典
133such as the Cambridge Dictionary or Longman, and find example sentences.例如"剑桥词典"或"龙门",并找到例子句子.
134When you make sentences, try saying them out loud.当你做出判决时 试着大声说出来
135Use your instinct.用你的直觉。
136Does it sound strange or wrong?听起来奇怪还是不对?
137It probably is.也许吧
138Pause the video and do the test.暂停录像并做测试。
139You'll see the answers in a few seconds.几秒钟后你会看到答案的
140Ready?准备好了吗?
141Let's check together.让我们一起检查。
142Alone can only be used after the noun it describes.只有在它描述的名词之后才能单独使用.
143For example, he was alone for most of the summer.例如,在夏天的大部分时间里,他都是一个人。
144Ill is also generally used after the noun it describes.在它所描述的名词之后也普遍使用Ill.
145For example, I didn't work yesterday because my daughter was ill.例如,我昨天没有工作,因为我女儿病了.
146Complete can be used in both positions.完整可用于两个位置。
147For example, it was a complete disaster, or the first stage of the work is now complete.例如,它是一个完全的灾难,或者第一阶段的工作现在已经完成.
148Only is used before the noun.只用在名词之前.
149For example, the only way to do it is to do it yourself.比如说,唯一的办法就是自己做.
150Unhappy can be used in both positions.不高兴可用于两个位置.
151For example, they had an unhappy marriage, or he didn't enjoy the last year of school比如说,他们有不愉快的婚姻, 或者他不享受 最后一年的学校
152and was often unhappy.经常不开心
153Finally, afraid is only used after the noun.最后,恐惧只在名词之后使用.
154For example, I was afraid of the dark when I was a child.例如,我小时候害怕黑暗.
155So you're probably thinking, how do I know?你可能还在想,我怎么知道?
156How do I know whether an adjective can be used before or after a noun?我怎么知道在名词之前或之后可以使用形容词?
157It's a good question.善问.
158Unfortunately, there isn't a simple answer.不幸的是,没有一个简单的答案。
159Dictionaries don't usually include this information.词典通常不包括这些信息.
160However, we have good news.然而,我们有好消息。
161Most adjectives can be used in both positions.多数形容词都可以在两种位置上使用.
162Also, for most adjectives which can't, you already know the answer.而且,对于大多数形容词,不能,你已经知道答案了。
163For example, remember the sentence the problem is main?例如,记得问题在于什么的句子吗?
164Most of you knew that this sentence sounded wrong.你们大多知道这句话听起来不对劲
165Your instincts can be helpful.你的直觉可以帮助。
166Anyhow, now you know about gradability and adjective position, there's a reason we've无论如何,现在你知道 升级和形容词位置, 我们有一个理由
167shown you these two topics, because our last idea depends on these points.给你们看这两个话题,因为我们最后的想法取决于这些要点。
168You know that adjectives can be gradable or ungradable, or that they can go before or形容词可以是可分级的,也可以是不可分级的,或者它们可以在前去或者
169after the noun, but in some cases, the same adjective can be used in different ways, with在名词之后,但在某些情况下,同样的形容词可以用不同的方式使用,与
170different meanings.不同的意义。
171For example, look at these two sentences.譬如观此二句.
172She handled the situation in a very professional way.她以非常专业的方式处理这种情况.
173She's a professional tennis player.她是职业网球运动员.
174Both these sentences use the adjective professional, but in different ways.这两个句子都使用形容词专业,但使用的方式不同.
175Can you see the difference?你能看出区别吗?
176In the first sentence, professional is used as a gradable adjective, and it means something在第一句中,专业是用作可升级的形容词,意思是
177like effective or competent.喜欢有效或胜任。
178In the second sentence, professional is ungradable.在第二句中,专业是无法升级的.
179It means that playing tennis is her job, and she makes money from it.这意味着打网球是她的工作,她从中赚钱.
180Let's do another example.再举个例子
181Jerome was present at the meeting.杰罗姆出席会议。
182The present situation looks more hopeful than it has for several months.目前的局势看来比几个月来更有希望。
183What about here?这里呢?
184Can you explain the difference between these two uses of present?你能解释一下现在这两种用途的区别吗?
185In the first sentence, present is used after the noun, with the linking verb.在第一句中,在名词之后使用现语,并带有链接动词.
186It means that Jerome was there.这意味着杰罗姆在那里。
187In the second sentence, present is used before the noun, and it means relating to now.在第二句中,在名词之前使用现时,意思是和现在有关.
188So, in this case, the adjective has different meanings in different positions.因此,在这种情况下,形容词在不同的位置上有不同的含义.
189To be clear, this isn't flexible.说清楚,这不是灵活的。
190You can't choose to use present before a noun to mean there.你不能选择在名词之前使用现值来表示那里.
191If you use present before a noun, then it means relating to now.如果你在名词之前用到礼物 那意味着现在
192So, what should you take away from this?那么,你应该从这拿走什么?
193What do you need to focus on?你要专心做什么?
194We aren't showing you these points because you need to learn lists of all the gradable我们不给你看这些分数 因为你需要学习所有可升级的列表
195and ungradable adjectives.和不可升级的形容词.
196This lesson gives you tools to help you understand adjectives more deeply.这个教训给了你帮助你更深刻地理解形容词的工具.
197The most important point is that adjectives don't follow one simple set of rules.最重要的一点是形容词不遵循一套简单的规则.
198Like with all vocabulary, you need to use context to understand what an adjective means就像所有词汇一样 你需要用上下文来理解形容词的意思
199in a sentence.在一句话。
200Next, and this is also a general point, one word doesn't have one meaning.接下来,这也是一个一般性的点,一个词没有一个意义.
201With adjectives, whether a word is gradable or not can make a difference.加上形容词,一个单词是否可分级,就可以有所区别.
202Where an adjective is used can make a difference.在使用形容词的地方可以有所区别.
203You can't simply rely on a dictionary or a translator.不能简单地依靠词典或翻译.
204Again, you need to understand the context to understand the words.再次,你需要理解上下文来理解这些话.
205Do you find anything especially confusing about using English adjectives and adverbs?你对使用英语形容词和副词有什么特别的困惑吗?
206We're sure you aren't alone.我们确定你不是一个人
207Share your ideas in the comments, and maybe you'll get some help!在评论中分享你的想法,也许你会得到一些帮助!
208Thanks for watching!谢谢你的观看!
209See you next time!下次见!
该视频共有字幕 209 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P30 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p30 29. 29. English Grammar 29.How to Use To, In, and At - Prepositions in English G (P30)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Niamh, and welcome to Oxford Online English.嗨,我是Niamh, 欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
0:06In this lesson, we're going to look at the prepositions to, in, and at.在此课中,我们将研究各种预设,进,进.
0:14Have you ever asked yourself why there doesn't seem to be any rules for prepositions in English?你曾经问过自己,为什么对英语的预设似乎没有任何规则?
0:20If you have problems with these small words, don't worry—you're not the only one.如果你对这些小词有问题, 别担心—— 你不是唯一的一个。
0:27A good way to understand and learn the difference between prepositions is to look at them in了解和了解前姿的区别的好方法就是在
0:33groups.组合。
0:34That way, you can compare and contrast them.这样,你可以比较和对比它们。
0:39We're going to look at to, in, and at together because they can be used to talk about place.我们一起看 一起看 因为他们可以用来谈论地方
0:49First, look at a picture.首先,看一张照片。
0:53Listen to three sentences.谛听三句.
展开字幕全文（197 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Niamh, and welcome to Oxford Online English.嗨,我是Niamh, 欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
2In this lesson, we're going to look at the prepositions to, in, and at.在此课中,我们将研究各种预设,进,进.
3Have you ever asked yourself why there doesn't seem to be any rules for prepositions in English?你曾经问过自己,为什么对英语的预设似乎没有任何规则?
4If you have problems with these small words, don't worry—you're not the only one.如果你对这些小词有问题, 别担心—— 你不是唯一的一个。
5A good way to understand and learn the difference between prepositions is to look at them in了解和了解前姿的区别的好方法就是在
6groups.组合。
7That way, you can compare and contrast them.这样,你可以比较和对比它们。
8We're going to look at to, in, and at together because they can be used to talk about place.我们一起看 一起看 因为他们可以用来谈论地方
9First, look at a picture.首先,看一张照片。
10Listen to three sentences.谛听三句.
11Which one fits the picture?哪个符合照片?
12I'm driving to the airport.我开车去机场
13I'm at the airport.我在机场
14I'm in the airport.我在机场
15Which sentence fits?哪个句子合适?
16The first one.初一颂.
17I'm driving to the airport.我开车去机场
18A good way to understand English prepositions is to look at the words that go before and理解英语预设的好方法就是 研究之前和之后的词
19after them.在他们之后。
20Which words go before and after the preposition to?预言之前和之后 都说些什么?
21For example, which verb comes before to in our sample sentence?例如,我们抽样句子中哪一个动词出现?
22The verb drive.动词驱动.
23Drive is a verb of movement.驱动是一种动词.
24To expresses movement, so before to, we need a verb that expresses movement.为了表达运动,所以之前,我们需要一种表达运动的动词.
25So, let's think.所以,让我们想想。
26Can you think of any other verbs which express movement?你能想到其他动词吗?
27Go is an obvious example.Go是一个明显的例子。
28Maybe you thought of verbs like run, walk, or come.也许你想到了动词 比如跑,走,或者来。
29For example, you ran to the end of the road.例如,你跑到路的尽头。
30We walk to school every day.我们每天都在上学
31Do you want to come to my house for dinner?你想来我家吃饭吗?
32These verbs are all about people and how they move.这些动词都是关于人和如何移动的.
33You can also move things.你也可以移动东西。
34For example, you sent a letter to France.例如,你给法国寄了一封信。
35Can you think of any more verbs related to moving things?你能想出其他动词吗?
36Good examples are take or move, but there are many more.良好的例子正在采取或移动,但还有许多例子。
37For example, I took my bike to the shop to get it repaired.例如,我把我的自行车带到商店去修理.
38We moved the sofa to the other side of the room.我们把沙发搬到房间的另一边
39I have another tip for you.我还有一个小费给你。
40You can also use to after nouns that express movement.也可以在表达动作的名词之后使用.
41What do I mean by that?这是什么意思?
42What's the missing word in this sentence?此句所缺字何为.
43I'm planning a to China this summer.我打算今年夏天去中国
44Do you know?你知道吗?
45The missing word is trip.缺字为行.
46I'm planning a trip to China this summer.我打算今年夏天去中国
47Can you think of any other nouns like trip where you can use to after the noun?你能想到其他的名词吗? 比如旅行,你可以在名词之后使用吗?
48You can also use to after nouns like holiday, invitation, or way.也可以在名词后使用,如节日,邀请,或方式.
49For example, we went on holiday to Egypt last year.例如,我们去年去埃及度假。
50They sent us an invitation to their housewarming party.他们给我们发了邀请函 来参加他们升房派对
51Do you know the way to the botanical gardens?你知道怎么去植物园吗?
52There is an exception to these rules.这些规则有一个例外。
53Do you know what it is?你知道这是什么吗?
54It's a very common word, which I'm sure you all know.这是一个非常常见的词,我相信你们都知道.
55The place home does not use the preposition to.家不使用预置位置。
56You cannot say, I'm going to home.你不能说,我要回家了。
57The correct sentence is, I'm going home.正确的句子是,我要回家了。
58Also, don't use to with the pronouns here or there.另外,不要用 代词在这里或那里。
59For example, bring it here.例如,把它带到这里。
60Let's go there and see what we can find.我们去看看能找到什么
61So, now you know how to use to.所以,现在你知道如何使用。
62Use to after verbs or nouns which express movement.用于表达运动的动词或名词之后.
63So, what about in?进来怎么样?
64How would you describe this picture?你会如何描述这张照片?
65There's a woman.有一妇人.
66Where is she?她现在在哪?
67You can say, she's in the library.你可以说 她在图书馆里
68Why do you use in?你为什么用在?
69We use in to describe being surrounded by walls or other things.我们用它来形容被墙或其他东西包围
70Let's look at some more examples.让我们看看更多的例子。
71The Empire State Building is in New York.帝国大厦位于纽约.
72They stayed in a small town in the south of England.他们留在英格兰南部的一个小镇.
73My cousin lives in China.我表弟住中国.
74Remember, to understand prepositions, you should look at the words before and after记住,要理解前题,你应该先看后题
75the preposition.预设位置。
76Let's look at the verbs you can use before in.让我们看看之前您可以使用的动词.
77You can see the verbs be, stay and live.你可以看到动词是,停留和生活。
78Do these verbs express movement?这些动词会快速移动吗?
79No, they describe states without movement.不,它们描述的是没有运动的状态。
80Can you think of other examples of verbs which don't express movement?你能想到其他没有表达动作的动词的例子吗?
81There are many.还有很多
82You could use stand, sleep or study.你可以站着、睡觉或学习
83For example, why is he standing in the corner like that?比如他为什么站在角落里?
84He was sleeping in the car on the way here.他来的时候睡在车里
85Do you prefer to study in your room or in the library?你更喜欢在房间里或图书馆学习?
86Now let's look at the nouns.现在看名词.
87All of these nouns, New York, China, a small town, the corner, the car, your room, the所有这些名词,中国纽约,一个小镇,角落,汽车,你的房间,
88library, what connects them?图书馆,什么是连接他们的?
89They're all places which surround you.他们都是包围你的地方
90You can use in for cities, countries and buildings which you are inside.可以在您所在的城市、国家和建筑物中使用。
91These are direct, physical ways to use in.这些是直接的,物理的用法。
92Can you think of other things which you can use after in?进去后你能想出其他东西吗?
93You can also use in in more indirect ways.也可以以更间接的方式使用.
94For example, is that you in the picture?比如说,照片里是你吗?
95She works in the finance department.她在财务部工作
96I read about it in a newspaper.我在报纸上看过
97So, use in with verbs which don't express movement, like be, stay or live, and use in所以,用动词 不表达运动, 像是,停留或生活,
98with places or things which surround you.与你身边的地方或事物。
99So, what about at?那么,怎么样?
100Look at some examples with at.举几个例子
101She wasn't at the bus stop when the bus came.公交车来的时候她不在场
102I'm waiting for you at the end of the road.临终时等.
103We'll meet you at the subway exit.地铁出口见.
104Which verbs do we use with at?我们用哪一种动词?
105We have be, wait and meet.我们有,等待和见面。
106These verbs do not express movement.这些动词不表示运动.
107This sounds very similar to in, so what's the difference?这听起来很相似 所以有什么区别?
108Let's look at the words after the preposition.先标后文.
109You have the bus stop, the end of the road and the subway exit.设有公交车站,路尾和地铁出口.
110Why at the bus stop?为什么在巴士站?
111Why not in the bus stop?为什么不在巴士站?
112You can use at for bus stop because you're not surrounded by it.你可以用在公交车站 因为你没有被它包围。
113Think about it.考虑一下
114The bus stop could just be a pole by the road with a sign on it.巴士站可能只是路边的柱子,上面有标志.
115In this case, you can't be in the bus stop, right?在这种情况下,你不能在公交车站,对不对?
116There's nothing to be inside.内无所着.
117Similarly, you say at the end of the road or at the subway exit because it's a specific同样,你说在路的尽头 或者在地铁出口 因为这是一个特定的
118place, but you're not surrounded by anything.地方,但你没有 周围任何东西。
119So, then why do we say things like,那么,为什么我们要说,
120She's studying microbiology at university.她在大学学习微生物学.
121I saw it at the cinema.我在电影院看到的
122We can get something to eat at the supermarket.我们可以去超市吃点东西
123Why do we say at the cinema and not in the cinema?为什么我们说在电影院而不是在电影院?
124After all, the cinema is a place which surrounds you.毕竟电影院是包围着你的地方
125It's because you use at to talk about why you go to a particular place.是因为你经常说为什么去某个地方
126If you say she's studying microbiology at university, you use at because you talk about如果你说她在大学学习微生物学, 你用它是因为你谈论
127what she's doing at university and why she's there.她在大学做什么 以及她为什么在那里
128She's there because she's a student.她在那里是因为她是一个学生。
129Similarly, if you say I saw it at the cinema, what are you talking about?同样,如果你说我在电影院看到它, 你在说什么?
130What is it?这是什么?
131I hope it's obvious it is a film.我希望这是一部电影。
132You say at the cinema because you're going to the cinema to watch a film.你说在电影院 因为你要去电影院看电影
133You're not focusing on the place as a place.你没有把注意力放在一个地方
134You're focusing on why you go there.你专注于你为什么去那里。
135Let's look at another slightly different example.让我们看看另一个略有不同的例子。
136Did you meet Anne at the party?你在派对上见过安妮吗?
137Okay, what about party?好吧,那派对呢?
138That's not exactly a physical location, so why do you use at?这不是一个物理地点, 为什么你使用在?
139You can also use at for events.您也可以在活动中使用。
140For example, he met his wife at a speed medal concert.例如,他在一次速度奖牌演唱会上遇到了他的妻子.
141There were so many people at the wedding.婚礼上有很多人
142So, like in, you can use at to describe where something is.所以,比如说,你可以用来描述东西在哪里。
143Unlike in, use at to talk about specific places where you're not surrounded by anything.不同的地方,用在谈论特定的 地方,你没有被任何包围。
144You can also use at when you want to focus on why you go to a place, rather than focusing当你想集中精神去一个地方的时候 你也可以用 而不是专注
145on the place as a place.在一个地方。
146Finally, you can use at for events.最后,你可以用于活动。
147So, now we've looked at each preposition individually, let's compare and contrast them.所以,现在我们逐个研究了每个前置位置, 让我们来对比一下。
148Okay, so can you remember the difference between to, in and at in English?好吧,所以你能记得区别 与英语,在和在英语?
149To expresses movement.表达运动。
150That means you need a verb which expresses movement before to, and a place after to.也就是说,你需要一个动词 表达移动之前,之后的地方。
151At and in both express where something is.在和两个快递 在哪里的东西。
152There are some places which can only be used with one preposition.有些地方只能使用一个前置位置.
153For example, are you still in bed?比如,你还在床上吗?
154There's still some sauce in the fridge.冰箱里还有酱汁
155You sat at the end of the table.你坐在桌子的尽头
156What did you do at work today?你今天在工作时做了什么?
157In these cases, you can't choose.在这种情况下,你不能选择。
158There's only one possibility.只有一个可能性。
159However, sometimes you can use either at or in with no difference in meaning.然而,有时你可以使用 无论是在或者在没有区别的含义。
160I can't talk right now.我现在不能说话
161I'm in a meeting.我在开会
162I can't talk right now.我现在不能说话
163I'm at a meeting.我在开会
164Then, sometimes at and in are both possible, but with slightly different meanings.然后,有时在时间和时间上都有可能,但含义略有不同。
165For example, I'm at the bank.例如,我在银行。
166I'm in the bank.我在银行里
167Can you tell the difference?你能分辨出不同吗?
168Now, these two sentences could have the same meaning.现在,这两句可以有同样的含义.
169They aren't necessarily different.它们不一定不同。
170However, they could be different.然而,它们可能有所不同。
171I'm in the bank focuses on the bank as a physical place.我在银行 专注于银行作为一个物理的地方。
172Maybe it started raining really hard, and you just ran into the bank so you wouldn't也许它开始下雨 真的很难, 你只是跑到银行 所以你不会
173get wet.淋湿。
174I'm at the bank focuses on the bank as a bank.我在银行 专注于银行作为一个银行。
175If you say, I'm at the bank, you have some banking to do there.如果你说,我在银行, 你有一些银行工作在那里。
176Let's see one more example like this.再举个例子
177We were at Mike's apartment last night.我们昨晚在迈克的公寓
178We were in Mike's apartment last night.我们昨晚在迈克的公寓里
179Can you tell the difference this time?这次你能分辨出不同吗?
180This time, the sentences are definitely different, and you probably wouldn't want to use one这一次,句子绝对不同, 你可能不想用一个
181of them.他们。
182We were at Mike's apartment last night focuses on why you were there.我们昨晚在迈克的公寓 专注于你为什么在那里。
183Why were you there?你为什么在那里?
184You were visiting Mike, probably.你可能去拜访迈克了
185Maybe you went over to Mike's for dinner or something like that.也许你去迈克家吃晚饭什么的
186We were in Mike's apartment last night focuses on Mike's apartment as a place.我们昨晚在迈克的公寓 专注于迈克的公寓作为一个地方。
187This suggests that you were in Mike's apartment, but Mike wasn't, so what were you doing there?这说明你当时在迈克的公寓里 但迈克没有 你在那里做什么?
188This is why you probably wouldn't say in Mike's apartment.这就是为什么你可能不会说 在迈克的公寓。
189I hope some of these rules have helped you understand the difference between these prepositions.我希望其中一些规则有助于你理解这些预设的区别.
190I strongly recommend that when you're learning vocabulary, don't just learn one word, but我强烈建议,当你学习词汇时, 不要只学习一个词,但是
191learn the words on either side, too.学两边的词也.
192For example, if you want to learn the word bus stop, learn a full phrase, like wait at例如,如果想学公交车站这个词,就学一个完整的短语,比如等待
193the bus stop.公交车站
194That way, it's easier to remember the correct preposition.这样就更容易记住正确的前置位置.
195If you enjoyed this lesson, you can find more of our free lessons at Oxford Online English如果你喜欢这个课程 你可以在牛津在线英语中找到更多的免费课程
196.com.腾讯网.
197Thanks for watching!谢谢你的观看!
该视频共有字幕 197 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P31 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p31 30. 30. English Grammar 30.Should You Use TO or FOR- - 5 Levels of English Gramm (P31)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Kasia.嗨,我是卡西亚。
0:02Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
0:05This is a five-levels lesson.此是五等经.
0:07The lesson has five parts.课有五部分.
0:10Each section will give you a challenge.每节都会给你一个挑战。
0:13Each section is designed to be more difficult than the previous ones.每节设计难度比前节要大.
0:18You'll probably find different parts easier or more difficult.你可能会发现不同的部分 更容易或更困难。
0:23This will help you to understand where you have problems.这会帮助你了解你哪里有问题。
0:27In each section, we'll give you an idea of what you need to know in order to understand在每一节,我们会给你一个想法 你需要知道什么才能理解
0:33the challenge fully.完全挑战。
展开字幕全文（197 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Kasia.嗨,我是卡西亚。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
3This is a five-levels lesson.此是五等经.
4The lesson has five parts.课有五部分.
5Each section will give you a challenge.每节都会给你一个挑战。
6Each section is designed to be more difficult than the previous ones.每节设计难度比前节要大.
7You'll probably find different parts easier or more difficult.你可能会发现不同的部分 更容易或更困难。
8This will help you to understand where you have problems.这会帮助你了解你哪里有问题。
9In each section, we'll give you an idea of what you need to know in order to understand在每一节,我们会给你一个想法 你需要知道什么才能理解
10the challenge fully.完全挑战。
11Level one is beginner, so if you're not a beginner, you should skip to level two.一级是初学者,所以如果你不是初学者,你应该跳到二级.
12Ready?准备好了吗?
13Let's go!我们走!
14Look at five sentences.观五句.
15Complete each sentence with either two or four.每句以两句或四句完成。
16Pause the video, and do it now.暂停录像,现在就做
17Ready?准备好了吗?
18Let's look at the answers.让我们来看看答案。
19Two and four both have many different uses in English.2和4在英语中都有许多不同的用途.
20Some are simple.有些很简单。
21You use two to talk about going somewhere.你用两个来谈论去什么地方。
22For example, go to the shop.譬如去店内.
23Go to London.去伦敦
24Go to China.去中国.
25And so on.及诸众生.
26There's one common exception.有一个常见的例外。
27You say go home without two.你说不带两个回家
28Use four when you do something for someone else.为他人作事时用四.
29For example, you can hold something for someone, carry something for someone, buy something比如,你可以拿东西给别人,拿东西给别人,买东西
30for someone, and so on.为某人,等等。
31Use to when you're talking about an end point in time or space.用于你所说的时间或空间的终点时.
32In these cases, you often use from, to.在这种情况下,你经常使用 从,到。
33For example, I'll be here from Monday to Friday.譬如我周一至周五来此.
34The new road runs from the capital city to the south coast.新路自京城至南岸.
35You can also use to with verbs of giving, like in sentence four.你也可以用动词来表示给予,就像第4句那样.
36However, with these verbs, it's common to use a structure without to.然而,用这些动词,通常使用一个结构而不使用.
37For example, with give, you can give someone something, or give something to someone.例如,用赠予,可以给人一些东西,也可以给人一些东西.
38Both structures are possible, but the first is more common.这两种结构都是可能的,但前者更为常见.
39So, you can say give the bottle to me, or give me the bottle.你可以说把瓶子给我 或者把瓶子给我
40Both are possible, but the second is more common.两者都是可能的,但第二种更为常见.
41These are some of the most common ways to use to and for.这些是使用和使用的最常见的方法。
42Let's move on to level two, where you'll see another important use of these two prepositions.进入第二层,你会看到这两个前置位置的另一个重要用途.
43Here are your sentences for level two.这是第二级的句子
44In each sentence, you need to choose to or for.在每一句中,你都需要选择去还是去.
45Pause the video and think about your answers.暂停录像 想想你的答案
46Are you ready?你准备好了吗?
47Here are the answers.以下是答案。
48You can use to and for to give a reason for doing something, or to explain the function你可以用它来解释做某件事的原因 或者解释这个功能
49of something.有些东西
50In sentences one and two, you're talking about your reason for doing something.在第一和第二句中,你说的是你做事的理由.
51Why did you stop on the way home?你为什么在回家的路上停下来?
52To get a coffee, or for a coffee.喝杯咖啡,还是喝咖啡
53Look at two more examples.再看两个例子。
54We need to go to the shop to buy some batteries.我们得去商店买些电池
55We need to go to the shop for some batteries.我们得去商店买电池
56Again, we're talking about why you're going to the shop.再说一遍,我们在谈论你为什么去商店
57In this case, you can use to plus an infinitive verb, or for plus a noun.在这种情况下,可以用来加无限动词,也可以用来加名词.
58In sentences three and four, you're talking about the function of something.在第三句和第四句中,你指的是某种东西的作用.
59What does this little metal thing do?这个金属小东西做什么?
60It's used to open bottles, or for opening bottles.用来开瓶,或用来开瓶.
61Look at two more examples like this.再看两个这样的例子。
62She developed a tool to analyse data collected at different times and places.她开发了一个工具来分析在不同时间和地点收集的数据.
63She developed a tool for analysing data collected at different times and places.她开发了一个分析在不同时间和地点收集的数据的工具。
64So, we're talking about reason and function.因此,我们谈论的是理性和功能.
65Are these ideas the same?这些想法是一样的吗?
66No, they're different.不,他们是不同的。
67Let's see how.让我们看看如何。
68Reason tells you why someone does something.理由告诉你为什么有人做一些事情。
69Here, you can use to plus an infinitive, or for plus a noun.在这里,你可以用来加一个无限,或者用来加一个名词.
70Don't use for plus an –ing verb.别用加-ing动词.
71Function tells you what something is used for.函数会告诉你什么是用来用的。
72For example, a tool.例如,一个工具。
73Here, you can use three structures.在这里,你可以使用三个结构.
74To plus infinitive verb, for plus –ing, or for plus noun.加上无限动词,表示加-ing,或表示加名词.
75If you're not sure whether to use to or for in sentences like this, what can you do?如果你不确定是用在还是用在这样的句子上,你会怎么做?
76If you're not sure whether a sentence is about reason or function, then try to use如果你不确定一个句子是讲道理还是讲功能, 那就试试看
77to plus infinitive if you can, because you can use this in both cases.加上无限的,如果可以, 因为你可以使用 在这两种情况下。
78Review this section if you need to, and think about the difference between reason and function.如果需要,请审查本节,并思考理性和功能之间的区别。
79It's a common mistake to use for plus –ing when talking about reason.在谈论理性时使用加-ing是一个常见的错误.
80For example, we stopped on the way home for getting a coffee.例如,我们回家的路上停下来喝咖啡。
81Remember, this is not correct, but it's a common mistake.记住,这不是正确的,但这是一个常见的错误。
82Let's move on to level three, where you'll see more mistakes which English learners often我们继续到第三级, 在那里你会看到更多的错误,英语学习者经常。
83{\fn黑体\fs22\bord1\shad0\3aHBE\4aH00\fscx67\fscy66\2cHFFFFFF\3cH808080}用它来做和用来做
84Level three is a little different.三级稍异.
85Four sentences are incorrect.四句不实.
86Only one is correct.只有一个是正确的。
87You have two jobs.你有两份工作
88First, find the correct sentence.首先,找到正确的句子。
89Second, correct the mistakes in the other four sentences.第二,纠正其他四句的错误.
90Got it?明白了吗?
91Pause the video and find your answers.暂停录像 找到答案
92Take as long as you need.随你需要多久
93Could you do it?你能做到吗?
94Which sentence do you think is correct?你觉得哪个句子是对的?
95Let's see.让我看看。
96To and for are used after many verbs, adjectives and nouns.来来去去用在许多动词,形容词和名词之后.
97Many of these are fixed phrases, meaning you just need to remember them as you learn.其中许多是固定的短语, 意思是你只需要在学习时记住它们。
98Good for your health is one expression like this.这样的表达有利于你的健康
99You can also say good for you, which has the same meaning, and is more natural-sounding,你也可以说对你有好处, 这有相同的含义, 并且更自然的声音,
100especially in conversational English.特别是英语
101So, you could say jogging two or three times a week is good for you.你可以说每周慢跑两三次对你有好处
102There are some verbs, like phone, call, ask or answer, which are used with to, or a similar有一些动词,如电话,电话,问或答,这些动词用来,或类似的
103idea, in many other languages, but not in English.思想,在许多其他语言,但不是英语。
104Is this true for your language?你的语气是真的吗?
105Do you say phone to someone, or phone someone?你是在跟别人打电话 还是给别人打电话?
106If in your language you say phone to someone, you need to be careful with mistakes like如果你用你的语言对某人说电话,你需要小心 的错误,比如
107in sentence two.在第二句。
108In English, you phone someone, call someone, ask someone, and answer someone without to.在英语中,你给某人打电话,给某人打电话,问某人,并回答某人不给.
109What about sentence three?第三句怎么样?
110You heard about this in level two.你听到这个在二级。
111This sentence expresses reason.此句表达了理性.
112Why did you go to the post office?你为什么去邮局?
113To express reason, don't use for plus an ing verb.为了表达理由,不要用加音动词.
114Here, because there's a verb, send, you need to use to plus an infinitive verb.在这里,因为有一个动词,发送, 你需要使用加一个无限动词.
115Sentence four has the same problem.第4句也有同样的问题.
116You're talking about reason.你在说理性
117Why are you taking a break?你为什么休息?
118And, there's a verb, eat, so you can only use to plus infinitive.还有,有一个动词,吃, 所以你只能用来加无限。
119Sentence five is correct.第五句对.
120Do you find it strange?你觉得奇怪吗?
121Normally, we use to to talk about the destination or end point of a journey.通常,我们用来谈论旅行的目的地或终点.
122However, with verbs like leave, depart, or set out, you use for instead.但是,如果动词像离开,离开, 或设置,你使用代替。
123Remember, there's a lot of information and different topics in this lesson.记住,这一课中有许多信息以及不同的话题.
124If you want more examples, go to a good online dictionary.如果您想要更多实例,请访问好在线词典.
125我们推荐莱希科,请访问www.lexico.com。
126Look up two or four, and you can find many examples of the different ways to use these往上看两到四个,你可以找到很多例子 来说明如何使用这些
127two prepositions.两个预设位置。
128This time, there are two gaps in each sentence.这一次,每个句子有两个漏洞.
129Put either two or four in each gap.每隙置二四门.
130Do you have the answers?你有答案吗?
131No?是吗?
132Pause the video and think about your answers.暂停录像 想想你的答案
133Don't just wait for us to tell you!别等着我们告诉你!
134Ready now?准备好了吗?
135OK, here are the answers.好吧,这是答案。
136With some verbs, nouns and adjectives, it's possible to use either to or for to express加上一些动词,名词和形容词,可以使用到或用于表达.
137different ideas.不同的想法。
138This means you can sometimes use both to and for after a verb, such as wait.这意味着有时可以在动词之后同时使用或用于动词,如等待.
139You can wait for something, wait for someone, or wait to do something.你可以等待一些东西,等待某人,或者等待做一些事情.
140If you combine these, you can also wait for something to happen, or wait for someone to如果你把这些结合起来,你也可以等待 事情发生,或者等待某人
141do something.做点什么。
142But it's possible to use both to and for here, and with other words, too, the order但这里和这里都有可能使用 换句话说,还有命令
143is not flexible.不灵活。
144You wait for someone to do something.你等着有人做点什么
145You can't put the to phrase before the for phrase.你不能把短语放在短语之前
146In sentence two, you could change the order of the to and for phrases, but in the other在第二句中,你可以改变语句的顺序,但在另一句中
147four sentences, you can't.4句,你无法。
148In such cases, you need to learn the exact patterns which can follow each verb, noun在这种情况下,你需要学习每个动词,名词的准确模式
149or adjective.或形容词.
150For example, apologise to someone, apologise for something, and apologise to someone for例如,对某人道歉,对某事道歉,对某人道歉
151something.东西。
152This is more of a vocabulary problem than a grammar one.这与其说是语法问题,不如说是词汇问题.
153If you have problems with this, then learning grammar rules isn't the best solution.如果你对此有问题,那么学习语法规则并不是最好的解决方案.
154Learn and practise specific phrases, and try to use them in natural speech or writing,学习并实践具体的短语,并尝试在自然的演讲或写作中使用,
155like you would with other new vocabulary.就像你会用其他的新词汇。
156Are you ready for the toughest challenge?你准备好迎接最艰难的挑战了吗?
157Let's see the sentences.见诸句义.
158Each sentence has three spaces.每句有三处空位.
159In each space, you can put two, four, or nothing.每个空间,你可以放2,4,或者什么都没有。
160You should put two or four, if possible.如果可能的话,你应该放两四个
161Pause the video and think about your answers now.暂停录像,想想你的答案
162We tried to make these sentences as challenging as we could, so take your time.我们尽量让这些句子充满挑战 慢慢来
163Ready?准备好了吗?
164Let's look together.让我们一起看看。
165In this lesson, you've seen different ways to use two and four.此课中见用二四不同.
166There are other meanings of two and four, which we haven't covered.另有二四之义,未详其义.
167Here's a test.这是测试
168Can you remember three different ways to use two, and three different ways to use four?你能记得三种不同的方式使用二,三种不同的方式使用四?
169Pause the video for a few seconds and think about it.暂停录像几秒钟,好好想想.
170Could you do it?你能做到吗?
171If not, don't worry.如果没有,不用担心。
172You don't need to memorise every single way to use two and four.你不必每一次都记起使用2和4的方法
173However, you should understand that if you're asking questions like,但是,你应该明白 如果你问的问题喜欢,
174how do I use two and four, or what's the difference between two and four,我怎么用2和4 或者2和4有什么区别
175then you're not asking one question.那你就别问一个问题了
176There are many ways to use two and four, and many differences between them.有多种方法可以使用二和四,它们之间也有许多不同之处.
177In level five, you needed to combine different uses of two and four in a single sentence.在第五级中,你需要将两个和四个的不同用途合并到一个单句中.
178This is common in real-world English use.这在现实世界英语使用中很常见.
179You may need to use two and or four in different ways in the same sentence.你可能需要用两个和四个 不同的方式在同一句。
180This is where things get complicated.这就是事情变得复杂的地方。
181So, what can you do?那你能怎么办?
182Here are two tips.这里有两个提示。
183One, learn about using two and four to talk about purpose and function,一,学习用二,四来谈目的和功能,
184which we covered in levels two and three.我们被分为二级和三级。
185This causes the most problems for English learners.这给英语学习者造成了最大的问题.
186Two, if you find it difficult to use two and four, try to find the reason why.第二,如果你觉得很难使用二和四,试着找出原因.
187Which meaning of two or four is giving you problems?二四意味着什么?
188Do you just need to learn more fixed phrases using two and four?你只需要用2和4来学习更多的固定短语吗?
189Are you having problems because you're trying to translate a structure from your language你因为想从语言中翻译一个结构而有问题吗?
190directly into English?直接译成英文?
191Remember that English might use different structures to your native language.记住英语可能会用不同的结构来表达你的母语.
192Before we finish, a question.在我们结束之前,有一个问题。
193What difficulties do you have with two and four?二四有什么困难?
194Can you think of other common ways to use two and four that we haven't mentioned in this video?你能想出其他常用的方法来使用我们在这段视频中没有提到的两四个吗?
195That's it!就是这样!
196Thanks for watching!谢谢你的观看!
197See you next time!下次见!
该视频共有字幕 197 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P32 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p32 31. 31. English Grammar 31.Uncountable Nouns (P32)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Martin.嗨,我是马丁。
0:04Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
0:07In this lesson, you can learn about countable and uncountable nouns in English.在这个课中,你可以学习英语中可计数和不可计数的名词.
0:15What's the difference between paper and a paper?纸和纸有什么区别?
0:21Why do we say trousers are, but news is?为什么我们说裤子是,但新闻是?
0:25Why can't you say, can you give me an advice?为什么你不能说 你能给我个建议吗?
0:31You'll learn the answers to all these questions in this lesson.在这个课中你会学到这些问题的答案.
0:38Where shall we start?我们从哪开始?
0:41Some nouns are countable.一些名词是可数的.
0:43You can count them.你可以数数
展开字幕全文（217 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Martin.嗨,我是马丁。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
3In this lesson, you can learn about countable and uncountable nouns in English.在这个课中,你可以学习英语中可计数和不可计数的名词.
4What's the difference between paper and a paper?纸和纸有什么区别?
5Why do we say trousers are, but news is?为什么我们说裤子是,但新闻是?
6Why can't you say, can you give me an advice?为什么你不能说 你能给我个建议吗?
7You'll learn the answers to all these questions in this lesson.在这个课中你会学到这些问题的答案.
8Where shall we start?我们从哪开始?
9Some nouns are countable.一些名词是可数的.
10You can count them.你可以数数
11For example, pens are countable.例如,笔是可数的.
12You can count them.你可以数数
13One pen, two pens, three pens, and so on.一笔二笔三笔等.
14Some nouns are uncountable.一些名词是无法统计的.
15You can't count them.你不能数他们。
16For example, water is uncountable.例如,水是无法计算的。
17One water, two waters.一水两水.
18No, that doesn't work.不,这行不通。
19You can't count water.不能数水.
20Do you know any other uncountable nouns?你知道其他不可统计的名词吗?
21You'll see more examples in the next section, but here are three.在下一节中你会看到更多的例子,但这里有三个。
22Money, rice, and knowledge are all uncountable nouns.钱,米,知识都是不可统计的名词.
23Countable and uncountable nouns behave differently.可计数和不可计数的名词行为不同.
24They follow different rules.他们遵守不同的规则。
25First, uncountable nouns can't be plural.首先,不可计算的名词不能是复数.
26That means you can't say monies, rices, or knowledges.这意味着你不能说钱,米,或知识。
27These forms don't exist.这些形式并不存在.
28Secondly, you need to use a singular verb with uncountable nouns.其次,您需要使用一个带有不可计数名词的单词动词.
29For example, this rice doesn't taste right.譬如此米饭不正味.
30Your money is on the table.你的钱在桌上
31His knowledge of this subject has improved significantly.他对这个主题的知识有了很大的提高.
32Next, you can't use a or an with an uncountable noun.接下来,您不能使用一个或一个不可计算的名词.
33You can't say a rice, a money, or a knowledge.不可说米,钱,或知识.
34However, you can use some or any.不过,你可以使用一些或任何。
35For example, is there any rice left?例如,还有米吗?
36You'll need some money for the bus.公交车需要钱
37Finally, we use different words to talk about quantities with countable and uncountable最后,我们用不同的词 来谈论数量 与可数和不可数
38nouns.名词.
39With countable nouns, we use many to talk about large quantities and few to talk about用无数名词,我们用很多人来谈论 大量,很少谈论
40small quantities.数量小。
41With uncountable nouns, we use much and little.名词不计数,我们用得不多
42You can use a lot of or lots of with both countable and uncountable nouns.你可以使用很多或很多 既可数又不可数的名词。
43For example, there isn't much rice left, but there aren't many potatoes left.例如,米饭不多,但马铃薯不多.
44There's a little money in my pocket, but there are a few coins in that small box.我口袋里有一小笔钱 但那个小盒子里有几枚硬币
45OK, so now you know the basics about uncountable nouns and how to use them.好了,现在你知道关于不可计数名词的基本原理 以及如何使用这些名词。
46Next, an important question.接下来是一个重要的问题。
47Many uncountable nouns are words for food and drink, such as pasta, meat, fruit, coffee,许多无法统计的名词是食物和饮料的词汇,比如面食,肉类,水果,咖啡,
48beer, or milk.啤酒,或者牛奶。
49Be careful because fruit is uncountable, but vegetables are countable.要小心,因为水果是不可计数的,但蔬菜是可计数的.
50Many collective nouns are uncountable.许多集体名词是无法统计的.
51Collective nouns are nouns which describe a group of objects all together.集体名词是用来描述一组物体的名词.
52For example, furniture, equipment, luggage, or traffic.例如,家具、设备、行李或交通。
53Finally, abstract nouns are often uncountable.最后,抽象名词往往无法统计.
54For example, knowledge, information, advice, or progress.例如,知识、信息、建议或进步。
55OK, I have a challenge for you.好吧,我有一个挑战给你。
56You have three groups of nouns here.这里有三组名词
57Food and drink, collective nouns, and abstract nouns.食物和饮料 集体名词 和抽象名词
58I want you to pause the video and find one more uncountable noun to add to each group.我要你暂停录像 找到一个不可计数的名词 加入每个组
59That means you need to find one uncountable food or drink noun, one uncountable collective这意味着你需要找到一个无法统计的食物或喝名词, 一个无法统计的集体
60noun, and one uncountable abstract noun.名词,以及一个无法计算的抽象名词.
61Write down your answers.写下你的答案。
62Why are you still here?你为什么还在这里?
63Pause the video and find your answers!暂停录像,找到答案!
64OK, finished?好了,说完了吗?
65But there's a problem.但有一个问题。
66There are many possible answers you could have here.这里有很多可能的答案
67How can you check?你怎么能检查?
68Easy!别激动!
69Find a dictionary.寻一字典.
70You can use an online dictionary, such as Longman, or a paper dictionary if you're feeling您可以使用在线词典,如Longman, 或者一个纸质词典,如果你感觉
71a bit old school.有点老了
72Look up the words you wrote down in the dictionary.查查字典上写的字
73It should tell you if they're countable or uncountable.它应该告诉你,他们是数不清的还是数不清的。
74Some dictionaries do this by adding a U for uncountable, or a C for countable after the一些词典为此增加了不可计数的 U 或 C 之后的可计数
75noun.名词
76Different dictionaries have different styles.不同的词典有不同的风格.
77So, now you can check your answers.所以,现在你可以检查你的答案。
78Were they correct?是吗?
79Now, things get more complicated.现在,事情变得更加复杂。
80If nouns could only be countable or uncountable, this topic would be very simple.如果名词只能计数或无法计数,这个话题将非常简单.
81However, many nouns can be both countable and uncountable with different meanings.然而,许多名词既可以计数,也可以有不同含义的不可计数.
82For example, paper can be countable or uncountable.例如,纸张可以计数,也可以不计数.
83Do you know the difference?你知道区别吗?
84What's the difference between paper and a paper?纸和纸有什么区别?
85Paper is the material that you write on.纸是你写的材料。
86A paper is another way to say a newspaper.报纸是说报纸的另一种方式。
87Let's look at some more examples like this.让我们再看看这些例子。
88Think about it.考虑一下
89What's the difference between fish and a fish, glass and a glass, time and a time?鱼与鱼,玻璃与玻璃,时间与时间有何区别?
90Ready?准备好了吗?
91Let's look at the answers.让我们来看看答案。
92Fish – uncountable – means the food.鱼——不可计数——指食物.
93You eat fish.你吃鱼。
94A fish – countable – means one whole animal, either living or dead.一条鱼——数不胜数——是指一只完整的动物,无论是生还是死.
95Compare, we eat a lot of fish.比起来,我们吃了很多鱼。
96We eat a lot of fish in general.我们经常吃鱼
97There's a fish in the toilet!厕所里有条鱼!
98One living fish.一条活鱼
99He ate three whole fish.他吃了三条整条鱼
100三俱 animals畜生.
101What about glass and a glass?玻璃和一杯怎么样?
102Glass is a material.玻璃是一种材料。
103A glass is something you drink out of.一杯酒是你们喝的
104For example, the sculpture was made of glass.例如,雕塑是由玻璃制成的.
105Would you like a glass of water?要喝点水吗?
106Finally, how about time and a time?最后,时间和时间如何?
107Time is the general meaning of time.时间是时间的一般含义.
108It's such a basic idea, I can't really explain it in more simple terms!这是个基本的想法,我无法用更简单的说法来解释!
109A time has a similar meaning to an occasion or a period.时间的含义与某个场合或某个时期类似.
110Look at some examples.看看一些例子。
111I don't have much free time.我没有多少空闲时间。
112How much time will you need to finish this?你需要多少时间来完成这个?
113There have been many times when I wanted to give up.我曾经想放弃很多次
114We had a good time at their barbecue.我们玩得很开心
115Can you see the difference now?你现在能看出区别了吗?
116So, there are many nouns which can be both countable and uncountable, often with different因此,有许多名词既可以计数,也可以不计数,经常有不同的名词.
117meanings.意义
118There are too many examples to explain them all here, but I will give you one general这里有很多例子可以解释 但我会给你一个将军
119idea which might be helpful.有帮助的想法
120Often, when a noun can be countable or uncountable, the uncountable noun has a general or collective当名词可以计数或无法计数时,不可计数名词往往具有一般或集体
121meaning.意义
122The countable noun has a specific meaning.可数名词有具体含义.
123For example, think about the word hair.例如,想一想"毛"这个词.
124It can be countable or uncountable.可数而不可数.
125Hair, uncountable, has a general meaning.头发,不可计数,有一般含义.
126It means, for example, the stuff that grows on your head.意思是,比如说,你头上生长的东西。
127Hair, countable, has a more specific meaning.头发,可数,有更具体的含义.
128Have you ever made the mistake in English where you say something like,你曾经犯过英语错误吗?
129My friend Jacob has a long hair.我的朋友雅各的头发很长
130If you say this, you mean that your friend has one long hair.如果你这么说,你是说你的朋友有一根长发
131That's probably not what you meant to say, right?你可能不是这个意思吧?
132Instead, say, My friend Jacob has long hair.相反,说,我的朋友雅各布有长发。
133To really understand countable and uncountable nouns, you'll have to remember a lot of要真正理解可数和不可计数的名词,你就必须记住很多
134information.资料。
135However, this basic idea can help you.然而,这个基本想法可以帮助你.
136Uncountable nouns are more general and abstract.不可统计的名词比较笼统和抽象.
137Countable nouns are more specific.可计数名词比较具体.
138In this lesson, we've talked about countable nouns, uncountable nouns, and nouns which在这个课上,我们讨论过可以数的名词,不可数的名词,以及哪些名词
139can be both.两者兼有
140There are a few strange nouns which don't fit cleanly into any of these categories.有一些奇特的名词并不适合这些类别。
141For example, we said at the beginning that uncountable nouns can't be plural.例如,我们一开始曾说过,不可计算的名词不能是复数的.
142You can't say rices or knowledges.不可说米饭知识.
143That's generally true, but there are some uncountable nouns which can only be plural.这一般是真实的,但有一些无法统计的名词只能是复数.
144They are police, clothes, trousers, scissors.他们是警察、衣服、裤子、剪刀
145You can't make these nouns singular.你不能让这些名词单数。
146You can't say one police or one trouser.你不能说一个警察或一个特洛伊人。
147Remember to use a plural verb with these nouns.记住使用这些名词的复数动词.
148For example, The police have interviewed all the witnesses.例如,警方约谈了所有证人。
149These trousers don't fit well.这些裤子不适合穿
150Careful with the scissors, they're sharp.小心剪刀,很锋利
151Another strange word is news.另一个奇怪的词是新闻。
152It's uncountable and singular, even though it ends with an s.虽以S为结尾,但不可计数和单数.
153So, don't say The news are depressing at the moment.所以,不要说新闻 压抑目前。
154Instead, say The news is depressing at the moment.相反,说 目前消息令人沮丧.
155Finally, there are some collective nouns like staff, team or crew.最后,有一些集体名词,如工作人员,团队或船员.
156Some of these are uncountable, like staff, and others can be countable, like team or其中一些是无法统计的,比如工作人员,另一些可以是计数的,比如团队或
157crew.船员
158These nouns are generally made plural in British English.这些名词一般在英国英语中成为复数.
159In the UK, we say The staff aren't happy with the new uniform.在英国,我们说员工对新制服不满意.
160The team are playing well at the moment.球队目前表现良好.
161However, in the US, these collective nouns are often singular.然而,在美国,这些集体名词往往是单数的.
162In the US, you might hear The staff isn't happy with the new uniform.在美国,你可能会听到 工作人员对新制服不满意.
163The team is playing well at the moment.球队目前表现良好.
164Both are possible, but try to be consistent.两者都有可能,但力求一致。
165If you make these nouns plural, then they should always be plural.如果你使这些名词复数,那么它们应该总是复数.
166If you make them singular, you should always make them singular.如果你把它们变成单数, 你总是应该把它们变成单数。
167That said, native speakers aren't always consistent.话虽如此,本地话并不总是一致的.
168Don't worry about it too much, and don't be surprised if you hear both forms.不要太担心,如果听到两种形式都不要惊讶.
169OK, we have one more thing to do.好吧,我们还有一件事要做。
170The point of uncountable nouns is that you can't count them, but sometimes you need to.不可计数名词的要点是不能数,但有时需要.
171What can you do?你能怎么办?
172Take an uncountable noun you saw earlier, rice.取一个你之前看到的无法统计的名词,大米。
173There's no way to count rice directly.不可直接数米.
174Rice can never be countable.大米永远无法计数.
175You can never say three rices.不可说三米.
176But sometimes, you need to count things, even if they're uncountable.但有时,你需要数事物, 即使它们不计数。
177How can you count rice?何以数米.
178Actually, there are many ways to do it.实际上,有许多方法可以做到。
179Rice is made up of single grains of rice.大米由单粒大米组成.
180Here is one grain of rice.这是一粒米
181You can also have a bag of rice, a packet of rice, or a portion of rice.也可以有包米,包米,或一部分米.
182By adding a noun plus of, you can make an uncountable noun countable.通过添加名词加法,可以使一个不可计算的名词计数.
183Let's see how this works in some example sentences.让我们看看这在一些例子句子中是如何运作的.
184There was a single grain of rice left at the bottom of his bowl.他碗底还剩一粒米
185Can you get two of those big bags of rice?你能买两袋大米吗?
186We'd like three portions of rice, please.请给我三分米
187Like with rice, there are often many different nouns you can add to make an uncountable和米一样,经常有很多不同的名词,你可以加起来使一个不计数
188noun countable.无名数.
189That's the good news.这是好消息。
190The bad news is that you need to add different nouns, depending on the uncountable noun you're坏消息是,你需要增加不同的名词, 取决于你的不可统计名词
191using.使用 。
192Let's practice this so you can see what I mean.让我们练习一下 这样你就能明白我的意思了
193Here are five uncountable nouns.这里有五个不可计算的名词.
194How could you make them countable?你怎么能让他们数起来?
195Think about your answers.考虑一下你的答案
196Ready?准备好了吗?
197Let's look together.让我们一起看看。
198You can give someone a piece of advice, or two pieces of advice if you're feeling generous.你可以给别人一个忠告,或者两个忠告,如果你觉得慷慨的话.
199Add a piece of to make advice countable.加上一点建议就可以数了
200A piece of is very useful because you can use it to make many uncountable nouns countable.一块非常有用,因为可以用它来使许多无法计算的名词可以计数.
201You can also have a piece of bread.也可以吃一块面包.
202With bread, you have other possibilities.有了面包,你还有其他的可能
203A loaf of bread, or a slice of bread.面包,或面包片。
204What about money?钱呢?
205You can have a sum of money, or an amount of money.你可以有一笔钱,或一笔钱。
206For example, you could say he's lost a large amount of money trying to play the stock market.举例来说,你可以说他失去了一大笔钱 试图玩股票市场。
207For furniture, you could say a piece of furniture, or possibly an item of furniture, although对于家具,你可以说一件家具, 或者可能是一件家具,虽然
208this is very formal and not common.这是非常正式和不常见的。
209Finally, what about coffee?最后,咖啡怎么办?
210You can have a cup of coffee, a packet of coffee, a spoonful of coffee, or a pot of你可以喝一杯咖啡,一包咖啡, 一勺咖啡,或一壶
211coffee.来杯咖啡吧
212In all these cases, there are other possible answers, however, these are the most common在所有这些案件中,都有其他可能的答案,但这些答案是最常见的。
213ones.这些
214So, that's it for this class.所以,这就是这个班级。
215请检查date=中的日期值 (帮助) Oxford Online English dot com网站上的完整版课程.
216You can read the text and practice with our quiz.你可以用我们的测验来阅读文字和练习.
217Thanks for watching and see you next time!谢谢你下次看你
该视频共有字幕 217 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P33 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p33 32. 32. English Grammar 32.How to Use Make and Do in English (P33)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Martin.嗨,我是马丁。
0:04Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
0:07In this lesson, you can learn how to use the verbs make and do in different ways.在这个课中,你可以学习如何使用动词制作和做不同的方式.
0:14You'll see the differences between make and do, and all of the meanings of each verb.汝等见造作之差别,及各动词之所有意义.
0:20You'll also see phrasal verbs and collocations with make and do.你也会看到词性动词和与造物和做物的合位.
0:26Here's a question.问曰.
0:29Have you visited our website yet?你访问过我们的网站了吗?
0:31If you want to learn English, we have many resources to help you, as well as teachers如果你想学英语 我们有很多资源可以帮助你 还有老师
0:37you can take online lessons with if you want.如果你愿意,你可以上网上课。
0:40Oxford Online English dot com.牛津在线英语点数com.
展开字幕全文（236 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Martin.嗨,我是马丁。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
3In this lesson, you can learn how to use the verbs make and do in different ways.在这个课中,你可以学习如何使用动词制作和做不同的方式.
4You'll see the differences between make and do, and all of the meanings of each verb.汝等见造作之差别,及各动词之所有意义.
5You'll also see phrasal verbs and collocations with make and do.你也会看到词性动词和与造物和做物的合位.
6Here's a question.问曰.
7Have you visited our website yet?你访问过我们的网站了吗?
8If you want to learn English, we have many resources to help you, as well as teachers如果你想学英语 我们有很多资源可以帮助你 还有老师
9you can take online lessons with if you want.如果你愿意,你可以上网上课。
10Oxford Online English dot com.牛津在线英语点数com.
11Let's look at our lesson.让我们看看我们的教训。
12What's the difference between make and do?造与作何分别.
13What are you doing?你在干吗?
14I'm making a shopping list.我在做购物单
15I need some stuff to make dinner.我需要一些东西做晚餐。
16What are you going to make?你准备做什么?
17I think some kind of stir fry.我想是有点刺激
18I have to do some work, too, so I need something quick.我得做一些工作, 所以我需要的东西快。
19Sounds tasty.听起来不错
20Why do you have to work?你为什么要工作?
21I have to make a presentation for our meeting tomorrow, and I need to check through what我必须为我们明天的会议做一个介绍 我需要检查一下
22I've written and maybe change a few things.我写过,也许可以改变一些事情。
23By the way, can you do the washing up before I get back?顺便说一句,你能在我回来之前洗洗吗?
24I'd like to start cooking as soon as I get in.我一进去就开始做饭
25I need to do everything and get to bed early.我需要做所有的事 早点上床睡觉
26Sure, I'll do it now.当然,我现在就去
27Here, you saw three ways to use do, and three ways to use make.在这里,你看到了三种方法使用,三种方法使用。
28Can you remember them?你还记得吗?
29Imagine you're an English teacher.想象一下你是英文老师
30Could you explain the basic difference between do and make to someone?你能解释一下做和做之间的基本区别吗?
31How would you do it?你会怎么做?
32Think about it.考虑一下
33Do means to perform an activity or task.执行某项活动或任务。
34For example, you do work, do the washing up, or do everything.比如说,你工作,洗衣服,或者做一切。
35Make means to create something and or produce a result.创造某种东西或产生某种结果。
36If you make a shopping list, make dinner, or make a presentation, then you create something.如果你做了购物列表,做晚餐,或者做演示,那么你就会创造一些东西.
37There's a result at the end of the process.过程末端有结果.
38That's the basic difference between do and make.这是做和做的基本区别。
39In the rest of this lesson, you'll learn about do and make in more detail, but keep接下来的课,你会学到更多细节,但保持
40this basic idea in your head.这是你脑中的基本想法
41What's up?这是怎么回事?
42I'm making a card for Sasha's leaving party.我在为萨莎的离家派对做名片
43I thought it would be nicer to make it myself, rather than just buy something.我以为自己做会更好 而不是只买东西
44How's it going?怎么样?
45It's a lot harder than I thought it would be.这比我想象的要难得多
46This is my second attempt.这是我第二次尝试。
47I made a lot of mistakes the first time, and I had to throw it away, but now I think I'm第一次我犯了很多错误,我不得不放弃它,但现在我觉得我
48making progress.正在取得进展。
49What happened in the kitchen?厨房里发生了什么?
50Did you make all that mess?你弄得一团糟?
51Er, yeah.对
52I need to make a cake, too.我也要做个蛋糕
53I mean, I've started making a cake.我开始做蛋糕了
54Let me guess.让我猜猜
55Harder than you thought it would be?比你想象的还难吗?
56Yeah, a little.是啊,一点点。
57I'm trying to make an orange and chocolate sponge.我想做一个橙色和巧克力海绵。
58There's chocolate all over the walls!墙上到处都是巧克力!
59What happened?发生了什么事?
60Well, the mixer was making a strange noise, so I took the lid off to see if there was搅拌机发出奇怪的声音 所以我把盖子脱了 看看有没有
61a problem, but I forgot to turn it off, so the chocolate mixture went everywhere.一个问题,但我忘了关机, 所以巧克力混合物到处都去了。
62Don't worry, I'll clean it up.别担心,我会清理干净的
63You can use make when you create a result.生成结果时可以使用制作.
64You can use make for things with a physical result, like make a card, make a cake, or你可以用做的东西 物理结果, 像制作卡片,做蛋糕,或者
65make dinner.做饭。
66You can also use make for non-physical results, like make a mistake, make progress, or make也可以利用非物理效果,如犯错、进步或
67a noise.一个噪音。
68Here's a question.问曰.
69Can you think of more examples like this?你能想出更多这样的例子吗?
70Pause the video and try to find three more examples of phrases with make which describe暂停录影带,并尝试找到另外三个用 make 描述的词组的例子
71physical results, and three which describe non-physical results.物理结果,以及描述非物理结果的三个.
72Can't think of three?想不出三个?
73Try to find one or two.试寻一两.
74Pause the video and do it now.暂停录像,现在就做
75Ready?准备好了吗?
76What did you get?你得到什么了吗?
77For physical results, it's common to use make with food and drink, like make a sandwich,对于物理效果来说,常见的是用食物和饮料来制造,比如做三明治,
78make a cup of coffee, or make pizza.煮杯咖啡或披萨
79You can also make a toy, make a chair, or make a shelf if you can do it yourself.也可以做玩具,做椅子,也可以自己做架子.
80You can say that companies make things.你可以说公司制造的东西。
81For example, Apple makes the iPhone, or Honda makes cars.例如苹果制造iPhone,或本田制造汽车.
82For non-physical results, there are many possibilities.对于非物理结果,有很多可能性.
83You could say make a joke, make a suggestion, make a friend, or make an appointment.你可以说开个玩笑 提出建议 交个朋友 或者预约
84It's also common to use make with money words, like make money, make a profit, or make an也常见于用钱作词,如赚钱,赚钱,或赚钱.
85investment.投资。
86Did you get any of these phrases?你听到这些话了吗?
87Did you find examples that we didn't?你找到我们没有的例子了吗?
88Perhaps share your ideas in the comments!也许在评论中分享你的想法!
89Next, let's look at a slightly different way to use make.接下来,让我们看看一个稍微不同的方法 使用制作。
90What's wrong?有什么不对吗?
91Did something happen?发生什么事了吗?
92What?你说什么?
93No, nothing.没什么
94You look sad.你看起来很伤心。
95It's my allergies.这是我的过敏症。
96At this time of year, they really make my face puffy.在每年的这个时候,他们真的让我的脸发臭。
97Plus, they make my eyes water.而且,他们让我的眼睛水。
98Are you taking anything?你要吃什么吗?
99Yeah, I take antihistamines, but they don't help that much.是啊,我服用抗己胺药, 但是它们没有多大帮助。
100They make me sleepy.他们让我困。
101What are you allergic to?你对什么过敏?
102Pollen?波伦?
103I think so, but it makes me sensitive to other things too, like dust.我想是的,但它让我敏感 其它的东西,如灰尘。
104It's bad, but it only lasts four weeks or so.虽然不好,但只持续四周左右.
105You can use make to mean produce a reaction in someone.你可以用制造 产生反应的人。
106Similar to the last section, this could be a physical reaction, as in they make my face和上一节相似,这可能是一种生理反应, 因为他们让我的脸
107really puffy.真让人毛骨悚然
108They make my eyes water.他们让我的眼睛水。
109The antihistamines make me sleepy.抗组织胺药让我很困
110You could also use it for emotional reactions.你也可以用它来做情绪反应
111For example, the news made him angry.例如,消息令他愤怒.
112Thinking about what he said made me happy.想想他说的话让我高兴
113Finally, you can use make for reactions which are both physical and emotional, like this.最后,你可以用来做出 无论是身体还是情感的反应,像这样。
114It was such a sad film.这部电影太悲哀了
115It made me cry for hours.这让我哭了几个小时。
116He's so funny.师笑曰.
117He makes me laugh all the time.他总是让我笑
118OK, here's a task for you.好吧,这是你的任务。
119Look at three questions.观三问.
120Can you answer these three questions for yourself?你能自己回答这三个问题吗?
121Pause the video and make your answers.暂停录像,然后回答
122You can write them down, say them out loud, or both!你可以写下来,大声说出来,或者两个都写出来!
123OK, could you do it?好吧,你可以做到这一点?
124Of course, everyone's answers will be different, but here are three suggestions.当然,每个人的答案都会不同,但这里有三个建议.
125Sitting outside on a beautiful day makes me really happy.坐在外面的美丽的一天 让我真的很开心。
126The last thing that made me laugh was a joke my colleague made in a meeting this morning.最后让我笑的是我的同事在今天上午的一次会议上开的玩笑。
127Someone not telling the truth could make me angry.不说实话的人会让我生气
128Were your answers similar, or not?你们的答案是否相似?
129Feel free to post your answers in the comments, and share them with other learners.请在评论中张贴答案,并与其他学习者分享。
130Now, you've seen many ways to use make.现在,你已经看到很多方法可以使用。
131What about do?怎么办?
132Have you done the report for our sales meeting tomorrow?你为明天的销售会议做了报告吗?
133No, I won't be here.不,我不会在这里。
134Did you not get my email?你没收到我的邮件吗?
135What email?什么邮件?
136I sent it to you last week.我上周寄给你的
137I've been doing a course on digital marketing, and tomorrow I have to do the final exam.我一直在做一个数字营销课程, 明天我必须做期末考试。
138So, who'll do the report?那么,谁来做报告?
139I don't know.师曰.
140Is there no way you can do it?你办不到吗?
141Sorry, no.对不起,没有。
142I've done most of my work for today, and then I'm going straight home to do some今天我做了大部分工作 然后直接回家做一些
143last-minute revision.最后一分钟的修订版。
144Remember that do means that you perform a task or an activity.记住,这确实意味着你执行某项任务或活动。
145You often use it to talk about things you do at work or school.你经常用它来谈论你的工作或学校里的事情.
146Look at three examples you heard in the dialogue.看看你在对话中听到的三个例子。
147Can you remember how to complete the missing words?你还记得怎么补完缺的字吗?
148Can you get the answers?你能得到答案吗?
149You'll see them in a second.你马上会见到他们的
150So, you can do work, do business, do a deal, do a report, and so on.因此,你可以做工作,做生意,做交易,做报告等等.
151You can also use do with other kinds of work, like do housework or do homework.您也可使用其他工作方式,例如做家务或做功课。
152Also, you can use do for many things connected with school and education.另外,你还可以做许多与学校和教育有关的事情。
153You do research, do exams, do a course, do revision, and do a subject.你做研究,做考试,做课程,做审校,做科目.
154With some of these, you can use other verbs, too.有了这些,也可以使用其他动词.
155For example, you can do an exam or take an exam.例如,您可以参加考试或者参加考试.
156You can also use take with course or subject.您也可使用课程或科目。
157For example, you can say I have to take four subjects in my first year of university, or比如说,你可以说我在大学一年级必须选四个科目,或者
158I have to do four subjects in my first year.我第一年要做四个科目
159There's no difference in meaning.义无分别.
160It doesn't matter which you use.你用什么无关紧要
161Let's look at one more common way to use do.让我们看看另一种常用的方法。
162Have you done anything about the washing machine?你对洗衣机做了什么吗?
163No, not yet.不,还没有。
164Well, when are you going to do something?你什么时候才能做点什么?
165It's been a week.已礼拜.
166I'm running out of clean clothes.净衣奔走.
167You could do it, too, you know.你也可以做到这一点,你知道的。
168Can't do everything around here.不能做所有的一切在这里。
169What do you mean do everything?你什么意思 做一切吗?
170You've done nothing all day.你一整天都没做什么
171You spent the morning watching cartoons in your underwear.你早上在看内衣漫画
172Fine, I'll do it tomorrow.好吧,我明天来
173You can use do as a general verb in phrases, like do something.你可以在短语中做一个一般的动词,比如做点什么.
174You heard three more phrases like this in the dialogue.你们在对话中又听到三句话
175Can you remember them?你还记得吗?
176You heard do anything, do everything, and do nothing.你听到什么,做任何事情, 和什么都不做。
177You can use these phrases in different ways.你可以以不同的方式使用这些短语.
178For example, I need to do something about my hair.例如,我需要做一些 关于我的头发。
179It's a mess.乱成一团.
180Do you want to do anything this weekend?这周末你想做什么吗?
181She's so lazy.她太懒了
182She sits in her office all day long, doing nothing.她整天坐在办公室里无所事事
183They're a very close couple.他们是一对非常亲密的夫妇.
184They do everything together.他们一起做任何事。
185Easy, right?放松点,对吧?
186To practise, try to make your own examples, too.练习时,也试着做你自己的例子.
187Let's do one more thing.让我们再做一件事。
188In our last section, you'll see some common collocations and phrases using make and do.在我们的最后一节,你会看到一些常见的同处 和短语使用制造和做。
189What did you make of the play?你对这部剧有什么看法?
190It was interesting, but you could see that they're on a tight budget.很有趣,但你可以看到 他们的预算很紧张。
191They could have done with better lighting, for one thing.他们可以做更好的照明, 一件事。
192I could hardly see sometimes.有时我几乎看不见
193I know what you mean.我知道你在说什么。
194I thought they did a good job of making do with what they had,我以为他们做得很好 做他们有,
195but obviously it would have been better if they'd had more resources.但是很明显,如果他们有更多的资源,那会更好。
196Yeah, they did their best.是啊,他们尽力了。
197Look at some phrasal verbs and collocations with make and do, which you heard.看看一些词性动词 和配音 与制造和做,你听到了。
198Can you remember how they were used?你还记得他们是如何使用的吗?
199Could you explain what they meant?你能解释他们是什么意思吗?
200Make of is mostly used in questions, when you want to ask someone for their opinion.制作主要用于提问,当你想征求别人的意见时.
201If someone asks you, what did you make of it?如果有人问你,你有什么想法?
202They want to know what you thought.他们想知道你的想法
203For example, if I ask you, what did you make of the concert?比如,如果我问你,你对演唱会做了什么?
204I'm asking you for your opinion.我问你的意见。
205Did you like it or not?你喜欢吗?
206Did you think it was good or not?你觉得好还是不好?
207Do with means want or need.做手段 想要或需要。
208It's conversational.其语曰.
209You might say, I could do with a cup of tea, meaning I want a cup of tea.你可以说,我可以做一个茶, 这意味着我想要一个茶。
210Do a good job is easier to guess.做一个好的工作是容易猜测的。
211If you do a good job, you do something well.如果你做一个好的工作, 你做一些好的东西。
212It doesn't have to be about work.不须工夫.
213You could use it about many things.你可以用它在很多方面。
214You can also use different adjectives.也可以使用不同的形容词.
215For example, do a bad job, do an adequate job, and so on.例如做坏事,做适当工作等等.
216Make do is harder to explain.做起来更难解释
217Look at an example.观一譬喻.
218I didn't have time to cook, so we made do with some snacks and small things.我没有时间做饭,所以我们做了一些零食和小东西。
219Does this help?这有用吗?
220If you make do with something, you don't have what you want, so you have to find a如果你做了一些事情, 你没有你想要的, 所以你必须找到一个
221way to use something else.用别的东西
222Here's another example.这是另一个例子。
223After we moved, the furniture didn't arrive for a week, so for a bed, we had to make do我们搬家后 家具已经一个星期没到 所以为了床 我们不得不做
224with a mattress on the floor.地板上有床垫
225This means that you didn't have the thing you wanted—your bed—so you had to use这意味着你没有你想要的东西,你的床, 所以你不得不使用
226something else.还有别的
227Do your best means to try as hard as you can.尽其所能尽其所能.
228It's often used when you didn't get the result you wanted.它经常被使用 当你没有得到你想要的结果。
229For example, they did their best, but in the end, they lost three-nil.例如,他们尽了最大的努力,但最后却输了三无.
230I did my best, but there was no way I could manage everything alone.我尽力了 但我不可能独自管理一切
231There are many more phrasal verbs and collocations with make and do.与制和制的合用词和合用词还有许多.
232Can you think of any more?你能再想想吗?
233If so, share your ideas in the comments, and make some examples to share your ideas with如果是的话,请在评论中分享你的想法,并举出一些例子,以分享你的想法。
234other learners.其他学习者。
235Thanks for watching!谢谢你的观看!
236See you next time!下次见!
该视频共有字幕 236 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P34 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p34 33. 33. English Grammar 33.Using the Verb Be - 5 Levels of English Grammar (P34)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Oli.嗨,我是奥利。
0:02Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
0:05In this lesson, you can learn about using the verb be and test your English grammar在这个课上,你可以学会使用动词 测试你的英语语法
0:10skills.技术。
0:11Are you a beginner, or are you a high-level English learner who's been studying for你是初学者,还是高水平英语学习者
0:16years?几年吗?
0:17This lesson will have something for you, whatever your English level is.这个课会给你一些东西, 不管你的英语水平是什么。
0:21You'll see many ways to use the verb be, from the most basic uses to complex structures.你会看到许多使用动词的方法,从最基本的用途到复杂的结构.
0:28Want more free English lessons?想要更多免费英语课程吗?
0:30Check out our website, Oxford Online English dot com.看看我们的网站 牛津在线英语点数com
展开字幕全文（194 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Oli.嗨,我是奥利。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
3In this lesson, you can learn about using the verb be and test your English grammar在这个课上,你可以学会使用动词 测试你的英语语法
4skills.技术。
5Are you a beginner, or are you a high-level English learner who's been studying for你是初学者,还是高水平英语学习者
6years?几年吗?
7This lesson will have something for you, whatever your English level is.这个课会给你一些东西, 不管你的英语水平是什么。
8You'll see many ways to use the verb be, from the most basic uses to complex structures.你会看到许多使用动词的方法,从最基本的用途到复杂的结构.
9Want more free English lessons?想要更多免费英语课程吗?
10Check out our website, Oxford Online English dot com.看看我们的网站 牛津在线英语点数com
11You can also book English classes with our fully qualified teachers, who can help you你可以和我们完全合格的老师订英语课 谁可以帮你
12with your English speaking, writing, IELTS preparation, or whatever else you need.用你的英语,写作,IELTS准备, 或任何你需要的。
13One more thing.还有一件事
14Do you want to watch this video with subtitles?你想用字幕观看这段视频吗?
15You can!你们可以!
16Turn them on now by clicking the CC button in the bottom right.通过点击右下方的 CC 按钮打开
17Here's how this lesson works.这个课是这样的
18There are five levels.有五关.
19Each level is more difficult than the previous one.每一级都比上一级更困难.
20Level one is beginner.一级是初学者。
21Levels two to four are intermediate.二级至四级为中间级.
22Level five is high-intermediate to advanced.五级为高中间向先进.
23If you're not a beginner, start at level two.如果你不是初学者,从二级开始
24At each level, you can see what you need to focus on if you have difficulties.在每个关卡上,如果遇到困难,都可以看到你需要专注于什么.
25Ready?准备好了吗?
26Let's start!开始吧!
27Here are five sentences.此为五句.
28Use the sentences with one word.以一字为句.
29Pause the video and think about your answers.暂停录像 想想你的答案
30If you want extra practice, say your answers aloud.如果你想多练习,大声回答
31Ready?准备好了吗?
32Here are the answers.以下是答案。
33Did you get all five right?5个都对吗?
34You should probably fast-forward to level two.你也许应该快到二级
35Did you make a mistake?你犯了错吗?
36Here's what you need.这是你需要的。
37One, you need to know the positive forms of be, including the past forms was and were.第一,你需要知道积极的形式,包括过去的形式过去和现在。
38Here they are.他们来了
39Pause the video to look if you need more time.暂停录像,如果你需要更多的时间。
40You also need to know the negative forms of be.你还需要知道 消极的形式。
41Here they are.他们来了
42Again, pause if you need time to look.如果你需要时间看,请再暂停
43You can see that most negatives have a contraction, or sometimes two.你可以看到,大多数负数都有收缩,有时有两种.
44You should use the contraction most of the time when you're speaking.你说话的时候大部分时间都应该用收缩法
45It doesn't matter which contracted form you use.你用哪种合同形式不重要
46Ready?准备好了吗?
47Let's go to level two.入二关.
48Here are your five sentences.汝等五句请.
49Complete each sentence with one word.以一个字完成每一句.
50Contractions, like isn't, count as one word.收缩,像不是,算作一个字。
51Again, pause the video to think about your answers if you need time.再次,暂停视频 思考你的答案 如果你需要时间。
52Ready?准备好了吗?
53Here are the answers.以下是答案。
54What's the point here?这里有什么意义?
55You can use be to make continuous forms.你可以用来做连续形式。
56Continuous forms have many uses.连续形式有许多用途。
57For example, you use continuous forms to talk about something happening at one moment in例如,您使用连续的表格来谈论在其中某一时刻发生的事情
58time.时间。
59For all continuous forms, you need to remember one rule – be plus –ing verb.对于所有连续的形式,你需要记住一条规则——是+-ing动词.
60All continuous forms need both things – be and a verb with –ing.所有连续形式都需要两样东西 — 和与 — ing的动词。
61There are other continuous forms.还有其他连续形式。
62You'll see some of them later.你会看到一些他们以后。
63Let's see all of the forms for the present continuous, past continuous and future continuous.让我们看看目前连续,过去连续和未来连续的所有表格.
64You'll see forms with the verb go as an example.你会看到表 与动词去作为一个例子。
65Each list will appear for three seconds.每个列表将出现三秒钟。
66Pause the video if you need more time to look.如果你需要更多时间看,请暂停录像。
67Also, don't forget that you can see all this information on the free lesson page on还有,别忘了你可以在免费课页上看到所有这些信息
68our website.我们的网站。
69If you're watching on YouTube, you can find the link in the video description.如果你在YouTube上观看,可以在视频描述中找到链接.
70What about sentence number five?那第五话呢?
71Did you get it right?你说对了吗?
72Do you find it strange?你觉得奇怪吗?
73You can use be in the continuous normally to talk about people.你可以继续正常地谈论人。
74You use it when someone is behaving in a way which is not normal for them.你用它,当有人的行为方式 对他们来说是不正常的。
75For example, if you say she's being so impatient at the moment, you mean that she's generally比如说,如果你说她现在很不耐烦, 你是说她一般都是...
76a patient person, but she's behaving impatiently now.她是个有耐心的人 但她现在很不耐烦
77Maybe she's under a lot of stress, and it's having an influence on her.也许她压力很大,对她有影响.
78When you use be in the continuous, you have the verb be twice, like she's being.当你使用在连续, 你有动词是两次, 像她。
79This might look strange, but be follows the same rules as every other verb.这看起来可能很奇怪,但必须遵守与所有其他动词相同的规则。
80You make a continuous form by using the verb be plus an –ing verb.您使用动词加一个- ing 动词来制作连续形式 。
81That's the end of level two.二层的终点
82Remember that you can always review a section if you need to.记住,如果需要,你可以随时检讨一节。
83Here are five more sentences.复有五句颂曰.
84This time, you need to complete each sentence with two words.这一次,你需要用两个字来完成每个句子.
85One word should be a form of be.一个字应该是一种形式。
86Remember that contractions, like isn't, count as one word.记住,收缩,像不是,算作一个词。
87Ready?准备好了吗?
88Here are the answers.以下是答案。
89So, what's the idea here?所以,这是什么想法?
90You can use be in different times and tenses, like any other verb.与其它动词一样,你可以在不同的时间和时态中使用.
91Be has perfect forms, like have been, has been and had been.有完美的形式,就像过去,过去和过去一样。
92Be doesn't behave differently to other verbs here.与这里其他动词没有不同的行为.
93Sometimes we hear questions like, how do you use have been and has been?有时候,我们听到的问题 比如,你如何使用 一直和一直?
94What's the difference between have been and had been?和以前有什么区别?
95These aren't questions about using be.这不是关于使用的问题。
96If you're asking these questions, you need to learn more about perfect tenses.如果你问这些问题, 你需要学习更多关于完美的紧张。
97Be can also be used in the future, with verbs like will or going to.将来也可以使用,动词如意志或将要使用.
98Like you saw in level two, you can have the verb be twice in one sentence if you use a就像你从第二级看到的一样 如果你用一个
99verb like be going to, which contains be.动词就像要去, 包含。
100In number three, the first be, isn't, is part of the verb be going to, which you use在第三,第一个是,不是, 是动词的一部分 去,你使用
101to talk about the future.谈论未来。
102The second be is the main verb.第二为主动词.
103It goes with the word late.和晚点的字一样
104If you've got everything right so far, you know a lot about English verb forms and how你对英语动词表很了解
105to use be.用来使用。
106Ready for level four?准备好进入四级了吗?
107This time, let's do something different.这次我们做点别的吧
108Here are five sentences, like before.这里有五句,像以前一样。
109This time, there's a mistake in each sentence.这一次,每句都有错误.
110Can you correct the mistakes?你能纠正错误吗?
111Pause the video and think about the corrections.暂停录像 考虑一下更正
112Write your answers down if you want.如果你想写你的答案
113Ready?准备好了吗?
114Here are the answers.以下是答案。
115Can you see what connects these five sentences?你能看到这五句有什么联系吗?
116They all involve the passive voice.它们都涉及到被动的声音。
117To make the passive voice, you need two things.要让被动的声音, 你需要两件事。
118Be plus a past participle.加上过去的聚会
119Often English learners make mistakes like these.通常英语学习者会犯这样的错误.
120Sometimes they forget to use be in a passive sentence, like in sentence number one.有时他们忘记了用在被动的句子中,就像第一句话一样.
121Sometimes they add be where it isn't needed, like in sentences two and five.有时它们会添加到不需要的地方,比如句子2和句子5中.
122Be careful, because remember that be is also used to make continuous forms, and there are要小心,因为记住, 这也是用来做连续的形式,
123passive continuous forms.被动连续形式。
124Do you mix these up?你把这些混在一起了吗?
125It's not always easy, but there are simple rules which work.虽然并不总是容易的,但有简单的规则是可行的.
126Continuous forms use be plus an –ing verb.连续形式使用是加一个-ing动词.
127This rule has no exceptions.这一规则没有例外。
128Passive forms use be plus a past participle.被动形式的使用是加上一个过去的participle.
129This rule also has no exceptions.这一规则也没有例外。
130So, in sentence four, you have a continuous form, was being, and a passive form, being所以,在第四句中,你有一个连续的形式, 是,和被动的形式,是
131cleaned.清理干净
132They overlap, but they follow the rules.他们互相重叠,但他们遵守规则。
133加上-ing动词,然后加上过去participle.
134If you have difficulties here, then study continuous forms and the past voice.如果你在这里有困难,那么学习连续的形式和过去的声音.
135Pay attention to passive continuous forms, so that you can avoid mistakes with be, like注意被动的连续形式, 这样你就可以避免错误,就像
136you saw in our examples.你从我们的例子中看到了
137Okay, let's move on to our last level.好吧,让我们继续我们的最后一个关卡。
138Here are your sentences.这是你的句子。
139You need to complete the missing words.你需要完成缺漏的词。
140This time, you can use one or two words.这一次,你可以用一两个字。
141At least one word in each gap must be a form of be.每个缺口中至少有一个字必须是一种形式。
142How did you do?你好吗?
143Here are the full sentences.这里有完整的句子。
144So, what's this about?所以,这是什么?
145Like every verb, be has infinitive and gerund forms.和每个动词一样,被具有无限和古老的形式.
146You can see this in sentence number one.在第一话中可以看到这一点.
147The sentence is passive, so you need, remember, be plus a past participle, but you're using句子是被动的,所以你需要,记住, 加上过去的participle, 但你在使用
148the verb like, which needs a gerund.动词像, 它需要一个基因。
149So, talk is passive, but also a gerund, being talked.所以,说话是被动的, 但也是一种深层的,被谈论。
150Usually, we talk about infinitives and gerunds like they're single things, but there are通常,我们谈论无限 和老年 喜欢它们是单一的东西, 但有
151different infinitives.不同的无限。
152There's an infinitive with to, and an infinitive without to.有无尽无尽无尽无尽无尽无尽.
153There are also continuous infinitives, be being, and perfect infinitives, have been.还有连续的无限, 正在,和完美的无限, 已经。
154The gerund, being, also has a perfect form, having been.古老的,是, 也有一个完美的形式, 已经。
155You often need different infinitives with modal verbs.您通常需要不同的无限动词。
156Modal verbs don't have past forms, so if you want to express a past meaning, you needmodal动词没有过去的形式,所以如果要表达过去的含义,就需要
157to use a perfect infinitive after the verb.在动词之后使用完美的无限。
158For example, look at sentence number two.譬如观二句.
159Think about the difference between these two sentences.想想这两句的区别.
160Would is a modal verb, so it doesn't have a past form.将是一种模式动词,所以没有过去的形式.
161I would like to be there, could mean now or in the future.我想在那里,可能意味着现在或未来。
162To talk about the past, you need a perfect infinitive.说到过去 你需要完美的无限
163I would like to have been there.我本来想去的
164You can see a continuous infinitive in sentence three.在第三句中可以看到连续的无限.
165The room is in the process of being redecorated now, so you use a continuous form.房间正在重新装修,所以你使用连续形式。
166It's also passive, so you need the verb be twice, once for the continuous form and once它也是被动的,所以你需要动词是两次,一次对于连续的形式,一次
167for the passive form.对于被动的形式。
168Sentence four uses a perfect gerund, and is also passive.第4句使用了完美的基因,也是被动的。
169Perfect forms need a past participle, and passive forms also need a past participle.完美的形式需要过去的participle,而被动形式也需要过去的participle.
170This means you have two past participles in a row.这意味着你连续有两个过去的派对
171Been involved.参与过
172Confused?困惑?
173It might take time to get comfortable with.也许需要时间来适应
174However, if you could understand the previous parts of this lesson, then you have the tools但是,如果你能理解这个课程的前几部分, 那么,你有工具
175you need to understand and form sentences like this.你需要理解和形成这样的句子。
176These sentences don't require new rules or ideas.这些句子不需要新的规则或想法.
177They require you to combine rules, because they combine multiple verbs.它们要求你结合规则,因为它们结合了多种动词.
178However, each step follows a simple, predictable rule.然而,每一步骤都遵循一项简单、可预测的规则。
179What about sentence five?那第五句怎么办?
180This looks like a gerund, although technically it's a participle.这看起来像一个老人, 虽然技术上它是一个participle。
181Participle clauses like this are a way to add extra information to a noun.像这样的Participle条款是一种在名词中添加额外信息的方法.
182In this case, the subject of the sentence is he, and the participle clause gives us在这种情况下,判决的主题是他, 和participle条款给我们
183extra information about him.有关他的额外信息。
184You use a perfect participle because you're talking about the past, as well as the present.你用一个完美的participle 因为你在谈论过去 以及现在。
185If you want more practice on this topic, check out the full version of this lesson on our如果你想在这个话题上做更多的练习, 请检查这个课的完整版本 关于我们
186互联网档案馆的存檔,存档日期2013-03-02., Oxford Online English dot com.
187If you're watching on YouTube, there's a link in the video description.如果你在YouTube上观看,视频描述中有链接.
188You'll find a quiz to help you practice the use of be, including basic and more advanced你会找到一个测试 帮助你练习使用 包括基础和高级
189uses.用户。
190Thanks for watching!谢谢你的观看!
191See you next time!下次见!
192Oxford Learning since 19841984年以来牛津学习
193网址:www.oxfordlearning.com
194Oxford Learning since 19841984年以来牛津学习
该视频共有字幕 194 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P35 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p35 34. 34. English Grammar 34.Present Simple and Present Continuous Tenses - 5 Leve (P35)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Liam.嗨,我是利亚姆。
0:03Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
0:05In this lesson, you can learn about using the present simple and present continuous在此课中,您可以学习如何使用当前简单而连续的
0:09verb forms.动词形式.
0:10You'll see many different ways to use these verb tenses, from basic meanings to more advanced你会看到很多不同的方式 使用这些动词紧张, 从基本意义到更高级
0:15uses.用户。
0:16A question for you.问曰.
0:18Do you want to watch this video with subtitles?你想用字幕观看这段视频吗?
0:21You can.你当然可以
0:22It's easy.方便无碍.
展开字幕全文（205 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Liam.嗨,我是利亚姆。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English.欢迎来到牛津在线英语。
3In this lesson, you can learn about using the present simple and present continuous在此课中,您可以学习如何使用当前简单而连续的
4verb forms.动词形式.
5You'll see many different ways to use these verb tenses, from basic meanings to more advanced你会看到很多不同的方式 使用这些动词紧张, 从基本意义到更高级
6uses.用户。
7A question for you.问曰.
8Do you want to watch this video with subtitles?你想用字幕观看这段视频吗?
9You can.你当然可以
10It's easy.方便无碍.
11Turn them on now by clicking the CC icon in the bottom right, or, on your phone, use the现在打开,点击右下方的 CC 图标,或在您的手机上,使用
12settings icon at the top of the video player.视频播放器顶部设置图标。
13Here's how this lesson works.这个课是这样的
14There are five levels.有五关.
15Each level is more difficult than the previous one.每一级都比上一级更困难.
16Level one is beginner.一级是初学者。
17Levels two to four are intermediate.二级至四级为中间级.
18Level five is high intermediate to advanced.五级为高中间层至高级层.
19If you're not a beginner, start at level two.如果你不是初学者,从二级开始
20At each level, you can see what you need to focus on if you have difficulties.在每个关卡上,如果遇到困难,都可以看到你需要专注于什么.
21Ready?准备好了吗?
22Let's start!开始吧!
23You'll see five sentences which use the present simple or present continuous.你会看到五句 使用现在的简单或现在的连续。
24You need to complete each sentence with one word.你需要用一个词来完成每个句子.
25The verb you need to use is given at the end of the sentence.您需要使用的动词在句尾给出.
26Here are your sentences.这是你的句子。
27Pause the video and think about your answers.暂停录像 想想你的答案
28Ready?准备好了吗?
29Let's look.让我们看看。
30What do you need to know here?你在这里需要知道什么?
31You need to know how to form the present simple and present continuous.需要知道如何形成现在的简单和持续.
32For example, you need to know rules like add s to the verb in the present simple after例如,您需要知道规则,比如在当前简单的动词中添加 s 。
33he, she or it.他,她还是它。
34You need to know that you make the present continuous with the verb be plus an ing verb.你需要知道,你使当前与动词的连续是加一个ing动词.
35You should also know how to make negatives and questions with these two tenses.你也应该知道如何用这两种紧张情绪来做负面和提问.
36Easy?轻点?
37Maybe, but even advanced English learners sometimes make mistakes with these points.也许,但即使是先进的英语学习者有时也会在这些分数上犯错误.
38Practice them carefully so you don't form bad habits.仔细练习,以免形成不良习惯.
39In this section, you need to choose the correct form in each sentence.在本节中,需要在每个句子中选择正确的形式.
40Look at your questions.看看你的问题。
41Pause the video and find your answers.暂停录像 找到答案
42Did you do it?是你干的吗?
43Let's check.让我们检查一下。
44Here, you need to think about the meaning of these two verb forms.在这里,你需要考虑这两种动词形式的含义.
45Use the present simple for habits or things you do regularly, like in sentence one.使用现在的简单 习惯或你经常做的事, 就像第一句。
46Use the present continuous for things which are happening right now, like in sentence使用当前连续 正在发生的事情,像句子
47two.两个
48You also use the present continuous for things which are unfinished, like in sentence three.您还使用当前连续的, 对于未完成的事物, 如第三句。
49For facts and things which are generally true, use the present simple, like in sentence four.对于一般真实的事实和事物,使用现在的简单,如第4句.
50If you're describing a photo or a picture and want to say what's happening, use the如果你在描述一张照片或一张照片 想说出发生了什么,使用
51present continuous, like in sentence five.与第五句一样,是连续的。
52If you understand these ideas, you'll be able to use the present simple and the present如果你理解这些想法, 你就可以使用现在的简单和现在
53continuous in many everyday sentences.在很多日常的句子中持续。
54However, there are many more things you need to know to use these verb forms well.然而,还需要知道很多事情才能很好地使用这些动词形式.
55Here we have a different challenge for you.在这里,我们有一个不同的挑战给你。
56Some of these sentences are correct, some are incorrect.其中一些句子是正确的,有些句子是不正确的.
57Your job is to find the correct sentences and correct the mistakes in the others.你的工作是找到正确的句子,纠正其他错误.
58Pause the video and do it now.暂停录像,现在就做
59What do you think?你觉得呢?
60How many correct sentences do you think there are?你认为有多少句子正确?
61Could you correct the mistakes in the others?你能纠正其他的错误吗?
62Let's look together.让我们一起看看。
63Sentences two and five are correct.第二句和第五句是正确的。
64The others all have mistakes.其他人都有错误。
65Now you can see the mistakes, and the corrections.现在你可以看到错误 和纠正。
66Can you explain the problems with sentences one, three and four?你能解释一下第一、三和四句的问题吗?
67Why are they wrong?为什么他们错了?
68Verbs of sensing, like smell, see or hear, are not generally used in the present continuous.感知动词,如嗅觉,见觉或听觉,一般不用于目前的连续.
69In sentence one, even though you're talking about something which is just true now, you在第一句中,尽管你说的 是真的,现在,你
70use the present simple because you're using a verb of sensing—smell.使用现在的简单,因为你正在使用一种感知的动词——味.
71Sentence two is correct.第二句对
72Use the present continuous to talk about arrangements in the future.利用目前的连续性来讨论今后的安排。
73This is common for talking about social plans.这在谈论社会计划时很常见.
74You can also use the present simple to talk about the future, like in sentence three.你也可以用现在的简单来谈论未来,比如第三句.
75Do you know why you use the present simple here?你知道你为什么用现在的简单吗?
76Use the present simple to talk about future events which follow a timetable.使用现在的简单来谈论按照时间表进行的未来事件.
77This includes things like trains, planes, meetings, appointments and lessons.这包括火车、飞机、会议、预约和课程等。
78Verbs of thinking or speaking, like promise, aren't generally used in the present continuous.思考或说话的动词,像承诺一样,一般不用于现在的连续.
79Can you think of other verbs like this?你能想到其他这样的动词吗?
80There are many, but know, realise, remember, admit and state are almost always used in有很多,但知道,意识到, 记住,承认和状态几乎总是使用
81the present simple, even if you're talking about something which is happening now.即使你说的是现在发生的事情
82In general, you can divide verbs into two types—action verbs and state verbs.一般来说,可以将动词分为两类——动作动词和状态动词.
83Action verbs, like run, do or cook, can be either simple or continuous.动作动词,如运行,做或烹饪,可以是简单或连续的.
84State verbs, like be, know or love, cannot normally be used in the present continuous.状态动词,如是,知或爱,通常不能在目前连续使用.
85There are exceptions to this, but it's a useful general rule to remember.这一点也有例外,但记住这是一条有用的通则.
86Finally, in sentence five, can you explain why you need to use the present continuous?最后,在第五句中,你能解释为什么你需要使用目前的连续?
87Use the present continuous to describe changing situations, or to talk about trends.利用目前的连续性来描述不断变化的情况,或谈论趋势。
88This is useful if you need to talk about statistics, for example, sales are falling by an average如果你需要谈谈统计,这很有用,例如,销售额平均下降
89of two percent annually.每年2%。
90There's a lot of information in this video.这段视频中有很多信息.
91Remember, you can always review a section if you need to, or take a break and come back记住,如果需要,你随时可以检讨一节,或者休息回来
92later.等会
93Now, let's move on to level four.现在,让我们进入第四层。
94Level four is a little different again.第四层又有点不一样了.
95Look at your sentences.观汝句.
96This time, you have two jobs.这次你有两个工作
97First, are both forms possible?首先,两种形式都有可能吗?
98In some sentences, you can use either the present simple or the continuous.在一些句子中,可以使用当前简单的或者连续的.
99In at least one sentence, you can't use both.在至少一句话中,不能同时使用两者.
100Where can you, or can't you, use both forms?你在哪里,或者你能不能,使用两种表格?
101Secondly, where you can use both forms, is there a difference in meaning?第二,在可以使用两种形式的地方,意义是否不同?
102If so, can you explain it?如果是,你能解释一下吗?
103Pause the video and think about these questions now.暂停录像 考虑一下这些问题
104Take your time.慢慢来
105Ready?准备好了吗?
106Let's check.让我们检查一下。
107In sentence one, both forms are possible.在第一句中,这两种形式都是可能的。
108Using the present simple suggests that this is a permanent situation.使用目前的简单说明,这是一种永久的情况。
109She works there because this is her long-term job, and she'll probably continue to work她在那里工作,因为这是她的长期工作, 她可能会继续工作
110there.这里
111Using the present continuous suggests that this is something temporary.利用目前的连续表示,这是暂时的。
112She's working there for a short time, and she'll probably be working somewhere else她在那里工作很短的时间, 她可能会在别的地方工作。
113soon.马上
114In sentence two, both forms are also possible.在第二句中,这两种形式也是可能的。
115Using the present continuous expresses that you find this habit annoying or strange.使用现在的连续表示,你发现这种习惯令人讨厌或奇怪.
116You can do this with adverbs like always or constantly.你可以用副词来做 总是这样或不断。
117The adverb is necessary.副词是必需的.
118You can only use the present continuous to talk about a habit if you use an adverb, like只有使用副词,比如
119always.永远
120Using the present simple here is neutral.使用目前的简单是中立的。
121It doesn't have any extra meaning.无有余义.
122It just expresses that he has this habit.它只是表示他有这种习惯。
123In sentence three, using the continuous expresses that you're just starting to understand在第三句中,用你刚刚开始理解的连续表达
124this idea.这个想法。
125In level three, you saw that verbs of thinking, like realise, aren't generally used in the在第三层,你看到 思维的动词,像意识到, 通常不使用
126present continuous.持续进行。
127That's true, but there's an important exception.没错,但有一个重要的例外.
128Use the present continuous to express feelings which you are just starting to be aware of.用现在的连续来表达你刚刚开始意识到的感受.
129When a feeling is coming to you, and you're still processing your thoughts, you can use当一种感觉来到你身边, 而你仍在处理你的想法, 你可以使用
130the present continuous to talk about it.现在继续谈论它。
131Here, it means that you've just started to understand that he's been lying to you,在这里,这意味着你刚刚开始理解 他一直在骗你,
132or you've recently found out that he's dishonest.或者你最近发现他不诚实
133You're still processing those thoughts.你还在处理这些想法
134Using the present simple suggests that this is not a new feeling.使用目前的简单表示,这不是一种新的感觉。
135It suggests that you understood that you were wrong to trust him some time ago.这表明你理解你以前信任他是错误的
136Sentence four is similar to sentence one.第四句与第一句相似.
137Both forms are possible.这两种形式都是可能的。
138Using the present simple suggests that this is a more permanent situation, while using使用现在的简单表示,这是一种更长期的情况,同时使用
139the present continuous suggests something more temporary.目前的连续性意味着更暂时的。
140For example, if they've only just started playing tennis, and they're both really lazy,例如,如果他们只是刚刚开始打网球, 而且他们都真的很懒,
141and you're sure they'll give up soon, then you'd probably use the continuous here.你确信他们会很快放弃, 然后你可能会使用 在这里连续。
142But, if they've been playing tennis on Fridays for years, and you know they're both really但是,如果他们在周五打网球很多年了, 你知道他们都是真的
143enthusiastic about it, and are likely to continue for a long time, then you'd use the present simple.对它充满热情, 并有可能持续很长一段时间, 然后你会使用现在的简单。
144Sentence five is different.句第五别.
145Why?为什么?
146Because there isn't a difference in meaning.因为意思没有区别
147There's another point.还有一点
148While it's possible to say, my English gets better year after year, using the continuous虽然可以说,我的英语 年复一年地好起来,使用连续
149sounds better.听起来好多了。
150You're talking about a changing situation, like you saw in level three, and it's more你在谈论一个变化中的情况, 就像你在第三层看到的,它更多
151common to use the continuous in this case.用于此情况下的连续。
152Up to now, you've seen many different ways to use the present simple and continuous.到目前为止,你已经看到许多不同的方式 使用现在的简单和连续。
153Are you ready for the hardest challenge?你准备好迎接最严峻的挑战了吗?
154Here are your sentences.这是你的句子。
155Your task is simple.你的任务很简单
156Put the verbs into either the present simple or the present continuous.将动词放入当前简单的或当前连续的.
157You know what to do.你知道该怎么做。
158Pause the video and find your answers.暂停录像 找到答案
159Ready?准备好了吗?
160Let's see how you did.让我们看看你是如何做的。
161Did you get them all right?你把它们都弄好了吗?
162If so, great job!如果是这样,伟大的工作!
163If not, don't worry!如果不是,别担心!
164These sentences test some more difficult and specialised uses of the present simple and这些句子检验了目前简单和专门化的一些困难和特殊用途。
165continuous.连续。
166In sentence one, do you know why you use the present simple?在第一句中,你知道为什么你使用现在的简单?
167A question.问曰.
168What is this sentence?这是什么句子?
169Who's saying it?谁说的?
170This sentence sounds like live commentary on a football match.这个句子听起来像足球比赛的现场评论.
171When commenting on live events, it's common to use the present simple even for things在评论现场事件时,常见的是即使是对事物都使用现在的简单.
172which are happening right now, when you would usually expect to hear the continuous.现在正在发生, 当你通常期望听到连续。
173In sentence two, did you think it might be correct to use the continuous?在第二句中,你是否认为使用连续字是正确的?
174The first part of the sentence, he never listens, sounds like an annoying habit.这句话的第一部分,他从不听,听起来像是个烦人的习惯.
175You saw in level four that you can use the continuous to talk about strange or annoying你看见四级的你可以用连续的 来谈论奇怪或烦人
176habits, but you can't use it here.习惯,但你不能在这里使用。
177Why not?为什么不呢?
178It's because you can only use the present continuous in this way with specific adverbs这是因为你只能以这种方式使用当前连续的副词
179– always is the most common – and you can't do this with never.- 总是最常见的 - 你不能永远这样做。
180In sentence three, you can use present tenses to tell a story, especially in informal conversation.在第三句中,可以使用现在的时态来讲述一个故事,特别是在非正式的对话中.
181In most cases, you'd use past tenses to tell a story, but you can also move the past在大多数情况下,你会用过去的紧张 来讲述一个故事, 但你也可以移动过去
182tenses into the present.紧张到现在。
183Past continuous becomes present continuous, past simple becomes present simple, and so过去的连续性变成现在的连续性,过去的简单变成现在的简单,所以
184on.继续
185This can make your story sound more vivid, as if it's taking place now.这可以让你的故事听起来更生动, 好像它正在发生。
186For sentence four, where do you think this sentence comes from?对于第四句,你认为这句话来自何处?
187Notice the capital letters, and the fact that it doesn't have a full stop at the end.注意大写字母,最后没有全站.
188It's a newspaper headline.报业头条.
189Headlines are written in a specific style, and often use the present simple to talk about标题以特定的风格写成,并经常使用现在的简单来谈论
190events in the recent past.最近发生的事件。
191What about sentence five?那第五句怎么办?
192Can you explain what's going on here?你能解释一下这是怎么回事吗?
193The key here is that C has different meanings.这里的关键是C有不同的含义.
194The first C means understand.第一个C就是理解
195This is a state verb, so it can't be continuous.这是一个状态动词,所以不能连续.
196The second C means meet, or have a relationship with.第二C表示相遇,或与之有关系.
197It's an action verb, so it can be continuous.是一种动作动词,因此可以连续.
198There are other verbs like this, where there are multiple meanings, some of which are actions还有其他类似动词,有多种含义,有些是动作.
199and some of which are states.和一部分为州。
200Other common verbs like this are have, think, expect, or look.其他常见的动词有,有,有,有,有期望,也有,也有看.
201How did you do on this lesson?这个课你表现如何?
202Which points did you find most difficult or confusing?你觉得最难或最困惑的几点?
203Let us know how you did in the comments, and what was most difficult for you.让我们知道你在评论中是如何做的,以及你最困难的是什么。
204Thanks for watching!谢谢你的观看!
205See you next time!下次见!
该视频共有字幕 205 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P36 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p36 35. 35. English Grammar 35.Understand English Grammar and Sentence Structure - S (P36)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Maureen.嗨,我叫莫琳,你好吗?
0:03Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
0:05In this lesson, you're going to see nine strange sentences.此课中见九种奇特句.
0:09Have you seen the nine sentences yet?你看过九句吗?
0:11If not, look below the video and read them.如果不是,请看下面的视频并阅读.
0:15What do you think?你觉得呢?
0:16Which ones are correct?哪个对?
0:18Actually, all nine sentences are correct, but we're sure at least some of these sentences实际上,所有九句都是对的 但我们至少可以确定其中的一些句子
0:24look weird to you.你看起来很奇怪
0:26In this video, we'll analyse each of these sentences, so that you can understand how在这段视频中,我们将分析这些句子中的每一个句子,这样你就可以了解
展开字幕全文（244 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Maureen.嗨,我叫莫琳,你好吗?
2Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
3In this lesson, you're going to see nine strange sentences.此课中见九种奇特句.
4Have you seen the nine sentences yet?你看过九句吗?
5If not, look below the video and read them.如果不是,请看下面的视频并阅读.
6What do you think?你觉得呢?
7Which ones are correct?哪个对?
8Actually, all nine sentences are correct, but we're sure at least some of these sentences实际上,所有九句都是对的 但我们至少可以确定其中的一些句子
9look weird to you.你看起来很奇怪
10In this video, we'll analyse each of these sentences, so that you can understand how在这段视频中,我们将分析这些句子中的每一个句子,这样你就可以了解
11they work.他们的工作。
12Look at our first three sentences.观前三句.
13Have you ever had to have a tooth extracted?你曾经用牙拔过吗?
14I would have had to stay longer if I hadn't had to go to have my car repaired.如果我不用去修理我的车 我就得多待一会
15All the medicine he had had, had had little effect.他吃过的所有药都没什么效果
16What connects these three sentences?这三句有什么联系?
17All three sentences play with different ways to use have.所有三句游戏用法各有不同.
18Have can be a main verb, which describes a state, like I have a new computer, or which可以说是主要动词,它描述一种状态, 就像我有一台新的计算机,或者
19describes an action, like I'm having lunch right now.描述一个动作, 就像我现在正在吃午饭。
20Have can also be an auxiliary verb, which is used in perfect verb forms.Have也可以是辅助动词,在完美的动词形式中使用.
21There's the verb have to, which you use to talk about obligations and rules.有动词必须使用,你用来谈论义务和规则.
22Finally, there are some fixed phrases with have, like have something done, which you最后,有一些固定的短语 有,比如 做了一些事情,你
23use when you pay someone else to do something for you.给别人做点什么的时候用
24For example, you could say I had my hair cut yesterday, meaning that you paid someone else例如,你可以说我昨天剪了头发,意思是你付了别人的钱
25to cut your hair.剪你的头发。
26When you use many of these forms of have in one sentence, you can get strange results,当你用很多这些形式 拥有在一句话, 你可以得到奇怪的结果,
27like have you ever had to have a tooth extracted?就像你曾经不得不有 牙提取?
28Here you use have in three different ways.这里你使用的有三种不同的方式。
29The first have is an auxiliary verb, because the question is present perfect.第一个有辅助动词,因为问题现在很完美.
30The second have is part of the verb have to, to talk about an obligation.第二个是动词必须的一部分,来谈论一项义务。
31Finally, the third have is part of the phrase have a tooth extracted.最后,第三种说法是其中的一部分,它提取了一颗牙齿。
32What does this mean?这是什么意思?
33Do you remember?你记得吗?
34It means that you're paying someone else to do something for you.这意味着你付钱给别人 为你做一些事情。
35Here, it means that you're paying a dentist to pull your tooth out.在这里,这意味着你支付牙医 拔出你的牙齿。
36You're not trying to do it yourself.你不是想自己动手
37So, can you explain the meaning of the full sentence?所以,你能解释 整个句子的意义吗?
38The question is asking about your past experience, and whether you've ever needed to go to问题在于你过去的经历 以及你是否需要去
39the dentist to have a tooth pulled out.牙医把牙拔出来
40Does this make sense now?这有道理吗?
41If not, remember that you can always go back and review parts of the video which are difficult如果没有,请记住,你总是可以回去 并审查视频中困难的部分
42for you.给你的
43Let's look at our next sentence.观下句.
44I would have had to stay longer if I hadn't had to go to have my car repaired.如果我不用去修理我的车 我就得多待一会
45Can you work out what's going on here?你能想清楚这是怎么回事吗?
46Here's a clue.这里有一个线索。
47It's similar to the last sentence you saw, but a little more complicated.这和你看到的最后一句相似,但有点复杂.
48The first have is an auxiliary.第一个是辅助
49You use have after would to show that you're talking about the past.你用它来证明你在谈论过去
50In this case, you're talking about the imaginary past—something which didn't really happen.在这种情况下,你指的是想象中的过去, 事情并没有真正发生。
51Then, you use have to to talk about an obligation.然后,你不得不谈论义务。
52The third have after if is another auxiliary.第三个有后 如果是另一个辅助。
53Again, you use have here to show that you're talking about the past—in this case, the再说一遍,你用这里来证明 你说的是过去...
54imaginary past.想象中的过去
55There's another have to, again expressing an obligation.还有另一个必须, 再次表达一种义务。
56The final have is part of the phrase have my car repaired, meaning that you're paying最后一首是这句话的一部分 把我的车修好 意思是你要付钱
57someone else to repair your car for you.别人帮你修车
58Now, you should be able to explain the overall meaning of the sentence.现在,你应该能够解释这句话的总体含义.
59Can you do it?你能做到吗?
60The sentence means that you needed to take your car to be repaired, but if you hadn't这句话意味着你需要坐车去修理 但如果你没有
61needed to do this, you would have needed to stay longer at the meeting or event, or whatever要做到这一点,你需要 停留更长的时间 在会议或活动,或任何东西
62you're talking about.你说的是。
63What about our last sentence?我们的最后一句呢?
64All the medicine he had had had little effect.他所有的药都没什么作用
65This one is a little different.这个有点不一样
66Can you see what's happening here?你能看到这是怎么回事吗?
67Two of the hads are auxiliary verbs, and two are main verbs.有两种是辅助动词,两种是主动词.
68This sentence is talking about some time in the past, and it says that all of the medicine这个句子讲的是过去一段时间,上面说所有的药
69he had taken before that time hadn't worked.在那之前他已经服用了 没有工作。
70The sentence uses two meanings of have.句用有二义.
71Have medicine, meaning to take medicine, and have an effect, which is a fixed collocation,有药,有药的意思, 并有效果, 这是固定的同乡,
72like have a result or have an influence.就像有结果或者有影响
73This sentence looks very confusing when it's written down, but in speech it hopefully sounds这个句子写下来时看起来很困惑, 但说话时希望听起来
74more logical.更合乎逻辑。
75Let's try once more.我们再试一次
76All the medicine he had had had little effect.他所有的药都没什么作用
77The two auxiliary verbs are pronounced weakly, meaning that the H sound either partly or两个辅助动词的发音很弱,表示H部分或
78completely disappears, and the vowel sound is reduced to a schwa.完全消失,元音音被简化为schwa.
79The main verbs have the full pronunciation, with the H and a full vowel sound, had.主动词有完整的发音,有H和完整的元音,有.
80Also, this sentence is very grammatically simple.另外,这句话在语法上非常简单.
81There's a subject, all the medicine he had had, a verb, had had, and a complement, little有个主题,他所有的药, 一个动词,一个有,和一个补充,一点点
82effect.效应。
83You can hear that there's a short pause between the subject and the verb.可以听到主题和动词之间有一个短暂的停顿.
84This helps to make all of the hads clear to your listener.这有助于让你的听众明白所有的事情
85This is an important point, especially for your listening.这一点很重要,特别是对于你的倾听。
86Have as an auxiliary verb needs to be reduced and pronounced weakly in most cases, while作为辅助动词,在大多数情况下需要减少和弱化,而
87have in main verbs keeps its full pronunciation.在主动词中保持其完整的发音.
88And if you're thinking, pronounced weakly, what's he talking about?如果你在想,轻轻地说,他在说什么?
89Learn about weak forms.学习弱形.
90There's at least one video on our channel which will explain it to you, and it's a我们的频道里至少有一个视频 可以解释给你听,它是一个
91really useful pronunciation topic to study.真正有用的发音话题 研究。
92OK, let's move on and look at our next group of sentences.好吧,让我们继续看 下一组句子。
93Let's read the sentences together.共念诸句.
94The party was almost over at around 10.30.晚会几乎在10点30分左右结束.
95The cat jumped out from behind the sofa.猫从沙发后面跳出来
96She gets in in the morning.她早上就进来了
97Before we look at these, we want to ask you a question.在我们看这些之前 我们想问你个问题
98What do prepositions do?预设会做什么?
99Prepositions can do many things.预设能作种种事.
100They can be used to express time, like it starts at eight o'clock.它们可以用来表达时间,比如从8点开始.
101They can be used to express where something is.它们可以用来表达东西的位置.
102For example, it's in the cupboard on the bottom shelf.例如,它位于底架上的橱柜中.
103They can express motion, as in she walked towards the lake.他们可以表达运动, 就像她走向湖边。
104Prepositions can be used in combination with nouns, verbs or adjectives.预语可以与名词,动词或形容词结合使用.
105They can also be used in phrasal verbs, like get up.它们也可以用在词组动词中,比如起来.
106Finally, prepositions can also function as adjectives in some cases.最后,前置也可以在某些情况下作为形容词发挥作用.
107For example, the preposition over can be used to mean finished.例如,前置位置可以用来表示已完成.
108Like you saw with the different meanings of have, when you combine all of these different就像你所看到的 不同的含义, 当你把这些不同的
109ways to use prepositions in one sentence, you can get some strange-looking results.在一个句子中使用前置位置的方法,可以得到一些怪异的外观效果.
110Let's look at our first sentence.观初句.
111The party was almost over at around 10.30.晚会几乎在10点30分左右结束.
112This sentence contains three prepositions altogether.此句共包含三个前言.
113What are they all doing?他们都在干什么?
114The first over technically isn't a preposition.技术上的第一个不是预设
115It's an adjective which describes the noun party, and it means finished.这是一种形容词,描述名词党,意思是完成.
116Then you have two prepositions describing when the party finished, at around 10.30.然后,你有两个预告 描述当党 结束,大约10:
117The second sentence is similar.第二句相类.
118The word out is technically an adverb.这个词在技术上是一个副词。
119It adds information to the verb jumped.它增加了动词跳动的信息.
120Then, you have two prepositions in a row.那么,你连续有两个预选
121Let's look.让我们看看。
122The cat jumped out from behind the sofa.猫从沙发后面跳出来
123Can you explain what the prepositions are doing here?你能解释一下这些预言在这里干什么吗?
124Out, which remember is an adverb, goes with the verb jump.出,记作副词,随动词跳.
125The cat jumped out, meaning that the cat wasn't visible before it jumped.猫跳出,表示猫跳出前没有露面.
126Then, the two prepositions describe the movement and position of the cat.然后,两个前置位置描述了猫的动作和位置.
127They tell you where the cat was before it jumped out.他们告诉你猫跳出来之前在哪
128It was behind the sofa.在沙发后面
129Overall, the sentence means that the cat was hidden behind the sofa, and then it jumped总的来说,句子的意思是猫藏在沙发后面,然后就跳了起来
130out and you saw it.出来,你看到了它。
131Finally, let's look at our last sentence, which is possibly the most confusing.最后,让我们看看我们的最后一句, 这可能是最混乱的。
132She gets in in the morning.她早上就进来了
133Can you see what's happening here?你能看到这是怎么回事吗?
134Although it looks strange to have the word in twice in a row, it's both logical and虽然连续两次使用这个词看起来很奇怪,但是这既符合逻辑,又符合逻辑
135quite common in English.英语很常见
136Like the other sentences in this section, one of the ins isn't actually a preposition.与本节其他句子一样,其中之一其实不是预设.
137The first in is an adverb, and it's part of the phrasal verb get in, meaning to arrive.第一种是副词,它是词性动词的一部分得到的,意思是到达.
138Then, the second in is a preposition of time.那么,第二个是时间的预设。
139It tells you when she arrives.它告诉你,当她到达。
140So, the meaning of this sentence is she arrives in the morning.所以,这句的意义是 她早上到达。
141There's something which connects all the sentences you've seen.有一些东西可以连接所有你看到的句子.
142These sentences can be confusing because the same word in English can do many different这些句子可能让人困惑,因为英语中的同一个词可以做许多不同的
143jobs.任务。
144For example, have can be a main verb or an auxiliary verb.例如,已经可以是主动词或辅助动词.
145In can be an adverb or a preposition.里面可以是副词,也可以是预设词.
146If you understand parts of speech and how these sentences are constructed, you'll如果你理解部分 语音和这些句子是如何构建的,你会
147see that all of these sentences follow the rules, even if they look weird.看到这些句子都遵循规则,即使看起来很奇怪.
148Next, let's look at our last group of sentences.接下来,让我们看看我们的最后一组句子。
149Let's read the sentences together.共念诸句.
150That said, that article that I read argues that that interpretation is incorrect.尽管如此,我读的那篇文章认为,这种解释是不正确的。
151If it's like that, then that's it.若如是则即是.
152There are their bags over there.那里有他们的包
153Again, these sentences are confusing because the same word, like that or their, can do同样,这些句子令人困惑,因为同一个词,像那样,或者他们可以
154more than one job.不止一项工作。
155Also, in one sentence, you have to deal with homophones, words which have the same pronunciation另外,在一句话中,你必须处理同声词,这些词具有相同的发音
156but a different meaning.但意义不同
157Let's start with a question.先问.
158What does that mean?这是什么意思?
159How many ways can you think of to use that?你能想出多少方法来使用它?
160First, that can be used as a determiner, like this or these.首先,这可以用来作为决定者,像这样或这样.
161You can use that to point to one thing which is distant from you.你可以用它来指 一件事是远离你。
162You can use that as a conjunction.你可以用它来配合。
163For example, she told me that I had a nice voice.例如,她告诉我,我有一个好的声音。
164That can be a relative pronoun, similar to who or which.这可以是相对代词,类似于谁或谁.
165Finally, that is used in many fixed phrases, like that's it, which means that something最后,这在许多固定的短语中使用, 就像它,这意味着什么
166is finished.结束。
167With this information, can you understand what's going on in our sentences?有了这个信息,你能理解 我们的句子是怎么回事吗?
168If not, don't worry—we'll look together.如果不行,别担心 我们会一起看的
169Look at the first sentence.观初句.
170That said, that article that I read argues that that interpretation is incorrect.尽管如此,我读的那篇文章认为,这种解释是不正确的。
171First, you have that said, which is a linking phrase.首先,你已经说过了,这是一个连接短语。
172That said introduces a contrasting idea.也就是说,这提出了一种相反的想法。
173It's similar to words like however, although it's more colloquial.不过,它与类似词类似,尽管它更具有口语性.
174The second that goes with the word article.第二随文句.
175It means that you referred to this article before.这意味着你以前提到过这篇文章.
176The third that is a relative pronoun.第三是相对代词.
177It has the same meaning as which, and you could also use which in this sentence without你也可以用这句
178changing the meaning.改变意义。
179Then, the fourth that is a conjunction, which goes with the verb argue.然后,第四个是结合,它与动词争论。
180It's not necessary—you could leave it out of the sentence, and it would still be没有必要 - 你可以把它从判决中删去,它仍然会
181correct.没错
182Finally, the fifth that specifies the word interpretation.最后,第五个具体指明了单词解释.
183Like that article, this means that you've mentioned this before, and now you're referring和那篇文章一样 这说明你以前提到过 现在又提到
184back to it.继续说
185For this sentence, pronunciation is also very important if you're reading it aloud.对于这个句子,发音如果大声读出来也是非常重要的.
186That, used as a relative pronoun or conjunction, is often pronounced weakly.用作相对代词或连结语,往往被弱化地宣告出来。
187That.那个
188When you use that as a determiner, or in phrases like that said, it has its full pronunciation—that.当你用它来做一个决定者,或者用这样的短语, 它有它的全部发音,即。
189Listen and try to hear the difference.听且试闻差别.
190That said, that article that I read argues that that interpretation is incorrect.尽管如此,我读的那篇文章认为,这种解释是不正确的。
191Using the weak and strong pronunciations correctly helps your listener to understand the grammatical使用弱而强的读音可以正确帮助你的听众理解语法
192structure of the sentence.句子的结构。
193What about our second sentence?我们的第二句呢?
194Let's read it together.共诵此经.
195If it's like that, then that's it.若如是则即是.
196This sentence is hard to understand, not only because of the different uses of that, but这个句子很难理解, 不仅因为有不同的用途,
197because it has no context.因为它没有背景。
198First, let's try to understand the end of the sentence.初,试解句末.
199That's it.就这样
200Have you seen this phrase before?你以前见过这句话吗?
201Do you know what it means?你知道这意味着什么吗?
202That's it means something is finished.意思是有些事结束了
203For example, imagine you're ordering some food in a cafe.比如说,想象一下你在咖啡馆里点食物
204You order some sandwiches, some muffins, some coffee, and so on.你点三明治、松饼、咖啡等等
205The server asks you, would you like anything else?服务器问你,你还需要什么吗?
206You answer, no, no thanks, that's it, meaning you've finished your order.你回答,不,不,谢谢,就这样,意味着你完成了你的命令.
207The first that in this sentence refers to something which has been mentioned before,第一句话提到以前提到过的东西,
208but without context, there's no way to know what it means.但是没有上下文,就没有办法知道它的意思.
209Let's try to give the sentence some context.让我们试着给这句话一些上下文。
210Imagine you have a car, and your car breaks down.想象一下你有车,你的车坏了。
211You have to take it to the garage to have it repaired.你必须把它带到车库去修理
212They call you and tell you that the car needs a new engine, and that the new engine will他们打电话给你 告诉你这辆车需要一个新的引擎 新的引擎会
213cost more than the car is worth.价格比车还贵
214What would you do in this situation?在这种情况下你会怎么做?
215Would you pay for the new engine?你会付新引擎的费用吗?
216Probably not.也许不是。
217You might say, if it's like that, then that's it, meaning that if the situation你可能会说,如果是这样, 那么这就是它, 这意味着如果情况
218is like this, then your car is junk, and there's no point trying to repair it.像这样,那么你的车是垃圾, 没有任何意义试图修复它。
219So this sentence is probably quite pessimistic.因此这句话可能相当悲观.
220It's the kind of thing you might say to admit defeat.你可能会说这种话来承认失败
221You're saying if that's the way things are, then there's no point trying anymore.你是说如果事情是这样的话 那就没必要再尝试了
222What about our last sentence?我们的最后一句呢?
223This one is slightly different.这个有点不同
224Where are their bags?他们的行李呢?
225Over there.那边
226There are two points to think about here.这里有两点需要考虑。
227First, there has more than one meaning.第一,有不止一种含义。
228There can be used to say that something exists, as in, there's a snake in the toilet.可以用来表示存在的东西,如在厕所里有一条蛇.
229There can also refer to a place which is distant from you.也可以指远离你的地方.
230Secondly, words can have the same pronunciation but different spellings and different meanings,第二,词可以有相同的发音,但不同的拼写和不同的含义,
231像他们的,T -h -e -r -e, 和他们的,T -h -e
232In this sentence, the first there is used to say that something exists.此句中,第一种是用来表示存在的东西.
233The second there is used to refer to a place.第二有用指一处.
234Over there means a place which you can see, but which is not close to you.在那里,你可以看到的地方, 但它并不接近你。
235Their bags explains who the bags belong to.他们的包可以解释这些包是谁的
236So, this sentence could be an answer to the question, where are their bags?所以,这句话可能是对问题的答案,他们的包在哪里?
237They've lost their bags, and someone wants to know where they are.他们的行李丢了 有人想知道他们在哪里
238You see them somewhere, so you answer, there are their bags, and then you point to the你看见他们的地方, 所以你回答,有他们的包, 然后你指向
239bags as you say, over there.你说的包,那边
240What about you?你怎么样?
241Can you think of any examples of weird sentences which you find really confusing?你能想到你觉得很困惑的奇怪句子吗?
242Let us know in the comments!在评论中告诉我们!
243Thanks for watching!谢谢你的观看!
244See you next time!下次见!
该视频共有字幕 244 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P37 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p37 36. 36. English Grammar 36.How to Use Do in English - 5 Levels of English Gramma (P37)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Martin.嗨,我是马丁。
0:03Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
0:06In this lesson, you can learn all about how to use the verb do.在这个课中,你可以学习所有如何使用动词的方法.
0:12Do you want to see more free English lessons?你想看更多的免费英语课程吗?
0:15You should visit our website, Oxford Online English dot com.你应该访问我们的网站, 牛津在线英语点com。
0:20You can also book English classes with our professional teachers, who can help you with你也可以和我们的专业老师订英语课, 他们可以帮助你
0:25your English speaking, writing, IELTS preparation, or whatever else you need.您的英语,写作,IELTS准备, 或者其他你需要的。
0:32One more thing!还有一件事!
0:33Do you want to watch this video with subtitles?你想用字幕观看这段视频吗?
0:36You can!你们可以!
展开字幕全文（220 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Martin.嗨,我是马丁。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
3In this lesson, you can learn all about how to use the verb do.在这个课中,你可以学习所有如何使用动词的方法.
4Do you want to see more free English lessons?你想看更多的免费英语课程吗?
5You should visit our website, Oxford Online English dot com.你应该访问我们的网站, 牛津在线英语点com。
6You can also book English classes with our professional teachers, who can help you with你也可以和我们的专业老师订英语课, 他们可以帮助你
7your English speaking, writing, IELTS preparation, or whatever else you need.您的英语,写作,IELTS准备, 或者其他你需要的。
8One more thing!还有一件事!
9Do you want to watch this video with subtitles?你想用字幕观看这段视频吗?
10You can!你们可以!
11Turn them on now by clicking the CC button in the bottom right.通过点击右下方的 CC 按钮打开
12This is a five-levels lesson.此是五等经.
13That means you'll see five sections.即见五节.
14Each section will give you a challenge.每节都会给你一个挑战。
15Each section is more difficult than the previous ones.每节比前节更难.
16The early sections will focus mostly on grammar.早期的章节将主要侧重于语法.
17Higher levels will test your grammar and vocabulary skills.更高层次将测试您的语法和词汇技能.
18Level one is beginner, so if you're not a beginner, you should skip to level two.一级是初学者,所以如果你不是初学者,你应该跳到二级.
19Ready?准备好了吗?
20Let's go!我们走!
21Look at five sentences.观五句.
22Complete each sentence with one word.以一个字完成每一句.
23Each word is a form of the verb do.每个词都是动词的一种形式.
24Contractions, like don't, count as one word.收缩,像不,算一个字。
25Pause the video and do it now.暂停录像,现在就做
26Ready?准备好了吗?
27Here are the answers.以下是答案。
28What do you need to know here?你在这里需要知道什么?
29Use do to make negatives and questions in the present simple and the past simple.使用来使当前和过去的负面和问题变得简单。
30For example, take a positive sentence.譬如说正句.
31I like bananas.我喜欢香蕉
32Make a negative.做一个负数。
33I don't like bananas.我不喜欢香蕉
34Make a question.问曰.
35Do you like bananas?你喜欢香蕉吗?
36If you're talking in the third person, he, she or it, use does and doesn't.如果你在第三人称中说话,他,她或者它,使用是和不是.
37Take a positive sentence.举正句.
38She likes bananas.她喜欢香蕉。
39Make a negative.做一个负数。
40She doesn't like bananas.她不喜欢香蕉
41Make a question.问曰.
42Does she like bananas?她喜欢香蕉吗?
43In the past simple, use didn't to make negatives and did to make questions.过去简单,用不着做负面的,也的确做问题.
44Take a positive sentence.举正句.
45They arrived early.他们早到了。
46Make a negative.做一个负数。
47They didn't arrive early.他们没早到
48Make a question.问曰.
49Did they arrive early?他们早到了吗?
50There's one exception.只有一个例外
51Don't use do, don't, did or didn't with the verb be, or with modal verbs like can.别用动词,别用,有用或没有用动词,或用模式动词如罐.
52Verbs like be and can make their own negatives and questions without using do.动词类似,可以自己做负面和提问而不使用做.
53Clear?明白吗?
54If not, you can review this section again.如果没有,你可以再次审查本节。
55If you think it's difficult, you should study the present simple and past simple verb如果你认为这很困难,你应该研究现在的简单和过去的简单动词
56tenses.紧张
57Focus on how to form negative sentences and questions.注重如何形成负面句子和问题.
58If everything's OK, then let's move on to level two.如果一切都好,那我们继续到第二层
59Here's your challenge for level two.这是你的挑战 二级。
60Your job is to put the words in order to make a question.你的工作是把话说出来 问个问题
61That's important.这很重要
62You need to make a question, not a sentence.你需要提出一个问题,而不是句子。
63Pause the video and think about your answers now.暂停录像,想想你的答案
64Ready?准备好了吗?
65Let's look.让我们看看。
66What does the first question, what do you do, mean?第一个问题是什么意思?
67It means, what's your job?这意味着,你的工作是什么?
68It's common in spoken English.常见于口语英语.
69In level one, you saw that you used do to make questions in the present and past simple.在第一级,你看到 你曾经做 提出问题 在现在和过去简单。
70There are different kinds of questions you can make, but there's another point here.你可以提出不同种类的问题, 但这里还有另一个问题。
71Do can be two things.作能为二事.
72It can be a main verb, which has a real meaning.它可以是主动词,具有真实的意义.
73It can also be an auxiliary verb, which you use to make negatives and questions.也可以是辅助动词,用来做负面和提问.
74It can also do both things in the same sentence.亦能于同句中作两事.
75All these questions use do twice, once as a main verb and once as an auxiliary verb.所有这些问题都使用两次,一次作为主动词,一次作为辅助动词.
76This is extremely common in English.这在英语中极为常见.
77Anyway, let's look at some different ways you can use do to make questions.总之,让我们看看 你可以用不同的方式 来提问。
78You can make yes-no questions, which start with the word do, does, and so on.你可以提出"是-否"的问题,从这个词做起,做,等等.
79For example, see question three.例如,见第三问题。
80You can make questions with a question word, like what, where, who, and so on.你可以用一个提问词来提问 比如说,在哪里,是谁,等等
81See question one for an example.例如,见问题一。
82You can also make questions with a question tag, like numbers two and five.也可以使用问号标签提问,如数字2和5.
83This can have several different meanings.这可以有几种不同的含义.
84You can use a tag question to check something, when you think you know the answer already.你可以用一个标签问题来检查什么, 当你认为你已经知道答案。
85You can also use it to show surprise or interest.您也可以使用它来显示惊喜或兴趣.
86Here's a question.问曰.
87In number two, the question tag is negative, don't you?第二,问题标签是否定的,不是吗?
88But in number five, the tag is positive, do you?但是在第五,标记是肯定的,你呢?
89Do you know why?你知道为什么吗?
90If you want to check information, meaning that you want to ask a question, but you think如果你想检查信息, 这意味着你想问一个问题, 但你认为
91you know the answer already, then the question tag should be the opposite of the main verb.问题标记应该与主动词相反。
92That means if the main verb is positive, the tag should be negative, and if the main这意味着如果主动词是正的,标记应该是负的,如果主动词是正的.
93verb is negative, the tag should be positive.动词为负数,标记应为正数.
94So, you do yoga, don't you?所以,你做瑜伽,不是吗?
95Means that I think you do yoga, and I'm asking to confirm my idea.意思是,我认为你做瑜伽, 而我要求确认我的想法。
96Use a positive sentence plus a positive question tag to show interest.使用正句加正题标记以显示兴趣.
97You do taekwondo, do you?你做跆拳道,是吗?
98Looks like a question, but it isn't really a question.看起来像一个问题,但它不是真的一个问题。
99It shows politeness and interest in the person you're talking to.它表现出了礼貌和对你说话的人的兴趣.
100This form is common when making small talk.这种形式在小谈时很常见.
101You can also make negative questions, starting with don't, doesn't or didn't.也可以提出负面的问题,从不,不或没有开始.
102You use these to express surprise or frustration.你用这些来表达惊讶或沮丧
103Question four is an example of this.问四即是例.
104Like number five, this isn't a real question.就像第五,这不是一个真正的问题。
105You use it to express an emotion.你用它来表达情感
106When you use negative questions, intonation is important.当使用负面问题时,内化很重要.
107Didn't you do the dishes?你没洗碗吗?
108Let's move on to level three.进三层.
109This time, we'll do something a little different.这次,我们做点不同的事
110Each of these five sentences contains a mistake.此五句各含一误.
111Your job is to find the mistake and correct it.你的工作是找出错误并纠正它。
112Pause the video and do it now.暂停录像,现在就做
113Think carefully about your answers.仔细想想你的答案
114Do you need to add a word, remove a word, or change a word?您需要添加一个单词,删除一个单词,还是修改一个单词?
115Here are the answers.以下是答案。
116Sentence one is an indirect question.第一句话是一个间接问题。
117An indirect question starts with a polite phrase, like can you tell me, or do you know?一个间接的问题从一个礼貌的短语开始, 就像你能告诉我,还是你知道?
118You use indirect questions when you want to sound more polite.你用间接问题来表达礼貌
119Indirect questions don't use do, does, and so on as an auxiliary verb.间接问题不使用 do, do,等等作为辅助动词.
120This is a common mistake.这是一个常见的错误。
121In question two, you need to use does as an auxiliary verb to refer to another verb, like,在问题2中,你需要作为一个辅助动词来指另一个动词,比如,
122which you used earlier.你之前用过这个
123In most cases, the auxiliary verb you need depends on the verb tense, not on the original在大多数情况下,你需要的辅助动词取决于动词的时态,而不是原动词.
124verb.动词.
125The exception is verbs like be, can, and so on, which can be their own auxiliary verbs.例外是动词像,可以,等等,这些动词可以是他们自己的辅助动词.
126Here, the verb like is present simple, so it uses the auxiliary verb do, does.在这里,像动词是现在的简单,所以它使用辅助动词做,做.
127In number three, you have a verb ask, which needs to be followed by an infinitive with第三,你有一个动词问, 它需要后面一个无限
128to.改为。
129Here, the infinitive is negative.在这里,无限是负的.
130You make negative infinitives by adding not.你通过不添加来做负面的无限。
131We don't use don't, doesn't, or any other form of do.我们不使用,不使用,或任何其他形式的行为。
132In number four, you need to know something about how to use do and make.第四,你需要知道 如何使用和制造。
133This is more of a vocabulary point.这更是一个词汇点。
134In many cases, you need to remember whether a word like progress goes with do or make.在很多情况下,你需要记住,像进步这样的词是能够做到的还是能够做到的。
135Number five is also a vocabulary point.第五号也是一个词汇点.
136There are many fixed phrases with do, like do someone a favour.有很多固定的句子与做, 像某人的帮助。
137After do, you need a person, do me a favour, do you a favour, and so on.之后,你需要一个人,帮我一个忙,帮你一个忙等等.
138So, to review, the topics covered in level three are indirect questions, do as an auxiliary因此,回顾一下,第三级涵盖的议题是间接问题,做一个辅助问题
139verb, negative infinitives, do versus make, and fixed phrases with do.动词,阴性无限,做对做,和固定的短语用做.
140Where were you stronger or weaker?你是强还是弱?
141Think about what you know, and what you need to focus on to improve.想想你所知道的, 以及你需要专注于改进。
142Anyway, time for level four!无论如何,第四层的时间到了!
143Here are your sentences for level four.这是第四级的句子
144You need to complete each sentence with two words.须以二句结此句.
145One word is a form of do.一个词是一种行为形式。
146Remember, you must use exactly two words.记住,你必须用两个字
147Let's see the answers!让我们看看答案!
148So, what do you need to know here?所以,你需要在这里知道什么?
149In level three, you saw that there are negative infinitive forms.在第三层,你看到有 负面的无限形式。
150There are also negative ing forms.也有负面的ing形式.
151Like negative infinitives, you just add not to make the sentence negative.和负无限一样,你只是添加不要使句子负.
152You can see this in sentence one.你可以看到这一点在第一句。
153Number two is a participle clause.第二条是部分条款。
154The meaning is similar to because I hadn't done anything similar before.其含义与我之前没有做过类似的事情相似.
155What about three?三个呢?
156Can you explain what's going on there?你能解释一下这是怎么回事吗?
157Remember that do can be both an auxiliary verb and a main verb, and it can also do both记住,这样做既可以是辅助动词,也可以是主动词,它也可以同时做到
158things in one sentence.一句话里的东西。
159Auxiliary verbs can be used to add emphasis.辅助动词可以用来增加强调.
160For example, if you want to contradict what someone else says, here, did is an auxiliary例如,如果你想反驳别人说的话, 这里,做一个辅助
161verb which adds emphasis, and do is a main verb.增加强调的动词,而做是一个主动词.
162So, if someone asked you, why didn't you do it?所以,如果有人问你, 你为什么不这样做?
163You might answer them like this.你可以这样回答他们
164I did do it.我确实做到了。
165I just forgot to send it to you.我只是忘了寄给你。
166You use the auxiliary verb did to add emphasis and contradict the other person.你用辅助动词来增加强调,与另一个人相矛盾.
167Four and five are vocabulary points.四五是词汇点.
168Do your best is a fixed phrase, meaning try as hard as you can.尽你所能是一个固定的短语,意思是尽量尝试.
169For example, you could say we did our best, but we didn't have four of our best players,比如,你可以说我们尽力了 但我们没有四个最好的球员
170so it's not surprising we lost three-nil.因此,这并不奇怪,我们失去了三零。
171Do with is a conversational way to say want.做是一个对话的方式 说想要。
172I could do with a long holiday means I really want a long holiday right now.我可以做一个漫长的假期 意味着我现在真的想要一个漫长的假期。
173Remember, you can review any section of this video as many times as you need.记住,你可以审查这段视频的任何部分,只要你需要多少次。
174Here's a tip.这里有一个提示。
175A big difficulty with do is that it has so many different uses.一个很大的困难是它有这么多不同的用途。
176It can be a main verb, an auxiliary verb, or it can be used in fixed phrases and phrasal它可以是主动词,辅助动词,也可以用于固定的短语和词组中.
177verbs.动词.
178So, when you see do in a sentence, ask yourself which thing it is.所以,当你看到在句子中做, 问自己它是什么东西。
179Is it a main verb, an auxiliary verb, or part of a longer phrase?它是主动词,辅助动词,还是更长短语的一部分?
180Getting this clear will help you to understand how to use do more accurately.搞清楚这一点有助于你了解如何更准确地使用。
181Now, are you ready for level five?现在,你准备好第五层了吗?
182Let's try!让我们试试!
183Ready for the hardest challenge?准备好迎接最艰难的挑战了吗?
184Here are five of the hardest sentences we could make.这里有五个最难的句子
185Your job is to complete them with one or two words.你的工作是用一个或两个字来完成它们.
186One of the words must be a form of do.其一言必为作形.
187Contractions like don't count as one word.收缩像不算一个字
188Could you do it?你能做到吗?
189Let's see the answers.让我们来看看答案。
190Most of the sentences here test vocabulary points.这里的大多数句子测试词汇点.
191For example, take sentence one.举一句为例.
192In conversational English, do can have the meaning of be enough, but not very good.在对话英语中,确实可以有足够的意义,但并不很好.
193If you say it'll do, you mean that it's not great, but it's enough for you.如果你说它会做,你的意思是它不是伟大的,但是它足够你。
194Sentence two tests a grammar point.句子两个测试一个语法点.
195Hopefully, you know already that you can use do as an auxiliary verb to refer back to a希望,你已经知道 你可以做一个辅助动词
196verb or verb phrase you used earlier.动词或动词短语,您之前使用。
197If you didn't use do here, you would have to repeat the full phrase, his chances of如果你不在这里用,你必须重复 完整的短语,他的机会
198working for the EU, which would be repetitive.为欧盟工作,将重复。
199However, here you also need an ing verb.然而,你在这里还需要一个动词。
200When you want to use do as an auxiliary verb to replace an earlier verb, and you want to当您想用一个辅助动词来代替较早的动词时,您想要
201use an ing form, or two plus infinitive, you should use do so.使用ing形式,或者两个加无限,你应该使用.
202Do so is formal.这样做是正式的。
203In spoken or informal English, you'd probably say do it, or do that.在口语或非正式英语中,你可能会说做,或者做.
204Three, four and five all test your vocabulary.三、四、五都测试你的词汇
205In three, get it done is a conversational way to say finish something.三,完成它是一种谈话方式 说完成一些事情。
206In number four, doing well for themselves means that they're making a lot of money,第四,为自己好意味着他们赚了很多钱
207so they have a comfortable lifestyle.所以他们有一个舒适的生活方式。
208In sentence five, it hasn't done me much good, is a semi-fixed phrase.在第五句中,它对我没有多大好处,是一个半固定的短语.
209If you want to make the phrase positive, say it's done me a lot of good.如果你想让这句话变得正面,就说它对我做了很多好事.
210Of course, you can also use this to talk about other people.当然,你也可以用这个来谈论别人.
211For example, she looks so much happier these days.比如说,她现在看起来很开心
212Switching to part-time work seems to have done her a lot of good.换做兼职似乎对她很有帮助.
213So, how did you do?你怎么样?
214Which topics did you find the hardest?你发现哪一个话题最难?
215We think level five is the hardest, because it tests a lot of fixed and conversational我们认为第五层是最难的,因为它测试了很多固定和对话
216phrases.短语。
217Do you agree?你同意吗?
218Please share your thoughts in the comments.请在评论中阐述你的想法。
219That's all for now.仅此而已
220See you next time!下次见!
该视频共有字幕 220 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P38 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p38 37. 37. English Grammar 37.Using Conditional Sentences in English - 5 Levels of (P38)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Stephanie.嗨,我是史蒂芬妮。
0:03Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
0:05In this lesson, you can learn about conditional sentences.在此课中,可以学习有条件的句子.
0:09Conditional sentences are sentences with the word if.有条件的句子是带有单词的句子如果.
0:13You can use conditional sentences to talk about many different situations.您可以使用有条件的句子来谈论许多不同的情况.
0:18There are also sentences which don't use the word if, but which follow similar rules.也有一些句子不使用单词如果,但遵循类似的规则.
0:24By the way, do you want English subtitles while watching this video?对了,看这段视频时,你想要英文字幕吗?
0:28Click the CC button in the bottom-right corner of the screen to turn on English subtitles点击屏幕右下角的 CC 按钮打开英文字幕
0:33if you need them.如果你需要的话
0:35This is a five-levels lesson.此是五等经.
展开字幕全文（224 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Stephanie.嗨,我是史蒂芬妮。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
3In this lesson, you can learn about conditional sentences.在此课中,可以学习有条件的句子.
4Conditional sentences are sentences with the word if.有条件的句子是带有单词的句子如果.
5You can use conditional sentences to talk about many different situations.您可以使用有条件的句子来谈论许多不同的情况.
6There are also sentences which don't use the word if, but which follow similar rules.也有一些句子不使用单词如果,但遵循类似的规则.
7By the way, do you want English subtitles while watching this video?对了,看这段视频时,你想要英文字幕吗?
8Click the CC button in the bottom-right corner of the screen to turn on English subtitles点击屏幕右下角的 CC 按钮打开英文字幕
9if you need them.如果你需要的话
10This is a five-levels lesson.此是五等经.
11That means you'll see five sections.即见五节.
12Each section, you get a challenge.每个区,你都会遇到挑战
13Each section is more difficult than the previous one.每节比上节更难.
14If you're a more advanced English speaker, you should probably skip to level two.如果你是更先进的英语演讲者,你也许应该跳到二级.
15Ready?准备好了吗?
16Let's go!我们走!
17Look at the five sentences.观五句.
18Your job is to put the verb in brackets into the correct form.您的工作是将动词置于括号中,以正确的形式排列.
19Pause the video and do it now.暂停录像,现在就做
20Ready?准备好了吗?
21Here are the answers.以下是答案。
22So, what do you need to know here?所以,你需要在这里知道什么?
23These sentences are called first conditionals.这些句子被称为第一条件句.
24They talk about things which could happen in the future.他们谈论将来可能发生的事情。
25All conditional sentences have two parts.所有有条件的刑期有两部分.
26They have an if clause, and they have a result clause.他们有一个条款,他们有一个结果条款。
27You need to know three basic things to make first conditional sentences.你要知道三个基本问题 才能做出第一个有条件的句子
28One, after if, use a present tense.一个人,如果,使用当前时态。
29Here, you use the present simple.在这里,你使用现在的简单。
30Other present tenses are sometimes possible, but you can almost always use the present其他的时态有时是可能的, 但你几乎可以总是使用现在
31simple.很简单
32Even though you're talking about the future, you generally can't use a future form after虽然你说的是未来 你一般不能用未来的形式
33if.狦
34You use a present verb tense to talk about the future.你用现在的动词来谈论未来.
35Two, in the result clause, meaning the other part of the sentence, use a future form.二,在结果条款中,指句子的另一部分,使用未来形式.
36You can use different future forms, like will, going to, or the present continuous.你可以使用不同的未来形式,比如意志,去,或者现在的连续.
37Three, you can change the order of the clauses.三,可以改变条款的顺序.
38You can put the if clause at the start of the sentence, or you can start with the result您可以在句首加上条款, 或者从结果开始
39clause, and the if clause goes afterwards.条款,如果条款在之后。
40With these three points, you can make first conditional sentences to talk about things有了这三点,你就可以做第一个有条件的句子来谈事情
41which might happen in the future.未来可能会发生
42However, there are many other kinds of conditional sentences.然而,还有许多其他类型的有条件判决。
43Let's move on to level two.进二层.
44Look at your sentences for level two.看看你的第二关句子
45Here, you have a different task.在这里,你有一个不同的任务。
46Some of these sentences are correct, but some are not.其中一些句子是正确的,但有些句子并非如此。
47Your job is to find the mistakes and correct them.你的工作就是找出错误并改正错误.
48Pause the video and think about it.暂停录像,想想看
49Take as much time as you need.需要多少时间都行
50Could you do it?你能做到吗?
51Let's look together.让我们一起看看。
52Sentences one and two are correct.一二句对.
53These are called zero conditionals.这些被称为零条件.
54A zero conditional uses the present simple in both halves of the sentence.一个零条件在句子的两半中都使用现在的简单.
55Use zero conditionals to talk about things which are generally true.用零条件来谈论一般真实的东西.
56Sentence three is incorrect, but four is correct.第3句不正确,但第4句正确。
57Can you explain why?你能解释为什么吗?
58Unless means if not.除非没有
59You can't use a negative verb after unless, because you can't have two negatives together你不能使用阴性动词 之后,除非, 因为你不能有两个阴性在一起
60in English.英文。
61So, sentence three should be unless you have further questions.因此,第三句应该是除非你还有其他问题。
62Let's move on to the next point.复次说下.
63Finally, sentence five is also incorrect.最后,第5句也是不正确的。
64There are many words which behave similarly to if.有许多字句行为类似
65Until is one such word.直到一个这样的词。
66Others include as soon as, when, in case and unless.其他情况包括:何时、何时、情况如何。
67Like with if, you can't generally use a future form after these words.就像如果,你一般不能使用这些词之后的未来形式.
68Instead, you use a present verb, usually the present simple, to refer to the future.相反,你使用现在的动词,通常是现在的简单,来指未来.
69So, sentence five should be I can't do any work until my computer is fixed.所以,第5句应该是我不能做任何工作 直到我的计算机修好。
70Did you get everything right?你一切都对吗?
71If so, great!如果是这样,太好了!
72If not, don't worry.如果没有,不用担心。
73Remember that you can always review a section if you need to.记住,如果需要,你可以随时检讨一节。
74Here are your sentences.这是你的句子。
75This time, you have to put both verbs into the correct form.这一次,你必须把两个动词都放入正确的形式.
76Here's a tip.这里有一个提示。
77Not all the sentences follow the same pattern.并不是所有的句子都遵循同样的模式.
78Think carefully.仔细想想
79For one verb, there are two possible answers.对于一个动词,有两种可能的答案.
80Pause the videos and make your answer now.暂停录像,现在就回答
81Done?说完了吗?
82Take a look.看看这个。
83How did you do?你好吗?
84Did you get them all right?你把它们都弄好了吗?
85If not, what do you need to study?如果没有,你需要学习什么?
86These sentences are all second and third conditionals.这些判决都是第二和第三个条件。
87Second and third conditionals are unreal conditionals.第二和第三个条件都是不真实的条件.
88That means you use them to talk about imaginary situations – situations that didn't really这意味着你用他们来谈论 想象中的情况 - 情况不是真的
89happen or won't happen.发生或不会发生。
90For example, look at sentence two.譬如观二句.
91If I were president, I'd send everyone a cake on their birthday.如果我是总统,我会给每个人送蛋糕 在他们的生日。
92But I'm not president, and I'm not going to be.但我不是总统,我也不会
93It's an unreal, imaginary situation, so no cake for you.这是一个不真实的,想象中的情况, 所以没有蛋糕给你。
94You use second conditionals to talk about unreal situations in the present or future.您使用第二个条件来谈论当前或未来的不真实情况 。
95You use third conditionals to talk about unreal situations in the past.你用第三个条件来谈论过去不真实的情况。
96Look at the five sentences again.又观五句.
97Which ones are second conditionals, and which are third conditionals?哪些是第二个条件,哪些是第三个条件?
98One, two and four are second conditionals.一,二,四是第二个条件.
99They refer to the present or future.它们指的是现在或未来。
100Three and five refer to the past, so they're third conditionals.三五是指过去,所以是第三个条件.
101If you find this difficult, start by reviewing second conditional sentences.如果您觉得这很困难, 请从第二个条件句开始 。
102Also, study the difference between real and unreal conditionals.另外,研究真假条件的区别.
103Many languages don't make a difference between real and unreal situations, like English does.许多语言并没有像英语那样区分真实和不真实的情况.
104If your language doesn't do this, then you'll need to pay extra attention to these如果你的语言不这样做, 那你需要多注意这些
105unreal sentences when you're speaking English.说英语时不真实的句子.
106When you feel that you understand second conditionals well, then learn and practise third conditionals.当你觉得你很清楚第二个条件时, 然后学习并实践第三个条件。
107So, is that it?是这样吗?
108Have we seen all the possible types of conditional sentences?我们见过所有可能的有条件判决吗?
109Not quite yet.还不行
110In level four, let's do something a little different.在第四层,我们做点不同的
111Look at the sentences to begin.观诸句初.
112You have two jobs here.你在这里有两个工作。
113One, are both verb forms possible?一,两种动词形式都有可能吗?
114If not, which one is right?如果没有,哪一个是正确的?
115Two, if both are possible, is there any difference in meaning?二,如果两者都有可能,在意义上是否有区别?
116If so, what?如果是的话,什么?
117Pause the video now.暂停录像
118You know what to do.你知道该怎么做。
119OK, before we look at the answers, here's a clue.好吧,在我们看答案之前,有一个线索。
120There's only one sentence where both verb forms are possible.只有一句话可以同时使用动词形式.
121If that's news to you, then feel free to pause and take more time to think about it.如果这是消息给你,那请随意暂停,多花点时间考虑.
122Ready now?准备好了吗?
123Let's check!让我们检查一下!
124Like in level three, all these sentences are unreal conditionals.和三级一样,这些句子都是不真实的条件.
125They're talking about things which didn't happen or won't happen in reality.他们谈论的是现实中没有发生或不会发生的事情。
126But, these are mixed conditionals.但是,这些是混合条件。
127That means the one part of the sentence is about the present or future, and the other这意味着句子的其中一部分是关于现在或未来的,而另一部分则是:
128part is about the past.这部分是关于过去的。
129For example, in sentence two, the first clause, which is here the result clause, is about例如,在第二句中,第一个条款,即结果条款,涉及
130the present, and the if clause is about the past.如果条款与过去有关
131In sentence three, the result clause is about the future, and the if clause is about the在第三句中,结果条款涉及未来,如果条款涉及未来。
132past.过去
133In sentence one, both forms are possible.在第一句中,这两种形式都是可能的。
134Sentence one can also be a third conditional, referring to the past.第1句也可以是第三个条件,指过去.
135However, it can also be a mixed conditional, with the if clause referring to the present但是,它也可以是一个混合条件,如果条款提到现在
136and the result clause referring to the past.以及提及过去的结果条款。
137Here's the question you probably want an answer to.你可能想要一个答案
138What's the difference between using the two forms in sentence one?在第一句中使用两种形式有什么区别?
139Can you explain it?你能解释一下吗?
140If you use wasn't, and say if she wasn't so shy, then you're referring to the present.如果你没有使用,并说 如果她不是那么害羞, 那么你指的是现在。
141This suggests that she's generally shy.这说明她很害羞
142This is a part of her personality.这是她人格的一部分
143If you say if she hadn't been so shy, then you're referring to the past.如果你说她没有这么害羞 那你指的是过去
144This suggests that she was shy during her stay here, but maybe she's not shy all the这说明她在这期间很害羞 但也许她并不害羞
145time.时间。
146This is a small difference, but it is a difference nonetheless.这是一种小的区别,但还是不同。
147Another question.另一个问题。
148How do you know there's only one possibility for sentences two to five?你怎么知道只有一种可能 判决2到5?
149It's because all these sentences contain a time marker.这是因为所有这些句子都包含一个时间标记.
150For example, sentences two and four include the word now, so they must be about the present.例如,第二句和第四句现在包括这个词,所以它们必须是关于现在的.
151Sentences three and five contain time markers which clearly refer to the past.第三句和第五句包含明确提及过去的时间标记。
152So, what should you do if you find this difficult?那么,如果你觉得很困难,你应该怎么做?
153First, review second and third conditionals, and how to form them.一,审查第二和第三个条件,如何形成条件.
154If you have difficulties with the formation of second or third conditional sentences,如果在第二或第三有条件判决的形成方面有困难,
155then you'll struggle with mixed conditionals, too.那你也会和混血儿争吵
156Then, try to make some mixed conditional sentences about your life.然后,尝试做一些混合 有条件的句子 关于你的人生。
157Think of things you did or didn't do in the past, which could have made a difference in想想你过去做过或没有做过的事 这可能会有所改变
158your life now.你现在的生活。
159Or, think about your personality traits, and how your past might have been different if或者,想想你的个性特征, 和你的过去可能有什么不同,如果
160you had a different personality.你有一个不同的人格。
161If you want extra practice, add examples in the comments.如果要额外练习,请在注释中添加示例。
162OK, there's one more section.好,还有一节
163Are you ready for the toughest challenge?你准备好迎接最艰难的挑战了吗?
164Look at your level five sentences.看看你的等级五句。
165Your job is to complete each sentence with one word.你的工作就是用一个字来完成每一句.
166There's only one answer that makes sense, except for number five, where there are at只有一个答案是有意义的, 除了第五,那里有
167least two possible answers.至少两个可能的答案。
168Pause the video and find your answers.暂停录像 找到答案
169Could you do it?你能做到吗?
170These sentences test some extremely specific grammar knowledge.这些句子测试了一些极其具体的语法知识.
171Let's see the answers.让我们来看看答案。
172So, can you explain what's happening here?你能解释一下这里发生什么了吗?
173Some of these sentences might look strange or wrong, but they're all correct.其中一些句子可能看起来奇怪或错误,但它们都是正确的.
174By the way, in sentence five, would is, we think, the most likely answer, but will and顺便说一句,在第五句中,我们认为,最有可能的答案是,但是,
175could are also possible.也可以这样
176In sentence one, using the present perfect instead of the present simple means that the在第一句中,使用目前的完美而不是目前的简单意味着
177person has already taken their English exam, but doesn't know the results yet.人已经参加过英语考试了 但还不知道成绩
178Usually, in first conditional sentences, you might be able to use other present tenses,通常,在第一个有条件的句子, 你可能可以使用其他的当前时态,
179but you could always use the present simple.但你总是可以使用现在的简单。
180However, there's one case where you must use the present perfect.然而,有一个案例 你必须使用现在的完美。
181If you're talking about the future consequences of something which happened in the past, you如果你是在说过去发生的事情 未来的后果
182need the present perfect after if.之后需要完美的礼物
183In this case, the event – the exam – is in the past, but the consequences, meaning在这种情况下,事件——考试——已经过去,但后果,意思是
184the results, are in the future.未来的结果。
185Sentence two is a more formal or literary style.第二句是比较正式或文学的风格.
186The more common pattern would be if you had told us sooner.更常见的规律是,如果你早点告诉我们。
187You can use this formal style if the first verb after if is had, should or were.如果后面的第一个动词有、应该或曾经有,则可以使用这种形式样式。
188To form the sentence, you do two things.要形成句子,你做两件事。
189One, you omit if.一,你省略。
190Two, you move the auxiliary verb – had, should or were – before the subject.二,移动辅助动词 — — 已经,应该或已经 — — 在主体之前.
191It's never necessary to use this pattern.没必要用这种模式
192You can always use a regular conditional with if instead.您可以使用常规条件 。
193What about sentence three?第三句怎么样?
194In second conditional sentences, if the verb after if describes an action, you can add在第二个条件句中,如果在描述动作后动词可以添加
195were to before the verb.在动词之前。
196This emphasises that the situation is very distant or unlikely.这强调局势非常遥远或不可能。
197When you use this, you're saying, I really don't think this will happen.当你使用这个,你说, 我真的不认为会发生。
198In this case, the interviewer is probably not very positive about this candidate.在这种情况下,面试者对这个候选人可能不是很积极.
199Again, you never need to use this structure.再说一遍 你再也不用用用这个结构了
200You could make a regular second conditional.你可以做一个常规的第二个条件。
201If we decided to hire you…如果我们决定雇用你...
202In sentence four, what do you think is happening?第四句,你认为会发生什么?
203You might be thinking, you can't use will after if in a conditional sentence.你可能会在想, 如果在有条件的句子里,你不能使用意志。
204That's generally true, but this sentence isn't really a conditional.这一般是真实的,但这句话其实并不是有条件的.
205If here does not express a condition.如果这里没有表达一个条件。
206It's a similar meaning to in case.其意与万一相似.
207You can understand the sentence as, you can take it because it might help you.你可以理解这句话 因为它可能会帮助你
208So, the regular rules about first conditionals don't apply here, and you can, and should,所以,关于第一条件的常规规则 不适用在这里, 你可以,并且应该,
209use will after if.如果使用后会使用。
210Sentence five might also look weird to some of you.第5句对有些人来说也很奇怪
211Can you explain it?你能解释一下吗?
212Why is there only one part?为什么只有一部分?
213Don't conditionals need to have two parts?条件不需要两个部分?
214Like with number four, this isn't a conditional.和第四一样,这不是一个条件。
215It's a formal way of making a request.具足正法请.
216The meaning is equivalent to, would you please follow me?意思是,请跟我来
217Because it isn't a conditional, it doesn't need a result clause.因为它不是有条件的,不需要结果条款.
218You can just use an if clause by itself.你可以只用条款本身。
219Remember that this is a formal style, and you're not likely to hear it or use it often.记住这是一种形式主义的风格,你不太可能听到或经常使用.
220Now, we have one final question for you.现在我们还有最后一个问题要问你
221What topic from this lesson would you like to learn more about?你想从这个课上学到什么?
222Please let us know in the comments.请在评论中告诉我们。
223Thanks for watching!谢谢你的观看!
224See you next time!下次见!
该视频共有字幕 224 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P39 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p39 38. 38. English Grammar 38.How to Use the Present Perfect Simple and Present Per (P39)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Kasia.嗨,我是卡西亚。
0:03Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
0:05In this lesson, you can learn about the present perfect simple and present perfect continuous在这一课中,你可以学习到 现今的完美 简单和现今的完美 连续
0:11verb forms.动词形式.
0:12What's the difference between I have done and I have been doing?我所作所为与所作所为有何差别.
0:18When should you use the present perfect continuous?你什么时候用现在的完美连续?
0:20You'll see the answers to these questions in this lesson.你会从这个课中看到这些问题的答案.
0:25Before we start, do you find it difficult to listen to English for long periods?在我们开始之前,你觉得很难听英语长时间?
0:31No problem!没问题!
0:32Use the English subtitles to help yourself understand.使用英文字幕帮助自己理解.
展开字幕全文（265 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Kasia.嗨,我是卡西亚。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
3In this lesson, you can learn about the present perfect simple and present perfect continuous在这一课中,你可以学习到 现今的完美 简单和现今的完美 连续
4verb forms.动词形式.
5What's the difference between I have done and I have been doing?我所作所为与所作所为有何差别.
6When should you use the present perfect continuous?你什么时候用现在的完美连续?
7You'll see the answers to these questions in this lesson.你会从这个课中看到这些问题的答案.
8Before we start, do you find it difficult to listen to English for long periods?在我们开始之前,你觉得很难听英语长时间?
9No problem!没问题!
10Use the English subtitles to help yourself understand.使用英文字幕帮助自己理解.
11Turn them on now.现在打开
12Just click on the CC button in the bottom right of your video player, or if you're点击您视频播放器右下方的 CC 按钮即可, 或者如果你是
13watching on a smartphone, tap the settings button.在智能手机上观看,点击设置按钮。
14But now, let's start with the basic point.但现在,让我们从基本点开始。
15What is the present perfect continuous verb tense?什么是目前完美的连续动词时态?
16Hey, sorry I'm late.抱歉我迟到了
17Where have you been?你去哪了? 来
18I've been trying to call you all morning!我整个早上都在找你!
19Have you been waiting long?你等了很久了吗?
20No, not so long.不,不会太久的。
21I just didn't know where you were.我只是不知道你在哪里,我还不知道你在哪里。
22I've been preparing for this lesson for the last few hours.这几小时我一直在为这个课做准备
23I just lost track of time.我刚失去时间
24So, let's start!所以,让我们开始!
25Look at the three sentences you heard in the dialogue.看看你在对话中听到的三句
26Do you know how to complete them?你知道怎么完成吗?
27Look at the full sentences.看满句.
28These all use the same verb form, the present perfect continuous.这些都使用了相同的动词形式,即现在的完美连续.
29Some questions.有些问题
30One.一个
31How do you make positive and negative sentences and questions?如何作正反句与问.
32Two.两个
33What does the verb form mean?动词形式是什么意思?
34We'll spend the rest of this lesson answering question two, but let's look at the first接下来的课我们用完 回答问题二,但让我们看看第一个
35question now.现在的问题。
36Form the present perfect continuous with three things.形成目前完美的连续 与三件事。
37Firstly, have or has.首先,曾经或曾经有过。
38Then add been.那就加一点
39Then add an ing verb.然后增加一个ing动词.
40Let's try it now.现在试试看
41Look at three sentences.观三句.
42Can you make them using the present perfect continuous?你能用现在的完美连续进行吗?
43Pause the video and say the sentences out loud, using the present perfect continuous暂停录像 大声说句子 用现在的完美连续
44verb form.动词形式.
45Could you do it?你能做到吗?
46Let's check the answers.让我们检查答案。
47Did you get them right?你弄对了吗?
48Next, to make a negative, just add not after have or has.接下来,做一个否定的,只是加不 之后有或有。
49For example, I have been working all morning.例如,我整个上午都在工作。
50I have not been working all morning.我整个早上都没工作过
51She has been waiting there for hours.她在那里等了几个小时
52She has not been waiting there for hours.她在那里等了几个小时。
53Actually, we're emphasising the word not so you can hear it, but in natural speech,实际上,我们强调这个词 不是让你可以听到它, 但在自然的演讲,
54you should use contractions like haven't or hasn't.你应该使用收缩 像没有或者没有。
55I haven't been working all morning.我整个早上都没工作过
56She hasn't been waiting there for hours.她已经等了好几个小时了
57What about the last sentence?后一句如何. 师曰.
58Can you make it negative?你能做负面的吗?
59Make the negative form and say it out loud.作阴形而大声说.
60Use a contraction.用收缩法.
61The answer is it hasn't been raining.答案是没下雨
62Did you get it?你拿到了吗?
63Finally, make questions in the present perfect continuous by moving has or have before the最后,通过移动使问题在目前完美无缺的状态下连续不断。
64subject.主题。
65For example, has she been waiting there for hours?例如,她在那里等了几个小时吗?
66Has it been raining?下雨了吗?
67These rules will help you to form the present perfect continuous verb tense, but how do这些规则会帮助你形成目前完美的连续动词时态,但如何
68you use it?你用它吗?
69What does it mean?这是什么意思?
70Let's start to answer that question.让我们开始回答这个问题。
71How long have you been doing this?你这样做多久了?
72This?这个?
73You mean making this video?你是说录影带?
74I mean teaching.我是说教书
75How long have you been teaching?你教书多久了?
76Ooh, for over ten years now.哦,已经超过十年了
77Should we take a break?我们该休息一下吗?
78We've been working for hours.我们工作了好几个小时
79Sure.当然
80Want to get a donut or something from the bakery?想从面包店买个甜甜圈吗?
81Hmm, better not.嗯,最好别。
82I've been trying to cut down on how much sugar I eat.我一直在试图削减 多少糖我吃。
83Well, how about a coffee instead?来杯咖啡怎么样?
84Good idea.不错
85Look at four examples of the present perfect continuous which you heard.看看你听到的目前完美连续的四个例子。
86Can you see what connects them?你能看到他们之间有什么联系吗?
87In all four sentences, you're talking about something which started in the past and continues在四句里,你说的都是过去开始的
88in the present.在现在。
89This can be a continuous action, something which started before now and continued without这可能是一个持续的行动,它开始于现在,并且继续下去,没有
90a break until now.直到现在为止
91For example, if you say, we've been working for hours, you mean that we started working比如说,如果你说,我们工作了好几个小时, 你是说我们开始工作了。
92several hours ago, and we've continued working from then until now.几个小时前,我们一直工作 从那时到现在。
93You can also use the present perfect continuous for repeated or regular actions.也可以使用当前完美的连续进行重复或常规动作.
94For example, if I say, I've been teaching for over ten years now, I mean that this is比如,如果我说,我已经教了10多年, 我的意思是,这是
95something I've been doing regularly, starting over ten years ago and continuing now.我经常做一些事,从10多年前开始,现在继续。
96So, to use the present perfect continuous in this way, three things need to be true.因此,为了以这种方式使用现在的完美连续,需要三件事是真实的.
97One, the action must have started in the past.第一,行动必须是过去开始的。
98Two, the action must be something continuous or repeated regularly.第二,行动必须是连续或经常重复的。
99Three, you must be still doing this thing now, in the present.三,你现在一定还在做这个工作
100Let's practice.让我们练习。
101Look at three questions.观三问.
102Pause the video, and try to answer the questions using the present perfect continuous.暂停视频,尝试用当前完美的连续回答问题.
103Say your answers out loud.大声回答
104If it's difficult, repeat your answers until you can pronounce them fluently.如果有困难,请重复回答,直到你能够流利地发音.
105Try it now.试试看
106How did you do it?你怎么做到的? 怎样做到的?
107Was it easy or difficult?是容易还是困难?
108Of course, there are many possibilities, but let's look at three sample answers.当然,有很多可能性,但让我们看看三个样本答案.
109For question one, you could say, I've been cleaning my room and doing a little bit of首先,你可以说, 我一直在清理我的房间 做一点点
110English study.英语研究.
111For question two, you could say, I've been watching a show called Dark on Netflix.第二题,你可以说,我一直在看一个节目 叫做"黑暗在Netflix"。
112For question three, you could say, so far this week, I've mostly been hanging out at第三个问题,你可以说,到目前为止, 这周,我大多 挂出在
113home and reading.家读书.
114I have a good book I want to finish.我有本好书想写完
115This is the most basic way to use the present perfect continuous, but there's another important这是使用当前完美连续的最基本的方法,但还有另一个重要
116use of this verb tense.使用此动词时态 。
117Let's look now.让我们看看现在。
118What happened to your hands?你的手发生了什么事?
119They're filthy!他们肮脏!
120I've been working on my bike.我在修自行车
121Well, go and wash them.去洗个澡
122I don't want you getting everything dirty.我不想你把一切都弄脏了
123Why are you in such a bad mood?你为什么心情这么不好?
124I've been working on my website.我在我的网站工作
125Not going well?情况不妙?
126No.没有
127Look at the first two lines from the dialogue.看看对话的前两行。
128A question.问曰.
129Is she working on her bike now?她现在在修自行车吗?
130The answer is no, so why use the present perfect continuous here?答案是否定的,所以为什么用现在的完美连续?
131The action has finished.行动已经结束。
132It's in the past.于过去世.
133Shouldn't we use a past tense verb?我们不该用过去紧张的动词吗?
134We use the present perfect continuous here for a continuous action which finished recently我们利用目前完美的连续 持续的行动,最近结束了
135and which has visible results now.现在已经取得了明显的成果。
136Or, more simply, use the present perfect continuous to explain why things look the way they look或者更简单的说,用现在的完美连续 来解释为什么事情看起来是这样
137now.现在
138For example,举例来说,
139Why are you so sweaty?你为什么这么出汗?
140I've been jogging.我在慢跑 慢跑 慢跑 慢跑
141Why is the kitchen in such a mess?为什么厨房这么乱?
142I've been cooking all afternoon.我整个下午都在做饭
143You look tired.你看起来很累
144Yeah, I've been working too much this week.是啊,我这个星期工作太多了。
145Okay, now you know the two basic ways to use the present perfect continuous.好了,现在你知道两个基本的方法 使用目前完美的连续。
146Next, another important question.接下来是另一个重要问题。
147How do you know when to use the present perfect continuous, and when to use the simple form?你怎么知道什么时候使用现在的完美连续,什么时候使用简单的形式?
148Did you hear?你听到了吗?
149Jen's getting married!珍要结婚了!
150Really?真的吗?
151That's good news, I guess.我想这是个好消息
152I guess.应该是吧
153Well, how long have they been together?他们在一起多久了?
154I saw her three months ago, and she didn't say anything about being in a relationship.我三个月前见过她 她没说恋爱
155I think they've been going out for a couple of months.我想他们已经出去几个月了
156That's not long.时间不长
157Maybe not, but I think they've known each other for longer.也许不是,但我想他们认识很久了
158Anyway, she seems really happy.无论如何,她看起来真的很开心。
159She's so excited about the wedding.她对婚礼很兴奋
160She's been talking about it non-stop for weeks.她已经说了好几星期了
161I bet.我敢打赌。
162Let's look at two sentences you heard.让我们看看你听到的两句。
163These are describing similar situations, so why use different verb forms?这些描述类似的情况,所以为什么使用不同的动词形式?
164The verb in the first sentence, go out, is an action.第一句中的动词,走出去,是一种动作.
165But, in the second sentence, the verb know describes a state, not an action.但是,在第二句中,动词会描述一种状态,而不是动作.
166What does this mean?这是什么意思?
167Knowing someone is a state.知某甲为州.
168It's not something you do.这不是你做的事情。
169If you know someone, then you know them.如果你认识一个人 那你就认识他们
170You know them today, and you'll know them tomorrow, too.今天你认识他们 明天你也会认识他们
171State verbs include be, like, understand or seem.国家动词包括类似、理解或似乎。
172Many verbs which relate to feelings or mental states are state verbs.许多与感情或精神状态相关的动词都是状态动词.
173State verbs aren't generally used in continuous forms.国家动词一般不以连续形式使用.
174If you're using a state verb like be, you should use the present perfect simple tense,如果你在使用一个状态动词 像,你应该使用 完美的简单时态,
175not the continuous.不是连续
176Let's test this quickly.我们快测试一下
177Look at two more sentences from the dialogue.再看两句对话.
178Do these verbs refer to states or actions?这些动词是指国家还是行动?
179Should they be present perfect simple or continuous?它们是完全简单还是连续的?
180Try to remember or work out the answers.试着记住或找出答案。
181Pause the video if you need more time to think.如果你需要更多的时间思考,请暂停录像.
182Let's check.让我们检查一下。
183Be is a state verb, so it should be present perfect simple.Be是一个状态动词,所以它应该非常简单。
184Talk is an action.谈话是一种行动。
185It's something you do, so it should be present perfect continuous here.这是你做的事,所以它应该是 完美的连续在这里。
186There's one exception to this rule.这个规则有一个例外.
187Want is a state verb, but you can use it in the present perfect continuous.想要是一个状态动词, 但你可以使用它 在目前完美的连续。
188For example, I've been wanting to see this film for ages.比如说,我一直想看这部电影
189Actually, I've been wanting to talk to you about this for some time.其实,我一直想 和你谈谈这个一段时间。
190You could also use the simple form here.您也可以使用简单的表格。
191I've wanted.и稱璶
192It doesn't matter which you use.你用什么无关紧要
193In this section, you've learned a basic way to tell the difference between the simple在这一节中,你学到了一种基本的方法,来分辨简单的区别
194and continuous present perfect forms.和连续的完美形式。
195In our final section, you'll see one more important difference between these two verb在我们最后的一节中,你会看到这两个动词之间还有一个重要的区别
196tenses.紧张
197Haven't you started cooking yet?你还没开始做饭吗?
198Everyone will be here in less than an hour.每个人都会在这里不到一个小时。
199I have started.我已经开始了
200I mean, I've chopped all the vegetables.我的意思是,我已经砍了所有的蔬菜。
201But the stew will take at least two hours to cook.但炖肉至少需要两个小时做饭.
202There's no way it will be ready in time.不可能及时准备好的
203Well, you could have helped me.你本可以帮我的
204I've been doing everything myself, and it's a lot of work.吾自作一切功德无量.
205Yeah, you know what else is a lot of work?是啊,你知道还有什么是 很多工作?
206Cleaning the whole house.清净一切众生.
207I've been vacuuming, mopping, dusting.我一直在吸尘 扫尘 擦尘
208I've cleaned both bathrooms.我打扫了两个浴室
209I haven't just been sitting around all day.我没有整天坐着
210OK, well, have you finished?好了,好了,你完成了吗?
211Can you give me a hand now?你能帮我一把吗?
212Sure, I'm free now.当然 我现在有空
213What needs doing?有什么需要做的吗?
214Actually, you know what?其实,你知道吗?
215We've run out of milk.我们没有牛奶了
216Could you pop out and get some?你能出来拿点吗?
217Yeah, OK.是啊,还好。
218Look at a sentence you heard.看看你听到的一句话
219Let's add another one.再来一个
220These are both possible, but they have slightly different meanings.这些都有可能,但它们的含义略有不同。
221Can you explain the difference?你能解释一下区别吗?
222The first sentence, with the present perfect simple, focuses on the result of the action.第一句用现在的完美简单,专注于动作的结果.
223Using this simple form shows that you have finished this, and there is a result.使用这个简单的形式可以显示您已经完成了这个过程,并且有一个结果.
224In this case, the vegetables are chopped and ready to go in the stew.在这种情况下,蔬菜被切碎,准备进入炖肉。
225The second sentence, with the present perfect continuous, focuses on the process.第二句以目前完美的连续进行为主线,专注于过程.
226If you say, I've been chopping the vegetables, there's no clear result.如果你说,我一直在切蔬菜, 没有明显的结果。
227Using the continuous form simply shows that you've spent time on this thing,使用连续的形式 仅仅表明 你花了时间在这件事情上,
228and you're probably not finished.你可能还没完
229Let's practice this point.让我们练习这一点。
230Look at four sentences.观四句.
231Here's a task for you.这是给你的任务
232In these sentences, can you use the present perfect simple, or the continuous, or both?在这些句子中,你能使用现在的完美简单,还是连续,或者两者兼而有之?
233If both are possible, is the meaning the same or different?如果两者都有可能,意思是相同还是不同?
234Pause the video and think about your ideas.暂停录像 想想你的想法
235Take your time.慢慢来
236Start again when you're ready.准备好了再开始
237OK, let's look together.好吧,让我们一起看看。
238In number one, only the simple form is possible.第一,只有简单的形式是可能的。
239This is because there's a number you've called five times, which shows a clear result.这是因为你打了五次电话,结果很明显。
240In sentence two, both are possible, but the continuous is more likely.在第二句中,两者都是可能的,但连续性的可能性更大.
241There's no difference in meaning.义无分别.
242This is because you still haven't arrived, so there's no result.这是因为你还没到 所以没有结果
243Probably, you want to focus on the process, meaning how much time you've spent driving.也许,你想专注于过程, 这意味着你花了多少时间开车。
244In sentence three, both are possible, with little difference in meaning.在第三句中,两者都是可能的,在意义上几乎没有区别.
245This is because you can focus on the result – you've finished watching many documentaries – or这是因为你可以专注于结果——你已经看完许多纪录片了——或者
246you can focus on the process – you've spent time watching nature documentaries.你可以专注于这个过程 —— 你已经花时间看大自然的纪录片。
247Confusing?困惑吗?
248Don't worry about it.别着急
249Here, the basic meaning is the same, whichever form you use.在这里,基本含义是一样的,无论用什么形式.
250In sentence four, both are possible, but here the meaning would be different.在第四句中,两者都是可能的,但这里的含义是不同的。
251If you say, I've made a soup for lunch, then you've finished cooking, and the soup is ready to如果你说,我做了一个汤 午餐,然后你完成了烹饪,汤准备好了
252eat.吃饭
253If you use the continuous form, then you probably haven't finished.如果你使用连续形式,那么你可能还没有完成.
254I've spent some time cooking, but there's probably no result, meaning no soup.我做了些时间,但可能没有结果,意味着没有汤.
255Maybe you're thinking, why probably?也许你在想,为什么可能?
256It's a good question.善问.
257It's because the sentence just doesn't contain that information.是因为这句话没有包含这个信息
258If you say, I've been making soup for lunch, there's no information about whether you've如果你说,我一直在做汤吃午饭, 没有关于你有没有
259finished or not.完成与否。
260But, if you had finished, you'd almost certainly use the present perfect simple.但是,如果你完成了, 你几乎肯定会使用现在的完美简单。
261I've made a soup.我煮了汤
262So, using the continuous strongly suggests that you haven't finished.所以,用连续的强烈暗示你还没有完成。
263That's all.就这样
264Thanks for watching.谢谢你的观看。
265See you next time!下次见!
该视频共有字幕 265 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P40 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p40 39. 39. English Grammar 39.Adjectives and Adverbs in English - 5 Levels of Diffi (P40)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Liam.嗨,我是利亚姆。
0:03Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
0:06In this lesson, you can learn about using adjectives and adverbs in English.在这个课中,可以学习使用形容词和副词的英语.
0:11You'll see how to use different types of adjectives or adverbs in an English sentence.在英语句子中你会看到如何使用不同类型的形容词或副词.
0:17请访问我们的网站Oxford Online English dot com。
0:22You can also book English classes with our fully qualified teachers, who can help you你可以和我们完全合格的老师订英语课 谁可以帮你
0:26with your English speaking, writing, IELTS preparation, or whatever else you need.用你的英语,写作,IELTS准备, 或任何你需要的。
0:33This is a five-levels lesson.此是五等经.
0:35That means you'll see five sections.即见五节.
0:37Each section will give you a challenge.每节都会给你一个挑战。
展开字幕全文（224 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Liam.嗨,我是利亚姆。
2Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
3In this lesson, you can learn about using adjectives and adverbs in English.在这个课中,可以学习使用形容词和副词的英语.
4You'll see how to use different types of adjectives or adverbs in an English sentence.在英语句子中你会看到如何使用不同类型的形容词或副词.
5请访问我们的网站Oxford Online English dot com。
6You can also book English classes with our fully qualified teachers, who can help you你可以和我们完全合格的老师订英语课 谁可以帮你
7with your English speaking, writing, IELTS preparation, or whatever else you need.用你的英语,写作,IELTS准备, 或任何你需要的。
8This is a five-levels lesson.此是五等经.
9That means you'll see five sections.即见五节.
10Each section will give you a challenge.每节都会给你一个挑战。
11Each section is more difficult than the previous ones.每节比前节更难.
12Level one is beginner, so if you're not a beginner, you should skip to level two.一级是初学者,所以如果你不是初学者,你应该跳到二级.
13Ready?准备好了吗?
14Let's go!我们走!
15Look at five sentences.观五句.
16Each sentence contains one adjective and one adverb.每句包含一个形容词和一个副词.
17Can you find them?你能找到他们吗?
18Pause the video and find the adjective and the adverb in each sentence.暂停视频,在每个句子中找到形容词和副词.
19Do it now.现在就做
20Ready?准备好了吗?
21Let's check.让我们检查一下。
22Adjectives often come before a noun, as in old town or Italian bakery.形容词经常出现在名词之前,如旧城或意大利面包店.
23Adverbs can also come after a noun, often after a verb like be, as in it was cloudy.形容词也可以在名词之后出现,经常在动词类似之后出现,如在其中云雾般.
24You could also put an adjective after a noun using other linking verbs like get, become也可以在名词之后加上形容词,使用其他连结动词,如得到,成为
25or look.或看着。
26For example, it's getting dark.譬如天渐黑.
27Adjectives only do one thing.形容词只做一件事.
28They describe nouns.他们描述名词。
29An adjective always links to a noun.形容词总是链接到名词.
30Adverbs can be harder to find because they do many different jobs.副词可能更难找到,因为它们做许多不同的工作.
31Many adverbs end in ly, like probably or lightly.许多副词都以ly结尾,如可能或轻而易举.
32However, many adverbs don't, like well or ever.然而,许多副词并不像,好或永远.
33Also, adverbs do many different jobs.另外,副词做许多不同的工作.
34They can describe verbs, adjectives or situations.它们可以描述动词,形容词或情况.
35To use adjectives and adverbs well in English, you should know how to recognise them in a要在英语中很好地使用形容词和副词,你应该知道如何在英语中识别它们。
36sentence.句号。
37If that's clear, then let's move on to level two.如果说得很清楚,那我们继续到第二级
38Here's your challenge for level two.这是你的挑战 二级。
39Here, your job is to put the adjectives and adverbs in the right places.在这里,你的工作是把形容词和副词放在合适的地方.
40You can't add any punctuation.不能加任何标点.
41That means there's only one possible answer for each sentence, except sentence five, where这意味着每个句子只有一个可能的答案, 除了句子5,其中
42there's at least one more possibility.至少还有一次机会
43Pause the video and think about it now.暂停录像 现在考虑一下
44Could you do it?你能做到吗?
45Let's take a look.让我们来看看。
46So, what do you need to know here?所以,你需要在这里知道什么?
47There are rules for word order for both adjectives and adverbs.形容词和副词都有词序的规则.
48The rules for adjectives are simpler, because adjectives always link to a noun.形容词的规则比较简单,因为形容词总是链接到名词.
49As you saw in level one, the adjective either goes before the noun, or after the noun, with正如您在一级看到的,形容词要么在名词之前,要么在名词之后,与
50a linking verb, like be.连结动词,就像。
51Rules for adverbs are more complicated, because different kinds of adverbs need to go in different副词的规则比较复杂,因为不同的副词需要用不同的
52positions.职位。
53Sometimes, an adjective and an adverb can have the same form.有时,形容词和副词可以有相同的形式.
54For example, enough can be an adjective or an adverb.例如,足够的可以是形容词或副词.
55If it's an adjective, it goes before the noun, as in, we don't have enough time.如果是一个形容词,它会在名词之前进行,比如说,我们没有足够的时间.
56If it's an adverb, it goes after the verb or verb phrase.如果是一种副词,则在动词或动词短语之后进行.
57For example, he didn't run fast enough.例如他跑得不够快.
58This is a useful rule for adverb word order.这是副词词序的有用规则.
59If an adverb describes a verb, then it normally goes after the verb or verb phrase.如果副词描述一个动词,则通常在动词或动词短语之后进行.
60You can see this in sentences two and three.可见此二三句.
61If this is confusing for you, you should learn about the different types of adverb, and where如果这令你困惑,你应该了解 不同类型的副词,以及在哪里
62to put them in a sentence.把他们放进句子里
63It's also important that you can tell the difference between adjectives and adverbs.同样重要的是,可以分辨形容词和副词的区别.
64Remember that the same word, like fast or enough, could be an adjective or an adverb记住,同一个词,像快或足够,可以是形容词或副词
65in different sentences.在不同的句子中,
66You can't tell just by looking at the word.光看字眼就看不出来
67You have to look at the whole sentence and understand the meaning.得观一切句义解.
68Now, let's go to level three.现在,让我们进入三级。
69Here are your sentences.这是你的句子。
70Your job is simple.你的工作很简单
71Choose the correct word in each sentence.在每一句中选择正确的单词 。
72Pause the video now and find your answers.暂停录像,找到答案
73Did you do it?是你干的吗?
74Even if it's difficult, spend some time thinking about it.即使困难,也要花点时间去思考.
75Take more time if you need.需要的话多花点时间
76OK, let's see the answers now.好吧,让我们看看答案。
77Did you get the right answers?你得到正确的答案了吗?
78Is anything confusing?有什么问题吗?
79Let么则见.
80First point.第一点。
81Not all adverbs end in ly, and sometimes a word can have two forms, like hard and hardly,并不是所有的副词都以ly结尾,有时一个词可以有两种形式,比如硬的和几乎没有,
82or direct and directly, and both of them are adverbs.或直接和直接,两者都是副词.
83In sentence one, hard and hardly are both adverbs, but they have different meanings.在第一句中,硬性且几乎没有两者都是副词,但它们有不同的含义.
84Do you know what they mean?你知道他们是什么意思吗?
85Hardly means almost never.几乎就是永远
86If you say, she hardly ever raises her voice, you mean that she almost never raises her如果你说,她几乎没有提高 她的声音,你是说,她几乎从来没有提高
87voice.声音
88Hard, as an adverb, means intensely.硬,作为副词,意思是强烈的.
89What about direct and directly?直接和直接怎么样?
90Here it's slightly different.这里稍有不同.
91Both mean that you go somewhere without stopping, but they're used in different contexts.两者都意味着你无所不至地去某处,但是它们被用于不同的场合.
92In most contexts, you say directly.在大多数情况下,你说直接。
93For example, I walked directly over to him and told him to stop.例如,我直接走到他面前,叫他住手。
94But, if you're talking about public transport, then you use direct, without ly.但是,如果你在谈论公共交通, 那你使用直接, 不ly。
95For example, if you take a train from Berlin to Moscow without changing trains, then you例如,如果你坐火车从柏林到莫斯科 不换火车,那么你
96can say you went direct from Berlin to Moscow.可以说你直接从柏林到莫斯科
97In sentence three, is sickly an adjective or an adverb?在第三句中,病态是形容词还是副词?
98It's an adjective.谓之形容.
99Adjectives can also end in ly.形容词也可以以ly结尾.
100Sick and sickly are both adjectives, but they have different meanings.病态和病态都是形容词,但它们有不同的含义.
101Sick means ill, as in I can't come to work today, I feel sick.生病意味着生病,因为今天我不能上班,我感到不舒服。
102Sickly describes someone who is unhealthy and who gets ill easily.病态地描述一个不健康、容易生病的人。
103For example, she was a very sickly child.例如,她是一个非常生病的孩子。
104She seemed to get ill every month.她似乎每个月都会生病。
105In sentence four, late is an adverb, meaning the opposite of early.在第四句中,later是一个副词,意为与早期相反.
106Lately is also an adverb, but it means recently, and it doesn't fit here.最近也是副词,但意思是最近,不适合这里.
107In sentence five, flatly and straight are both adverbs.在第五句中,平和直均是副词.
108What's the point here?这里有什么意义?
109The most important thing is that you can't tell by looking at a word whether it's an最重要的是,你无法通过观察一个字来判断它是否是一个
110adjective or an adverb.形容词或副词.
111Many words can be both.很多词都可以是两个词.
112Adjectives and adverbs can have the same form.形容词和副词可以有相同的形式.
113Sometimes, words which look like they should be related, like hard and hardly, can have有时,那些看起来应该互相关联的词, 像是硬的,几乎不能,
114completely different meanings.完全不同的意义
115Don't focus on the words.别专注言语.
116Focus on the sentences and what they mean.专注句子及义.
117The same word in a different sentence could have a completely different meaning.不同句子中的同一个词可能具有完全不同的含义.
118Ready to move on?准备好了吗?
119Remember, you can always review a level if you need to.记住,如果需要,你可以随时检讨一个关卡.
120So, what's happening here?发生什么事了?
121Can you guess?你能猜到吗?
122Do these sentences look right to you?这些句子看起来对吗?
123They aren't.他们不是。
124Each sentence has one mistake.每句话都有一个错误。
125The mistakes relate to adjective or adverb use.错误涉及形容词或副词的使用.
126Your job is to find the mistakes and correct them.你的工作就是找出错误并改正错误.
127Try to think about why these sentences are wrong.试着想想为什么这些句子是错误的.
128Could you explain the problem?你能解释一下问题吗?
129Anyway, pause the video now and think about your ideas.总之,暂停录像 想想你的想法。
130Take your time.慢慢来
131OK, let's look together.好吧,让我们一起看看。
132In sentence one, amazing is a strong adjective.在第一句中,惊人是一个强烈的形容词.
133You can't use very with a strong adjective.用强的形容词不能非常使用.
134You can use really or absolutely, so you could also say it was an absolutely amazing你可以用真的或绝对的, 所以你也可以说这是一个绝对惊人的
135experience.经验
136Do you know any other strong adjectives?你知道其他强词组吗?
137There are many, but you could say adjectives like freezing, incredible or delighted.有很多,但你可以说形容词 像冻结,不可思议或高兴。
138In sentence two, if you have more than one adjective before a noun, then the adjectives在第二句中,如果在名词之前有一个以上的形容词,那么形容词
139need to go in a specific order.需要按具体顺序进行。
140The most important rule to remember is that adjectives which give an opinion go before最重要的规则是 给人以意见的形容词
141adjectives which describe a fact.形容事实的形容词。
142That's why lovely needs to go before small.这就是为什么可爱需要去 在小之前。
143In sentence three, there's a useful rule which you can use.第三句中有一条有用的规则可以使用.
144If you're deciding where an adverb, like sometimes, can go, and the verb has two parts,如果你决定一个副词, 像有时,可以去, 而动词有两个部分,
145like can be, then the adverb always goes in the middle.就像可以,然后副词总是在中间。
146In sentence four, can you explain the problem?第四句 你能解释一下问题吗?
147Let's change the sentence a little.略改句号.
148This sentence is fine.此句无碍.
149You don't need to add people to make it correct.你不需要增加人来纠正
150Why not?为什么不呢?
151Some adjectives can also be used as nouns.一些形容词也可以用作名词.
152Egyptian can be an adjective or a noun.埃及语可以是形容词或名词.
153Spanish is only an adjective, so it needs a noun after it.西班牙语只是形容词,所以之后需要名词.
154With words for nationalities, words which end in an can be used as adjectives or nouns带有国籍的单词,结尾的单词可以用作形容词或名词
155– German, Russian, Australian, Brazilian, and so on.– 德语,俄语,澳大利亚语,巴西语等.
156There are a few other words which don't fit this pattern, but can also be used as还有几句话不符合这种模式,但也可以用作
157adjectives or nouns, like Greek or Kazakh.形容词或名词,如希腊语或哈萨克语.
158So, you can say, there are many Greeks living in Australia.所以,你可以说,有许多希腊人生活在澳大利亚。
159If you aren't sure whether a word can be used as a noun or not, then just add a noun如果你不确定一个词能否作为名词使用,那么就添加一个名词
160afterwards.之后会的
161You can also say, there are many Greek people living in Australia.也可以说,有许多希腊人生活在澳大利亚.
162It's totally correct.这是完全正确的。
163In sentence five, you have a compound adjective, two-year-old, which is made by combining other在第五句中,你有一个复合形容词,两岁,这是通过结合其他的
164words.词
165Compound adjectives are often made with a number, like a six-hour flight or a $300 ticket.复合形容词常常用数字来制作,如6小时的航班或300美元的机票.
166If you make a compound adjective with a number, don't add s to the other parts of the adjective如果用数字做复合形容词,不要在形容词的其他部分添加 s
167– it's a common mistake.- 这是一个常见的错误。
168Now, let's look at the hardest challenge, level five.现在,让我们看看最严峻的挑战,第五层。
169Level five will test everything you've seen so far.5级会测试你迄今看到的一切.
170Here are your sentences.这是你的句子。
171Only one of these sentences is correct.只有一句话是正确的。
172Four have problems – possibly just one mistake, or maybe more than one.四者有问题 — — 可能只有一个错误,或不止一个。
173Your job is to find the correct sentence and correct the mistakes in the other four.你的工作是找到正确的句子,纠正其他四个错误.
174Pause the video and do your best.暂停录像,尽力而为
175Ready?准备好了吗?
176How did you do?你好吗?
177Which sentence do you think is correct?你觉得哪个句子是对的?
178Sentence two is correct.第二句对
179The other four have problems.余四有烦恼.
180Surprised?惊讶吗?
181Some people might tell you that sentence two is wrong, because you should use an adverb可能有人会告诉你第二句错了 因为你应该用副词
182– I'm doing well.-我表现很好
183However, in colloquial speech, it's common to say I'm doing good.然而,在口头演讲中,常说我做得很好.
184What about the other four?其他四个呢?
185Let's look.让我们看看。
186In sentence one, you should say we went deep into the forest.在第一句中,你应该说 我们深入森林。
187Deep and deeply are both adverbs, but if you're talking about a place, you can only深和深都是副词 但如果你说的是一个地方 你只能
188use deep, meaning far into.用深,意思是远入。
189Deeply describes how you do something.深刻地描述你怎么做事情。
190Here, you're talking about a place, because you're saying where you went, or more specifically,这里,你说的是一个地方, 因为你说的是你去了哪里, 或者更具体地说,
191how far into the forest you went.你走进森林有多远
192In sentence three, you need to say a loan criminal, not alone.在第三句,你需要说一个贷款罪犯,而不是单独。
193Some adjectives change form depending on whether they're used before or after the noun they某些形容词根据名词前后是否使用而改变形式
194describe.说明。
195Loan and alone have the same meaning, but you can only use loan before a noun, and alone贷款和单独有相同的意义, 但你只能在名词之前使用贷款, 单独
196after a noun.名词后.
197In sentence four, rather cannot be used in this way.在第四句中,不能这样使用。
198You could say completely wrong, utterly wrong, totally wrong.你可以说完全错误,完全错误,完全错误。
199There are other possibilities.还有其他的可能性。
200Rather expresses a medium level of something.确切地说是中度的东西。
201For example, if you say it's rather cold, you mean that it's medium cold.例如,如果你说它相当冷,你的意思是它是中度冷.
202However, wrong is ungradable.然而,错误是无法纠正的。
203It's a binary idea.二义智.
204Either something is wrong, or it isn't.要么是错的 要么是错的
205You can't have different levels of wrong.你不能有不同程度的错误。
206Finally, in sentence five, the first problem is with word order and adverb position.最后,在第五句中,第一个问题在于词序和副词位置.
207The second problem is that there's a double negative.第二个问题是出现双重负差.
208Hardly means almost not, so it includes a logical negative.几乎没有,所以它包括逻辑负数。
209You can't use hardly and didn't together.你不能几乎不使用 没有在一起。
210The most likely correct sentence is, unfortunately, they hardly prepared for the presentation,不幸的是,最可能正确的句子是,他们几乎无法准备发言,
211and unsurprisingly, it was an utter disaster.毫不奇怪,这是一场灾难。
212There are other possible positions for the adverbs.副词还有其他可能的位置.
213For example, unsurprisingly, could go at the end of the sentence.例如,毫不奇怪,可能会在句尾出现.
214How did you do?你好吗?
215Using adjectives and adverbs correctly is complex, and there are many things you need正确使用形容词和副词很复杂,需要很多东西
216to think about to use this language to a high level.考虑如何高调使用这种语言。
217If this lesson was hard for you, don't worry.如果这课对你来说很困难,别担心
218In each level, we mention topics which you need to know to understand the sentences and在每一层面,我们都会提到一些你需要知道的问题,以便理解这些句子,以及
219the exercises.练习。
220Choose one or two topics, and work on them.选择一个或两个话题, 并开展工作 。
221Don't try to do everything at once.别一时一切法.
222That's all.就这样
223Thanks for watching!谢谢你的观看!
224See you next time!下次见!
该视频共有字幕 224 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格

P41 · 【40集全】牛津官方语法课 # 外教精讲，最后一次搞定语法，学语法看这个就够了 p41 40. 40. English Grammar 40.Articles in English - 5 Levels of Difficulty (P41)

字幕摘录

时间英文中文
0:00Hi, I'm Molly.嗨,我是莫莉,你好吗?
0:03Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
0:05In this lesson, you can test your ability to use articles a, an and the.在这个课中,你可以测试你使用文章a,a和the的能力.
0:12Here's how this lesson works.这个课是这样的
0:16There are five levels.有五关.
0:18Each level is more difficult than the previous one.每一级都比上一级更困难.
0:23Level one is beginner.一级是初学者。
0:26Levels two to four are intermediate, and level five is high-intermediate to advanced.第二至第四级为中间层,第五级为高中间层至高级层.
0:34If you're not a beginner, start at level two.如果你不是初学者,从二级开始
0:37At each level, you can see what you need to focus on if you have difficulties.在每个关卡上,如果遇到困难,都可以看到你需要专注于什么.
展开字幕全文（225 条）
序号英文中文
1Hi, I'm Molly.嗨,我是莫莉,你好吗?
2Welcome to Oxford Online English!欢迎来到牛津在线英语!
3In this lesson, you can test your ability to use articles a, an and the.在这个课中,你可以测试你使用文章a,a和the的能力.
4Here's how this lesson works.这个课是这样的
5There are five levels.有五关.
6Each level is more difficult than the previous one.每一级都比上一级更困难.
7Level one is beginner.一级是初学者。
8Levels two to four are intermediate, and level five is high-intermediate to advanced.第二至第四级为中间层,第五级为高中间层至高级层.
9If you're not a beginner, start at level two.如果你不是初学者,从二级开始
10At each level, you can see what you need to focus on if you have difficulties.在每个关卡上,如果遇到困难,都可以看到你需要专注于什么.
11Got it?明白了吗?
12Let's start with level one.从一级开始
13Look at five sentences.观五句.
14Each sentence has a gap.每句有间隙.
15You can put a, an, the or nothing in the gap.你可以把一个,一个, 或者什么都没有在缺口。
16Pause the video, and find your answers now.暂停录像,现在找到答案
17Ready?准备好了吗?
18Let's see the answers together.让我们一起看看答案。
19Use a or an after there is, when you're talking about one thing.用一个或一个后面有, 当你谈论一件事。
20Use a or an to say what someone is, for example to say someone's job.用一个或一个来说某人是什么,比如说某人的工作.
21Remember that you can't use a or an with a plural noun.记住,你不能使用一个或一个带有复数名词的名词.
22Use nothing.别用什么
23Don't use a or the to talk about things in general.不要用一个或那个来谈论一般的事情.
24If you say I like strawberries, you mean that you like all strawberries in general.如果你说我喜欢草莓 你是说你喜欢所有的草莓
25Use a or an to mean one of many.使用a或a来表示其中之一.
26This is a common way to use a or an, so it's useful to remember this idea.这是一种常用的方法,使用一个或一个,所以应该记住这个想法.
27Here, there are many possible questions you could ask, but you just want to ask one.这里有很多问题你可以问 但你只想问一个
28Use the when it's obvious which thing you mean.用很明显的你的意思
29You often use the in this way to talk about things around you which you can see and touch.你经常用这种方式 来谈论你周围的东西 你可以看到和触摸。
30There are many windows in the world, but if someone asks you to close the window, you世界上有很多窗户 但如果有人要你关上窗户
31probably know which window they mean.也许知道他们指的是哪个窗口
32Now, let's move on to level two.现在,我们进入二级
33Here are your sentences for level two.这是第二级的句子
34Here, we'll focus on when to use the or not.在这里,我们将专注于何时使用或不使用。
35Some of these sentences are missing the.其中一些判决漏掉了。
36Some are correct.有些是对的。
37Your job is to decide which sentences are incorrect and add the where needed.您的工作是决定哪些句子不正确 并添加需要的地方。
38Pause the video and think about it.暂停录像,想想看
39Could you do it?你能做到吗?
40Take more time if you want.如果你想的话,多花点时间
41OK, let's see the answers.好吧,让我们看看答案。
42In number one, fish is general.以第一义中鱼为总.
43You aren't talking about some specific fish.你不是在说某些特定的鱼
44However, you could say the smoked fish.不过,你可以说 烟熏鱼。
45Do you know when?你知道什么时候吗?
46You could say the smoked fish if you were talking about food from a menu.你可以说烟鱼 如果你在说菜单的食物。
47You often use this when ordering in a restaurant.你经常在餐厅订餐时用这个
48For example, I'll have the salmon, please.比如说,我要沙门
49In this case, it's something specific.在这种情况下,这是具体的事情.
50The smoked fish means the smoked fish which is on your menu and which you serve here.烟熏鱼是指你菜单上的烟熏鱼 你在这里服务。
51Meals – breakfast, lunch and dinner – don't usually have an article.饭——早餐,午餐和晚餐——通常没有文章.
52Use the before a superlative adjective, like tallest, most or best.使用前一个超形容词,如最高,大多数或最好.
53In many phrases, you just have to remember whether to use the or not.在许多短语中,你只需要记住是否使用.
54Why do you say on TV, without the, but on the internet, with the?你为什么在电视上说,没有,但是在互联网上,用?
55There's no real logic to this.这没有真正的逻辑。
56You just need to remember.你只需要记住。
57Try to learn phrases like this as whole chunks, so you don't have to think about whether试着学习这样的短语 整个块, 所以你不必考虑
58to use the or not when you're using them in speech.在说话时是否使用
59If you're talking about people in general, then you don't use the.若论一般人,则不用之.
60For example, most people in the UK live in houses, not apartments.例如,联合王国的大多数人住在房屋里,而不是公寓里。
61But if you're talking about a specific group of people, then you need the.但是,如果你说的是特定的人组, 那你需要的。
62That's why you say, most of the people in my class.所以你才说,我班里大多数人
63You're talking about a specific, limited group of people.你说的是一个特定的,有限的群体。
64When you're talking about transport, you need the.在谈论运输时,你需要的。
65If you use the verb take, take the bus, take the train, take the subway, and so on.若用动词取法,乘公交车,乘火车,乘地铁等.
66However, don't use the after buy.然而,不要使用后购.
67Go by bus, get there by train, travel by subway, and so on.乘公交车,乘火车赶到,乘坐地铁等.
68Finally, you often need to use the with places in a city, like shops, supermarkets, banks,最后,你常常需要使用 与地方在一个城市, 像商店,超市,银行,
69and so on.诸如来.
70Let's think about something.我们想想办法
71Look at two sentences.看两句.
72Both are possible, but what's the difference?两者都是可能的,但有什么区别?
73Sentence number one, with the, means that you know which post office you're going to,第一句 意思是你知道你要去哪个邮局
74and where it is.及其所在之处.
75The second sentence, with a, means that there are many post offices, and maybe you haven't第二句a意味着邮局很多 也许你没有
76decided which one you're going to stop at.决定了你要停哪一个
77When you talk about places in a city, you have a specific place in mind.当你谈论一个城市中的地方, 你有一个特定的地点。
78That's why you often need the.这就是为什么你经常需要那个。
79Got it?明白了吗?
80In the next two sections, you'll see more details about when to use the, and when not在接下来的两节中,你会看到更多关于何时使用以及何时不使用的细节.
81to.改为。
82One of the biggest challenges with using the accurately is different kinds of name.准确使用最大的挑战之一是不同名称。
83There are many rules to remember, and they aren't very consistent.有许多规则需要记住,它们并不十分一致.
84Let's practice this now.让我们现在练习这个。
85Each sentence has two spaces.每句有两处空格.
86The question is, do you need the or not?问题是,你需要还是不需要?
87Pause the video and think about it.暂停录像,想想看
88Ready?准备好了吗?
89Let's check.让我们检查一下。
90Many building names, like cinemas, museums, theatres, and other famous buildings, have许多建筑名称,如电影院,博物馆,剧院,以及其他著名的建筑,都有.
91names with the.与名称。
92The Odeon is a well-known cinema chain.Odeon是著名的电影连锁店.
93Street names don't use the.街名不用那个
94There's a confusing rule with islands.与岛屿有混淆的规则.
95If you're talking about a group of islands, you need the, but for an individual island,如果你说的是一组岛屿, 你需要的,但对于一个单独的岛屿,
96you don't use the.你不使用这个。
97So, you say the Philippines, but Luzon.所以,你说菲律宾,但吕宋。
98You say the Seychelles, but Hawaii, without the.你说塞舌尔,但夏威夷,没有。
99There's something similar with mountains and mountain ranges.与山脉和山脉也有类似之处.
100If you're talking about a mountain range, like the Himalayas, you need the, but for如果你说的是山脉, 像喜马拉雅山脉, 你需要的,但是为了
101a single mountain, like Mount Everest, you don't use the.像珠穆朗玛峰那样的单山,你不用山
102Use the with names of rivers, seas, and oceans.使用河流、海洋和海洋的名称。
103What about lakes?那湖怎么办?
104No the for lakes.没有湖。
105This is the kind of time you might be feeling annoyed with the English language.这时候你可能会对英语感到烦恼。
106Why are there all these rules?为什么有所有这些规则?
107Why don't they make sense?为什么他们不合理呢?
108First, don't worry about these things too much.先别太担心这些事情
109It's good to speak and write accurately, but it's also not the end of the world if说话和写得准确是好的,但如果
110you make a mistake with the in these situations.你犯了一个错误 在这种情况下。
111Second, learning language in chunks can really help here.其次,用拼图来学习语言可以帮助我们。
112If you learn the sentence Luzon is the second-largest island in the Philippines, and you remember如果你学会了句子 吕宋是菲律宾第二大岛 你还记得
113the sentence, you don't have to think about when to use the or not.句子,你不必考虑何时使用或不使用。
114Here's a rule which is useful.这是一条有用的规则。
115If a name has a place as part of the name, it probably won't have the.如果一个名字有一个地方作为名字的一部分,它可能就没有这个名字.
116Stansted is a place, so the name Stansted Airport doesn't have the.斯坦斯特德是一个地方,所以斯坦斯特德机场这个名字没有.
117Like countries, names of counties, states, provinces and so on mostly don't have the.像国家一样,县,州,省等名称大多没有这种名称.
118Essex is a county in the east of England.埃塞克斯(英語:Essex)是英国东部的一个县.
119Then, if you learn in this way, you have many examples in your head of when to use the or那么,如果你以这种方式学习, 在你的脑中有很多例子 什么时候使用,或者
120not.没有
121This can build your instinct for what's correct, which makes it easier to decide when to use这可以建立你的本能 对于什么是正确的, 这使得更容易 决定何时使用
122the or not in new sentences.不管有没有在新的句子。
123In number five, you can see another example of a name with a place, Edinburgh University.在第五位中,可以看到另一个带有地名的例子,爱丁堡大学.
124It doesn't use the.它不使用这个。
125But, if a name has of in it, it generally will need the, even if it includes a place但是,如果名字里有,它通常需要, 即使它包括一个地方
126name.名称。
127And, sometimes there are two names for the same thing.而有时亦有二名为同.
128You can say Edinburgh University, or The University of Edinburgh.可以指: 爱丁堡大学,或爱丁堡大学.
129The first one is more common, but both are possible.第一个更常见,但两者都有可能。
130OK?好吗?
131Remember that you might need to review a section more than once to get it.记住,你可能需要审查 一节不止一次才得到它。
132Also, remember that these five level lessons are designed to help you find out what you记住,这五级课程 旨在帮助你发现什么
133know and what you don't know.以及你不知道的东西
134If you find a section difficult, that can help you to understand where your weaknesses如果你发现一个部分很困难, 那可以帮助你理解你的弱点所在
135are and what you need to do to spend more time on.以及你需要做什么 来花更多的时间。
136Here, you're going to see a topic which is, in our experience, one of the most confusing在这里,你会看到一个话题, 根据我们的经验, 这是一个最混乱的话题
137for English learners relating to using the.用于英语学习者使用该语言。
138Before you see your sentences for level four, look at an example.在看到第四级的句子前,看看一个例子.
139Here, are we talking about one orangutan?这里,我们说的是一个猩猩?
140No, here we mean all orangutans.不,在这里,我们是指所有的猩猩。
141We're talking about orangutans generally, so why use the singular noun with the?我们一般谈论红猩猩, 所以为什么用独有的名词?
142Why not use a plural noun and say orangutans are found in Malaysia and Indonesia?为何不使用复数名词,
143Well, you can!你当然可以!
144Both sentences are possible.两句皆有可能.
145Using the here means that you're talking about a group or category.使用这里意味着你指的是一个团体或类别.
146It can be confusing because usually you use the to talk about a specific thing, but here这可能会让人困惑 因为通常你用这个来谈论一个特定的事情, 但在这里
147the has a general meaning.具有一般意义。
148Let's practice this a little more.让我们多练习一下
149Look at your sentences for this level.看看你这关卡的句子
150So, what do you have to do?那么,你必须做什么?
151Focus on the highlighted phrases with the.专注于突出的短语与The。
152Some of these phrases can be replaced with a plural noun, without the, like in the example其中一些短语可以用复数名词代替,而不使用,比如例子中
153about orangutans you just saw.关于猩猩你刚刚看到的。
154Your job is to find the sentences where this is possible, and change the noun phrase.您的工作是找到可能的地方的句子,并更改名词短语.
155You might need to add some words.你可能需要添加一些词。
156Pause the video, take your time, and think about it.暂停录影 慢慢考虑
157Ready?准备好了吗?
158Confused?困惑?
159Let's do one together.让我们一起做一个。
160Here's the answer for number one only.这是第一的答案
161Done?说完了吗?
162Let's see the remaining answers.让我们看看剩下的答案。
163In sentences two and three, rich and Swiss are adjectives.在第二句和第三句中,富人和瑞士人是形容词.
164You can use the plus an adjective to talk about a group or category in general.您可以使用加词来一般地谈论一个群体或类别.
165If you want to use a plural noun instead, you need to add the noun people.要使用复数名词代替,需要添加名词人.
166In sentence five, you can't use a plural noun.在第五句中,不能使用复数名词.
167With musical instruments, you can only use the plus a singular noun to talk about the有了乐器,你只能用一个单数名词来谈论
168category in general.一般类别。
169Again, if you're questioning your life choices in watching this video, don't worry about再说一遍 如果你在看这段视频时 质疑自己的人生选择 别担心
170it.这个
171Many English learners find this difficult, and need time to understand it in depth.许多英语学习者发现这种困难,需要时间来深入理解.
172On the other hand, these aren't strange sentences or rules that you only need sometimes.另一方面,这些不是奇特的句子或规则,你有时只需要.
173These rules and topics are relevant for speaking and writing in almost any situation, so they're这些规则和主题与几乎任何情况下的演讲和写作有关,所以它们
174worth spending time on if you want to communicate accurately and clearly.值得花时间 如果你想准确和清晰的沟通。
175OK, you're nearly done.好了,你快结束了。
176One more level to go.还有一层
177This is it!就是这样!
178Level five, the hardest questions we could make.五级,我们最难的问题
179Here are five sentences.此为五句.
180Four of these sentences have mistakes.以上四句有误.
181One is correct.一个是正确的。
182Can you find the correct sentence and correct the mistakes in the other four?你能找到正确的句子,纠正其他四个错误吗?
183Pause the video and try it now!暂停录像,现在试试看!
184Difficult?难吗?
185Here's a clue.这里有一个线索。
186You might need to forget about the rules you know.你也许需要忘记你知道的规则
187These sentences test your knowledge of exceptions and unusual cases which don't fit the general这些句子考验你对不符合一般的例外和异常情况的了解
188rules about using articles.关于使用文章的规则。
189Finished?说完了吗?
190Let's look together.让我们一起看看。
191Sentence one is correct.第一句是对的
192How do you explain this?你怎么解释?
193Normally, you don't use articles with people's names.一般情况下,你不会用带有人名的文章.
194However, here you're talking about multiple people who have the same name, and contrasting然而,你在这里谈论 多个人 谁有同名, 和对比
195them.他们。
196The Jamie I was telling you about is specific, and needs the to show this.我跟你讲的杰米很具体 需要展示一下
197A Jamie in my class is one of many Jamies, but not the Jamie we're interested in right我班上的一个杰米是许多杰米之一,但不是我们感兴趣的杰米
198now.现在
199In most cases, you say the future.在大多数情况下 你说未来
200In sentence two, you're talking about one of many possible futures, so you use a.在第二句中,你指的是许多可能的未来之一,所以你使用a.
201This is common when you use an adjective with future.这在与未来使用形容词时很常见.
202A bright future, a difficult future, and so on.光明的未来,艰难的未来等等.
203Again, sentence three shows you an exception to a rule.再说一遍,第三句是规则的例外
204You don't usually use articles with days of the week, but if you're talking about which你通常不使用文章 与周日, 但如果你在谈论
205day a specific date falls on, then you can use a.一天,一个特定的日期落下, 然后你可以使用 a。
206You also need an article with days of the week if you use certain adjectives, like following如果使用某些形容词的话, 您也需要文章, 包括周日, 如:
207or previous.或先前。
208Sentence four is a good example of how inconsistent the rules are here.第四句是这里规则不一致的好例子.
209You need the for the hotel name, and for the floor number, but you don't use the with你需要酒店名称和楼层号码 但你不用
210the room number.房间号码。
211Don't try to look for the logic.不要试图寻找逻辑。
212There isn't any.没有
213In sentence five, it would be easy to think that the two noun phrases first second half在句子5中,很容易想到这两个名词短语的前半部分.
214of the year should have the same article.年应拥有相同的条款。
215However, in this case, there is some logic to why they're different.然而,在这种情况下,它们为何不同是有某种逻辑的.
216In the first one, you say a terrible first half, because although there's only one first在第一个,你说一个可怕的上半部, 因为虽然只有一个先
217half of the year, there are many ways it could have gone.半年时间里,它可能已经走了许多路。
218It could have been good, or amazing, or average, or bad, and so on.本来是好的,或者惊人的,或者一般的,或者不好的,等等.
219In the second one, there's no adjective.第二句中无形容词.
220Here, you use regular rules.在这里,你使用常规规则。
221There's only one second half of the year, so you use the.年仅二分之一,故用之.
222The adjective makes all the difference.形容词使一切差别.
223That's all!就这样!
224We hope you found the lesson interesting.我们希望你发现这个教训很有趣。
225See you next time!下次见!
该视频共有字幕 225 条。解锁更多字幕为会员功能，请移动到 价格
下载安装